JP2024028282A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine for preventing interest in a game from decreasing easily by preventing erroneous operation of an operation part.SOLUTION: Both a ball-dispensing button and an adjustment button provided in a ball tray are not turned on even if game tokens run on to the buttons.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 90

Description

Regarding gaming machines.

In conventional pachinko gaming machines, a special game is executed when the winning/failure lottery result becomes a jackpot, and a large amount of prize balls is won by inserting game balls into the jackpot during the execution of the special game. . Furthermore, after the special game ends, the game is moved to a high base state which is a time-saving state, and the high base state is continued until a predetermined number of winning/failure drawings are performed, thereby improving the ease of acquiring the special game. In addition, by providing a plurality of periods of the high base state (the number of winning/fail drawings during which the high base state can continue), the gameplay of the high base state has been enhanced (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 2006-296598

Since there are already a large number of conventional pachinko gaming machines that adopt this configuration, in order to differentiate them from the conventional models, it is necessary to further improve the interest of the game.

The present invention has been made in view of these problems, and an object of the present invention is to provide a pachinko game machine that can improve the interest of the game.

Ball rental button,
Equipped with a return button,
It is configured to detect the operation of the ball lending button when the operating part of the ball lending button is pressed and the operating part of the ball lending button moves a predetermined distance,
When the operation part of the ball lending button is pressed down and the operating part of the ball lending button moves a predetermined distance to detect the operation of the ball lending button, the load applied to the operating part of the ball lending button is a predetermined load of 0.06N or more. A gaming machine that is designed for heavy loads.

It should be noted that any combination of the above-mentioned constituent elements of the invention, or mutual substitution of the constituent elements and expressions of the present invention among methods, apparatuses, systems, computer programs, recording media storing computer programs, data structures, etc. The configurations according to the embodiments and modifications described in the detailed description are also effective as aspects of the present invention.

According to the pachinko game machine according to the present invention, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

It is a front view of the pachinko game machine based on the premise. It is a perspective view of the front direction of the above-mentioned Pachinko game machine with the frame member opened. FIG. 2 is a perspective view of the pachinko game machine from the rear with the frame member opened. It is a perspective view showing a game board attached to a pachinko game machine based on the premise. It is a functional block diagram of a pachinko gaming machine based on the premise. It is a diagram showing the transition of the gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine based on the premise. It is a diagram showing the power-on process of the main control board of the pachinko game machine as a premise. It is a diagram showing a game stop state setting process during the power-on process. It is a diagram showing the interrupt processing of the main control board of the pachinko game machine as a premise. It is a diagram showing a winning/failure lottery table of the Pachinko gaming machine based on the premise. It is a diagram showing a winning symbol lottery table of the pachinko gaming machine based on the premise. It is a diagram showing a fluctuating pattern lottery table during a low base state of the pachinko gaming machine based on the premise. It is a diagram showing a fluctuating pattern lottery table during the high base state of the pachinko gaming machine based on the premise. It is a diagram showing a special variation pattern lottery table that is referred to during a limited period of the pachinko gaming machine that is the premise. It is a diagram showing the power-on process of the performance control board of the Pachinko gaming machine based on the premise. It is a diagram showing the interrupt processing of the performance control board of the pachinko gaming machine based on the premise. It is a diagram showing a game effect during a normal game (medium low probability/low base) of a pachinko gaming machine based on the premise, during a symbol variation display (during a stop display of decorative symbols). It is a diagram showing a game performance in a situation where a reach performance with a high degree of expectation of a jackpot is being performed on the premise of the pachinko game machine. It is a diagram showing a game performance in a state where a jackpot game is being executed in a pachinko game machine based on the premise. It is a diagram showing a game performance when the electric chew support function is in operation, which is a specific game state (high probability or low probability/high base) of the pachinko game machine based on the premise. It is a diagram showing a game flow in the pachinko gaming machine of the present embodiment. It is a figure showing an example of a performance (retention charge performance) of a specific game (breakthrough zone) in the Pachinko gaming machine of the present embodiment. It is a diagram showing an example of a production (breakthrough zone battle production) of a specific game (breakthrough zone) in the pachinko game machine of the present embodiment. It is a diagram showing an example of a performance (breakthrough zone battle victory performance) of a specific game (breakthrough zone) in the pachinko game machine of the present embodiment. It is a diagram showing an example of presentation (V winning promotion presentation) during a small winning game in the Pachinko gaming machine of the present embodiment. It is a figure which shows the example of a performance (big hit type notification performance) during the special game start demonstration in the pachinko game machine of a present Example. It is a diagram showing an example of performance during a special game (first jackpot) when moving to a specific game (pseudo jackpot) in the pachinko game machine of the present embodiment. It is a diagram showing an example of performance during a specific game (pseudo jackpot) in the pachinko game machine of the present embodiment. It is a diagram showing an example of performance during a special game (second jackpot) after execution of a specific game (pseudo jackpot) in the pachinko game machine of the present embodiment. It is a diagram showing an example of production (the first half of the battle mode) during a specific game (battle mode) in the pachinko game machine of the present embodiment. It is a diagram showing an example of a performance (reserved charge performance (battle mode)) that is displayed for a maximum of four pending games after the final change in a specific game (battle mode) in the pachinko game machine of the present embodiment. It is a diagram showing an example of the effect (battle mode final battle effect) that is displayed for a maximum of four remaining pending changes after the final change in a specific game (battle mode) in the pachinko game machine of the present embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the arrangement|positioning relationship of a prize-winning device etc. in the game area of the Pachinko game machine of 2nd Example. It is a figure showing the game flow in the pachinko gaming machine of the 2nd-1st embodiment. It is a diagram showing the distribution ratio of jackpot (small win) symbols in the pachinko game machine of the 2-1st embodiment. It is a diagram showing an example of a performance of a long-time chance state of the Pachinko gaming machine of the 2-1st embodiment. It is a figure which shows the example of a production|presentation of the normal electric accessory release production in the Pachinko game machine of 2nd-1st Example. It is a figure showing the game flow in the Pachinko gaming machine of the 2nd-2nd embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the performance during chance time of the Pachinko game machine of 2nd-2nd Example. It is a diagram showing another example of the performance during the chance time of the pachinko gaming machine of the 2-2 embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the performance during the super chance time of the Pachinko game machine of 2nd-2nd Example. It is a figure showing the game flow in the pachinko gaming machine of the 2nd-3rd example. It is a diagram showing the distribution ratio of jackpot (small win) symbols in the pachinko game machine of the 2-3rd embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the screen for setting the automatic operation function of the Pachinko game machine of 3rd Example. It is a figure which shows an example of the screen after setting the automatic operation function of the Pachinko game machine of 3rd Example. It is a figure which shows an example of the screen for selecting the performance for which the automatic operation timing of the Pachinko game machine of 3rd Example is desired to be set. It is a figure which shows an example of the screen for setting the automatic operation timing of the Pachinko game machine of 3rd Example. It is a figure which shows an example of the arrangement|positioning relationship of a prize-winning device etc. in the game area of the Pachinko game machine of 3rd Example. FIG. 12 is a diagram showing an example of an effect screen related to the occurrence of the "relief function" of the pachinko game machine of the fourth embodiment (when there is a hold related to the first special symbol at the time of the 699th rotation). It is a figure which shows an example of the production screen regarding the generation|occurrence|production of the "relief function" of the Pachinko game machine of 4th Example (when there is no hold|reservation regarding the 1st special symbol at the time of the 699th rotation). It is a figure which shows an example of the fluctuation pattern regarding the special symbol lottery of the Pachinko gaming machine of 4th Example. It is a figure which shows an example of a win/fail, a symbol, and a variation pattern regarding normal symbol lottery of the Pachinko gaming machine of 4th Example. It is a figure which shows an example of the arrangement|positioning relationship of a prize-winning device etc. in the game area of the Pachinko game machine of 5th Example. It is a figure which shows an example of the effect|production screen regarding generation|occurrence|production of the "relief function" of the Pachinko game machine of 5th Example (when the fluctuation|variation of the 500th rotation is a fluctuation|variation of the 1st special symbol). It is a figure which shows an example of the production screen regarding the generation|occurrence|production of the "relief function" of the pachinko game machine of 5th Example (when the fluctuation|variation of the 500th rotation is a fluctuation|variation of the 2nd special symbol). It is a figure which shows an example of the arrangement|positioning relationship of a prize-winning device etc. in the game area of the Pachinko game machine of 7th Example. It is a figure which shows an example of the performance screen during the special game of the Pachinko game machine of 7th Example. It is a figure which shows another example of the performance screen during the special game of the pachinko game machine of 7th Example. It is a figure which shows an example of the performance screen after the special game of the Pachinko game machine of 7th Example ends. It is a figure which shows an example of the performance screen when the special game based on the 1st special symbol of the Pachinko game machine of 7th Example is performed. It is a figure which shows an example of the performance screen when the special game based on the 2nd special symbol of the Pachinko game machine of 7th Example is performed. It is a figure which shows the symbol type regarding the 1st special symbol and the 2nd special symbol of the Pachinko game machine of 8th Example. It is a figure which shows the game flow in the Pachinko gaming machine of 8th Example. It is a figure which shows the termination conditions of the high base state in the pachinko game machine of 8th Example. It is a figure which shows the example of a performance of the high base state (ST mode) in the pachinko game machine of 8th Example. It is a figure which shows the example of a performance of a high base state (battle mode) in the pachinko game machine of 8th Example. It is a figure which shows the example of a performance of a high base state (super invincible battle mode) in the pachinko game machine of 8th Example. It is a figure which shows the example of a performance of a high base state (invincible battle mode) in the pachinko game machine of 8th Example. It is a figure showing the game flow of the Pachinko game machine of the 9th-1st example. It is a diagram showing an example of performance (battle victory) in the pachinko gaming machine of the 9th-1st embodiment. It is a diagram showing an example of performance (battle defeat) in the pachinko gaming machine of the 9th-1st embodiment. It is a diagram showing an example of production (final battle) in the Pachinko gaming machine of the 9th-1st embodiment. It is a figure which shows the example 1 of a performance in the Pachinko game machine of 9th-2nd Example. It is a figure which shows the example 2 of a performance in the pachinko game machine of 9th-2nd Example. It is a figure showing the time between rounds in the Pachinko gaming machine of the 10th embodiment. It is a figure which shows the symbol type regarding the 1st special symbol and the 2nd special symbol of the Pachinko game machine of 11th Example. It is a figure which shows the game flow in the Pachinko gaming machine of 11th Example. It is a figure which shows the termination condition of the high base state in the pachinko game machine of 11th Example. It is a figure which shows an example of the performance screen before and after the occurrence of the "relief function" in the Pachinko gaming machine of the 11th embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the pending object and the said variable object in the pachinko game machine of 11th Example. It is a figure which shows an example of the fluctuation pattern and performance pattern in the Pachinko game machine of 11th Example. It is a diagram showing an example of a pre-read performance and a pseudo continuous performance in the Pachinko gaming machine of the 11th embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the performance using the performance accessory in the Pachinko game machine of 11th Example. It is a figure which shows the example of a high base state (challenge mode) in the Pachinko game machine of 11th Example. FIG. 12 is a diagram showing an example of a performance in a high base state (battle mode) (an example of a performance related to transition to the battle mode) in the pachinko game machine of the eleventh embodiment. FIG. 12 is a diagram showing an example of a performance in a high base state (battle mode) (an example of a performance related to transition to a consecutive game mode) in the pachinko game machine of the 11th embodiment. It is a figure which shows the example of a performance of a high base state (consecutive game mode) in the pachinko game machine of 11th Example. It is a diagram showing the symbol types and high base state termination conditions regarding the first special symbol and the second special symbol of the twelfth embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the volume setting function in the pachinko game machine of 13th Example. It is a figure which shows the upper surface of the upper ball plate in the Pachinko game machine of 14th Example. It is a figure showing the energy applied to the button of the substantially horizontal upper surface part of the upper ball tray in the Pachinko game machine of the 14th example. It is a figure which shows the energy applied to the button of the inclined upper surface part of the upper ball plate in the Pachinko game machine of 14th Example. It is a figure which shows the ball lending button in the Pachinko game machine of 14th Example. It is a front view of the upper part of the gaming machine in the pachinko gaming machine of the 15th embodiment. It is a right side view of the upper part of the gaming machine in the pachinko gaming machine of the 15th embodiment. It is a front view of the game board in the pachinko game machine of the 16th embodiment. It is a front view of the game board in the pachinko game machine of the 16th embodiment. It is a front view of the game board in the pachinko game machine of the 16th embodiment. It is a front view of the game board in the pachinko game machine of the 16th embodiment.

(Prerequisite technology)
DESCRIPTION OF THE PREFERRED EMBODIMENTS The pachinko game machine (hereinafter referred to as "base technology") on which the present invention is based will be described below with reference to the drawings. As a representative example of a pachinko game machine related to the underlying technology, a pachinko game machine is shown in FIGS. 1 and 3, and a game board installed in this pachinko game machine is shown in FIG. 4. First, please refer to these figures. Now, we will explain the mechanical configuration of the Pachinko gaming machine. In the following description, for convenience, the directions shown by the arrows in FIG. 2 will be referred to as the front-rear direction, the left-right direction, and the up-down direction, respectively.

[Mechanical configuration of Pachinko machine]
First, the basic structure of the front side of the Pachinko gaming machine P will be explained. As shown in FIGS. 1 and 2, the pachinko game machine P is configured in an outer rectangular shape, and is configured in a rectangular shape with a size matching the opening of the outer frame P1 in front of the opening of the outer frame P1 fixed in the gaming facility. The front frame P2 is attached so that it can be laterally opened/closed and attached/detached by upper and lower hinge mechanisms (upper hinge part 10, lower hinge part 20) disposed on the front left edge of each other.

A game board P5 and a glass frame P3 are removably set on the front frame P2. The glass frame P3 has a rectangular shape, and is assembled and held on the front side of the front frame P2 so as to be horizontally openable and detachable using upper and lower hinge mechanisms (upper hinge part 10, lower hinge part 20). The game board P5 is removably set on the front side of the front frame P2, and is configured so that the player can see the game area P501 provided on the front side of the game board P5 through the glass P301 of the glass frame P3 that is held closed. has been done. In addition, the front frame P2 and the glass frame P3 can be opened by inserting a key into the keyhole of the locking part P30 provided on the front right edge of the pachinko gaming machine P and rotating it in either the left or right direction. , the outer frame P1 and the front frame P2 are unlocked, or the front frame P2 and the glass frame P3 are unlocked. As a specific example, when a key is inserted into the keyhole of the locking part P30 and rotated to the right, the outer frame P1 and front frame P2 are unlocked, and when the key is inserted into the keyhole of the locking part P30 and rotated to the left. When this is done, the front frame P2 and the glass frame P3 are unlocked.

At the bottom of the glass frame P3, upper and lower ball plates P340 (an upper ball plate P341 and a lower ball plate P342) for storing game balls are provided. Further, the glass frame P3 is provided with a production lamp P350 that emits light according to the development situation of the game, and a speaker P370 that can output sounds such as sound effects according to the development situation of the game. A performance operation unit P380 for performing a predetermined performance operation is attached to the lower center of the glass frame P3. The button P381 can be operated by the player at any time, while the lever P382 is one of the movable objects (frame movable accessory P360) provided in the glass frame, and the operating means itself Operation input is enabled when the display is moved to an upwardly protruding state (input permission state) (multiple operations are possible with one performance operation means).

At the lower right portion of the front frame P2, a handle P204 is provided for operating the game ball and adjusting the firing strength. The lower part of the front frame P2 is further provided with a firing device unit P240, and although not shown, there is a ball feeding mechanism P241 that sends out the game balls stored in the upper ball tray P341 one by one. A launcher P242 having a launcher mechanism (a ball hammer driven by a rotary solenoid) that launches a game ball toward the game area P501, a launcher control board P243 that synchronously controls the operation of the ball feeding mechanism P241 and the launcher P242, etc. It is provided.

As shown in FIG. 4, the game board P5 (game board unit) is constructed based on a base material formed into a rectangular flat plate using transparent synthetic resin or wood. Note that FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko game machine P including the game board P5 seen from the front side, and FIG. 4 is a perspective view of the game board unit P5. FIG. 4 illustrates a state in which a performance accessory P560 (also referred to as a "movable performance device", "performance movable body", "performance movable accessory", etc.) provided in the game board unit is in operation. On the front of the game board P5, there is an arc-shaped outer rail P502 arranged from the lower left to the upper right, and a circle arranged from the lower center of the game board to the inside of the outer rail P502 from the lower left to the upper left. The outer rail P502 includes an arc-shaped inner rail P503 and a rail decoration P504 formed in a curved shape that opens leftward and is disposed between the end of the outer rail P502 at the upper right side and the lower part of the board surface. A substantially circular game area P501 is defined inside surrounded by an inner rail P503 and a rail decoration P504. This game area P501 includes a left side area P501L (left-handed playing area) which is an area on the left side of the center accessory P540, and an area on the right side of the center accessory, based on a center accessory P540, which will be described later, arranged approximately in the center. It has a right side area P501R (right-handed hitting area). Further, the outer rail and the inner rail form a guide path for guiding the game ball launched by the launcher unit P240 to the game area P501.

In the gaming area P501, along with a large number of game nails P510 and windmills P511 (not shown), there are a first starting prize opening P711 (first starting opening), a second starting winning opening P721 (second starting opening), a general winning opening P731, Various ball entry devices (referred to as "winning device" when a prize ball is generated) are provided, such as a normal pattern operating gate P741 (normal pattern operating gate device), a large winning hole P751 (attacker), and the like. In addition, the number of big winning holes may be one, or it may be configured to have a plurality of them. In addition, in this specification, due to the configuration of the ball entry device, there are those in which the game ball is ejected after entering the ball entry device, and those in which the game ball further flows down the gaming area P501 after entering the ball entry device (gate type). On the other hand, when a game ball is detected by an internal detection switch, it is called an "incoming ball" or "winning (especially when a prize ball occurs)", and it flows into the downstream gaming area like a gate-type ball entrance. ``passing'' is sometimes described separately from ``passing.'' Further, the ball entering device may be referred to as a ball entering hole, and the winning device may be referred to as a winning hole.

In addition, at the lower right of the gaming area P501, a main control display device P50, including a first special symbol display device P51, a second special symbol display device P52, a normal symbol display device P53, etc., whose lighting is controlled by a main control board to be described later. are centrally located. A center accessory P540 is arranged approximately in the center of the game area P501, and the screen of the production display device P80 is provided so as to be visible through the opening of the center accessory P540. A performance accessory P560 (movable accessory device) is provided above the center accessory P540, etc., which performs a performance operation according to the development situation of the game. At the lower end of the game area P501, an out port P790 is provided through which game balls that have flowed down without entering the prize openings of various ball entry devices can pass through. Game balls that have entered the winning holes of various winning devices or game balls that have flowed into the out port P790 flow down to the rear side of the game board P5 through a through hole (not shown) formed through the game board P5 from front to back. The game balls are collected in the collection channel (played ball path) at the bottom of the front frame P2, and pass through the out ball sensor P792 (fired ball number sensor) provided at the bottom of the front frame to detect the total number of fired game balls. Afterwards, it is ejected from the gaming machine.

The first starting winning device P710 is provided as a starting winning device corresponding to the first special symbol game. This first starting winning device P710 is provided with a first starting winning opening P711 into which a game ball can enter. The entry of the game ball into the first starting winning hole P711 is an opportunity to acquire a random number (also referred to as the first random number, details will be described later) used for the lottery related to the first special symbol, and the first starting winning hole P711 Based on the entry of the game ball into the winning hole P711, a lottery related to the first special symbol is executed at the timing immediately after the entry of the ball or after the suspension period has elapsed.

The second starting winning device P720 is provided as a starting winning device corresponding to the second special symbol game. This second starting winning device P720 includes a second starting winning opening P721 into which a game ball can enter, and a state that makes it easy for the ball to enter the second starting winning opening P721 when winning a normal symbol lottery to be described later. A normal electric accessory P770 (also referred to as a variable member) which is a movable body to be switched is provided. The entry of the game ball into the second starting winning hole P721 is an opportunity to acquire a random number (also referred to as a second random number, details will be described later) used for the lottery related to the second special symbol, and the second starting winning hole P721 Based on the entry of the game ball into the winning hole P721, a lottery related to the second special symbol is executed at the timing immediately after the entry of the ball or after the suspension period has elapsed. The second starting winning device P721 is in an open state in which the game ball can enter or easily enters the second starting winning hole P721 by the operation of the normal electric accessory P770 (also referred to as an auxiliary game), and when the game ball enters the second starting winning hole P721. It changes to a closed state in which it is impossible or difficult for the ball to enter the winning hole P721. In other words, the second start-up winning device P720 has a structure in which it is difficult for the game ball to enter the second start-up winning opening unless it is displaced to the open state, and the second start-up winning device P720 has a structure that makes it difficult for the game ball to enter the second start-up winning opening, and the second start-up winning device P720 is set at a predetermined opportunity (an opportunity to win the normal symbol lottery), which will be described later. When the ball is in the open state, it becomes easier for the game ball to enter the ball. In addition, various aspects of the structure of the normal electric accessory P770 are known, and the structure may not change the ease of ball entry by opening the movable body P771. '' may be expressed as "easy ball entry state (easy ball entry mode)" and "difficult ball entry state (difficult ball entry mode)," respectively.

The general winning device P730 includes a left general winning device P730L placed in the left hitting area P501L and a right general winning device P730R placed in the right hitting area P501R. In the pachinko gaming machine P according to this basic technology, three general winning ports P731La to P731Lc are configured as one unit as the left general winning device P730L, while the right general winning device P730R is a large winning device P750 described later. configured as a part. The entry of a game ball into the general winning hole P731 triggers the payout of prize balls as in other winning devices. It should be noted that the number and position of the general winning holes P731 of the Pachinko gaming machine that are assumed are just an example, and it may be configured such that they are arranged only in the right-hand playing area P501R.

The normal pattern operating gate device P740 (normal pattern operating port) is provided as a starting ball opening corresponding to the normal pattern game. This standard operating gate device P740 is provided with an operating gate P741 through which a game ball can pass, and the entered game ball is configured to be able to flow further downstream of the gaming area of the game board. Passage of the game ball to the activation gate P741 triggers a normal symbol lottery to determine whether or not to open the second starting winning device P720, that is, whether or not to activate the normal electric accessory P770. . In addition, as a modified example, it is also possible to configure the above-mentioned general winning hole P731 to have a function that triggers the normal symbol lottery, and in this case, in addition to the function to execute the normal symbol lottery, the prize ball It is also possible to provide the function of generating the winning device as one winning device (general drawing winning opening).

The big winning device P750 is configured with a big winning opening P751 (special electric accessory P755) that opens and closes when the lottery result of the first special symbol lottery or the second special symbol lottery is a jackpot or a small win. It is sometimes referred to as an "attacker (device)." The grand prize device P750 has an open state in which the game ball can enter the grand prize opening P751 or can easily enter (for example, a state in which a special electric accessory is activated P755), and an open state in which the game ball cannot enter the grand prize opening P751. Or it changes to a closed state where it is difficult to enter the ball (for example, a state in which the special electric accessory P755 is inactive). In the jackpot game, a plurality of round games (unit games) involving opening and closing operations of the jackpot P751 are performed. In addition, even if the special electric accessory P755 is activated, if the movable body P756 that constitutes the grand prize opening P751 becomes in a closed state that makes it difficult to enter the ball due to a series of operation patterns (also referred to as "opening pattern"). has. Note that the name of the special game may be subdivided depending on the number of round games to be executed. For example, for a special game in which round games are executed 10 times, there are 10 round jackpot, 10R jackpot, 10 round special game, It is preferable to call it a 10R special game ("R" is the initial letter of "ROUND"). Furthermore, the name of the special game may be subdivided in correspondence with the game state to which the special game transitions after the execution of the special game, for example, it is a special game in which a round game is executed 10 times, and a probability fluctuation function is added after the special game ends. Regarding special games in which the Special games in which the probability variation function does not operate after the end of the game are preferably referred to as 3-round normal jackpot, 3R normal jackpot, 3-round normal special game, 3R normal special game, etc.

In addition, depending on the specifications of the gaming machine, the big winning device P750 may include a specific area P760 (referred to as a "V zone" or "V area") through which the game ball can pass, and depending on the function, a "probability variation function activation" may be provided. (referred to as "area", "continuation area", etc.) may be provided. The functions related to this "specific area" include (a) activating a probability fluctuation function (described later) after a jackpot game, triggered by passing through a specific area during a jackpot game, and (b) passing through a specific area during a small win game. Activate the accessory continuous activation device (a flag for continuously operating the special electric accessory) and grant the right to execute the jackpot game, (c) In a specific round during the jackpot game, For example, the subsequent round may be determined to be executed or not executed based on whether a region has been passed or not. In addition, an opening/closing member P761 (valve member), which is a structure for changing the ease of passage, may be provided for the "specific area", and by distributing the flow path by the action of the opening/closing member P761, It may be configured to pass through the specific area P760 or other non-specific areas. Further, during a jackpot game or a small win game, there may be a period in which the passage of the game ball in the specific area P761 is valid and a period in which it is invalid.

In addition, in the pachinko gaming machine P based on the premise, the big prize winning device P750 is provided in the right side area P501R (right-hand hitting area) in the gaming area P501. Therefore, in a jackpot game or a small win game, when firing a game ball toward the game area P501, the ball can easily enter the big winning opening P751 by aiming at the right side area P501R, or hitting the right side. It has become.

Next, the basic structure of the back side of the pachinko gaming machine P will be explained. On the back side of the front frame, a back set unit P4 is attached which has a front and rear communication window for attaching the game board unit P5 in the center. The back set unit P4 includes a storage tank P401 that stores a large number of game balls supplied from the gaming facility side, a gutter member P402 that allows the game balls to flow down from the storage tank P401, and a gutter member that sweeps away the game balls guided by the gutter member. A prize ball payout unit P410, a back passage member P403 for causing the game balls paid out from the prize ball payout unit P410 to flow down to the upper ball tray P341 or the lower ball tray P342, etc. are provided. In addition, on the game ball flow path from the storage tank P401 to the ball tray P340, there is a ball removal mechanism (ball removal operation lever P405, a valve member that forms a flow path for removing game balls from the flow path in conjunction with the operation lever). P406) is provided.

On the back side of the game board P5, there is a main control board P40 (also referred to as the main gaming section) that comprehensively controls the game progress of the pachinko game machine P, and general effects that match the game progress under the control of the main control board P40. An effect control board P41 (also referred to as a sub-gaming section) that controls the game, an image control board P42 (also referred to as an image control section) that controls image display according to game development, and the like are attached. In addition, in the pachinko gaming machine P based on this basic technology, the performance control board P41 and the image control board P42 are integrated with the performance display device P80 (also referred to as a liquid crystal display device or performance display unit) to display the performance display unit in an assembled state. It consists of On the other hand, on the back side of the back set unit P4, there is a payout control board P43 (also referred to as a payout control unit) that controls the payout of game balls, and various electrical and electronic control boards that receive power from the gaming facility side. A power supply board P44 (not shown, also referred to as a power supply unit or power supply unit) that supplies power to the components is attached. In order to prevent unauthorized modification, these control boards are installed in a predetermined position on the back of the game board P5 or the back of the back set unit P4 in an assembled state housed in a transparent resin board case with a caulking structure and a sealing structure. are arranged respectively. These control boards and the electric/electronic parts of each part of the pachinko game machine are connected to each other via a harness (connector cable), so that the pachinko game machine P can proceed with the game and execute the performance. .

[Functional block]
FIG. 5 shows the functional blocks of the pachinko game machine based on the premise.

A pachinko gaming machine includes a power supply board P44 that generates power used within the gaming machine based on AC power supplied from outside the gaming machine, and a main control board P40 (main control CPU) that controls the basic operations of the game and the progress of the game. ), a payout control board P43 (payout control CPU) as a frame control device that controls the payout of prize balls and the firing of game balls, and a performance control board P41 that controls performance operations and processing. It is composed of several forms. Note that the arrows shown in the figure indicate the upper transmission/reception relationships by solid line arrows, and the broken line arrows indicate electrical connection relationships by function.

By operating a power switch P47 provided on the board, the power board P44 powers a main control board P40, an effect control board P41, a payout control board P43, and various gaming devices electrically connected thereto, which will be described later. On the other hand, it generates and supplies the power necessary for operation. Although the details will be described later, since the power-on operation of the power switch P47 is a switch operation that triggers the start of processing of information related to the settings of the gaming machine, the power switch is covered with an opening/closing cover to prevent unauthorized operation. protected in a safe manner.

The main control board P40 includes a first starting winning opening P711 (special drawing 1 starting opening switch P712), a second starting winning opening P721 (special drawing 2 starting opening switch P722), a big winning opening P751 (big winning opening switch P752), Detection switches related to the progress of various games such as the normal drawing opening P741 (normal drawing operating opening switch P742), general winning opening P731 (left general winning opening, right general winning opening), and out opening P790, which are other detection switches. It is connected to switches and sensors used for managing various games and monitoring fraud, such as a setting key switch P49, a vibration detection sensor P72, and a magnet sensor P73. The main control board receives information related to the occurrence of various gaming states from these switches, and determines the control content related to game progress. A special electric accessory driving means P70 that is driven to expand the prize opening P751, and a normal electric accessory that is driven to make the ordinary electric accessory P770 into a state where it is easy to enter the ball when winning the normal symbol lottery. Information related to the driving mode is outputted to the gaming device such as the driving means P71.

Sensors, etc. connected to the main control board P40 are connected to terminals called input ports on the main control board, and notify the main control board P40 of the occurrence of various gaming states based on sensor detection as information. It receives information outputted from a terminal called an output port, such as a firing permission signal for the accessory driving means P70, the ordinary electric accessory driving means P71, and the firing device P242, and controls the respective apparatuses and devices.

In addition, the main control board P40 also includes special symbol display devices P51 and P52 (also referred to as a first special symbol display section and a second special symbol display section) that display variations of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, and the jackpot and small The main control display device P50 provides various displays such as a round indicator light P54 that indicates the type of winning (number of rounds), a status indicator light P55 that indicates the gaming status, and the performance of the gaming machine (for example, the base value during normal gaming, In other words, it is connected to a performance display device P59 that displays the ratio of the number of prize balls to the total number of balls fired. Regarding the "base value," there are many other accounting methods, such as data that excludes winnings from the starting winning slot P711, etc., but this will be explained separately and assumed as necessary for the present invention. The details will be omitted in the explanation of the pachinko machine.

In addition to the above, the main control board P40 is configured to be electrically connectable to devices outside the gaming machine through an external information output terminal P77, a test terminal P78, etc., and transmits and receives various control signals to and from each device. The main control board P40 is also electrically connected to the production control board P41 and payout control board P43, which are other control boards in the gaming machine.

The payout control board P43 controls the payout of prize balls by the payout device P410 based on signals indicating the payout of prize balls transmitted from the main control board P40 and the control status of the main control board, and also controls the payout of prize balls by the player using the handle P204. In response to the operation, control related to the firing of game balls by the firing device unit P240 is performed. The payout device P410 includes, for example, a payout motor P411 and a ball counting sensor P412, and is configured to be able to pay out game balls one by one by rotation of the payout motor P411. The firing device (launching device unit) P240 moves the game balls staying in the ball tray P340 (upper ball tray P341) one ball at a time to a position where they can be fired by the ball feeding unit P241, and then applies a batting mallet to the game balls. It is configured to fire the game ball by hitting it. The payout control board P43 is provided with a ram clear switch P48, which is mainly used for initializing the gaming machine and canceling errors that occur during gaming. Operation information of the ram clear switch P48 is input to the main control board via the harness and connector used.

The performance control board P41 includes a performance display device P80, a drive source and position detection sensor for the performance movable accessory P560 (for example, a drive motor, an initial position detection sensor, a performance position detection sensor), and a speaker P83 (upper speaker P370, lower speaker 141), production operation unit P380 (for example, production button P381 which is production operation means P81, production lever P382, cross key P383, etc.), production lamp P82 ("decoration lamp", "board lamp (P550)", "frame lamp (P350)) ), and various control signals are sent and received between them. In addition, the effect control board P42 and the effect display device P80 are connected via an image control board P42 (VDP) that controls the display of the effect display device P80 (for example, a device that displays images such as a liquid crystal display device). It may be something that does. In addition, in the Pachinko gaming machine based on this premise, the speaker P83 is configured to be controlled by the performance control board P41, but a separate audio control board equipped with an IC for audio control, etc. is provided to control the speaker P83. It may be configured to control.

Data transmission and reception between the main control board P40 and the production control board P41 is performed in one direction so that the data is sent and received in one direction from the main control board P40 to the production control board P41. Since the unidirectionality of data transmission from the main control board P40 to the production control board P41 is maintained, data cannot be sent from the configuration included in the production control board P41 to the configuration included in the main control board P40. , it is not possible to request data transmission. Therefore, the production control board P41 cannot refer to the information generated by the main control board P40 unless the information is transmitted. In addition, in the pachinko gaming machine P based on this premise, data is transmitted and received in both directions between the main control board P40 and the payout control board P43. However, similar to the case between the main control board P40 and the performance control board P41, data may be transmitted and received in one direction from the main control board P40 to the payout control board P43.

[Basic game progress]
Next, the basic game progress and game method in the Pachinko game machine P as the basic technology configured as described above will be explained for each game state. The "gaming state" can be roughly divided into a "normal gaming state" and a "special gaming state" in which it is easier to obtain game balls compared to the normal gaming state. The "normal gaming state" is a state in which the player aims to acquire the right to transition to the "special gaming state." Among the normal gaming states, there are gaming states that have different degrees of advantage for the player when it comes to acquiring the right to transition to the special gaming state. Among the multiple normal gaming states, there are states in which it is relatively easy for the player to obtain the right to move to the special gaming state (a state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state (low probability/low base state)). state) is expressed as a "specific gaming state." The "special game state" corresponds to the so-called "big win game" and "small win game", and the special electric accessory drive means P70 is driven by the main control board P40, the big prize opening P751 is opened, and the game ball is acquired. It means a state where it becomes easy.

[Normal gaming state (low probability/low base state)]
First, a description will be given regarding the gaming method and the progress of the game in the normal gaming state. Note that the normal gaming state described here is an explanation regarding the "normal gaming state (low probability/low base state)" (see Figure 6), excluding specific gaming states, and is generally used in situations where a player starts playing. This is to explain the gaming state, and the gaming method in the specific gaming state, the progress of the game, and the meanings of the terms "low (high) probability" and "low (high) base" will be described later.

As a method of playing in the normal gaming state (low probability/low base state), the player first operates the handle P204 to fire a game ball toward the gaming area P501 provided on the gaming board P5. In the pachinko gaming machine P based on the premise, in the normal gaming state (low probability/low base state), the player controls the amount of operation of the handle P204 to cause the game ball to fire toward the left side area P501L (left-handed hitting area) of the gaming area. Operate to play the game.

When a game ball is fired by a player into the left side area P501L of the game area, the fired game ball flows down the game area P501 and hits a game nail P510 (also called an "obstacle nail" or "nail"), not shown. , while displacing the flow direction by the windmill P511, to the first starting prize opening P711 located approximately at the lower center position in the gaming area P501 of the game board called "Heso" or the like, or to the general prize opening P731L of the left general prize winning device. Either the ball enters (wins) or the ball does not enter any winning hole and enters the out port P790 as a played game ball. When a ball enters the first starting winning hole P711 or the general winning hole P731, the main control board P40 sends information (control command ), and the player obtains a new game ball by paying out the prize ball.

Here, a special figure 1 starting opening switch P712 is arranged inside the first starting prize opening P711, and a gaming state (gaming result) that can occur when a player fires a game ball into the left side area P501L in the gaming area is displayed. , When a ball enters the first starting prize opening P711, game ball detection information of the special figure 1 starting opening switch P712 is input to the main control board P40.

When the main control board P40 receives the input of the game ball detection information of the special symbol 1 starting port switch P712, it not only pays out a predetermined number of prize balls, but also performs the lottery related to the control of the first special symbol. Get a random value to do. The random number value can be obtained by acquiring the random number value generated by the random number generation circuit on the electric circuit based on the detection of the game ball (hard latch), or by the control device of the main control board P40 by software processing. There are methods such as executing a process to obtain a random number value from the previous random number generation circuit when checking the detection information of the game ball, or obtaining a random number value updated by software (soft latch). Yes, they can be used depending on the random number value to be obtained, or they can be used in combination. In addition, when the ball enters the general winning hole, the random number related to the special symbol is not obtained, and only the payout of the prize ball is performed.

The lottery related to the control of the first special symbol is a "special symbol lottery", and the "special symbol lottery" includes a "win/fail lottery", a "winning symbol lottery", and a "variable pattern lottery". "Win/fail lottery" is a process that determines whether the lottery result using the obtained random numbers is a "big hit" or a "miss" (depending on the specifications of the gaming machine, the lottery result may include a "small win"). ). “Winning symbol lottery” (sometimes simply referred to as “symbol lottery”) is a process of determining the display pattern of stop-display symbols that indicate the win/fail lottery results on the special symbol display device P51 (P52) in the main control display device P50. Yes, it is possible to determine one symbol from multiple stop display symbols for one lottery result (big hit, small win), and depending on the stop display symbol determined here, "big hit" or "small win" This makes it possible to vary the execution mode of special games. "Fluctuating pattern lottery" is a process for determining at what timing a stop display symbol indicating the result of a winning/failure lottery is to be displayed on the special symbol display device P51 (P52). It determines the time during which a variable display indicating that a lottery has been executed (referred to as "variable display time" or "variable pattern"). It is common to use different random numbers for "win/fail lottery", "winning symbol lottery", and "fluctuation pattern lottery", respectively. called "random numbers". In addition, the lottery related to the control of the second special symbol, which is performed based on the detection of the game ball of the special symbol 2 starting port switch P722, is also a similar "special symbol lottery". Further, a description regarding the "special symbol lottery" will be given later.

Returning to the explanation of the gaming method in the normal gaming state (low probability/low base state), in the normal gaming state (low probability/low base state), the player fires the game ball into the left area P501L of the gaming area. Then, a game ball is entered into the first starting winning hole P711, a lottery related to the first special symbol (special symbol lottery) is executed, and a special symbol indicating a "big hit" ("small win") is displayed on the special symbol display device. By displaying the stop display symbol, a game aiming at acquiring the right to execute a special game is played.

Although it has been mentioned above that in the process of the player receiving the special symbol lottery, the special symbols are displayed in a variable manner according to the time determined by the variable pattern lottery, but in the Pachinko gaming machine P which is based on the premise, During this special symbol fluctuation display period, if a new ball enters the starting winning hole (first starting winning hole P711, second starting winning hole P721), a predetermined number of special symbol drawings will be executed. It has a hold function that temporarily stores random numbers corresponding to rights. In the pachinko game machine P based on the premise, it is possible to suspend the special symbol lottery up to four times as a suspension function corresponding to the special symbol lottery based on the winning of the first starting winning hole P711. In addition, the hold function can be set for each special symbol, and in the Pachinko gaming machine P based on this basic technology, in addition to the hold of the first special symbol, the hold function of the special symbol lottery for the second special symbol can also be set up to four times. It is possible to reserve the random numbers used for special symbol drawings.

In this manner, in the normal game state (low probability/low base state), the player fires the game ball into the left side area P501L of the game area to execute the special symbol lottery related to the first special symbol. In the special symbol lottery, when the special symbol display device displays that you have won a lottery result that results in a special gaming state such as "big hit" or "small win" and have acquired the right to move to the special gaming state. , the gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine P shifts to the special gaming state.

[Special gaming state]
Next, a description will be given regarding the gaming method and the progress of the game in the special gaming state. The special game state includes "big hit (game)" and "small win (game)," but in both cases, the special electric accessory P755 is activated, that is, the special electric accessory drive means P70 is activated from the main control board P40. This is a state in which a drive signal is output to the jackpot P751 and the jackpot P751 is in a state where it is easy to enter the ball. The major difference is that the "small win" is based on the operation of an actuating device, whereas the "small win" ends with a single operation of a special electric accessory. Another difference is that in the operation of the special electric accessory (jackpot) based on the operation of the accessory continuous activation device, it is possible to make the operation mode of the special electric accessory P755 more advantageous to the player. Specifically, while the total opening time of the big prize opening P751 in the operating state of the accessory continuous operating device (jackpot) is allowed up to 30 seconds, the total opening time of the big winning opening P751 in the small winning is allowed. There is a point where the time is limited to 1.8 seconds. In the following description of the gaming method and game progress in the special gaming state, a jackpot will be explained as an example.

The game progress of the special game in the pachinko game machine P based on the underlying technology is chronologically called the "special game start demo" (in the case of a jackpot, it is called the "jackpot start demo", "win combination operation start demo", etc.), In the case of a win, there is a production period called a "small win start demo" to notify the player that they have won various special games, and a one-time performance period called a "round (game)" (also called a "unit game"). The operation period of the special electric accessory P755 and the "special game end demo" (in the case of a jackpot, it is called "jackpot end demo", "win combination operation end demo", etc., and in the case of a small win, it is called "small win end demo") ), which mainly consists of a period for notifying game results (such as the number of game balls acquired) during the special game and the type of normal game state (including a specific game state) to which the game will be transferred.

Next, the game method during each special game period mentioned above will be explained. First, during the "Special Game Start Demo" period, in the pachinko gaming machine P based on the underlying technology, the big prize opening P751 is placed in the right area P501R (right-handed area) of the gaming area, and the normal gaming state (low probability/low Even if you fire a game ball into the left area P501L similar to the base state), you can hardly expect the ball to enter the big winning hole P751, so in the special game, before the round game starts where the big winning hole P751 becomes easy to enter the ball. In addition, the display device P80, speakers (lower speaker P141, upper speaker P370), and display lamp display a right-handed notification effect that urges the player to fire the game ball into the right area P501R (right-handed area) of the gaming area. Execute using P82. In accordance with the right-handed hitting notification effect, the player increases the amount of operation of the handle P204 to increase the firing strength of the game ball, and changes the firing position so that the game ball flows down to the right-hand area P501R (right-handed hitting area) of the gaming area. (perform a right-handed hit).

During the "round (game)" period, in the pachinko game machine P based on the underlying technology, the drive signal output from the main control board P40 to the special electric accessory drive means P70 causes the big winning hole P751 to be in the easy-to-enter state or A production that congratulates players for winning a jackpot (small win) during a special game execution period when the player is in a state where it is difficult to enter the ball, and specifies that the normal game state that is transitioned to after the special game is more advantageous for the player. A performance such as a performance suggesting a game state is executed. The player fires the game ball into the right side area P501R (right-handed hitting area) of the game area in order to enter the game ball into the big prize opening P751 and obtain a large number of game balls.

During one "round (gaming)" period, the opening pattern (operation mode of the special electric accessory) of the big prize opening determined based on the type of jackpot (small win) is completed (the opening time elapses). Alternatively, the game ends when a predetermined "specified number" (sometimes expressed as "count", "C", etc.) of game balls enter the ball. Then, depending on the type of special game state being executed (type of jackpot, small win), when all the round games to be executed are completed, the state shifts to a ``special game end demo'' state.

Next, during the "Special Game End Demo" period, the pachinko machine P based on the underlying technology will display the number of game balls acquired during the current special game state, and the number of games played consecutively during the specific game period described below. Performing a display that notifies the total number of game balls acquired in the special game state (obtained without transitioning to the normal game state (low probability/low base state)), or performing a normal game that transitions after the special game state. Performances of notification of the type of state and notification of the gaming method in the destination gaming state (such as the above-mentioned right-handed notification performance) are executed. The player operates the handle in preparation for a game according to the type of normal game state to which the game is to be transferred based on the performance being executed.

In many pachinko gaming machines P, with some exceptions, when a jackpot game is executed as a special gaming state, the player enters a special gaming state called a "specific gaming state" as a normal gaming state. The game has become a state in which it is easy to obtain the right to move to , and the player can enjoy a so-called "consecutive game" in which the specific game state and the special game state are repeated in succession.

[Specific gaming state]
Next, the "specific gaming state" will be explained. As shown in FIG. 6, there are roughly three specific gaming states. There are "probability states" and "base states" as elements that differentiate these types, and a specific gaming state is constituted by a combination of these.

(probability state)
"Probability status" is a probability variation function based on the operating state of the "probability variation function" (also referred to as "probability variation"), which is a function that varies the probability that the lottery result will be a "big hit" in the special symbol lottery. is activated and the winning/failure lottery in the special symbol lottery has a higher probability of being a "jackpot" than when it is not activated, which is expressed as "high probability (state)"("probability variable state", "probability variable state") The state in which the probability fluctuation function is not activated is expressed as "low probability (state)." The "high probability (state)" is a gaming state that is more advantageous than the normal gaming state (low probability/low base state) in that the probability of winning a jackpot for one special symbol drawing is high.

(Base state)
The "base state" is a state related to the "base", that is, the "proportion (expected value) of game balls that will be obtained as prize balls when a predetermined number of game balls are fired", and is generally used for ordinary electric accessories. The state in which the operation of P770 is easier (more advantageous) than the normal gaming state (low probability/low base state) is called the "high base (state)" (also referred to as the "den support state"). . Depending on the specifications of the gaming machine, even if the "Electric Chew Support Function" is not activated, the recommended launching position of the gaming balls may be changed to indicate "If you shoot a predetermined number of gaming balls, you will receive a prize ball." If the percentage of game balls that are played increases, it can also be expressed as a "high base state.""High base (state)" means that during the period until the special gaming state is acquired, the number of game balls that are paid out as prize balls increases (they are more likely to be paid out), thereby reducing the consumption of game balls and making special This is a gaming state that is advantageous to the player in that he or she can aim to obtain the gaming state.

"Electric chew support function" is a state in which the operation of the normal electric accessory P770 is easier than in the normal game state (low probability/low base state), but it is mainly a combination of three functions (including at least one ). The three functions that make up the "electric chew support function" are "normal symbol probability change", "normal symbol time saving", and "opening extension (of normal electric accessories)". "Normal pattern probability variation" refers to a state where the probability of activating the normal electric accessory in the "normal pattern lottery" is high. "Reduced normal symbol time" means that the time from executing the normal symbol lottery to displaying the result of the normal symbol lottery is shortened in the ordinary symbol display means P53 (also referred to as the ordinary symbol display section) in the main control display device P50. refers to the state of "Extension of opening of ordinary electric accessory" is to release the ordinary electric accessory in a manner that makes it easy for the game ball to enter the winning hole related to the ordinary electric accessory P770 for the winning type in the ordinary symbol lottery. This refers to a change in the operation of the ball, and one example of this is to extend the total time during which a normal electric accessory is in an easy-to-enter state.

The "normal symbol lottery" is different from the above-mentioned special symbol lottery, which is a lottery related to the operation of the special electric accessory P755, whereas the target of the ordinary symbol lottery is a lottery related to the operation of the ordinary electric accessory P770, and the lottery. Although they are different in that the trigger for execution is the entry of a game ball into the normal pattern activation gate device P740, they are almost the same in that the winning/failure, symbols, and fluctuation patterns are determined by lottery and that they have a hold function. When specifically expressing the lottery of winning or losing symbols, symbols, and fluctuating patterns related to regular symbol drawings, we use "common symbols" (or " It is expressed by adding "normal pattern") at the beginning.

We have explained the "probability state" and "base state" as elements that differentiate the types of "specific gaming states," but there are also other elements that make up the specific gaming states, such as "time saving state" ("fluctuating time reduction state") (also referred to as a state in which the "fluctuating time reduction function" is activated). Generally, the "time saving state" refers to a state in which the variable display time (variable pattern) for each special symbol is shortened, and the number of executions of special symbol drawings per unit time is increased, which is more convenient for the player. This is an advantageous situation in that many special symbol drawings can be drawn per unit time. The "time saving state" (variable time shortening state) is often controlled at the same time as the "high probability state" and "electronic chew support state" described above, and it is rare that it alone constitutes a specific gaming state.

[Specific gaming state 1: low probability/high base state]
Returning to the explanation regarding the "specific gaming state," first, the progress of the game and the gaming method in the specific gaming state 1 (low probability/high base state) shown in FIG. 6 will be explained.

The transition to specific gaming state 1 (low probability/high base state) is made by the gaming state transitions shown in (1), (8), and (12) in FIG. The game state transition conditions for (1), (8), and (12) in Figure 6 are (a) winning a jackpot game in each state, (b) passing a predetermined number of games ) only). Although not shown, there is also a case where the specific gaming state 1 returns to the specific gaming state 1 via a jackpot game. On the other hand, if the conditions for ending the special gaming state are met, the transitions are as shown in (2), (7), and (11) in FIG. These game state transition conditions (2), (7), and (11) include (c) acquiring a type of jackpot game that will cause the transition to the respective game state in specific game state 1; and (d) An example of this is that a predetermined number of games have elapsed (*(2) only). In addition, the "number of games" refers to the "number of times special symbol lottery is executed" as an example.

When transitioning to specific gaming state 1 (low probability/high base state), the pachinko gaming machine P that is assumed is in a state in which both the above-mentioned "electronic chew support function" and "fluctuation time shortening function" are activated. In the premised layout configuration of each winning device on the game board P5 of the pachinko game machine P, there is a normal figure actuation gate device P740 in the right side area P501R (right-handed area) of the game area, and a second starting winning device related to the normal electric accessory. A mouth P721 is arranged, and the player can easily receive a normal symbol lottery and a special symbol lottery by performing a "right strike" to fire a game ball into the right region P501R (right strike region) of the game area. Furthermore, the pachinko gaming machine P that is assumed is also controlled to the above-mentioned "time saving state" in the specific gaming state 1 (low probability/high base state).

To explain the progress of the game in more detail, in the case of specific game state 1 (low probability/high base state), the player fires the game ball into the right area P501R (right-handed hitting area) of the game area, The first step is to let the ball enter (pass) the operating gate device P740, and by entering (pass) the ball into the normal pattern operating gate device P740, a normal symbol lottery is received on the main control board P40. In the normal symbol lottery in specific game state 1 (low probability/high base state), there is a high probability (approximately 1/1) of winning due to the activation of the regular symbol probability change function, so 1 game ball is sent to the regular symbol operating gate device P740. When the ball enters (passes), one operation of the normal electric accessory P770 occurs. When the normal electric accessory P770 is activated, in the pachinko game machine P which is based on the premise, the second starting prize opening P721, which is the trigger for the special symbol lottery related to the second special symbol, becomes in the state where it is easy to enter the ball, and the player can enter the second As a procedure, a game ball is fired toward the second starting prize opening P721. When a game ball enters the second starting winning hole P721, the detection information is input to the main control board P40, a special symbol lottery related to the second special symbol is executed, and the right to execute a special game (big hit, small win) A lottery will be held to obtain the .

Specific gaming state 1 (low probability/high base state) is predetermined by the gaming state transition conditions (for example, if a jackpot was executed, the type of jackpot executed, etc.) that led to the transition to the state. The game ends when the number of games (the number of times the special symbol lottery is received) passes or when a new jackpot game is obtained (note that there is a case where the game returns to the main state after the jackpot game). In the case of acquiring a small winning game, it is often assumed that the specific gaming state does not end, but depending on the specifications of the gaming machine, the acquisition of a small winning game (or the acquisition of multiple small winning games, a specific type of In some cases, the game is designed to end with the acquisition of a small winning game. When the specific gaming state 1 (low probability/high base state) ends depending on the number of games, the game shifts to the normal gaming state (low probability/low base state).

[Specific gaming state 2: High probability/high base state]
Next, the progress of the game and the gaming method in the specific gaming state 2 (high probability/high base state) shown in FIG. 6 will be explained.

The transition to the specific gaming state 2 (high probability/high base state) is made by the gaming state transitions shown in (3), (7), and (9) in FIG. The game state transition conditions of (3), (7), and (9) in FIG. 6 are (a) to obtain a jackpot game in each state. Although not shown, there is also a case where the specific gaming state 2 returns to the specific gaming state 2 via a jackpot game. On the other hand, if the conditions for ending the special gaming state are met, the transitions are as shown in (4), (8), and (10) in FIG. The game state transition conditions for these (4), (8), and (10) are (a) acquiring the type of jackpot game that will cause the transition to the respective game state in specific game state 2; and (c) For example, a predetermined number of games has elapsed.

When transitioning to specific gaming state 2 (high probability/high base state), in the pachinko gaming machine P that is assumed, the "probability variation function" is activated in addition to specific gaming state 1 (low probability/high base state). The difference is that it is a "high probability (state)." The progress of the game and the method of playing in specific gaming state 2 are the same as in specific gaming state 1, but the difference is that the player can win the jackpot earlier because the probability of winning the jackpot is higher in the special symbol lottery. do.

Specific gaming state 2 (high probability/high base state) is predetermined by the gaming state transition conditions (for example, if a jackpot is executed, the type of jackpot that was executed, etc.) that led to the transition to the state. The game ends when the number of games (the number of times the special symbol lottery is received) passes or when a new jackpot game is obtained (note that there is a case where the game returns to the main state after the jackpot game). Generally, the specific game state 2 does not end when a small winning game is obtained. If specific gaming state 2 (high probability/high base state) ends depending on the number of games played, normal gaming state (low probability/low base state), specific gaming state 1 (low probability/high base state), or specific gaming state Transition to 3 (high probability/low base state).

[Specific gaming state 3: High probability/low base state]
Next, the progress of the game and the gaming method in the specific gaming state 3 (high probability/low base state) shown in FIG. 6 will be explained.

The transition to specific gaming state 3 (high probability/low base state) is made by the gaming state transitions shown in (5), (10), and (11) in FIG. The game state transition conditions for (5), (10), and (11) in FIG. ) only). Although not shown, there is also a case where the specific gaming state 3 is transferred to the specific gaming state 3 again via a jackpot game. On the other hand, if the conditions for ending the special gaming state are met, transitions occur as shown in (6), (9), and (12) in FIG. These game state transition conditions (6), (9), and (12) include (c) acquiring the type of jackpot game that will cause the transition to the respective game state in specific game state 3, and (d) An example of this is that a predetermined number of games have elapsed (*(6) only).

When transitioning to specific gaming state 3 (high probability/low base state), the assumed pachinko gaming machine P becomes a "high probability (state)" in which the "probability variation function" is activated, and specific gaming state 1 and specific gaming Unlike state 2, the "electronic chew support function" and the "fluctuating time reduction function" are not activated. In the premised layout configuration of each winning device on the game board P5 of the pachinko gaming machine P, there is a normal figure operating gate device P740 in the right side area P501 (right-handed area) of the game area, and a second starting winning device related to the normal electric accessory. The mouth P721 is placed, but if the player performs "right-handed hitting" in which the game ball is fired into the right-hand area P501R (right-handed hitting area) in the specific gaming state 3 (high probability/low base state). The probability of winning in a normal symbol lottery is low, and there is no advantage to hitting right.

Therefore, the player will proceed with the game by firing the game ball into the left area P501L (left-handed area) of the gaming area, and since this is a high probability state, the probability of hitting the jackpot in the special symbol lottery is low. The game method and game progress are the same as in the normal game state (low probability/low base state), except that the jackpot game can be obtained early because of the high price.

Specific gaming state 3 (high probability/low base state) is predetermined by the gaming state transition conditions (for example, if a jackpot is executed, the type of jackpot executed, etc.) that led to the transition to the state. The game ends when the number of games (the number of times the special symbol lottery is received) passes or when a new jackpot game is obtained (note that there is a case where the game returns to the main state after the jackpot game). Generally, the specific game state 3 does not end when a small winning game is obtained. When the specific gaming state 3 (high probability/low base state) ends due to the number of games played, the game shifts to the normal gaming state (low probability/low base state).

Note that the specific game state 3 (high probability/low base state) is different from the board layout configuration of FIG. 6 described as the premised pachinko game machine P, in which the normal electric accessory P770 is placed in the right area P501R (right-handed area). The arrangement and configuration of the winning device on the game board, such as arranging the third starting winning hole of the type that does not have a type, and activating the "time saving state" so that many special symbol drawings can be won in a short time. Depending on the control of the time-saving state, the game state may be such that "right-handed play" is recommended.

As explained above, in the pachinko game machine P based on the premise, the game progresses through a plurality of game states, but it is not necessarily necessary to have all the game states described above. Therefore, among the game machine specifications formed by a combination of a plurality of game states, etc., game machine specifications (sometimes referred to as "specs") that can be adopted by the assumed Pachinko game machine P are illustrated below.

Regarding typical gaming machine specifications ("specs"), examples of the types of gaming machine specifications related to the operation of the probability variation function of special symbol drawings are "(until next time) fixed variation" and "ST (number of times cut fixed variation)". , ``V definite change (also referred to as ``ball definite'', ``attack round system'')'', and ``latent definite change'' can be adopted. Differences in gaming machine specifications due to differences in probability variation functions are sometimes expressed as, ``This gaming machine is a XX machine (eg, an ST machine)''. In addition, in a gaming machine that does not have a probability fluctuation function, by passing through a specific area P760 inside the big winning opening P751 during a small winning game, the accessory continuous operation device is activated (that is, the transition to the jackpot game). There is also a gaming machine specification called "Kotori V".

[(Until next time) Definitely different]
First of all, I will explain about "(until next time) Definite Change". "Until next time" is generally defined as "Specific gaming state 2 ( This figure shows the specifications of a Pachinko game machine in which the high probability/high base state continues until the right to the next jackpot game is acquired. In other words, a gaming machine with "probability change until next time" is configured so that the specific gaming state 2 (high probability/high base state) continues until the right for the next jackpot game is acquired, and does not end depending on the number of symbol changes, etc. has been done.

In addition, depending on the type of jackpot, there may be a case where the control is performed to specific gaming state 1 (low probability/high base state) or specific gaming state 3 (high probability/low base state). In addition, in the case of "a pachinko gaming machine in which specific gaming state 3 (high probability/low base state) continues until the right to the next jackpot game", the probability fluctuation function continues until the next jackpot. Although it is sometimes referred to as "Until next time, probability change", the base state is "low base state", and the same game as the normal game state (low probability / low base state) may be required regarding the electric chew support function. In this way, it is a definite change until the next time when the electric chew support function is not activated, so it is expressed separately as a ``latent definite change.''

[ST (Number of cutting definite changes)]
Next, "ST (number of times cutting sure change)" will be explained. "ST" is an abbreviation of "Special Time", and generally, "Specific gaming state 2 (high probability/high base state) performs a special symbol lottery a predetermined number of times (a predetermined number of times)" This shows the game machine specifications for a Pachinko game machine that continues until the symbol change is executed or the right to a jackpot game is acquired.

In addition, depending on the type of jackpot, there may be a case where the control is performed to specific gaming state 1 (low probability/high base state) or specific gaming state 3 (high probability/low base state). In addition, similar to the above-mentioned "Until the next time, it is certain", until the gaming state is in the specific gaming state 3 (high probability/low base state) and the special symbol lottery is performed a predetermined number of times, or the right to play the jackpot game is acquired. Regarding the case to be controlled, it is also possible to configure it to have a state called "latent probability change (latent ST)".

In addition, even if it is "ST (number of times cut probability variable)", the period in which the gaming state is controlled by ST is "until 10,000 special symbol drawings have been drawn", etc., in a high probability state. If the specifications of the gaming machine are such that a jackpot is guaranteed until the next time, it may be expressed as ``until the next time.''

As mentioned above, "until next time definite change" and "ST (number cut definite change)" differ in the end of the probability variation function of the special symbol lottery, which distinguishes the "definite change state" as a gaming machine specification. It is. On the other hand, with regard to the activation or non-operation of the probability variation function of the special symbol lottery in a specific gaming state, in other words, the start of the execution of the probability variation function, as in the "V Kokuhen ("Kyu Koku" "Attack Round System")" described below, In some cases, game machine specifications ("specs") are expressed by requiring special conditions.

[V definite change]
Next, the specifications of the gaming machine called "V Kokuhen" will be explained. "V Definite Change" is a "specific area P750" (referred to as "V zone", "V area", etc.) provided in the big winning hole P751 during a jackpot game before the gaming state shifts to a specific gaming state. ), if the passing of a game ball (``V winning'') is detected under predetermined conditions (such as during a specific jackpot round), the probability fluctuation function will be activated after a jackpot game. The gaming machine specifications of a pachinko gaming machine that performs control to shift to a specific gaming state (specific gaming state 1 or specific gaming state 3) are shown. Regarding the "specific region" used for "V probability variation", it may be particularly referred to as "probability variation function operating region".

As mentioned above, "V probability variation" is a gaming machine specification indicating that whether or not the probability variation function is activated depends on the game result during the jackpot game (depends on whether the game ball passes through the specific area P760). Yes, depending on whether the activated probability variation function ends with the same control as the previously explained "Probability variation until next time" or with the same control as "ST", "V probability variation (V-loop)" ” and “V-ST” are used to indicate different gaming machine specifications.

In addition, in the pachinko game machine P that adopts "V-kokuhen" as the gaming machine specification, if you do not win a V prize during a jackpot game, the probability change function will not operate after the jackpot game, and the probability change function will not operate in the normal game state or in the specific game. Controlled to state 1 (low probability/high base state). In addition, it is possible to switch whether or not to enter a game state in which the probability fluctuation function operates after the jackpot game depending on whether or not a V prize is won, and at the same time, it is possible to change the operating mode of the electric chew support function. For example, in the "V Loop" machine, if you win a V prize, the probability fluctuation function and electric chew support function will continue until you win the next jackpot, and if you do not win a V prize, the probability fluctuation function will not operate. First, the electric chew support function may be limited to 100 special symbol drawings.

[Small hit V]
Next, a gaming machine specification called "Small Hit V" will be explained as a gaming machine specification that can provide an advantageous gaming state to the player in terms of winning a jackpot without having a probability variation function.

“Small win V” is a “specific area P760" (sometimes referred to as "V zone", "V area", etc.), the machine operates the accessory continuous actuation device following the small win game, that is, starts the jackpot game. be. In other words, it is a gaming machine specification that allows you to win a jackpot game by passing through the specific area P760 during a small win without getting a jackpot result as a result of the special symbol lottery.

"Small hit V" is a "Type 1 (Pachinko)" game that activates a continuous actuation device or a special electric accessory as a result of a special symbol lottery, and a special electric accessory when the continuous actuation device is not activated. It is a specification that activates the accessory continuous activation device when it passes through a specific area P760 during operation (while the big prize opening P751 is open), and is sometimes expressed as "1st type small hit V", while it is different from conventional pachinko games. It is sometimes referred to as a ``1-type 2-type Pachinko machine'' because it has a gameplay similar to the specifications of a so-called ``2-type Pachinko'' game machine.

Generally, pachinko gaming machines that adopt "small hit V" as a gaming machine specification do not have a probability variation function (probability variation function), and the degree of advantage is changed depending on the presence or absence of the electric chew support function. In other words, when the electric chew support function is activated, it becomes a trigger for changing the special symbol that makes it easier to win a small hit (for example, win a small hit with 1/2) in the winning hole related to the ordinary electric accessory P770, which makes it easier to win a prize. By configuring with a starting prize opening, it is easy to win a small prize under the condition that the electric chew support function is operating, and it is possible to aim for a big prize by winning a V prize during a small winning game. By doing this, instead of increasing the random number range that results in a jackpot like in the variable probability function, the game is designed to increase the possibility of winning a jackpot through small wins.

[Other gaming machine specifications (specs)]
The game machine specifications described above are typical ones, and since there are several other characteristic game machine specifications known, they will be briefly explained below.

(limiter)
"Limiter" is a situation in which a specific gaming state in which the probability fluctuation function or electric chew support function is activated occurs repeatedly with the execution of a jackpot game (so-called "consecutive winnings" state), and is predetermined. Even if a jackpot game in which the probability fluctuation function or the electric chew support function is supposed to operate when the specified number of repetitions (number of consecutive games) is reached, the probability fluctuation function or the electric chew support function will not operate. This is a function that limits operation. As a limiter function, the function that limits the "probability fluctuation function" based on the number of consecutive times is called the "definite change limiter", and the function that limits the "denchu support function" based on the number of consecutive times is called the "time saving limiter". call. A gaming machine equipped with a limiter function is referred to as a "limiter machine."

(Fall)
"Falling" is a gaming machine that executes a "falling lottery" that determines whether or not to end the probability varying function every time a special symbol lottery is held during a period when the probability varying function of the special symbol lottery is in operation. Show specifications. In a situation where the Denchu support function is operating together with the probability variation function, if you win the lottery, the Denchu support function may end at the same time as the probability variation function ends, or only the probability variation function may end. The operation of the power supply support function may continue.

Note that it is possible to combine multiple gaming machine specifications mentioned above. For example, when "ST" and "fall" are combined, in the case of specific gaming state 2 (high probability/high base state), ( Specified gaming state 2 (High The probability/high base state) ends (transfers to another gaming state).

Next, the control of the main control board P40 that governs the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine P will be explained. Furthermore, regarding the pachinko game machine P which is the premise of the description of this embodiment, the description will be made on the premise that the pachinko game machine P adopts "ST (variable number cut)" as the game machine specifications (specs) mentioned above. . In the description of the embodiment, the notation "P-s〇〇" indicating a processing step in the figure will be described as "step 〇〇" in the text.

[Main control board power-on processing (main control board main loop processing)]
The main control board P40 of the pachinko game machine P, which is the premise, first executes a power-on process (step 1000) when the power of the pachinko game machine P is turned on. Here, details of the power-on process will be explained with reference to FIG. 7.

When power-on processing is started in the main control board P40 of the pachinko game machine P, initial settings related to the operation of the CPU, which is an arithmetic unit provided on the main control board P40, are performed (step 1002). The initial settings are to appropriately perform settings necessary for the subsequent operation of the CPU, and the details thereof will be omitted.

When the CPU initialization is completed, input port confirmation processing (step 1004) and power-off information confirmation/checksum processing (step 1006) are executed, and based on these processing contents, gaming stop state setting processing (step 1008) is executed. ).

To explain in more detail, the input port confirmation process (step 1004) involves setting a "setting value" for changing the advantageous degree of the special symbol lottery of the pachinko gaming machine P (in particular, the operating probability of the accessory continuous operating device, that is, the jackpot probability). ”, and the flag indicating whether or not the “settings confirmation process” to check the “setting value” is executed. This is a process of generating information for determining whether or not to establish (turn on or not) in the game stop state setting process that will be performed later. In the assumed pachinko gaming machine P, the detection status of the frame release switch P131 (a switch that detects that the front frame is open to the outer frame) and the detection status of whether the ram clear switch P48 is operated by the player. , data including data indicating the detection status of whether or not the setting key switch P49 is rotated is generated as 1-byte data.

In the subsequent power-off information confirmation/checksum processing (step 1006), the pachinko gaming machine P turns off the power normally when the power was turned off last time, and the control data related to the gaming state at the time the power-off occurred is correctly stored. This is a process to check whether the data is normally saved and stored in the storage area of the CPU of the main control board P40. If the data is not normal, it is treated as an error and the game is stopped in the game stop state setting process (step 1008), which will be described later. This is the process of setting (turning on) a flag to stop the process.

The "gaming stop state setting process" (step 1008) sets a flag to prevent the player from actually being able to play after the power-on process is completed and the main loop process is started to start the game. Based on the processing results of input port confirmation processing (step 1004) and power-off information confirmation/checksum processing (step 1006), "settings change state", "settings confirmation state", "unrecoverable" This is a process to set a flag to cause the game to proceed to one of the game progress disallowed states (error state). Details of the "gaming stop state setting process" are shown in FIG. 8, and will be explained based on the description in FIG.

In the game stop state setting process, first, it is determined whether the slot is open or not based on the 1-byte data generated in the input port confirmation process (step 1004) (step 1100). If the front frame P2 of the pachinko gaming machine P is open to the outer frame P1 when the power is turned on (YES in step 1100), the specific bit of the 1-byte data is "1". Therefore, the process of the subsequent step 1102 is omitted. On the other hand, if the frame is not open when the Pachinko machine is powered on, it is assumed that some of the required operations for executing the setting change process are not satisfied, and the 1 generated in the input port confirmation process (step 1004) is not completed. Calculate the setting key switch operation information from the byte data so that it becomes OFF data. Note that, although not shown, regardless of whether the result of step 1102 is YES or NO, the bits in the 1-byte data whose frame is being opened are also calculated to become off data.

In the following step 1104, it is determined whether the 1-byte data generated in the input port confirmation process (step 1004) is information that can be determined to indicate that "a setting change operation has been performed." In the assumed pachinko game machine P, the situations in which it is determined that there is a "setting change operation" are (1) the frame release switch P131 is on (the frame is being opened when the power is turned on), and (2) the setting key switch P49 is on. (rotation operation is being performed), and (3) ram clear switch P48 is on. As described above, the information on the frame release switch P131 in the 1-byte data is set to OFF, and it is determined in this step whether or not both (2) and (3) are satisfied. For example, if two specific bit data are "1", it is determined that a setting change operation has been performed (note that the active data indicating that the two switches are on does not necessarily have to be "1"; (One piece of data may be "0"). Then, if it is determined that there has been a setting change operation, that is, if it is determined YES in step 1104, data indicating "settings changing" is stored as the game stop state flag, and the game stop state setting process is ended ( Step 1106, Step 1118). On the other hand, if the determination in step 1104 is NO, the process moves to the subsequent step 1108. In addition, if the setting value information stored in the RAM (RAM=Random Access Memory) of the main control board P40 is abnormal data (in the case of a recovery operation from an unrecoverable error state), the initial setting value is Data corresponding to the setting value "1" is set in the area for storing the setting value (step 1118).

Next, in step 1108, it is determined whether a game stop error has occurred. A game stop error is an error that occurs when the ram clearing and setting value setting (change) processing is required when the game cannot proceed due to a checksum abnormality (ram abnormality) or setting value abnormality, for example. refers to. The judgment in step 1108 is based on the processing result of the power-off information confirmation/checksum processing (step 1006) and the error information stored during the previous power-off processing to determine whether or not to set the gaming stop state. . If it is determined that it should be in an error state (YES in step 1108), the game stop state flag is set to "unrecoverable error state" and the game stop state setting process is ended (steps 1110 and 1118). If it is determined that no error has occurred, the process moves to the subsequent step 1112.

In the following step 1112, it is determined whether or not the ram clear switch P48 has been operated. In the game stop state setting process, the state when progressing to the relevant step is (a) when an operation to move to the setting confirmation state is being performed, in other words, (1) of the determination that "setting change operation is performed" ) The frame release switch P131 is on (the frame is being opened when the power is turned on), (2) the setting key switch P49 is on, and (3) the ram clear switch P48 is on is not satisfied. In other words, (2) setting key switch P49 is on, and (3) ram clear switch P48 is on. (c) When the power is turned on without any operations such as ``setting change operation'', ``setting confirmation operation'', or ``RAM clear operation'' being performed. In these states, the 1-byte data generated in the input port confirmation process (step 1004) shows that (a) the bit data indicating on/off of the setting key switch P49 is "1 (on data)", and (b) the ram clear switch is "1 (on data)". This is either a situation in which the bit data indicating on/off of the operation detection state of P48 is "1 (on data)", or (c) all 1 byte data is off data (for example, all bits are "0").

Then, in step 1112, it is determined whether or not the ram clear switch P48 has been operated, and if there has been a ram clear operation (YES in step 1112), the pachinko gaming machine clears the ram and then returns to the playable state. In order to make the transition, processing is performed to clear the game stop state flag (step 1114). On the other hand, in situations other than the RAM clear operation, the current 1-byte data will be set as is, and at this time, if the game stop state flag is changed to the "setting confirmation state" (step 1112) If the determination is NO), the bit data indicating the operation status of the setting key switch P49 is "1", and the 1-byte data indicating the game stop state flag is stored as data indicating "Setting confirmation in progress" ( step 1118). In addition, if there is no RAM clear operation or operation to transition to the setting confirmation state, the 1-byte data generated in the input port confirmation process (step 1004) is originally data indicating that the game is not stopped as a game stop state flag, Set as no game stop information.

Regarding the game stop state flag set in the "game stop state setting process" (step 1008), if a value indicating some kind of stop state is stored, the main In the interrupt processing (step 2000) which is the main part of game progress control executed after transition to the loop (steps 1028 to 1036), the value indicating the stopped state is referenced, and the game progress described as "basic game progress" is referenced. However, these controls will be described later in the explanation of interrupt processing.

Returning to the explanation of the power-on process in FIG. 7, the following process will be explained. When the game stop state setting process (step 1008) is completed, it is determined whether a ram clear operation has been performed (step 1010). The ram clear operation is when the ram clear switch P48 is operated when the power of the pachinko game machine P is turned on. Note that this process is executed whether the setting key switch P49 is off or on. If it is determined in step 1010 that there is a ram clear operation, a predetermined portion of the storage area is initialized from the ram storage area of the main control board P40.

In the subsequent steps 1014 to 1020, processing is performed to set a performance control command (performance command) from the main control board P40 to the performance control board P41 for recognizing the state of the gaming machine when the power is turned on. More specifically, in step 1014, processing is performed to clear from the storage area the effect control commands that were not sent when the power was cut off last time (when the power cutoff occurred). Then, in step 1016, information regarding the current gaming state of the main control board P40 that has returned after power-on is generated as an effect control command, and if it is determined in step 1018 that the game is not in a stopped state, in step 1020, the generated return A performance control command indicating the game state that has been achieved is set in an area for storing transmission data of the performance control command.

When the processing related to setting the performance control command at the time of power-on is completed, necessary data (drive signal ) is outputted from the output port to the special electric accessory driving means P70 and the ordinary electric accessory driving means P71. (Step 1022)

When the power-on process up to step 1022 is completed, a process is performed to set the interrupt processing time interval for the CPU of the main control board P40 (step 1024). In the pachinko game machine P that is assumed, the interval at which interrupt processing (FIG. 9, step 2000) to be described later is executed is set to 4 ms (milliseconds). When this process is completed, the process moves to a cyclic process called a main loop in which the player can play, and the cyclic process in the main loop is repeated until a power outage occurs.

(Main loop)
As shown in FIG. 7, in the main loop processing of the main control board, first, in step 1026, the occurrence of interrupt processing is prohibited, and until the main loop processing is completed (in step 1036, interrupt processing is prohibited). ) limits execution of interrupt processing.

When interrupts are disabled, in the following step 1028, a watchdog timer is used to monitor the occurrence of a runaway of the CPU of the main control board P40 (such as a situation in which the processing loops and stops progressing). Clear (initialize) the area that stores timekeeping information.

Then, in step 1030, it is determined whether a power-off has occurred (for example, whether a power-off signal sent based on a voltage drop from the power supply board P44 is input to the input port of the CPU of the main control board P40). , if a power outage has occurred, a power outage process (step 1032) that stores the current gaming state, stores power outage information and checksum information, and stops the processing of the main control board P40 as a CPU. ). If the situation is such that a power outage has not occurred, the process moves to the next one.

In step 1034, processing is performed to update the random numbers used for the special symbol lottery and the random numbers used for the normal symbol lottery. Note that some of these random numbers are updated in interrupt processing, which will be described later, and this is a process to prevent the random number update period from becoming constant due to random numbers being updated only in interrupt processing. In addition, if there are processes that are executed irregularly in interrupt processing, it is possible to prevent the random number update cycle from becoming constant by adopting a method such as updating random numbers according to those processes. Therefore, it is not essential to provide random number update processing in the main loop.

Step 1036 is the last process in the main loop, in which interrupts are permitted. Immediately after, the process returns to step 1026, which is the first process in the main loop, to disable interrupts, but when the process of step 1036, which enables interrupts, is performed, the interrupt execution cycle (4 ms has elapsed since the previous interrupt process occurred) If there is an input to the CPU of the main control board P40 indicating a state in which the current state has occurred, an interrupt process to be described later will be executed.

[Interrupt processing]
Next, interrupt processing (also referred to as "timer interrupt processing") performed by the CPU of the main control board P40 will be explained with reference to FIG. In the pachinko game machine P that is assumed, most of the progress of the game is controlled by interrupt processing (step 2000), and the submodule program, which can be changed depending on the game machine specifications, is generally fixed. It is configured to read and control in the order of. Processing related to those submodules will be briefly explained below.

(Watchdog timer clear)
At the beginning of the interrupt processing, a watchdog timer clearing process is provided. This process is the same process as the watchdog timer clear process in the main loop process (FIG. 7, steps 1026 to 1036) executed by the CPU of the main control board P40 described above. (Step 2002)

(Input port confirmation process)
The input port confirmation process checks the information input to the input port of the CPU of the main control board P40, thereby obtaining information that makes it possible to identify whether or not there is input information as information necessary for judgment in subsequent processes. This is the process of generating. (Step 2004)

Information input to the input port includes input signals related to human operations, such as input signals indicating the operation status of the ram clear switch P48 and setting key switch P49, and input signals indicating the operation status (touching or non-touching) of the handle P204. , Input signals indicating game results by detection of game balls such as special drawing 1 starting opening switch P712 and big winning opening switch P752, magnetic sensor P73, door open sensor P131, vibration detection sensor P72, etc., are provided for fraud monitoring. There are input signals indicating the detection status of the sensor.

In the input port confirmation process, the input signals of these input ports are read three times in 10 μs (microseconds), and the data that is the same data (same bit) in all the reads is input data for this interrupt (referred to as "level data"). ) in the RAM of the main control board P40. In addition, for the part of the data read three times that was not the same data in all reads, the data determined in the previous interrupt processing (interrupt processing 4ms ago) will be adopted as the level data, that is, the data determined by the current interrupt If the data cannot be read normally, the data stored in the previous interrupt will not be updated.

Once the input data (level data) for this interrupt is determined, a comparison operation is performed with the input data for the previous interrupt to generate "rising data" (data that identifies the bit where the input data changed from off to on). Data identifying the switch whose input was turned on by this interrupt is stored.

(Random number update processing)
Random number update processing is performed using software from among various random numbers such as winning/losing random numbers, random symbols, and fluctuating pattern random numbers for special symbol drawings, regular symbol winning/falsifying random numbers for regular symbol drawings, regular symbol random numbers, and regular fluctuating pattern random numbers. This is a process of updating a so-called soft random number, which is a random value to be updated (step 2006). In the pachinko gaming machine P that is based on the premise, the random numbers used for special symbol drawings and normal symbol drawings are those that are updated at the random number generation circuit at the update cycle on the circuit, and those that are updated at the software cycle. By combining these specifications, the system is configured to maintain the randomness of various random numbers when obtaining random numbers.

In the random number update process, as mentioned above, the soft random number is updated, but the updating method is (a) incrementing (+1) or decrementing (-1) the random number and updating the random number. When the upper limit (or lower limit) of the range is exceeded, the lower limit value (or upper limit) is set. (a) An arbitrary prime number is subtracted (or added) to the random number, and if it exceeds the random number range, the random number range + 1 (or random number range - 1), (c) repeats incrementing (or decrementing) from a random number set as the initial value, and updates it separately when one cycle of updating is completed. Various updating methods can be exemplified, such as one in which an existing "initial value random number" is set as a new initial value and the same update is repeated (also referred to as an initial value update type random number). Note that the updating method is not limited to the one exemplified in this embodiment, and any updating method may be used as long as the randomness of the random numbers can be maintained.

(Setting control processing)
The setting control process is performed when the game stop flag set during the power-on process (see FIG. 7) in the CPU of the main control board P40 is "setting changing" or "setting checking". (Step 2008)

In the setting control processing, first, it is determined whether or not the bit data indicating that the setting key is being operated in the data stored as the game stop flag during the power-on processing is on data, and if it is not on data, that is, the pachinko gaming machine is If the setting key is not turned on when the power is turned on, this processing is configured to exit.

On the other hand, if the bit data indicating that the setting key is being operated in the game stop flag is ON data, the current interrupt is Referring to the input information of the setting key switch P49 in the process (generated in the input port confirmation process described above), if the setting key switch P49 is turned off, the game stop flag is cleared and the game is enabled, and then Depending on whether the return is from the "setting change state" or the "setting confirmation state", a production control command for returning (or starting) the production to the production control board is set.

In addition, in the power-on process (see Figure 7), if the game stop flag is "settings changing", the role of the "settings change switch" at this interrupt timing is changed until the setting key switch P49 is turned off. Check the operating status of the ram clear switch P48 (switch operated to change the set value). When the game stop flag is "Settings changing", if the rising data related to the operation of the setting change switch P48 is generated in this interrupt, the "setting value" is changed to the next one in the predetermined change order. Change the data to match the set value. For example, if the pachinko game machine P has set value data in which the settings change in order from 1 to 6, each time there is start-up data based on the operation of the setting change switch (ram clear switch P48), the settings are set in this setting control process. A process of increasing the value by "1" (if the setting value before the operation is 6, change it to 1 as the next value) is performed.

In the pachinko gaming machine P based on the premise, by providing the processing for the setting change state and setting confirmation state during interrupt processing (see Figure 9), the operations of the setting key switch and setting change switch can be monitored at the cycle of the interrupt processing. , a program for periodic monitoring during the power-on process (see Figure 7), which enables the output of display data to the display device in the LED output process described later, and for which interrupt processing cannot be set separately. Setting is optional. Note that during the power-on process, the configuration may be such that monitoring of switches, control of the display device, and updating of setting values related to setting changes and setting confirmations are performed.

(Game stop monitoring process)
In the game stop monitoring process, the CPU of the main control board reads the game stop flag data generated during the power-on process (see Figure 7) executed when the pachinko game machine is powered on, and checks whether the game is stopped or not. This is a process to check whether the (Step 2010)

In the game stop monitoring process, if some game stop information (game stop flag) is stored in the read game stop flag data, for example, if the game stop flag data is not 0 but one of the bits is "1". ”, it is determined that the game is in a stopped state (a state in which it is necessary to stop the game), and it is assumed that the game is stopped. Accessory object control processing (step 2028)) is omitted.

In the assumed Pachinko gaming machine P, the states that require the game to be stopped, that is, the state in which the player is unable to play, are "Changing settings," "Checking settings," and "Unrecoverable error." An example of such a state is "currently occurring".

(timer subtraction processing)
The timer subtraction process is a process of updating timer data used to manage time related to the progress of the game (step 2014).

Examples of timer data update processing include managing the variable display time that is set when the variable display of special symbols starts, and the operating time of the special electric accessory P755 during a jackpot game (opening time of the grand prize opening P751). ) etc., timer data update processing triggered by game progress, time measurement processing for error determination such as detecting ball jamming, LED lighting pattern in main control display device P50 such as special symbol display device P51, P52, etc. Examples include processing for timing a switching time for switching, processing for timing a period during which information is output from an external information output terminal P77, etc. to an external device (such as a hall computer), and the like.

The timer data updated in the timer update process is stored in the storage area (RAM storage area) of the main control board P40, divided into types of timer data such as "1-byte timer" and "2-byte timer", and is stored in a continuous format. Each is stored in a storage area.

In the timer update process, processes such as "1-byte timer update process" and "2-byte timer update process" are performed on the storage area that stores the types of individual timer data, and the time values of various timers are updated. I do. The timer update process is a process of decrementing (-1) the timer data stored in the storage area. Note that if the stored timer data is already "0", it will be processed so that it becomes "0" even after processing (if it becomes a negative value, it will be set to "0", (Do not decrement if it is 0, etc.)

In addition, in the pachinko game machine P used as the premise, the cycle of one interrupt is 4ms, so if the data is from a 1-byte timer, only the managed object can be controlled that can be updated a maximum of 255 times (approximately 1 second). However, if there is no game information that is managed only within 1 second (if there is little), it is also possible to configure it with only 2-byte timer data and not have 1-byte timer update processing. It is. Furthermore, if it is necessary to manage time values that cannot be managed even with a 2-byte timer, it may be configured to have timer data such as a "3-byte timer" that can manage a longer time.

(Validity period setting process)
The validity period setting process is a period during which the winning hole that can be changed to the easy ball entering mode or the difficult ball entering mode (mainly applicable to the winning hole related to the big winning hole P751 and the ordinary electric accessory P770) is controlled to be in the easy ball entering mode. This is a process of setting a valid period in the valid extension period and setting an invalid period for other periods (when the winning hole is in a difficult-to-enter mode and is outside the valid extension period). (Step 2016)

In the pachinko gaming machine that is based on the premise, the winning period is set as the prize winning hole P751 as the big winning device and the second starting winning hole P721 which is the second starting winning device P720 equipped with the normal electric accessory P770. The process is as follows.

In addition, during the validity extension period, in order to treat the game ball that entered the ball just before the big winning hole P751 or the ordinary electric accessory P770 shifts to the difficult-to-enter mode as a valid winning, the special electric accessory P750 (special electric accessory P755) and ordinary electric accessory P770, etc., even after the control period for performing open control on electric accessories has elapsed, it is treated as a valid period, so a certain period of time that is set as appropriate depending on the structure of the electric accessory is treated as a valid period. This is the control period.

Furthermore, depending on the specifications of the game machine, if the game machine has a specific area P760 (V area), a valid extension period for the passage of the game ball regarding the specific area P760 may also be set, and in such a case, in this process, The validity period of the specific area is also set.

(Winning monitoring processing)
The winning monitoring process determines whether or not it is a valid winning based on the winning of game balls in various winning holes (big winning hole P751, starting hole P711, P721, general winning hole P731) in the pachinko gaming machine, and then determines whether the winning is valid or not. This process generates information that triggers the process of generating (occurring reservation) the right to draw special symbols for balls and balls that enter the starting gate. (Step 2018)

The processing details include (a) detecting the presence or absence of a prize for each winning opening in a predetermined order based on the data generated in the input port confirmation process (step 2004); and (b) detecting the presence or absence of a winning opening for each winning opening that has a validity period. In this case, it is determined whether the prize has been won during the valid period, and if a valid prize has been won for each type of prize opening, furthermore, (c) the effect control command that shows the winning information for each type of winning hole to be sent to the effect control board P41. Settings, (d) Update the counter value (referred to as "winning counter") for storing the number of occurrences of operation triggers based on winnings for each type of winning opening (in other words, the number of times the operation trigger based on the detection of various winning openings) is updated. (updates the counter value that stores the number of unprocessed operations).

In addition, in the winning monitoring process, not only the occurrence of winnings to various winning holes, but also the out ball detection switch P792 provided for counting out balls, the operating hole switch P742 that triggers the normal symbol lottery, and the gaming machine Depending on the specifications, it is also possible to determine whether a game ball enters or passes through a specific area P760 (V area), and in addition to the occurrence of a prize ball or the occurrence of a special symbol lottery, the operation of the gaming machine (for example, In this process, it is determined whether or not a game ball is detected, which is necessary for the process of transmitting information to the effect that the operation port switch P742 and the specific area P760 have been passed to the performance control board P41.

(Operation port monitoring process)
The actuating port monitoring process is performed when the rising data of the normal pattern actuating port switch P742 is generated from the data generated in the input port confirmation process (step 2004), the suspension related to the normal symbol lottery (also referred to as the normal pattern pending) is performed. ). (Step 2020)

More specifically, when the normal symbol actuation port switch P742 is detected, the number of reservations related to the regular symbol lottery is checked, and if the number of reservations does not reach the upper limit, a random number is stored as a new reservation. Since it is possible, after incrementing (+1) the data in the storage area that stores the number of reservations and increasing the number of reservations information by one, the random number of the common symbol, the random number of the common symbol, and the random number of the common symbol variation pattern are set as random numbers. Obtain from the generation circuit or obtain the current corresponding soft random number and store it as pending.

(Normal pattern control processing)
The normal symbol control process performs processing related to the normal symbol lottery, the variable display of the normal symbol, and the operation of the normal electric accessory P770 (step 2022). These processes shift to different submodule processes depending on which data indicating the control state of the normal symbol called normal symbol status or the normal electric accessory object is, and perform control according to the state. The status of the normal symbol is "0: Normal symbol waiting", "1: Normal symbol changing", "2: Normal symbol stopped and displayed", "3: Normal electric accessory in operation", "4: Normal "Electric accessory end demonstration in progress" and processes are performed according to each state.

《Normal symbol fluctuation start monitoring control process》
The normal symbol fluctuation start monitoring control process is a submodule process that is called from the normal symbol control process when the normal symbol status is "0: waiting for a normal symbol".

In the normal symbol variation start monitoring control process, first, it is checked whether the number of reservations related to the normal symbol lottery is "0" or not. If it is "0", the normal symbol control process is exited because the normal symbol variation right has not occurred. On the other hand, if the number of reservations related to the normal symbol lottery is not "0", it means that the right to change the normal symbol has occurred, and it is judged that the conditions for starting the variation of the normal symbol are satisfied, and the fluctuation of the normal symbol is Executes processing related to start.

When it is determined that the fluctuation of the normal symbol is to start, after decrementing the pending number information by 1 from the area that stores the pending number information related to the normal symbol lottery, the common symbol winning/failing random number, the common symbol random number, and the common symbol fluctuation pattern random number are respectively set. Call it up and perform the common pattern winning/failure lottery, common pattern pattern lottery, and common pattern variation pattern lottery, store the lottery results in the storage area of the main control board, clear the random number information used this time, and clear the storage area of the pending number information. A shift process is performed so that they are processed in the stored order, and the normal symbol status is updated to "1: Normal symbols are changing." Regarding the normal symbol lottery, different lottery tables are used depending on the operation status of the above-mentioned "base state" (normal symbol probability variation function, normal symbol variation time shortening function), and it is easier to win in the high base state. , there is a tendency for a short variation display time of a normal symbol to be easily determined.

《Normal symbol fluctuation processing》
The normal symbol fluctuating process is a submodule process that is called from the normal symbol control process when the normal symbol status is "1: Normal symbol fluctuating".

In the process during normal symbol fluctuation, the timer (normal This is a process in which the normal symbol display device P53 executes a variable display of normal symbols until the symbol variation display timer becomes 0 in the timer update process.

More specifically, if the normal symbol fluctuation display timer is not 0, the ordinary symbol display switching counter whose maximum value is "5" is updated every time this process is executed, and the ordinary symbol display switching counter is set to "5". 5'', processing is performed to store information regarding the next light emitting pattern in the storage area that stores data for specifying the light emitting pattern of the LEDs constituting the normal symbol display device P53. Note that the ordinary figure display switching counter is reset to the initial value "0" at the timing when it reaches the maximum value "5". That is, in the variable display of the normal symbols, the lighting pattern of the normal symbol display device P53 is switched at intervals of 5 interruptions (4 ms x 5 = 20 ms). Note that the switching interval can be set as appropriate. For example, if the maximum value of the normal symbol display switching counter is set to 25, the display pattern of the normal symbol display device P53 will be switched once every 25 interrupts (once every 100 ms). It will be done.

When the normal symbol fluctuation display time ends, that is, the normal symbol fluctuation display timer is "0", in this process, the display pattern of the normal symbol stop display symbol determined by the ordinary symbol lottery is changed to the main control display device. Data for specifying the LED lighting pattern indicating the stop display mode is stored in the storage area for storing the LED lighting pattern of the normal symbol display device P53 so that the normal symbol display device P53 at P50 stops displaying. Then, the symbol fixing time of the normal symbol (the time for displaying the stop display symbol) is stored in the normal symbol stop display timer, and the normal symbol status is updated to "2: Normal symbol stop display".

《Normal symbol stop display processing》
The normal symbol stop display process is a submodule process that is called from the normal symbol control process when the normal symbol status is "2: Normal symbol stop display".

In the normal symbol stop display processing, at the end of the normal symbol fluctuation processing, it is checked whether the value of the normal symbol stop display timer to which the symbol fixing time is set is "0", and at the timing when it becomes "0". Then, a process for making settings for moving on to the next gaming operation is performed.

When the normal symbol stop display timer reaches "0", if the result of the current normal symbol lottery is "hit", the winning symbol and the operating state of the base state (extension function of normal electric accessories) , call the operation pattern of the ordinary electric accessory P770, set the operation pattern, clear the winning counter related to the ordinary electric accessory P770, etc., and change the normal symbol status to "3: Normal electric accessory in operation" ”.

On the other hand, when the normal symbol stop display timer reaches "0" and the result of the current normal symbol lottery is "miss", the process updates the normal symbol status to "0: Normal symbol waiting". I do.

<Normal electric accessory in operation process> The normal electric accessory in operation process is a submodule process called from the normal symbol control process when the normal symbol status is "3: Normal electric accessory in operation".

In the normal electric accessory operation process, the opening operation (change to easy ball entry mode) and closing operation of the ordinary electric accessory is performed based on the operation pattern of the ordinary electric accessory P770 set in the normal symbol stop display process. (Change to difficult-to-ball mode), and also monitors whether the conditions for terminating the operation of the normal electric accessory are met. The operation of the normal electric accessory P770 ends when (a) a specified number of ordinary electric accessory prizes set as the termination condition of the ordinary electric accessory occurs, (b) the operation of the preset movement pattern ends. (when the opening operation period of the normal electric accessory ends).

When the condition for terminating the operation of the normal electric accessory P770 is satisfied, an extension period of a fixed time predetermined in accordance with the structure of the ordinary electric accessory P770 is timed in the timer area that stores the valid extension period of the ordinary electric accessory P770. Set the time. Then, the time value related to the demonstration of the end of the operation of the normal electric accessory is set in the normal electric accessory operation end demo timer, and the normal symbol status is set to "4: Demonstrating the end of the normal electric accessory".

《Normal electric accessory operation end demonstration process》
The normal electric accessory operation end demonstration process is a submodule process that is called from the normal symbol control process when the normal symbol status is "4: Normal electric accessory operation end demonstration in progress".

In the normal electric accessory operation end demo process, wait until the ordinary electric accessory operation end demo timer set in the normal electric accessory operation process reaches "0", and then wait until the normal electric accessory operation end demo timer reaches "0". When this happens, a process is performed to update the normal symbol status to "0: Waiting for a normal symbol".

(Start port monitoring process)
In the starting port monitoring process, when the rising data of the special pattern 1 starting port switch P712 and the special pattern 2 starting port switch P722 are generated from the data generated in the input port confirmation process (step 2004), the special pattern lottery is performed. Reservation related to the drawing of the first special symbol (regarding the reservation related to the lottery of the first special symbol, it is also called the first reservation or first special symbol reservation; regarding the reservation related to the lottery of the second special symbol, it is also referred to as the second reservation or second special symbol reservation) Processing related to the occurrence of (Step 2024)

More specifically, when the special pattern 1 starting port switch P712 and the special pattern 2 starting port switch P722 are detected, the number of reservations related to the special symbol lottery is checked, and if the number of reservations is less than the upper limit. can store a random number as a new hold, so after incrementing (+1) the data in the storage area that stores the hold number and increasing the hold number information by 1, the winning/losing random number, symbol random number, and fluctuation pattern A random number is obtained from a random number generation circuit, or a current corresponding soft random number is obtained and stored as pending.

In addition, in the pachinko gaming machine P which is based on the premise, there are two types of special symbols: a first special symbol (sometimes referred to as special symbol 1) and a second special symbol (sometimes referred to as special symbol 2). Since symbols are provided, for each starting port provided on the game board P5, the number of reservations of the corresponding special symbol and the data of the starting port switch are called, and the number of reservations is added for each starting port, and a random number is obtained. processing is performed.

In addition, if the starting port to be processed is composed of a starting port (electric chew) related to a normal electric accessory, the starting port prize related to the normal electric accessory P770 is valid in the validity period setting process described above. After determining whether or not the process was performed within the period, if it is within the valid period, the above-mentioned processing is performed.

In addition, when memorizing the random numbers, symbol random numbers, and fluctuation pattern random numbers, the obtained random number information is used in advance using the advance notice judgment value table, so that the fluctuation content when the fluctuation based on the various random numbers to be held is executed is stored in advance. Information that can be estimated is generated and notified to the production control board P41 as a production control command (referred to as "pre-determination command", "pre-determination information", and "pre-read determination command"). The advance judgment command is generated for each of the win/fail random numbers, symbol random numbers, and variable pattern random numbers, and when sent to the production control board P41, the production control board P41 uses it for a lottery related to the execution of the "pre-read production" described later. be done.

(Special pattern control processing)
The special symbol control process (step 2026) includes status information for managing special symbols called special symbol status (also referred to as "special symbol status") and special electric accessory status (also referred to as "special electric game status"). Depending on the state information for managing the operating state of the called special electric accessory, we can manage the start of special symbol fluctuation (special symbol fluctuation start monitoring control processing), special symbol fluctuation processing, and special symbol stop symbol display processing. Execute the process.

The special symbol status includes "0: Waiting for special symbol change", "1: Special symbol fluctuating", "2: Missing symbol stopped and displayed", "3: Jackpot symbol stopped and displayed", "4: Small hit The special electric accessory status includes ``0: Waiting for a hit'', ``1: Special electric accessory operating'', ``2: Grand prize opening closed'', and ``3 : Jackpot end demonstration in progress,""4: Small win special electric current in operation,""5: Small win closed," and "6: Small win end demonstration in progress." In addition,
Depending on the specifications of the game machine, there may be cases where the game machine does not have a small win, and in that case, it does not have status data related to the small win. Control based on these statuses will be described later.

The special symbol control process is performed based on a predetermined order (priority order) when there is a plurality of special symbols. As a predetermined order, processing is performed to prioritize and control the second special symbol, and in a situation where both the first special symbol and the second special symbol are on hold, the variation of the second special symbol is performed first. The gaming machine specifications that are processed so that the second special symbol is started (the second special symbol changes with priority) are called "second special symbol (special symbol 2) priority consumption control", and the implementation of the pachinko gaming machine P based on the premise In the description regarding the form, processing related to this type will be exemplified and explained.

In the special symbol control process, first, the second special symbol is controlled. When control of the second special symbol is started, first, the information on the special symbol status of the first special symbol and the special electric accessory status is referred to. If the special electric accessory status is data indicating that a jackpot game or a small win game is in progress (when the special electric accessory status is other than "0: waiting for a hit"), the first special symbol is changing and the first of the dovetails is displayed. If the special symbol status of the special symbol is other than "0: Standby for special symbol variation", the process is completed without performing any processing.

When the situation is such that the control of the second special symbol is to be executed, a process of updating the timer value of the control related to the second special symbol is executed. The timer is updated by decrementing (-1) the data in the storage area that stores the timer, and if the result of the decrement is a negative value, "0" is set. Then, when the timer update ends, a submodule process to be described later is called and executed based on the special symbol status corresponding to the special symbol 2. Although the timer subtraction process is also performed during the interrupt process, the timer updated in the timer subtraction process does not include the timer data updated in the special symbol control process. It manages timer data for controlling special symbols.

《Special symbol fluctuation start monitoring control process》
The special symbol variation start monitoring control process is a submodule process that is transferred when the special symbol status is "0: Standby for special symbol variation".

In the special symbol variation start monitoring control process, it is checked whether or not there is a pending special symbol that is being processed as a target, and if there is no pending, the process is finished, and if there is a pending, the subsequent process is executed. The following process is a special symbol lottery that is performed when starting the variation. In the special symbol lottery, data stored as setting values is first read out and inspected to determine whether or not the setting value information is appropriate. If the set value is appropriate, the appropriate lottery table is selected by referring to the data in the area where each flag indicating the gaming status etc. is stored, and the win/fail lottery, symbol lottery, and variable pattern lottery are executed, and the lottery results are displayed. After being stored in the storage area, the special symbol status is updated to "1: Special symbol changing". In addition, the contents determined by the special symbol lottery are transmitted to the production control board P41 as production control commands (win/fail commands, symbol commands, variable pattern commands), and the contents of the variable production to be executed in accordance with the variable display of the special symbols. It is used as information for the decision process (lottery process). In addition, details regarding the special symbol lottery will be described later.

《Special symbol fluctuation processing》
The special symbol changing process is a submodule process that is transferred when the special symbol status is "1: Special symbol changing".

In the special symbol fluctuation processing, the timer that manages the special symbol fluctuation display time is monitored until the special symbol fluctuation time determined by the fluctuation pattern lottery has elapsed, and the timer that controls the special symbol fluctuation display time is monitored at every interrupt until the remaining fluctuation time reaches "0". Due to the updated special symbol display switching timer (maximum value "24"), the special symbol display device (second special symbol display device P52 (when controlling special symbol 1 performs switching processing of the lighting display pattern of the first special symbol display device P51)).

When the remaining variable display time of the special symbol reaches "0", it indicates that the variable display of the special symbol has been executed once for the external equipment (data counter, hall computer, etc.) connected to the pachinko gaming machine P. Setting of information for outputting an external signal, processing of setting a symbol fixing time for fixedly displaying the stop display symbol of the special symbol, and stop display showing the stop display symbol determined as a result of the win/fail lottery and the symbol lottery. Lighting pattern data for displaying symbols on the special symbol display device P52 (P51) is set. Then, the special symbol status is set to one of "2: Loss symbol is stopped and displayed", "3: Jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed", and "4: Small win symbol is stopped and displayed" according to the winning/failure lottery result.

《Processing when the special symbol is off and the symbol is stopped displaying》
The special symbol missing symbol stop display process is a process that is transferred when the special symbol status is "2: Missing symbol stop display".

In the special symbol deviation symbol stop display process, check whether the value of the timer that manages the symbol fixation time set in the special symbol change process has reached "0", and if it has become "0", it will be processed. In addition to updating the special symbol status of the special symbol that is currently in use to "0: Waiting for special symbol change", the remaining number of games for the game status (probability variation function, electric chew support function, variation time shortening function) related to the special symbol lottery will be updated. At the same time as updating, confirmation is made regarding the satisfaction of the termination condition, and when the gaming state transition condition is satisfied, control related to the transition of the gaming state (such as turning off the flag) is performed.

《Special symbol jackpot symbol stop display processing》
The special symbol jackpot symbol stop display process is a process that is transferred when the special symbol status is "3: Jackpot symbol stop display".

In the special symbol jackpot symbol stop display process, check whether the value of the timer that manages the symbol fixation time set in the special symbol fluctuation process has reached "0", and if it has become "0", it will be processed. The special symbol status of the special symbol being displayed is updated to "0: Waiting for special symbol change", and the special electric accessory status is updated to "2: Grand prize opening closed". Furthermore, in order to terminate the game state (probability variation function, electric chew support function, variation time reduction function) related to the special symbol lottery, a process is executed to clear the respective remaining number of times information storage area and operation flag storage area. Then, in order to execute the jackpot game according to the jackpot symbol, the information of various storage areas used as data during the previous jackpot game is initialized based on the jackpot symbol information, and the special electric accessory P755 is controlled during the jackpot game. Set content data.

In the special symbol jackpot symbol stop display process, a process is further executed to transmit a performance control command for causing the performance control board P41 to execute the performance of the jackpot game (jackpot start demonstration performance). In addition, in accordance with these processes, a right-handed indicator light P56 (which indicates a game state in which a right-handed game in which a game ball is fired aiming at the right side of the gaming area is recommended) is displayed, which is one of the components of the main control display device P50. Lighting pattern data for lighting the LEDs (which are turned on at certain times) is also set.

《Special symbol small hit symbol stop display processing》
The special symbol small hit symbol stop display process is a process that is transferred when the special symbol status is "4: Small win symbol stop display".

The special symbol small hit symbol stop display process is the same as the special symbol jackpot symbol stop display process, and at the end of the symbol fixing time, the data related to the operation of the special electric accessory P755 is set, and the right-hand hit indicator light P56 is lit. The relevant setting process is performed. In addition, in the pachinko gaming machine P based on this basic technology, when a small winning game is executed (stop display of small winning symbols), unlike when the jackpot symbols have stopped, the gaming state related to the special symbol lottery (high probability state or It does not have a process to end the special symbol (high base state), and, similar to the special symbol is removed symbol stop display process, the game state is changed based on the determination result of whether or not the end condition is satisfied for each game state. Control. In addition, in accordance with these processes, the special electric accessory status is updated to "5: Small hit closed". In addition, depending on the specifications of the gaming machine, as a modified example, the specification may be designed to have a process for forcibly ending the gaming state (high probability state or high base state) when executing the small winning game in the same way as when the jackpot symbol is stopped. It is also possible.

When any one of the above submodule processes is selectively executed, the first special symbol is processed following the second special symbol. The processing of the first special symbol differs from the processing of the second special symbol only in the information referred to (for example, regarding whether fluctuation can be started, the special symbol status of the second special symbol is used instead of the special symbol status of the first special symbol). Since almost the same process is repeated (e.g., making a judgment by referring to

《Enter ball order control, parallel control》
In addition, in the above-mentioned explanation of the special symbol control process, the explanation was based on the process related to "second special symbol priority extinguishing control", but there may be cases where a gaming machine specification different from the Pachinko gaming machine based on this premise is adopted. Alternatively, it is also possible to proceed with the special symbol control process using different processes. The typical ones will be briefly explained below.

"Ball entry order processing control" is a gaming machine specification in which the reservation information corresponding to each of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is processed one by one in the order in which they occur. The fluctuation display of one symbol is not performed while the other symbol is fluctuating, and in a certain game state, both the reserved balls corresponding to the first special symbol and the reserved ball corresponding to the second special symbol are generated. This is a specification that is often adopted when this is expected.

"Parallel control (parallel digestion)" is different from the above-mentioned "second special symbol priority digestion control" and "incoming ball order digestion", and simultaneously displays the fluctuations of both the first special symbol and the second special symbol. This is the type of gaming machine that allows you to play. Since two symbols can be consumed at the same time, it is possible to increase the number of special symbol drawings per unit time. In addition, if the special electric accessory P755 is activated with the stop display of the first special symbol (when a jackpot or small hit is executed), the other symbol will be forcibly missed and the symbol will stop, or the fluctuating display will be stopped. A specification that temporarily suspends the subtraction of the remaining time is adopted as appropriate. For example, when one special symbol becomes a jackpot, the other special symbol is forcibly stopped and displayed as a loss, and when one special symbol becomes a jackpot or small hit, the other special symbol It is possible to adopt a specification that temporarily suspends the fluctuating display of special symbols.

(Special electric accessory control processing)
The special electric accessory control process executes submodule processing related to the operation of the special electric accessory P755 according to the data content (value) of the special electric accessory status (sometimes referred to as special electric game status), and This is a process for managing the operation of objects (step 2028). In other words, when executing a jackpot game or a small win game, each state in the jackpot game or small win game state is controlled, and control related to opening and closing of the big win opening P751 is performed.

As mentioned above, the special electric accessory status includes "0: Waiting for winning," "1: Special electric accessory operating," "2: Big prize opening closed," and "3: Jackpot end demonstration in progress." , "4: Small win special electric current in operation," "5: Small win closed," and "6: Small win end demonstration in progress."

Among these special electric accessory statuses, if the status is "0: Waiting for a win", it means that the right to execute a jackpot game or a small win game has not yet been acquired through the player's play. , the special electric accessory control process ends without performing any processing.

If the special electric accessory status is other than "0: Waiting for a hit", one of the processes described below will be executed depending on the status.

《Processing during special electric accessory operation》
The special electric accessory in operation process is a process that is executed when the special electric accessory status is "1: Special electric accessory in operation" or "4: Small hit special electric object in operation." This process is a process for a state in which a so-called round game (unit game) is being executed in a special game (a state in which the big prize opening P751 can be controlled to open).

In the special electric accessory operation process, first, a process is performed to determine whether or not the end conditions of the round game (unit game) are satisfied. The conditions for ending the round game are (a) whether a specified number of prizes (also called a "count") have been won according to the activated special electric accessory, or (b) the activation pattern of the special electric accessory to be executed. It is determined that the opening time (opening pattern) has ended if either of the following is satisfied. If these conditions are not met, the special electric accessory control process in the current interrupt process is ended without performing any subsequent processes. In addition, among the operation patterns (opening patterns) of the special electric accessory P755, there is a pattern that opens and closes the big prize opening P751 multiple times, and when these patterns are executed, one round While the timer used for determining (b) becomes "0" multiple times during the game, after checking whether there is next operation data during one round of play, condition (c) " If it is determined that there is no next operation pattern data in the current unit game, it is determined that the above (a) is satisfied.

On the other hand, if either of the above (a) or (b) of the round game termination conditions are met, as a subsequent process, the closing time of the big prize opening is stored in the closing time management timer of the special electric accessory. , the special electric accessory status is incremented to "2: Grand prize opening closed". Then, command data for notifying that the round game has ended is set as a production control command to the production control board P41, and the process ends.

《Processing while the grand prize opening is closed》
The big winning opening closing process is a process that is executed when the special electric accessory status is "2: Big winning opening closing" or "5: Small winning opening closing". This process is a process that is controlled during the "between rounds" between so-called round games in special games, and also before the start of the first round at the start of jackpot games and small win games. When the state is controlled by the "Jackpot start demo (period)" or "Small win start demo (period)" state, or after the final round of round play has ended, the process during the win end demo described later is executed. This process is performed when the system is controlled during a period of waiting until the event occurs.

In the big winning opening closing process, first, it is determined whether the big winning opening closing time set in the special electric accessory operation process has elapsed, and if the closing time management timer is not "0", that is, the closing time If the period has not elapsed, the special electric accessory control process for the current interruption is ended.

If the big prize opening closing time has elapsed, whether the operation of the special electric accessory P755 (round game) that stopped operating first was the final round game in the current winning game (big winning game, small winning game). It is determined whether or not the game is successful, and different processes are executed at the end of the final round game and at the end of a round game other than the final round (or at the time of winning start demonstration). In addition, to judge whether or not it was the final round game, the cumulative data of the number of activations of the special electric accessory P755 activated during the current winning game is the data of the maximum number of activations of the special electric accessory P755 in the current winning game. The judgment is made based on whether or not the winning number exceeds 1, and the cumulative data of the number of operations of the special electric accessory P755 is "0" at the time of the winning start demonstration.

In the process of closing the big winning hole, if it is determined that it is the end of the final round game, the execution pattern of the winning end demo according to the type of winning (the type of special symbol that started the jackpot or small winning) (mainly winning end demo time data) and set. Then, the special electric accessory status is incremented to "3: Jackpot end demonstration in progress" or "6: Small hit end demonstration in progress", and a performance command is set to execute the winning end demo performance on the performance control board P41. I will do it. Further, in order to set the valid extension period of the big winning hole P751, time value data determined as the valid extended period is stored in a timer that manages the valid extended period of the big winning hole P751, and the process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of closing the big prize opening, if it is determined that it is the end of a game other than the last round (or at the time of a winning start demonstration), a performance control command to the performance control board P41 is sent to indicate what round the next round game will be. Information that allows you to identify whether there is one (N round start demo command *N is an integer) and the recommended firing position during a winning game (in the pachinko game machine, the right side area of the game board P501R (right-hand hitting area)) Sends information for instructions (right-handed command).

Then, the special electric accessory status is decremented and updated to "1: Special electric accessory in operation" or "4: Small hit special electric power in operation", and the number of winnings of the game ball to the big winning hole P751 during the round game. Initialize the data in the data area for counting. Then, set the time value related to the first opening (or closing immediately after the start of the round game) of the big winning hole P751 during the round game, and the operation pattern data of the big winning hole P751 (special electric accessory P755) during the round game. Then, the data in the storage area regarding the cumulative number of activations of the special electric accessory P755 is incremented.

(Prize ball control processing)
The prize ball control process is a process for awarding a game ball to a player as a prize ball in response to a winning of a game ball to a winning hole arranged on the game board P5. As for the processing content, the configuration is such that the following three submodule processes are executed. (Step 2030)

《Payout data reception monitoring process》
The payout data reception monitoring process is a process of checking the presence or absence of a control command related to the execution of prize ball payout transmitted from the payout control board P43 to the main control board P40, and receiving (memorizing) the transmitted command. . The main control board P0 stores information transmitted from the payout control board P43 in two registers (storage areas). Register 1 is called a status register, and stores information for determining whether there is information transmitted from the payout control board P43 and whether the transmitted information has been transmitted normally. has been done. The other register is called a data register, and stores information on the control contents related to payout control transmitted from the payout control board P43, and if the status register is not abnormal, the data in the data register is stored as payout control information. Store in area.

《Payment command request processing》
In the payout command request process, the winning counter data for each winning opening storing the winning number data of various winning openings stored in the winning monitoring process (step 2018) is checked, and the presence or absence of unpaid winnings is checked. The confirmation process checks each winning opening in a predetermined order, and if it is determined that the winning counter data for one winning opening is not "0", the number of prize balls for the corresponding winning opening is determined. , performs a process of transmitting a control command for causing the payout control board P43 to execute the payout of game balls. Through this process, even if the winning counter data for a plurality of winning openings is not "0", the number of payout control commands transmitted to the payout control board P43 in one interrupt is limited to one.

《Payout command control process》
In the payout command control process, a check is made to see if the payout control board P43 has normally received information regarding the number of payouts, and in this process it is determined whether the command is received normally or some abnormality causes a communication error. That will happen. Until the command reception status is determined in the dispensing command control process (it is determined whether the reception has been completed normally or an error has occurred), the next dispensing control command in the dispensing command request process will not be sent until the dispensing command request process It is temporarily interrupted by flag data that is set on and off in the payout command control process.

(Anomaly detection processing)
The abnormality detection process is a process of checking whether an abnormality has occurred based on information from a sensor provided for detecting fraud in the pachinko gaming machine P based on the premise. (Step 2032)

More specifically, regarding the input of sensors such as vibration sensor P72, magnetic sensor P73, radio wave detection sensor P74, and frame opening sensor P131, it is determined whether an abnormality has occurred based on the input information generated in the input port confirmation process (step 2004). This process determines whether or not the current situation is present. In addition to various sensors, detection targets include disconnection of a harness for electrical connection and short circuits in wiring.

If abnormal data exists for any of the judgment information, the corresponding error flag is turned on and stored, and then a command is set to notify the error information as a production control command to the production control board P41. do.

(Sensor detection judgment processing)
The sensor detection determination process determines the period during which sensor or switch detection has been performed continuously based on the sensor or switch detection data (level data) generated in the input port confirmation process (step 2004), and then performs the process. This is the process of establishing a flag. (Step 2034)

In the sensor detection judgment process, when the level data of the detection data information of the target sensor and switch is on, the data for counting the continuous on input period of the corresponding switch is incremented and updated, and various processes are executed. It is determined whether or not a start condition is met, and if the condition is met, a process is executed depending on the switch to be monitored. When the monitored switch is no longer on data, the data counting the continuous input period is initialized (updated to "0").

For example, if the winning hole detection switch installed in the winning hole detects that the switch is continuously turned on, it is determined that a ball jam has occurred, and the control is set to an error state and the production is performed. It performs a process of setting command information to cause the performance control board P41 to issue an error notification as a control command, and generates and requests output of signal data to notify an external device (such as a hall computer) of the occurrence of an error.

In addition, the switches to be detected in this process include a touch sensor switch provided on the handle P204 and a switch for detecting fraud, in order to determine whether it is caused by human operation or electrical noise. This also covers sensors that require on-data input for a certain period of time.

(Game status display processing)
The game status display process is a process that generates lighting data for displaying information regarding the progress of the game on the main control display device P50. Although it is called a display process, the output of display contents to the main control display device P50 is not performed by this process but by an LED output process to be described later. (Step 2036)

In the pachinko gaming machine P based on the premise, for example, an error indicator light (status indicator light P55) that indicates an error state, and a special symbol pending indicator light (special symbol 1 pending indicator light) that displays the number of pending special symbol drawings. Generate lighting data (lighting pattern) such as P61, special pattern 2 hold indicator light P62), normal symbol hold indicator light P63 that displays the number of holds related to the normal symbol lottery, and use it as data output in the LED output process. Store.

In addition, in the gaming state display process, if a blinking display is required for the LED indicator light whose lighting is controlled, the display switching counter for the corresponding LED is updated and the lighting pattern is switched by comparing the counter value and the threshold value. It will be done. For example, in the pachinko gaming machine P based on the premise, the number of special symbol drawings that can be reserved can be up to 4, but the special symbol retention indicator light is composed of two LED indicator lights (special symbol 1 retention indicator light P61 , each special figure 2 hold indicator light P62 has two LEDs), so if there are three or more hold numbers, at least one LED will display a blinking display instead of a continuous lighting display. It is designed to be done.

(Output port output processing)
The output port output process is a process that performs settings for transmitting signals related to game operations to the electric accessories that are operating devices on the game board P5 connected to the main control board P40, the payout control board P43, etc. (Step 2038)

More specifically, when the operation pattern of a normal electric accessory or a special electric accessory is set during normal symbol control processing or special electric accessory control processing, the normal electric accessory is Signal data for opening (or closing) each electric accessory is output to the accessory driving means P71 and the special electric accessory driving means P72 (solenoids in the pachinko game machine).

Further, a control signal (launch permission signal) for permitting or prohibiting the firing of game balls based on the player's handle operation is generated and outputted to the payout control board P43 by the output port output process. The output content of the firing permission signal is set depending on the communication state with the payout control board P43 and the occurrence of an error that requires stopping the game.

(Production control command transmission process)
The performance control command transmission process is a process of outputting a performance control command to the performance control board P41, and in the pachinko gaming machine P based on the premise, the performance control command is sent to the performance control board P41 only in the performance control command transmission process. The specification is to be transmitted (step 2040). In addition, regarding the setting of the production control command to be transmitted, it is set (set) in a predetermined storage area as an untransmitted production control command during other processing.

The premised Pachinko gaming machine P uses a storage area called a ring buffer that cyclically refers to a storage destination as an area for storing unsent performance control commands. In a storage area called a ring buffer, a "write pointer" and a "read pointer" that are updated by each process of writing (setting) a production control command and reading (sending) a production control command are used in the next process. It is designed to write and read production control commands using information for calculating the address of the storage area where the command is written and the address of the storage area where the command is read.

Furthermore, in the pachinko game machine P that is assumed, the production control command is composed of two data: MODE data indicating the type of command and EVENT data indicating the content of the command.

Returning to the explanation of the specific processing contents of the production control command transmission processing, the explanation will be given. In the performance control command transmission process, it is first checked whether the information of the write pointer and read pointer described above match, and if they match, it is determined that there is no performance control command to be transmitted and the process is terminated. On the other hand, if the data of the write pointer and the read pointer do not match, it is determined that there is an effect control command to be transmitted, and the process moves to the next process.

If it is determined that there is a production control command to be sent, MODE data and EVENT data are called from the address of the storage area of the main control board P40 calculated from the data of the read pointer, and are temporarily stored in the registers of the CPU of the main control board P40. After storing and clearing the production control command in the read destination ring buffer, the value of the read pointer is updated to the value to be used in the next process.

As production control commands, MODE data and EVENT data stored in the register of the main control board P40 will be transmitted P41 to the production control board in order. First, MODE data is set to the performance command output port which is an output port for transmitting a performance control command to the performance control board P41, and a strobe signal for causing the performance control board P41 to perform a reading operation is output. The main control board P40 will then output the EVENT data, but after performing processing with a waiting time of 26 μs in order to ensure a sufficient period for the production control board P41 to receive the MODE data, the MODE data will be output. As in the case of transmission, setting the EVENT data to the output port and outputting the strobe signal are performed. When the production control board P41 confirms the strobe signal, it generates a production control command reception interrupt and receives the production control command transmitted from the main control board P40.

(External information output processing)
External information output processing outputs information regarding the gaming status and security information such as error occurrences as signals from the external information output terminal 77 to external devices (data counters and hall computers) connected to the pachinko gaming machine P. (Step 2042). The signal output from the external information output terminal 77 is output based on the data set to the output port of the main control board P40, and when a signal output trigger occurs, a pulse signal that is an on-potential for a certain period of time is transmitted. There are some that continue to output an on-potential until a condition for ending signal output is met.

In the external information output process, first, a signal related to the gaming state is generated. In order to be able to identify the type of specific gaming state as a signal related to the gaming state, the pachinko gaming machine P assumes the operating state of the probability fluctuation function (probability state) and the operating state of the electric chew support function (base state). By referring to the corresponding information and the information indicating that a special game is in progress (big hit or small win), if the game is controlled in each game state, external output data is sent so that the corresponding data is transmitted. Update. In addition to the examples shown here, depending on the specifications of the gaming machine, an output signal may be generated based on information indicating the presence or absence of a variable time reduction function or information indicating a specific type of jackpot. There may be cases.

Further, as an output signal outputted in the external information output process, not only a signal related to the gaming state but also information based on the occurrence of a predetermined gaming result is outputted. For example, a signal (also called a "fixed symbol signal") that is sent each time a special symbol is displayed as a variable display and stopped, or a starting port switch (special pattern 1 starting port switch P712, special pattern 2 starting port switch 722) and the big winning opening switch P752, each time the entry of game balls into various winning openings is detected, or when the payout of prize balls based on balls entering into various winning openings reaches a predetermined number (for example, 10 balls). At each time, data is set in external output data, and there are signals sent to external equipment. These signals are mainly composed of pulse signals, and a signal of 1 is transmitted as a pulse signal with an ON potential of 128 ms, but if multiple gaming results occur in succession, After the output of the pulse signal is finished, after a certain period of off-potential output, the pulse signal is output again.

In addition, in the external signal output process, the data in the storage area that stores the error flag as a result of the confirmation in the abnormality detection process (step 2032) described above, and the comparison data for checking whether an error requiring security notification has occurred are used. If it is determined that it is necessary to output a security signal by calculating and comparing the two, the output data set in the output port is updated so that the bit corresponding to the security signal in the external output data is turned on.

(LED output processing)
The LED output process is a process for outputting data indicating a lighting pattern to a plurality of LEDs constituting the main control display device P50, causing the LEDs to emit light, and displaying the progress of the game and the game status. (Step 2044)

The LEDs constituting the main control display device P50 include a first special symbol display device P51 (8 LEDs), a second special symbol display device P52 (8 LEDs), a first special symbol hold indicator P61 (2 LEDs), and a second special symbol display device P52 (8 LEDs). Special symbol holding indicator P62 (2 LEDs), normal symbol display device P53 (2 LEDs), normal symbol holding indicator P63 (2 LEDs), round indicator light P54, status indicator P55, right-handed indicator light (total) It has a total of 32 LED display parts (8 LEDs).

In addition, the status indicator light P55 is a collective representation of indicator lights related to multiple gaming states, and in detail, the special pattern probability variation indicator light that indicates whether the probability variation function is activated or not, and the activation of the probability variation function of normal symbols. This refers to indicator lights such as the general pattern indicator light that indicates whether the electric chew support function is activated or not, and the error indicator light that indicates an error state.

In the LED output processing, the main control display device P50 is lit by setting the lighting data of the display unit in the main control display device by 1 byte to the output port for each interrupt processing, and is updated every interrupt processing. Based on the value of the digit counter, the LED of the main control display device P50 to be lit by the current interrupt is selected, the lighting pattern data corresponding to the gaming situation is selected, and the lighting pattern data is set as display data to control the lighting of each LED. It looks like this.

That is, in the pachinko gaming machine P based on the premise, the main control display device P50 is operated using a dynamic lighting method that sequentially outputs lighting data for 32 LEDs using at least four interrupt processes. It's in control.

In addition, in the LED output process, in addition to the LED display that the player should see as the main control display device P50, lighting control is performed only when the game stop flag is in a setting change state, a setting confirmation state, or an unrecoverable error state. It also controls the lighting of the LED display.

In addition, in the pachinko gaming machine P based on the premise, if a flag indicating some kind of game stop state is stored in the game stop flag, the setting of lighting pattern data for the main control display device P50 is omitted. , While changing the settings, checking the settings, or in the event of an unrecoverable error, the LEDs constituting the main control display device are all turned off. As a modified example, when setting the game stop flag, a fixed lighting pattern set for each state may be used to perform a light emitting display. For example, during a period when settings are being changed, the main control display device P50 The configuration may be such that all of the LEDs constituting the device are turned on.

(Outside area control processing)
The out-of-area control processing includes test signal output processing (processing for outputting signals used for pachinko gaming machine testing) and display on the performance display device. It is configured by a process that performs control (step 2046). The meaning of "outside the area" is that it is a process executed by a program in a storage area that is not included in the calculation of the capacity of the program storage area stipulated in the rules for pachinko gaming machines.

In the test signal output process, a process is performed in which information related to game results and game status to be output from the test terminal P78 of the pachinko game machine P to an external test device is set in the output port. In the performance display process, the game status is confirmed, the number of out balls is counted, the ratio (base) between the number of out balls and the number of prize balls is calculated, and the results are updated as display data and displayed on the performance display device P59. This is the process of outputting.

[Special design lottery]
Next, details of the special symbol lottery executed by the CPU of the main control board P40 will be explained using FIGS. 10 to 14. The "special symbol lottery" mainly consists of "win/fail lottery,""winning symbol lottery," and "variable pattern lottery."

(Win/fail lottery)
The "win/fail lottery" is a lottery that determines whether or not the special electric accessory P755 will be activated based on the result of the special symbol lottery to be executed.To explain more simply, the lottery result of the special symbol , is a lottery to determine whether it is a "big hit", "small hit", or "miss". Note that, depending on the specifications of the pachinko game machine P, there may be machines that do not have a "small win" as a lottery result of the win/fail lottery. In addition, when configured to have the first special symbol and the second special symbol, the lottery result of the winning lottery regarding one special symbol is a "small hit", and the lottery result of the winning lottery of the other special symbol is a "small hit". It may be configured so that there is no "hit".

Win/fail lottery uses random numbers called "win/fail random numbers" among the random numbers acquired and stored when a game ball enters a starting hole (first starting winning hole P711, second starting winning hole P721, etc.). A lottery will be held. In the pachinko game machine P based on the premise, the range of random numbers (random number range) that the random number can take is 65536 from "0" to "65535", and is composed of so-called 2-byte random numbers. When a win/fail lottery is held, the result of the win/fail lottery is determined by comparing the value of this random number with a lottery table (referred to as a "win/fail lottery table") used for the win/fail lottery depending on the gaming state and setting values. Perform processing.

FIG. 10 shows some examples of lottery tables used for the lottery. FIG. 10(A) shows a winning/failure lottery table in a setting value "1" and a low probability state, and FIG. 10(B) shows a winning/failing lottery table in a setting value "1" and a high probability state. (C) and (D) of FIG. 10 show the winning/failure lottery tables in the low probability state and the high probability state when the set value is "6", respectively.

For example, in a situation where a win/fail lottery is executed using the win/fail lottery table of FIG. 10(A), the win/fail random number in the current special symbol lottery is the random number corresponding to the first special symbol (special symbol 1), Assuming that the numerical value is "1500", the flow of the lottery will be explained.

First, it is determined whether or not the first lottery result belongs to the random number range of jackpot (from "0" to "327"). Specifically, a process is performed to subtract the random number range "328" of the jackpot to be determined from the random number "1500" of the current win/fail random number. At this time, the subtraction result is "1172" and is not a negative value, so it is determined that the current win/fail random number does not belong to the jackpot random number range.

As a subsequent process, a comparison is made between the random number value "1172" after the calculation of the previous jackpot determination and the random number range ("328" to "65370") of the loss as the determination area of the success/failure lottery result following the success/failure lottery table. . More specifically, the random value range "65043" of the judgment target is subtracted from the primary data "1172" of the success/failure random numbers. At this time, since the calculation result is a negative value, information corresponding to the "lost" result is stored as the win/fail lottery result.

If a special symbol lottery is carried out in a high probability state for the current winning/losing random number "1500", the lottery will be drawn on the winning/losing lottery table shown in Figure 10 (B), and the random number of the first jackpot will be drawn. It is determined whether it belongs to the range (from "0" to "1639"). At this time, the result of the comparison operation (subtraction) between the winning random number and the random value range is a negative value, so the winning lottery result is determined to be a "jackpot".

The pachinko gaming machine P that is based on this method employs a method of determining lottery results by sequentially comparing the data obtained as random numbers with the random number range corresponding to the lottery results of the lottery table. The same lottery method is adopted for the winning symbol lottery and the variable pattern lottery, which will be described later. Note that the lottery method is not limited to the above-mentioned example, and a method may be adopted in which it is directly determined whether the obtained random number matches the random number that will result in a jackpot, and different lottery methods may be used depending on the content of the lottery. may also be adopted.

(Winning design lottery)
The "winning symbol lottery" is based on the results of the winning/failing lottery of the special symbol lottery described above, and includes the control contents related to the subsequent operation of the special electric accessory P755 and the lottery table of the fluctuating pattern lottery (see Figs. 12 to 14). ) is a process of determining a stop display symbol of a special symbol as a lottery result necessary for switching.

FIG. 11 shows the jackpot symbol lottery table (see FIG. 11(A)) used in the winning symbol lottery when the winning lottery result is a "big hit" and the jackpot symbol lottery table used in the winning symbol lottery when the winning lottery result is a "small hit". , the small winning symbol lottery table used in the winning symbol lottery (see FIG. 11(B)), and the losing symbol lottery table used in the winning symbol lottery when the win/fail lottery result is "lost" (see FIG. 11(B)). C) is shown.

The "symbol random number" used for the winning symbol drawing has a random value range of "1000" (from "0" to "999"), and when expressed as 2-byte data, the upper 1 byte is " The data is expressed as ``0'' to ``3'', and the lower 1 byte is expressed as ``0'' to ``255''.

To explain the winning symbol lottery using a specific example, for example, when the winning lottery result is a jackpot, the first special when the symbol random number is "400" (upper byte is "1", lower byte is "144") In the case of a winning symbol lottery for symbols, use the lottery table of the upper 1 byte "1" shown in FIG. will be obtained as a lottery result, and in the variable display of special symbols, the "5R Kokuhen 2" symbol will be displayed as a stop display symbol on the first special symbol display device P51 (in the case of the second special symbol lottery, the second special symbol display device P52) is stopped and displayed.

Then, when the "5R probability variation 2" symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display device P51, a jackpot game corresponding to the "5R probability variation 2" symbol will be executed. At this time, each of the 5 rounds of the jackpot game is divided into the case where "5R probability change 2" is displayed as a stop display symbol and the case where "5R probability change 1" is displayed as a stop display symbol on the first special symbol display device. The content of the round game (opening pattern and opening time of the big winning opening P751, etc.) may be varied based on the stop display symbol, and the control content in the specific gaming state to which the jackpot game transitions after the jackpot game may be controlled to be different. It is possible. The assignment of control in these jackpot games and specific game states is determined as appropriate for each pachinko game machine P to realize gaming performance according to the specifications, and a detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

Note that the pachinko gaming machine P used as the premise is described so as to display symbols grouped by type of jackpot through the lottery shown in FIG. 11(A). After determining the type of jackpot called ``5R Guaranteed Variation 2'', the type of jackpot is determined by performing another lottery from multiple patterns to determine the stop display symbol that will execute the jackpot of the corresponding type. , the winning symbol lottery may be performed in two steps: determination of the stop display symbol and determination of the stop display symbol.

In addition, in the pachinko gaming machine P based on the premise, as shown in FIG. , the types of winning symbols that can be determined are different. More specifically, in the pachinko gaming machine P based on the premise, there is an increased possibility that "10R probability change 5" or "10R probability change 8" will be determined in the jackpot of the second special symbol, and It can be said that the specification is such that it is easier to win a jackpot with a large number of rounds than with a winning symbol lottery, and it is easier to win a jackpot that causes a transition to a high probability/high base state as a specific gaming state.

FIG. 11(B) shows an example of a small winning symbol lottery table. The small hit symbol lottery table is a table that is referenced in the winning symbol lottery when the result of the special symbol lottery is a "small win", and the lottery method is the same as the above-mentioned jackpot symbol lottery table. It is similar to

In the small winning symbol lottery table shown in FIG. 11(B), most of the winning symbols are "small winning 1" symbols, and if the winning result of the second special symbol is "small winning". ``Small win 2'' can be determined in a part of the game. Note that there may be one type of small winning symbol, or it may be configured such that three or more types of symbols can be determined.

An example of the purpose of providing multiple small winning symbols as in the pachinko game machine P that is based on the premise is to increase the number of game balls that can be obtained by simply changing the opening mode of the big winning opening P751 during a small winning game. For example, in a pachinko game machine P that adopts small win V as the gaming machine specification, in order to distinguish between small win games where it is easy to win V in a specific area and small win games where it is difficult to win V in a specific area. Examples of the purpose include differentiating the small winning symbols or differentiating the small winning symbols in order to separate the type of specific game to be transferred to after the execution of the jackpot game after winning a V prize. In addition, "a small winning game that makes it easy to win a V prize" and "a small winning game that makes it difficult to win a V prize" refer to the opening/closing member P761 (which is a structure for changing the ease of passing with respect to a "specific area"). This is achieved by sorting the flow paths by the action of the valve member). Specifically, (1) during the small winning game, the big winning hole P751 is opened multiple times (for example, opening for 0.1 seconds 10 times), and the first big winning hole P751 during the small winning game is opened for 10 times. Immediately after the opening starts (for example, 0.1 seconds after the first opening of the big prize opening P751), the opening/closing member P761 (valve member) switches to the flow path that guides to the specific area, and the big winning opening during the small winning game. Immediately after the last opening of the winning opening P751 ends (for example, 0.1 seconds after the 10th opening of the big winning opening P751 is completed and closed) or a predetermined number of 10 pieces will be a small hit. Immediately after the opening of the current grand prize opening (any of the 1st to 10th times) is forcibly ended by entering a ball during a game and it is closed (for example, any of the 1st to 10th times of the grand prize opening P751) A small winning game in which the opening/closing member P761 (valve member) switches to a downstream path that does not lead to the specific area side 0.1 seconds after the opening is completed and closed) is a "small winning game that is easy to win V". It is. In other words, if the player continues to fire game balls toward the big winning hole P751, the probability that all 10 balls, which are the predetermined number of balls, will land in the big winning hole P751 is high. A small winning game in which the probability of at least one of the 10 balls passing through a specific area is approximately 100% is a "small winning game where it is easy to win a V prize". On the other hand, (2) during the small winning game, the big winning hole P751 is opened once (for example, opening for 0.2 seconds once), and the first opening of the big winning hole P751 during the small winning game is After a long time has passed since the start (for example, 5 seconds after the opening of the big prize opening P751 starts once), the opening/closing member P761 (valve member) switches to the flow path that guides to the specific area side, and 0.1 from the switching. A small winning game in which the opening/closing member P761 (valve member) switches to a downstream path that does not lead to the specific area side after a second is a "small winning game in which it is difficult to win a V prize." In other words, even if the player continues to fire game balls toward the grand prize opening P751, the probability that all 10 balls, which are the predetermined number of balls, will not enter the grand prize opening P751 is approximately 100. %, and even if some game balls enter the big prize opening P751, the probability of them not passing through a specific area is approximately 100%. It is a game.

FIG. 11(C) shows an example of a losing symbol lottery table. The winning symbol lottery table is a table that is referred to in the winning symbol lottery when the result of the special symbol lottery is "losing", and the lottery method is the jackpot symbol lottery described above regarding the first special symbol. It is the same as the table, but the second special symbol is a different method.

More specifically, FIG. 11(C) shows only the winning symbol lottery table for the first special symbol, and in the pachinko gaming machine P based on the premise, the winning symbol lottery table is the first special symbol. Only in this case, a lottery process is performed and either "miss 1" or "miss 2" is determined as the stop display symbol.

The "miss 2" symbol is a missed symbol that has a probability of winning approximately 6.4% when the first special symbol is a miss, and if "miss 2" is won, it is likely to become a reach in the fluctuating pattern lottery. It is configured to make it easier to determine the fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time) by referring to a special lottery table (not shown). For this reason, the "missing 2" is sometimes referred to as a "missing reach symbol."

In addition, the pachinko gaming machine P that is based on the premise does not have a losing symbol lottery table for the second special symbol, and a losing symbol of 1 is determined no matter what the random symbol number is. The table comparison process itself is omitted, and it is configured to memorize the losing symbol of 1. It should be noted that a lottery table in which one symbol always wins may be used, and a configuration may be made such that a missed symbol wins.

(Fluctuating pattern lottery)
The "fluctuation pattern lottery" is a process of determining by lottery the variable display time until the stop display symbol, which is the lottery result of the special symbol, is stopped and displayed. In the pachinko gaming machine P based on the premise, the special symbol is displayed in the special symbol lottery as the performance time necessary for the performance display device P80 to notify whether there is a jackpot or not, and if it is a jackpot, what type of jackpot it is. A process is performed to determine the variable display time of , using a variation pattern table described later.

FIG. 12 mainly shows a normal game state (low probability/medium low base) and a low base state (non-electronic chew support state), that is, in a pachinko game machine P based on the premise, a game ball is fired to the left area P501L of the game board. It represents the ``Low Base Medium Variation Pattern Lottery Table'' in a state where it is recommended.

The "ID" shown in FIG. 12 represents information stored as a result of the variable pattern lottery, and the "variable pattern" is displayed on the effect display device P80 when the same ID is won. A representative example of the manner in which fluctuations are produced is shown. "Variation time" is the variable display time value of the special symbol in the result of the target variation pattern lottery (variation pattern ID), and represents the time from when the special symbol is displayed in a variable manner until it is stopped and displayed.

In Figure 12, "1 variation" to "4 variation" indicate the number of reservations in situations where the special symbol lottery execution conditions are met, and the winning lottery result is "lost" and the target special symbol (here In this case, when there are N reserved balls of the first special symbol), a variable pattern lottery is executed using the variable pattern table of "Hold N Variation". That is, the variation pattern lottery of the first special symbol in the low base state is configured to use different variation pattern tables depending on the number of reservations. In addition, if a game ball enters the starting prize opening in a state where there is no hold, it will be temporarily stored as a hold in the process, so a variable pattern lottery will be executed using the change pattern table of "1st change". Ru.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 12, the variable pattern lottery corresponding to the second special symbol is independent of the number of reservations, and is configured to use a common lottery table regardless of the number of reservations. Although it is not shown, if the result of the symbol lottery is determined to be "missing 2 (a symbol that is out of reach)", even if it is a variation pattern lottery of the first special symbol, the variation of 1 does not depend on the number of reservations. It is configured to perform a variable pattern lottery using a pattern table (variable pattern table for losing 2).

“10R Probable Variable”, “5R Probable Variable”, “10R Normal”, and “5R Normal” in FIG. 12 indicate the variation pattern table used for the variation pattern lottery at the time of jackpot in the low base state, and the winning/failure lottery results. represents a "big hit", and a lottery is performed by selecting an appropriate variable pattern table depending on which symbol is the symbol lottery result. In FIG. 12, since the second special symbol is not the main character of the game in the low base state, the jackpot fluctuation pattern table is expressed in a manner that does not depend on the jackpot symbol, but the jackpot of the second special symbol is also , there may be multiple patterns depending on the type of jackpot.

Here, a specific example of the fluctuation pattern lottery in the low base state will be described using FIG. 12. As a specific example, in the lottery of the first special symbol, the variation pattern random number is "30000", and the number of reserved balls at the start of variation is 3 (the number of reserved balls is 2 after the start of variation). We will explain the winning/failure lottery results and the situation where the winning symbol lottery results in "loss 1".

First, since the number of reservations at the start of fluctuation is "3", a fluctuation pattern table of "hold 3 fluctuation" is used. The lottery process is similar to the lottery process in the win/fail lottery described above, and a comparison operation (subtraction) is performed between the fluctuating pattern random number and the random number range corresponding to the fluctuating pattern ID of each lottery result, and it is determined whether the random number belongs to the same range. do. By performing this process, at the timing of normal fluctuation B of ID "2", the result of repeating the comparison calculation between the fluctuation pattern random number and the random value range becomes a negative value, and the same ID is determined as the fluctuation pattern lottery, and the special After a 7-second variable display is performed as a variable display of symbols, a missed symbol 1 will be displayed on the first special symbol display device P51.

Next, the fluctuation pattern table in the high base state will be explained using FIG. 13. The structure of the fluctuation pattern table in the high base state is symmetrical to the fluctuation pattern table in the low base state shown in FIG. 12, and the fluctuation pattern at the time of failure depends on the number of reservations for the second special symbol. The table is configured to have a table for each jackpot symbol at the time of jackpot. Note that although FIGS. 12 and 13 are structured so that many fluctuation patterns can be determined in common, this is also for the purpose of simplifying the explanation; It is also possible to configure the variation patterns to have only a small number of overlaps, or to have no overlap at all.

In addition, as a feature of the fluctuation pattern table in the high base state, the lottery results of the second special symbol "Hold 3 fluctuation" and "Hold 4 fluctuation" in the case of a miss will be the shortest fluctuation time of the pachinko gaming machine P that is assumed. The configuration is such that a 2-second fluctuation (fluctuation pattern ID "12") can be determined.

Furthermore, as a feature of the fluctuation pattern in the high base state, the 10 second fluctuation of the fluctuation pattern ID "4" is always determined for the lottery of the first special symbol. The reason for configuring the first special symbol with a 10-second variation is that the player's profit in the event of a jackpot is large (the expected value of the balls obtained is high due to the large number of execution rounds) in the jackpot symbol lottery table shown in Figure 11. This is due to the fact that there are many jackpot symbols that shift to a probability variable state as a specific game state), and by giving priority to and performing a large number of variable displays corresponding to the second special symbol, it is possible to create a jackpot that is more advantageous to the player. The purpose is to make it possible to obtain. In addition, even if there is almost no difference in the advantageous degree of the jackpot game between the first special symbol and the second special symbol, the first special symbol is It is easy to avoid displaying fluctuations, and it is easy to maintain the hold that was established in the normal gaming state (low base state) until the end of the specific gaming state (high base state), which is an advantageous state, and the second Another purpose is to avoid requiring a large amount of game balls to generate the reservation of the first special symbol in a low base state compared to the amount of game balls used to generate the reservation of the special symbol.

FIG. 14 is a diagram showing a special table for a limited period, and represents a special fluctuation pattern table that is referred to during a specific period. In FIG. 14, as an example of the special fluctuation pattern table provided in the pachinko game machine P, three periods of special fluctuation pattern tables are comprehensively shown.

More specifically, FIG. 14 shows the period from the 1st change to the 4th change after a jackpot (a jackpot is achieved with 4 reservations that exist at the time of a jackpot, so-called "retention series" (retention in the reservation)) The "on-hold consecutive winning table" (targets IDs "51" and "71") that is referred to in the period) and the reach fluctuation that is referred to from the nth to mth fluctuation after the jackpot and is 55 seconds are likely to be selected. It is referenced in the high frequency reach table (targeting IDs "52", "53", "54", and "72") and the last fluctuation display of the high base state, and is mainly used to execute the "result effect" described below. It is shown that the ``result variation table'' (targeting IDs ``55'' and ``73'') is provided in the assumed Pachinko gaming machine P.

A special fluctuation pattern table that is referred to in a limited period in this way is referred to as a "special fluctuation pattern table" or "limited frequency (pattern table)."

The pachinko game machine P based on the premise is configured such that the reference period of the limited frequency pattern table can be referenced during a predetermined period after a jackpot game (the activation of a special electric accessory, in other words, the operation of the accessory continuous operation device). are doing. Regarding these reference periods, it is possible to change whether or not to refer to them depending on the type of jackpot (jackpot symbol). It is also possible to configure them to be different. What kind of special fluctuation pattern table to refer to in any situation can be set appropriately for each pachinko gaming machine, and is not limited to the example shown, but the details should be explained in a separate description if necessary. shall be.

Next, the control of the performance control board P41 that controls the performance operation in the pachinko gaming machine P will be explained. In addition, the operation control of the performance control board P41 has fewer restrictions on the type test of the gaming machine and has a higher degree of freedom in design than the control of the main control board P40, so it will be explained in the following explanation. The present invention is not limited to only the processing, and the timing at which the processing is performed can also be changed as appropriate.

[Power-on processing of production control board ~ Main loop processing]
In the pachinko game machine P that is assumed, when the power of the game machine is turned on, the power-on process (step 4000) is executed in the CPU of the performance control board P41. Here, details of the power-on process of the production control board P41 will be explained with reference to FIG. 15.

When power-on processing (step 4000) is started in the production control board P41 of the pachinko gaming machine P, which is the premise, initial setting processing related to the operation of the CPU, which is a calculation device provided on the production control board P41, is performed. (Step 4002). The initial setting process is to make the necessary settings for the subsequent operation of the CPU, and although the details are omitted, regarding the performance that was being executed when the power was cut off last time, the settings on the main control board P40. Since there is a time difference between the completion of the power-on process (Fig. 7) and the power-on process of the production control board (Fig. 15), if the production returns to the one before the power cut after the power is restored, the operation of the main control board P40 and Because there is a possibility that deviations may occur, in the initial processing when the performance control board P41 returns from a power outage, the performance information etc. are often initialized so that the performance that was being executed before the power outage will not be executed (" (referred to as "control board reset" or "sub-reset").

(Main loop of production control board)
In the pachinko game machine P that is assumed, the process shifts to the main loop process after the initial setting process. In the pachinko game machine P based on the premise, the period (frame) for drawing the effect image on the image control board P42 connected to the effect display device P80 (image display device) is set to 1 so that the effect image is drawn 30 times per second. Since the cycle is set to approximately 33 ms (30 FPS), the main loop processing loop is configured to be performed once at a cycle of 16 ms, which is approximately half the cycle (steps 4002 to 4016).

In the main loop processing of the performance control board P41, first, clearing processing of the watchdog timer for detecting runaway of the CPU is performed (step 4004).

Subsequently, a process (step 4006) is performed to update the performance control random number data, and various performance control random numbers to be used when an opportunity to execute the performance lottery occurs.

Next, input port monitoring processing is executed (step 4008). The pachinko gaming machine P used as the premise is designed to monitor the input port even during interrupt processing of the performance control board P41, which will be described later, but the input port monitoring processing in the main loop processing is a 16 ms cycle monitoring process. Therefore, monitoring is limited to inputs such as switches, which are monitoring targets necessary for the system, and monitoring of inputs such as sensors necessary for performance control of the performance movable accessory P560 is omitted. In addition, as a modification, regarding the sensors that should be monitored for performance purposes, confirmation may be performed in the input port monitoring process within the main loop process.

Similar to the main control board's input port confirmation process, the input port monitoring process includes generating and storing level data from input data from various sensors, and storing rising (falling) data. be done.

Subsequently, the production control board P41 performs production device control processing (step 4010) and executes control regarding production operations other than the production display device P80 (image display). The production devices controlled in this process include lamps P82 ("board lamp (P550)" and "frame lamp (P350)"), speakers P83 (upper speaker P370, lower speaker 141), production movable accessories P560, etc. A performance operation command corresponding to the performance content determined to be executed by processing such as a performance control process (step 4012), which will be described later, is transmitted to each performance device to cause the performance device to execute the performance operation.

This is because the output of performance operation commands to various performance devices in the performance device control process (step 4010) needs to be executed (started) in synchronization with the performance image displayed on the performance display device P80 (image display device). , the reception of a signal transmitted at regular intervals from the image control board P42 controlling the performance display device P80 to the performance control board P41, or a signal for forced synchronization (the input port monitoring process described above) (reception)), synchronization with the performance switching timing of the performance display device P80 is achieved, and performance operation commands are outputted to various performance devices.

In addition, regarding the operation control of the performance movable accessory P560 of the performance device, since the drive means of the performance movable accessory P560 needs to be controlled in a shorter cycle, the performance set in this process is Regarding the operation pattern of the performance movable accessory P560 to be executed in accordance with the operation command, sensor monitoring and operation switching are also executed during interrupt processing of the performance control board P41 (see FIG. 16), which will be described later.

Next, the production control process (step 4012) executed in the main loop process of the production control board P41 will be explained. The performance control process includes flags established based on the results of analyzing the performance control command received from the main control board P40 in the performance control command analysis process described later, and information on the received performance control command itself (such as the lottery result ID of the special symbol lottery) ), input port monitoring processing (step 4008), interrupt processing (FIG. 16), and other processing, based on flags established during other processing, to determine the content of the production to be executed by various production devices by drawing or selecting. It is.

The performance control process selects a performance determination process to be executed based on each flag information and command analysis information, and calls and executes a corresponding submodule process for performance determination. As an example of the production contents determined here, a process of determining a variation production corresponding to one variation of the special symbol based on commands related to the execution result of the special symbol lottery (win/fail command, symbol command, variation pattern command) (Processing that determines the content of notices, reach, decorative symbols to stop, etc.), and pre-reading effects for newly generated holds based on the number of holds and advance judgment information that are sent when a hold occurs Pre-read lottery processing that determines whether or not to execute a special game (also called "pre-determined performance"), and determines the content of the performance during a special game based on information sent as a performance control command when executing a special game (big hit or small win) There is a special game performance content determination process.

In addition, the production control processing includes not only processing for production control commands sent from the main control board P40, but also processing for determining error display contents when an error is detected on the production control board P41 (error display sent from the main control board P41). (including determination processing of error display contents based on information), adjustment of the volume output from the speaker P83 based on input operations by the player using the performance operation means P81 such as the performance button P381 and cross key P383, and the adjustment of the volume output from the speaker P83, and the lamp P82. It also executes the determination of performance contents, such as light intensity adjustment to change the luminance of light emitted from the display, and customization of performance contents and performance content determination trends.

Furthermore, since specifications unique to each gaming machine are often used for the determination processing of various performance contents performed in the submodule processing called in the performance control processing, the explanation is omitted and is the subject of the invention. When a characteristic process is executed in the pachinko game machine P, the details will be explained in the description of the embodiment of the pachinko game machine P that is the subject of the invention.

Returning to the explanation of the main loop processing of the production control board, production control command analysis processing (step 4014) will be explained as the last processing of the main loop processing.

The performance control command analysis process is based on information stored as a performance control command transmitted from the main control board P40, and analyzes information corresponding to the performance control command to be used for determining the content of the performance in the performance control process described above. memory and set flags. In this process, it is necessary to determine the processing content according to the command sent from the main control board P40, and the processing content is determined from the contents of the MODE data and EVENT data, which are the production control commands, and then according to the production control command. The specified processing is executed.

Note that one command (MODE data and EVENT data) may be sent every time the main control board P40 interrupts processing (every 4ms), so in the Pachinko gaming machine P that is assumed, the performance control command is Until the period (16 ms) of the main loop processing of the board P41 has elapsed, analysis of the production control command is repeatedly executed as much as possible (step 4016).

[Interrupt processing of production control board]
Next, the interrupt processing executed in the CPU of the production control board P41 will be explained. The interrupt process in the production control board P41 is different from the interrupt process in the main control board, and includes a plurality of interrupt processes that are started at different execution timings (see FIGS. 16(A) and (B)). Note that priorities are set for these multiple interrupt processes, and if an interrupt with a higher priority occurs, the higher interrupt process will be executed even while the interrupt process is being executed. controlled by. In this description, the production control timer interrupt process (FIG. 16(A)) and production control command reception interrupt (FIG. 16(B)) will be representatively explained.

(Production control timer interrupt processing)
The production control timer interrupt process (FIG. 16(A)) is an interrupt process that is executed at a 1 ms cycle in the CPU of the production control board P41.

The port input/output process (step 5002) is the input of the sensor provided for detecting the position of the performance movable accessory P560 and other sensors (input sensor of the performance operation means P81) from the input port of the performance control board P41. From the process of generating and storing level data and rise data, and from the output port, driving the drive means (solenoid, stepping motor, etc.) of the performance movable accessory P560 according to the operation pattern set in the performance device control process. Processing to output a signal is executed. Furthermore, when data is output from the output port, data in a counter (storage area) that counts the number of outputs is updated if necessary.

The timer update process (step 5004) is a process of subtracting or adding a timer that measures the switching timing of performance operations. When the update processing for each timer is completed, a comparison calculation is performed with the comparison value, it is determined whether or not a switching condition for the production operation has occurred, and information necessary for determining the content of the production is used in the production control process (step 4012). Performs processing to store the flag in the storage area.

The sensor monitoring process (step 5006) uses the sensor detection data generated in the port input/output process to collect sensor detection information related to the switching of the performance operation, such as whether the performance operation switching condition of the performance movable accessory P560 is satisfied. It is determined whether or not this has occurred, and a process is performed to switch the table of motion patterns, and a process is performed to set a condition flag for determining the content of the performance in the performance control process (step 4012).

The production button monitoring process (step 5008) is a process of determining whether or not a production switching condition is satisfied based on inputs from the production button P381, lever P382, cross key P383, etc., which are production operation means P81. In the production button monitoring process, production is performed based on the level data and rise data (data indicating that the level data has changed from OFF to ON this time) that indicates the input status of each input device generated in the port input/output processing (step 5002). It is determined whether or not the operation means P81 is operated and the mode of operation.

For example, if rising data is generated as input information to the production operation means P81, it is assumed that there has been a player operation on the production operation means P81, and information such as a flag for executing the corresponding production is stored. . Note that if the input is judged only based on the rising data, there is a possibility that electrical noise will cause false detection and switching of the performance operation, so it is necessary to input level data (on data) multiple times after the rising data is generated. It may be determined that a player's operation (sometimes expressed as a "single push (single pull) operation" or "single blow operation") is performed on the performance operation means P81 based on the successive operations.

In addition, if the level data of ON input is detected 500 times in a row, that is, if it is determined that the production operation means P81 has been operated for 0.5 seconds, it is determined that it is a "long press (long press)" operation, It is configured to be treated as a special operation. In addition, falling data (data indicating that the level data has changed from the previous on to the current off) may be detected as electrical noise when determining whether or not to continue the "long press" operation. In this case, as well as the measures to prevent false detection described above, after detecting falling data, input of "long press (long press)" operation is performed based on the detection of multiple inputs of level data (off data). It may also be used to determine termination.

In the pachinko gaming machine P that is based on the premise, depending on the content of the performance being executed, the performance operation means can be activated once every fixed period (for example, every 0.3 seconds) by performing a "long press" operation on the performance button P381. It is possible to repeatedly perform a process that assumes that there is a "single press (single pull)" input operation on page 81, and in this way, when a special operation such as a "long press (long pull)" operation is triggered, The process of repeatedly executing a process by assuming that a "single press" operation has been performed is called an "auto multiple press" operation. In addition, the "auto continuous hit" operation is not limited to the exemplified operation contents, but can also be performed by simultaneously operating multiple production operation means P81, or by turning on and off a dip switch provided as a switch different from the production button. It is also possible to adopt a method in which it is assumed that the "auto continuous hit" operation has been executed based on the input of the production button P381.

Note that, depending on the execution status of the performance, input to the performance operation means P81 has a period of time treated as a valid operation ("operation valid period") and a period of time treated as an invalid operation ("operation invalid period").

The multitasking process (step 5010) is based on the value of the task counter (updated between values "0" and "15"), which is updated every time the production control timer interrupt process is executed. This is a process that differs in the content of the process executed during the timer interrupt process. The task counter is configured to circulate at a cycle of 16 ms, and the process at each counter value is executed approximately in synchronization with one cycle of main loop processing. As an example of processing in each task, it is determined whether or not the operation of the image control board P42 can be executed based on a signal sent from the image control board P42 (input information is generated by port input/output processing), and A process of monitoring the operating status of the control board P42 is performed.

The image control command transmission process (step 5012) sends an image control command ("inter-sub command") to the CPU of the image control board P42 in order to display an image according to the effect determined in the effect control process P41. This is the process of transmitting the image control board P42 to the CPU of the image control board P42. In addition, although the image control board P42 and the effect control board P41 may be comprised by the same board|substrate, it is described as the image control board P42 in this specification for convenience.

In the pachinko gaming machine P based on the premise, the production control board P41 configures the image control commands into a first command indicating the type of display content and a second command specifying the pattern of the display content, and sends them to the image control board P42. It is configured to send.

Note that the pachinko gaming machine P based on the premise is configured to transmit image control commands in the production control timer interrupt processing, but there is a separate procedure for transmitting and receiving commands between the production control board P41 and the image control board P42. It is also possible to configure so that transmission and reception can be performed by providing interrupt processing.

(Production control command reception interrupt)
In the effect control command reception interrupt (FIG. 16(B)), a strobe signal is output in the effect control command transmission process (step 2040) during the interrupt process (FIG. 9) of the main control board P40, and the strobe signal is sent to the effect control board. This is an interrupt process that is generated when P41 is received.

When the production control board P41 starts the production control command reception interrupt, it reads the production control command (MODE data or EVENT data) transmitted from the output port of the main control board P40, updates and stores the temporary buffer data (step 5502, step 5504).

When the update of the temporary buffer data is completed, it is determined whether reception of one effect control command (combination of MODE data and EVENT data) has been completed (step 5506). In addition, in the production control command transmitted from the main control board P40, specific bits of 1-byte data are composed of "1" and "0".

When updating the temporary buffer data (2-byte data storage area) in step 5504 described above, the process of storing the content of the currently received production control command in the lower 1-byte storage area is normally performed. At this time, if a specific bit part of the lower 1 byte of the current temporary buffer data storage area indicates MODE data before updating, the storage data of the temporary buffer data is shifted to the upper 1 byte storage area. After that, the currently received EVENT data is stored in the lower 1-byte storage area of the temporary buffer data.

In determining the completion of reception of the production control command in step 5506, it is determined whether a specific bit of the lower 1 byte of the temporary buffer data is data indicating EVENT data, and it is determined that it is EVENT data. In this case, the reception of the first production control command is completed (step 5506 YES) and the process proceeds to the next step. If it is determined that the reception is MODE data (step 5506 NO), the EVENT data is transmitted from the main control board P40. Until a strobe signal based on is received, exit the production control command reception interrupt, perform other processing, and wait.

In step 5506, when it is determined that the reception of the production control command is completed, it is determined whether the sent production control command is normal (step 5508). This process is determined, for example, based on whether matching data exists in the list data of production control commands that can be transmitted from the main control board P40. If it is determined that it is a normal command, it is stored in a storage area for storing the received performance control command so as to be analyzed in the performance control command analysis process during the performance control timer interrupt process, If the data is abnormal, the temporary buffer data is discarded.

[Example of basic image display]
Next, with reference to FIGS. 17 to 20, the basic performance in the pachinko gaming machine P will be explained. FIG. 17 is a diagram showing the symbol variation display (during the stop display of decorative symbols) during a normal game (low probability/low base), and FIG. 18 is a diagram showing a reach effect with high expectations for a jackpot. FIG. FIG. 19 is a diagram showing a state in which a jackpot game is being executed, and FIG. 20 is a diagram showing a game effect during operation of the electric chew support function in a specific game state (high probability or low probability/high base). This is a diagram.

(Example of display in normal game mode) 《Decorative pattern》
FIG. 17 is a diagram showing symbol variation display (during stop display of decorative symbols) during a normal game (low probability/low base). Three numbers are displayed in a substantially central area of the screen in a manner that is clearly visible to the player. These three designs are called "decorative designs (P801)" (also called "decorative designs"), and are decorative displays that are displayed in response to the results of the special design lottery. The display changes depending on the display. Although the numbers are expressed only in numbers in FIG. 17, each number may be displayed with a decorative image such as a character image. Further, in the case where each number is displayed with a decorative image, the display mode of the decorative image and each number may be changed depending on the game state. With such a configuration, it becomes easier for the player to determine the current gaming state.

The decorative pattern P801 is displayed in a variable manner as one performance for each special pattern variable display (one special symbol lottery), except when a special performance is performed. Although not shown, when the decorative pattern P801 is displayed in a variable manner, the decorative pattern is displayed in a high-speed variable manner (transparent display or non-display depending on the case), and " A performance called "notice" is performed to heighten the expectation of acquiring the right to the jackpot game.

The decorative patterns P801 shown in FIG. 17 are scrolled in the vertical direction (from top to bottom) when the variable display starts, and then the left pattern (P801a), the right pattern (P801c), and the middle pattern (P801b) are displayed. For each symbol row, the stop display symbols determined by the production control board P41 are stopped and displayed. Generally, when three decorative patterns P801 are stopped and displayed in the same manner (in a row), it is visually announced that a jackpot has been won. In addition, a state in which one symbol is displayed in a variable manner while another symbol is displayed, for example, the left symbol P801b, which is the symbol to stop last (also referred to as the "final stop symbol"), stops. The state in which the right and right symbols are displayed as the same symbol (temporarily stopped display) is called "reach" ("reach state", "reach mode").

The fluctuating display of the decorative pattern P801 is often displayed in a scrolling manner in the vertical direction (from top to bottom), but the manner in which the fluctuating display is not limited to the vertical direction, but also in the horizontal direction and depth, It may be possible to perform a scrolling display operation in the (diagonal) direction, or it may be possible to perform a rotation operation on the spot without scrolling and to sequentially switch and display the display.

Further, the decorative pattern P801 may be stopped and displayed a plurality of times during one variable display of the special pattern. At this time, when the stop display is displayed multiple times, the stop display indicating the result of the special lottery is a stop display that is displayed at the same time as the stop display symbol of the special symbol is stopped and displayed on the special symbol display device. A stop display at a timing other than that is referred to as a "temporary stop (display)." In addition, the stop display of the special symbol and the stop display at the same time may be expressed as "main stop".

When the decorative pattern P801 is temporarily stopped, in order to distinguish it from the final pattern stop display (main stop), the decorative pattern P801 is not completely fixed, but is temporarily stopped to the extent that it cannot be recognized as fixed. It is configured to be able to rotate, move in directions such as up and down or left and right, and swing around a single rotation axis. In addition to temporary stoppage, such a state is sometimes expressed as "shaking fluctuation."

After the decorative pattern P801 is temporarily stopped and displayed, it may repeat the fluctuation display again, and generally, the re-fluctuation from the state where the symbols other than the jackpot symbol are temporarily stopped is called a "pseudo fluctuation (pseudo series)" effect. , A re-variation in which the jackpot symbol that is stopped and displayed after the jackpot symbol has stopped is called a "promotion (variation)" performance. In addition, when performing the promotion performance, it may be configured not to change to a jackpot symbol that is more disadvantageous than the stopped jackpot symbol, or to not change to a losing symbol.

In addition, when the decorative pattern P801 is stopped and displayed, there is a type of special decorative pattern that is not displayed during normal fluctuating display and is displayed only when executing some effects, and this is called "special decoration pattern". (P804)" (special symbol). Each special design has a meaning, for example, it suggests that a specific jackpot will be executed, it suggests that the above-mentioned pseudo-variable effect will be performed, or it indicates a specific reach effect (reach mode). Examples include things that suggest that a preview effect (not shown) will be executed. When using a special symbol, the special symbol may be temporarily stopped as a decorative symbol (middle symbol P801b) that is temporarily stopped at the end, or a single symbol that substitutes for all of the left symbol P801a, middle symbol P801b, and right symbol P801c may be used. A special pattern may be temporarily stopped as a decorative pattern.

《Simple layout (mini layout)》
At the top right of the screen, three numbers are displayed in the same manner as the decorative pattern P801. This design is also called a "simple design (P802)"("simpledesign") or "mini design", and like the above-mentioned "decorative design", it shows the lottery result of the special design in accordance with the fluctuating display of the special design. Displayed as a display object.

Unlike the "decorative design", the simple design P802 (mini design) differs from the "decorative design" in that even if a special effect is performed in which the decorative design P801 does not stop and display, the special design indicating the result of the special lottery is a special design. In line with the display on the display devices P51 and P52, a stop display is always performed once for each special symbol lottery.

In addition, the variable display of the simplified drawing P802 may be configured to form the same ready-to-reach mode when the above-mentioned decorative symbol P801 becomes a ready-to-reach mode, or may be configured to notify the result of a special symbol lottery. In order to achieve the minimum objective, even if a simple method of variable display is adopted, such as constant display switching of the special symbol until the variable display of the special symbol reaches a stopped display state, regardless of the decorative symbol P801. good.

《Hold display area》
A reservation display area P810 is provided in the lower area of FIG. 17 . In the reservation display area P810, a reservation object P811 corresponding to a reservation (random value) corresponding to an unexercised right is displayed as a special symbol lottery right acquired by the player. The example in FIG. 17 shows a state in which three special symbol lottery rights are reserved.

In the example of FIG. 17, the earlier the special symbol lottery is executed (that is, the earlier the reservation occurs), the closer to the center of the lower screen the display is, and the reservation display area P810 The display position of the held object located on the rightmost side is called "Hold 1 (display area)", and as you move towards the left side of the screen, "Hold 2 (display area)", "Hold 3 (display area)", and "Hold 4 ( display area).

Further, near the right side of the pending display area P810, an object having substantially the same aspect as the pending object P811 in the pending display area P810 is displayed at a higher position and in a larger size than the pending object P811. This display area continues to display the pending display corresponding to the random number that triggered the start of the current special symbol variable display from the pending display area, and is referred to as the "variable object display area (P812)". . Further, the object displayed in the relevant variable object display area P812 is called the "relevant variable object (P813)", but may also be referred to as the "relevant pending display", and is differentiated from the pending object P811 in the pending display area P810. For this reason, we use the acronym "applicable."

Note that the display mode of the variable object P813 in the variable object display area P812 does not need to be configured completely the same as that of the pending object P811, and the pending display that is present upon the start of variation is moved and displayed in the variable object display area P812. In some cases, the shape may change or disappear (not be displayed). Further, the variable object P813 may also be configured so that the display mode can change in the same way as the pending display in the pending change lookahead described below (for example, the shape or color of the object changes at a timing in the middle of the variable display). ).

《Simple hold display》
On the left side of the screen, at approximately the center in the height direction, two numbers are displayed vertically side by side. These two numbers represent the current number of reservations for the first special symbol and the number of reservations for the second special symbol, and are called a "simple reservation display" (P814). In the example in Figure 17, the number of reservations for the first special symbol is indicated by the number "3" displayed at the top, and the number of reservations for the second special symbol is indicated by the number "4" displayed at the bottom. .

(Look-ahead performance)《Hold change look-ahead》
Further, in FIG. 17, the pending object P811 in the 3rd display area in the 3rd reserve display area P810 is displayed in a different manner from the pending object P811 in the 2nd and 1st display areas. The pachinko game machine P based on the premise is configured such that the display mode of the pending object P811 of the third bet is more likely to result in a jackpot than the display mode of the pending object P811 of the second match. In this way, the effect of changing and displaying the display mode of the pending object P811 for a specific pending is called "holding change (pre-reading)".

In addition, it is configured so that it has not only the mode illustrated in FIG. 17 but also multiple types of change modes, and the probability (expectation level) of becoming a jackpot can be different for each of them, and the pending object P811 is changed in stages. The display mode may be changed.

In addition, not limited to "holding change (prereading)", if a random value stored as a hold is determined to be the target of execution of the effect, a variable display corresponding to the hold that is the target of the execution of the effect will start. A performance that suggests that there is a high possibility of becoming a jackpot for the pending performance that is the target of the performance is called a ``pre-reading performance'' (sometimes referred to as a ``pre-judgment performance''). I'm here.

When performing a "pre-reading effect," the hold that is determined as the target of the effect may be referred to as a "pre-reading target hold," a "trigger hold," a "culprit hold," etc. , The variable display of the special symbol based on the prefetch target suspension is referred to as "prefetch target variation," "trigger variation," "culprit variation," etc.

Here, some typical examples of "pre-read effects" that can be adopted in the pachinko gaming machine P based on the premise are illustrated.

《Looking ahead to opportunities》
"Opportunity read ahead" is a stop display of the decorative pattern P801 according to a predetermined rule in the fluctuation display of the decorative pattern P801 until the change of the look-ahead target fluctuation starts (or a temporary stop display) This is a performance that will be performed. As an example of the rules for the stop display mode of the decorative pattern P801 predetermined as a chance item, (a) when a miss pattern is stopped and displayed by a combination of only the patterns with the same hue in the numerical part of the decorative pattern, (b) When decorative patterns such as "1", "2", "3", "5", "4", and "3" are displayed in a regular stop display mode, such as in order (normal order, reverse order order), etc. (c) A case where a special number such as "7" or a symbol different from a number such as "first" is stopped and displayed as a stop display symbol of the middle symbol.

《Pre-reading of staged movable characters》
"Production movable accessory pre-reading" is to pre-read the production movable accessory P560 or frame movable accessory P360 (lever P382 of the pachinko game machine P1 etc. which is based on the premise) provided on the game board P5 or the frame (glass frame P3). This is a performance in which a lively movement is performed according to a performance operation pattern from the start of the change, spanning the change until the start of the change display of the target change or the pre-read target change.

《Zone transition look ahead》
"Zone transition look-ahead" moves to a special production mode (called "zone") in the variation display of the special symbol before the start of the look-ahead target variation, and waits until the variation display becomes the look-ahead target variation. This is a look-ahead performance that suggests that there is a high possibility of winning the jackpot by executing a preview lottery to execute a preview performance that corresponds to a performance mode. For example, "display the normal background → display the background during pre-reading → jackpot" or "display the normal background → display the background during pre-reading → lose the symbol stops and return to the normal background".

(Example of display when performing reach effect)
Next, FIG. 18 is a diagram showing a situation in which a reach effect with a high degree of expectation of a jackpot is being performed. As mentioned above, "reach effect" is a situation where the decorative symbols (left symbol P801a, right symbol P801c) other than the first decorative symbol (middle symbol P801b) are displayed in the same manner, and there is one more symbol. It refers to a performance in which it is announced that if the game stops in the same manner, it will be a jackpot.

In most cases, the pachinko game machine P on which this game is based is designed to notify a jackpot by displaying three decorative symbols P801 in the same stationary display mode via a ready-to-reach effect.

In the example of FIG. 18, the left pattern P801a and the right pattern P801c of the decorative patterns are displayed as "5", and "4", "5", and "6" are displayed as the symbols in the changing middle symbol row. This is a situation where the "4" symbol vibrates violently and if it switches to "5", it will be a jackpot.

Here, in the example of FIG. 18, the left and right decorative symbols "5" are displayed smaller than the decorative symbol P801 at the time of stop display in FIG. 17, and the middle symbol during the variable display is displayed smaller. The decorative pattern P801b in the row is displayed larger and highlighted than the decorative pattern P801 when the display is stopped. The decorative symbols displayed in small sizes corresponding to the left symbol P801a and the right symbol P801c at this time may be called a "retreat symbol (P803)" or a "reach symbol". In the reach effect, in addition to the illustrated example, it is announced whether or not there will be a jackpot depending on the ending of the animation of the preview effect (reach effect) that is displayed along with the fluctuating display of the decorative symbols. In some cases, the left symbol P801a and right symbol P801c, which have already been temporarily stopped and displayed, are displayed (or hidden) in a smaller size than the retracted symbol P803, thereby increasing the visibility of the performance that the player wants to draw attention to. ing.

Furthermore, gaming machines that do not display three decorative symbols P801 are also known, and there are also multi-line reach modes that simultaneously form multiple rows of reach modes, but detailed explanations thereof will be omitted.

As an exception to the ready-to-reach effect, there is a ready-to-reach effect called a "full rotation reach" in which all three decorative symbols P801 are synchronously and variably displayed in the same manner. The standard for reach production is ``a situation in which decorative symbols other than the first decorative symbol are displayed in the same manner, and if one more symbol stops in the same manner, it will be announced that it will be a jackpot''. Although the situation is different, a full rotation reach is also recognized by those skilled in the art as a reach effect.

Further, in FIG. 18, a "effect setting display area (P850)" is displayed in the lower right area of the screen, and in the example of FIG. 18, a volume setting display P851 is displayed as the effect setting display.

The production setting display area P850 has a volume setting function that adjusts the volume level output from the speaker P83 of the gaming machine P, a light intensity adjustment function that adjusts the luminance of the decorative lamp P82 of the gaming machine P, and a production mode. This is an area for displaying the setting status and change status of a performance mode change function that changes the type of preview performance that is called and changes the frequency of occurrence of the preview performance.

The production setting display area P850 is not displayed all the time, but is temporarily displayed when the player performs operations related to the various production settings (volume adjustment function, light intensity adjustment function, production mode change function). For example, by operating the cross key P383 in the left/right direction, it is possible to display the effect setting display (volume setting display P851) related to the volume adjustment function shown in FIG. 18. In the situation shown in FIG. 18, if the player further operates the right button of the cross key P383, the set volume level (black area in the diagram) increases, and the volume setting value changes from "3" to "3". It is now changing to "4".

In addition, in the pachinko gaming machine P based on the premise, when adjusting the light intensity, the change operation is performed by operating the cross key P383 in the up and down direction, and the production mode change function is configured such that the change operation is performed according to the operation of the production button. An example is where the production modes are switched in a predetermined order. It should be noted that the operations related to these effect settings may adopt different operation modes depending on the execution of the effect during the game, and methods other than the exemplified setting change method can be adopted as appropriate.

Furthermore, regarding the display of the performance setting display area P850 and the use of various performance setting functions, it is possible to set a period during which the player's performance setting operation is valid and a period during which it is invalidated, so that particularly important performances can be set. When executed, the effect setting display area P850 is hidden and the various effect setting functions are disabled.

(Example of performance display during jackpot game)
Next, based on FIG. 19, the display mode of the performance in a state where a jackpot game is being executed in the pachinko game machine P will be explained.

《Display showing the type of jackpot》
At the lower left and upper right of the screen in FIG. 19, a decorative pattern P801 that triggers the execution of the jackpot game is displayed. The bottom left of the screen displays the decorative pattern P801 (also referred to as "Jackpot design (P805)") in a smaller display format than the decorative pattern currently being displayed, and the top right of the screen. continues to display the simplified installation drawing P802 that was displayed when the variable display of the special symbols ended.

In the pachinko gaming machine P based on the premise, the type of jackpot executed by the player and the number of game balls that can be obtained during the jackpot are determined by the type of decorative pattern P801 that triggered the occurrence of the jackpot (stopped and displayed when the jackpot occurred). It visually suggests the level of expectation and the gaming state after the jackpot (normal gaming state). Therefore, by displaying the decorative patterns that trigger the jackpot (jackpot design P805, simple pattern P802), it is possible to know the type of jackpot and the number of game balls expected to be obtained even during a jackpot game. It is possible to make suggestions.

In addition, as a display indicating the type of jackpot, in FIG. 19, an icon image P821 resembling a pentagonal shield is displayed under the character string "ROUND6" (referred to as "Round display (P820)"), and the icon The characters "MAX" are written in the center of P821. The icon P821 in the figure indicates the jackpot indicated by the character string "MAX", and indicates that the maximum round jackpot game of the pachinko game machine P is to be executed. This icon P821 is called a "jackpot icon" or "consecutive game (display) icon," and each time a specific game state and a jackpot game are repeatedly executed, the number of icons displayed increases in a cumulative manner. This is an effect display that informs the player how many times and what type of jackpot has been won in a state so that the player can understand.

Although not shown in the figure, in the pachinko gaming machine P based on the premise, "〇〇Bonus!'' (notifying the maximum round jackpot) and the By displaying a message such as "△△chance" (suggesting a jackpot other than the maximum round), an effect is executed to notify the player of the type of jackpot.

For example, even if it is suggested that it is a jackpot such as "△△chance" where the number of rounds to be executed is small, the execution round of the jackpot will be displayed as "Extra Bonus! +〇 Round" during the jackpot round. In fact, it is also possible to execute a "jackpot promotion effect" that notifies the user that the jackpot is the maximum round.

In addition, "jackpot promotion effect" is also used to suggest that a jackpot game is being executed that will transition to a specific gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the type of jackpot announced earlier. Sometimes. For example, from a jackpot game (referred to as a "non-probable jackpot" or "regular jackpot") that suggests that the probability fluctuation function does not operate after a jackpot game, to a jackpot game that suggests that the probability fluctuation function does not operate after a jackpot ("non-probable jackpot" or "normal jackpot"), An example of an effect display is that the effect display switches to an effect called ``probable strange jackpot'' or ``specific jackpot''.

《Production display showing the progress of the jackpot game》
Next, when executing the jackpot game, an explanation will be given regarding the performance display that shows the progress of the jackpot game. In FIG. 19, as a performance indicating a jackpot performance display, "Round display (P820)" is executed with the character string "ROUND_〇" displayed at the top left of the screen, and a character string "TOTAL_〇〇pt" is displayed at the bottom right of the screen. Examples include "Display number of pitches acquired (P822)" which is executed in , and "Count display (P825)" which is displayed by 10 circular image objects approximately in the center on the right side of the screen. Although not shown, during the jackpot game, in addition to these displays, an image display such as an animation called a "round effect" is displayed.

《Round display》
"Round display (P820)" is a display indicating what round the round game (unit game) is being executed during the jackpot game. The numerical value to the right of "ROUND" is updated at the timing when the round game starts. The example in FIG. 19 shows a situation where the sixth round game is being executed.

Note that the "round display (p820)" does not necessarily need to be synchronized with the number of rounds executed during the actual jackpot game. For example, in the specifications of the above-mentioned "small win V", the period during the small win game may be counted as the first round, and the first round of the jackpot game executed after winning the V prize may be treated as the second round. In addition, in another example, if the opening pattern of the big winning hole P751 in a round game ends with a transition to the easy entry state for a short time, the value of "round display" is not updated and the big winning hole P751 is closed. There may be a case where a round that has been substantially executed is treated as a "substantially round" only when the open pattern of the ball is in an easy-to-enter state for a long time.

《Number of balls acquired》
"Display number of balls acquired (P822)" is the same as "Display number of balls acquired in jackpot (P823 *not shown)" which displays the cumulative number of game balls acquired in one jackpot game being executed, and a specific game. There is a type called ``cumulative acquired ball count display (824)'' that displays the cumulative number of game balls acquired in multiple jackpots. FIG. 19 shows an example in which a ``cumulative number of acquired pitches display (P824)'' which is a five-digit number of acquired pitches is displayed. Note that the "display of the number of jackpot balls obtained (P823)" and the "display of the cumulative number of balls obtained (P824)" may be simultaneously displayed in parallel.

In the pachinko game machine P based on the premise, the "number of balls won display (P822)" displays the cumulative number of prize balls paid out based on balls entering the big winning hole P751 during the jackpot game. However, as a target for accumulating prize ball payouts in the acquired ball count display P822, payouts based on balls entered into the general winning hole P731 and the second starting winning hole P721 arranged in the right area P501R of the game board P5 are cumulatively added. It's okay.

In addition, as another modification, the display period of "Number of pitches acquired (P822)" may be displayed not only during the jackpot game but also during execution of a specific game, or "Display of the number of pitches acquired (P822)" The addition period for the cumulative number of paid out prize balls may be extended not only during jackpot games, but also during specific games or small win games.

In addition, in the pachinko gaming machine P used as the premise, in addition to the "number of balls acquired" display (P822), the cumulative number of prize balls paid out is divided into "2500 balls", "5000 balls", "10000 balls", etc. Only in special situations, such as when the number of payouts has been reached, it is possible to perform a ``display of the number of pitches acquired at intervals'' that emphatically notifies the player in addition to the ``display of the number of pitches acquired'' (for example, ``GET 10000! !”).

《Count display》
"Count display (P825)" indicates how many balls can be entered before the number of game balls set as the closing condition of the grand prize opening P751 in one round game, or how many game balls can be entered in the current round game. This is a display indicating whether a ball has entered the big winning hole P751. The former is displayed as a shaded circular object in FIG. 19, and the latter is displayed as a white circular object in two rows of objects at approximately the center position on the right side of the screen.

In the example in Figure 19, for the 6th round of the game, 5 balls have already entered the grand prize opening (indicated by the white circular object), and 5 more balls can be entered (indicated by the shaded circular object). display) is indicated by count display P825. The count display P825 is reset to the initial state each time a new round is started.

During the execution of the round game of the jackpot game, depending on the falling situation of the game balls, the number of game balls that meet the closing conditions of the big winning hole P751 will be consecutively equal to or higher than the closing conditions of the big winning hole P751. Winning may occur, and the occurrence of winning with the number of game balls exceeding the closing condition is called "over winning".

Although not shown, when an "over-win" occurs, a special effect is performed using the object display of the count display P825, a special light is emitted from the effect lamp P82, and a special sound effect is emitted from the speaker P83. You may notify by Further, regarding the above-mentioned acquired ball number display P822, the number of prize balls paid out based on winnings that are "over-winning" may be included in the addition, or may be excluded from the addition.

《Other effects displayed during jackpot games》
Next, another effect display that is executed in FIG. 19 will be explained.

First, the two numbers displayed at the substantially center position on the left side of the screen are the aforementioned simple hold display P814.

The display "Sound_2" displayed on the right side of the decorative pattern at the bottom left of the screen (Jackpot design P805) is the "Selected song display (P854)" which shows the title of the song being played during the current jackpot game. . In the pachinko gaming machine P based on the premise, the player can arbitrarily select a song to play by operating the production button P381 or cross key P383 during the first or second round during a jackpot game. Has specifications. Regarding the selected song display P854, if the song can be changed, as shown in FIG. 20, an image displaying "Can be changed using the (up) and (down) keys" is displayed near the selected song display P854.

In addition, the selection of production during such a jackpot game is not limited to music selection, but it is also possible to change the round production and select the production (production mode) during a specific game after the jackpot game (collectively referred to as (referred to as "performance customization display (P853)"), detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

Finally, the "Right shot" and right arrow symbol displayed at the bottom of the simplified installation diagram P802 at the top right of the screen are image displays related to "Right shot notification (P830)" (also called "Recommended firing position notification" etc.) It is. In the pachinko game machine P based on the premise, during a jackpot game, the game state is such that it is recommended to fire the game ball into the right area P501R of the game area, so the "Right hit notification (P832)" ("Right hit") is activated. string, and the display of the arrow symbol to the right) is being executed.

The "split notification" may be displayed not only during a jackpot game but also during a game in a specific game state or during a game in a normal game state. In particular, in situations where the gaming state changes (occurrence/end of a jackpot or occurrence/end of a specific gaming state), the display is displayed in a larger size so that it is easier for the player to recognize it than the split notification P830 shown in FIG. 19. By temporarily displaying in the center of the screen, etc., an effect is executed to notify the player of the recommended firing position in the next game state.

In addition, in "Bulking division notification (P830)", the image that is temporarily displayed in a large size at the timing of the game state transition is called "1st punching division notification image" ("Right hit large display (P831)", " ``Left hit large display (P833)'', and during jackpot games or specific game states, the recommended firing position in the game state is displayed for almost the entire period during which the game state continues. "Notification image" ("right-hand small display (P832)", "left-hand small display (P834)").

In addition, as another type of effect of "Bullet notification (P830)", if a situation where a game ball is fired at a position other than the recommended firing position is detected, for example, during a jackpot, the left side area of the game area "Left-handed hitting warning notification" ("Right-handed hitting alert notification (P835)") that alerts the player that when a game ball is fired at P501L, the game ball should be fired at the right side area P501R of the gaming area. ) to display a message such as "Please hit right." Note that in a situation where the recommended firing position and the player's actual firing position are reversed, a "right-handed hitting warning notification" ("left-handed hitting alert notification (P936)") is executed.

(Example of effect display during specific game state)
FIG. 20 is a diagram showing a game effect during operation of the electric chew support function in a specific game state (high probability or low probability/high base). There are a wide variety of effects displayed in the figure, but we will omit explanations of those that have been explained in the previous explanation, and will include effects that have not been explained so far, as well as differences from the above explanation. An explanation will be given regarding the effect display having the following.

First, as a performance display that has not been explained so far, the "performance mode display (P840)" and the "remaining number of games display (P841)" will be explained as an explanation regarding the performance display during a specific game state.

《Production mode display》
"Production mode display (P840)" is a display that shows the current state of the production display mode, and is a display that shows that a preview production according to the corresponding mode is selected by lottery based on status information called production mode. . When the production mode display is different, the type of preview production that is visible to the player is generally created so that the visual impression it gives is significantly different, although there are some preview productions that share some common preview effects. . In FIG. 20, "RUSH_MODE" is displayed, indicating that the assumed gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine P is "ST (number of times cut probability variable)" (high probability/high base state). ing.

In addition to notifying the performance mode in a specific game state, the "performance mode display (P840)" may be displayed in the normal game state (low probability/low base state), or may be displayed in the normal game state (low probability/low base state). When a state has a plurality of performance modes, the display may be performed temporarily each time a condition for switching the performance mode is satisfied, or may be displayed continuously until the performance mode ends.

《Remaining number of games displayed》
"Remaining game count display (P841)" is the number of times the special symbol will be displayed in a variable manner until the end of a specific game state (the number of special symbol drawings), or the number of times the special symbol will be displayed in a variable manner until the current production mode ends. This is a display showing the number of times. In FIG. 20, "56 remaining" is displayed at the top center of the screen, indicating that the "ST (number of times cut probability variable)" game state will continue until 56 special symbol drawings are executed. The person is notified.

Next, in the effect display example of the specific game state shown in FIG. 20, the display that is different from the effect display examples in the other game states described above will be explained.

《Decorative pattern (specific game state)》
In the center of the screen in FIG. 20, a variable display of a decorative pattern P801 is displayed. Compared to the decorative pattern P801 in the performance display example in the normal game state of FIG. 20, the decorative pattern P801 is displayed smaller in the performance display example of the decorative pattern P801 in the specific game state in FIG.

In the pachinko gaming machine P that is based on the premise, a performance mode display P840, a remaining number of games display P841, and a jackpot icon display P821 are performed at the top of the screen as a performance display for a specific game state, and a selected song is displayed at the bottom of the screen. P854 and number of pitches acquired P824 are displayed. In the specific game state, such additional display that is not displayed in the normal game state (low probability/low base state) is performed, so if the decorative pattern P801 is displayed in the same size as the normal game state, the stop display In this case, there is a risk that the display of some symbols may overlap with a portion of each display, reducing the visibility of the stop display symbols. The display of the decorative pattern P801 is made small and simplified so that it is less likely to occur. Further, as an example of displaying the decorative pattern P801 in a simplified manner, in addition to reducing the size, it is also possible to adopt a method of not displaying a character image or the like that is displayed along with the number indicating the pattern.

《Hold display area (specific gaming state)》
In the pachinko gaming machine P based on the premise, as shown in the lower left of the screen in FIG. 20, the display of the pending object P811 in the pending display area P810 of the specific game state changes from "Hold 1" to "Hold 1" in the depth direction from the front side of the screen. A display area for pending objects of ``Hold 4'' is provided. Note that the variable object display area P812 (and the variable object display P813) is not displayed in the "RUSH_MODE" production mode state.

When the fluctuation display shown in FIG. 20 ends and a new fluctuation starts in the state, the display of the pending object P811 located at the bottom of FIG. 20 disappears, and the display of the pending object P811 lined up at the back moves to the front. The display is controlled to be larger.

Further, although not shown, a "result display effect" which is an important effect displayed during a specific game will be explained.

《Result display performance》
In the Pachinko gaming machine P that is based on the premise, "result display performance" is mainly used when the last change in a specific gaming state (high base state) is executed, or when a hold that occurred during a specific gaming state is no longer held, etc. This is a performance that is performed at the timing when the player recognizes that the "consecutive game" state has ended, and in the so-called "consecutive game" state, information on how many jackpot games have been won and how many game balls were fired in total are displayed. This is an effect that informs the player whether the ball has been acquired (equivalent to displaying the number of acquired balls).

[This example]
The pachinko game machine P of this embodiment has various characteristic configurations in addition to having the above-mentioned underlying technology as its basic configuration. Hereinafter, differences from the underlying technology will be mainly explained, and explanations of common points will be omitted or simplified. Among the elements constituting the pachinko game machine P of this embodiment, the same reference numerals are given to the elements that are the same as or correspond to the elements explained in the basic technology.

The pachinko gaming machine P of this embodiment is a pachinko gaming machine that adopts the "small win V" described in the explanation of the typical gaming machine specifications ("specifications") of the pachinko gaming machine on which it is based. Depending on the "base state" in the normal gaming state when starting the winning (or jackpot) game, after the jackpot game is executed (or by passing through the specific area P760 inside the big winning opening P751 during the small winning game, The content of the "specific gaming state" (in particular, the length of the period during which the "base state" is maintained at the "high base state") in the normal gaming state (after the execution of the jackpot game based on the activated accessory continuous operating device) is varied. This is a pachinko machine that offers new gameplay.

In particular, in the pachinko gaming machine P of this embodiment, the normal gaming state is controlled to the "(low probability/) low base state" immediately after the "specific gaming state" (low probability/high base state) ends. If you acquire the right to a small hit (or jackpot) in the special symbol reservation (reservation of the second special symbol) that is the main character of the game in the specific gaming state that is consumed while By configuring the period during which a specific gaming state (low probability/high base state) is maintained as the gaming state so that the next small hit (or jackpot) can be obtained, it is possible to substantially win two small hits ( This game adopts a unique gameplay feature in which you can win the right to win a jackpot.

A detailed explanation of the pachinko game machine P of this embodiment having the above-mentioned features will be given below.

(Board configuration)
First, the configuration of the board configuration (configuration of the gaming area) of the pachinko gaming machine P of this embodiment will be explained.

The pachinko game machine P of this embodiment can be implemented with almost the same board configuration as the pachinko game machine shown in FIG. 1. The pachinko game machine P of this embodiment adopts the gaming characteristics (specs) described later, so it is configured to include a specific area P760 inside the big prize opening (attacker) P751. Note that a different board configuration may be adopted as appropriate as long as the change does not change the gameplay (or is a minor change) as disclosed below.

(spec)
Next, the gaming performance (specs) of the pachinko gaming machine P of this embodiment will be explained. In addition, in this explanation, regarding the "settings" (setting values) that affect the ball dispensing performance, only the specifications related to "Setting 1" will be explained, but various numerical values related to other setting values will be set as appropriate. It is.

The pachinko gaming machine P of this embodiment has a jackpot probability of 1/269 (common to the first special symbol and the second special symbol) and a small win probability of 1/9.1 (second special symbol only). The number of prize balls is 4 balls for the first starting prize opening (first starting opening) P711, 3 balls for the second starting winning opening (second starting opening) P721, 3 balls for the left general winning opening P731L, The right side general winning hole P731R is set to 2 balls, and the big winning hole (attacker) P751 is set to 15 balls.

In addition, the pachinko gaming machine P of this embodiment employs second special symbol priority extinguishing control, and when both the first special symbol and the second special symbol are reserved, the second special symbol is Give priority to variable display. In addition, in the pachinko gaming machine P of this embodiment, only the second special symbol is configured to have a "small win" as a special symbol lottery result, but it may be configured such that the first special symbol has a "small win". It is possible. In addition, if the game nature of the Pachinko gaming machine P of this embodiment is not lost, the first special symbol priority digestion control may be applied as a modification, in addition to the second special symbol priority digestion control, or, Needless to say, it is also possible to apply ball entry order processing control in which balls that entered first are given priority.

The pachinko gaming machine P of this embodiment adopts the gameplay (spec) called "Small hit V" explained as the underlying technology, and in addition to the case of "Jackpot" in the special symbol lottery, there is also a special When the symbol lottery results in a "small hit" and the game ball passes through the specific area P760 inside the big prize opening P751 during the small winning game that is subsequently executed, the accessory continuous operation device is activated and the jackpot game starts. It is designed to be executed. In this embodiment, when a small win game develops into a jackpot game, a series of special game states from the start of the small win game to the end of the jackpot game are referred to as "small win V" or "small win development jackpot". etc.

The types of jackpots (including small hit V) in the special gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine P of this embodiment are 3 round jackpot (first special symbol jackpot) and 10 round jackpot (second special symbol jackpot or small win V). ) is provided. In addition, regarding a specific game that is an advantageous normal game state, the pachinko gaming machine P of this embodiment does not have a probability variation function, but has an electric chew support function (den support) after various jackpots (including small hit V). A specific game (high base state) is executed by operating the .

In addition, in the detailed control example described later, the pachinko gaming machine P of this embodiment has a predetermined control function during a period of a specific game and/or a period in which a maximum of four remaining reservations after the end of a specific game is displayed in a variable manner. The special variation pattern table (limited frequency pattern table) is referred to at the specified timing, and a variation pattern is selected in order to secure the variation display time of the special symbol as required, but the special variation pattern table The timing to refer to is to separately count and store the number of variable displays of the first special symbol and the number of variable displays of the second special symbol after the execution of the special game is completed, and the number of variable displays of the first special symbol or the second special symbol At the start of variation, when the memory information of the number of variations stored correspondingly is a specific value, the special variation pattern table for the first special symbol or the special variation pattern table for the second special symbol can be referred to. There is.

(game flow)
Next, the game flow of the Pachinko gaming machine P of this embodiment will be explained using FIG. 21. The game flow shown in FIG. 21 is a flow assuming a case where the game is executed as designed by the player (normal game). Note that if a game is executed that ignores the player's design intention (abnormal game, irregular game), the game flow may result in operations that do not apply to the situation shown in Figure 21. I will omit the explanation.

First, in the "normal game (low probability/low base state)" shown in FIG. The game is played using the so-called "left-handed" technique. When a game ball enters the first starting prize hole, a special symbol lottery is performed based on the first special symbol (special symbol 1), and if the special symbol lottery result is a jackpot, the "jackpot (special symbol 1)" is It is executed (FIG. 21(A)). Note that the state surrounded by double lines in the figure represents a special game state (big hit game, small win game).

When the "Jackpot (Special Figure 1)" ends, the gaming state shifts to a specific gaming state (high base state) (FIG. 21(B)). The specific game state after "Jackpot (Special Figure 1)" is "Breakthrough Zone_Low Probability/High Base (Special Figure 2: 1 time) + Maximum remaining pending 4 pieces" (details will be described later), and the second The high base state (operating state of electric chew support function) continues until the special symbol (special symbol 2) changes once and is stopped and displayed.

When the game moves to the "breakthrough zone", the player plays the game in a so-called "right-handed manner" in which the game ball is fired aiming at the second start winning hole P721 arranged in the right side area P501R of the game area P501. Since the "breakthrough zone" is in a high base state, the movable body P771 of the normal electric accessory P770 provided in the second starting prize opening P721 is likely to be in a state where it is easy to enter the ball, and the game ball can be launched into the right area P501R. As a result, the game ball enters (passes) into the normal pattern operation opening P741, a normal symbol lottery is performed, the normal electric accessory P770 is activated, and the second special symbol is entered by the ball entering the second starting prize opening P721. A special symbol lottery will be held based on (Special Figure 2).

In the "breakthrough zone", the high base state continues until the fluctuating display of the second special symbol ends at one time. 4 pieces), you can receive a special symbol lottery of the second special symbol having a "small win" which is the lottery result that triggers the small win V. Here, in the "Breakthrough Zone", a jackpot or small hit is achieved by drawing the second special symbol (up to 5 times), and the player receives the "Small Hit V/Jackpot (Special Figure 2)" (Fig. 21(C) )) is set at approximately 45%. In addition, in the "Breakthrough Zone", if the special symbol lottery of the second special symbol does not result in a hit (big hit, small hit), the game will move to the "Normal Game (Low Probability/Low Base)" (Figure 21 ( D)).

When "Small Hit V/Jackpot (Special Figure 2)" ends, "Battle Mode_Low Probability/High Base (Special Figure 2: 6 times) + Maximum remaining pending 4 pieces" or "Pseudo Jackpot_Low Probability/High Base" (Special figure 2: 95 times) + remaining pending maximum of 4 pieces'' (FIG. 21 (E), (H)).

Here, whether to transition to "battle mode" or "pseudo jackpot" as the specific game state to transition to after "Small hit V/Jackpot (special figure 2)" depends on the Pachinko gaming machine P of this embodiment. The pachinko gaming machine P of this embodiment uses not the special symbol (stop display symbol) that triggered the execution of "Small Hit V/Jackpot (Special Figure 2)", but Depending on the game state when the winning variation of the special symbol that triggers the execution of "Small Hit V/Jackpot (Special Figure 2)" starts, it is determined whether to shift to "Battle Mode" or "Pseudo Jackpot" are doing.

Specifically, the variable display starts when the game is controlled by "Breakthrough Zone", "Battle Mode", or "Pseudo Jackpot" and is in a high base state where the electric chew support function is activated. In the case of "Small hit V/Jackpot (Special chart 2)" triggered by a change in the special symbol that becomes a hit, "Battle mode" will be activated after "Small hit V/Jackpot (Special chart 2)" ends. (Fig. 21 (E)), and the fluctuation starts in the low base state where the electric chew support function is not activated.The hit fluctuation of the second special symbol corresponding to the remaining reservation (retention related to the second special symbol) After the "Small hit V/Jackpot (Special figure 2)" triggered by the "Small hit V/Jackpot (Special chart 2)" ends, the control is performed to shift to the "Pseudo jackpot" (FIG. 21(H)).

"Battle Mode_Low Probability/High Base (Special Figure 2: 6 times) + Maximum remaining pending 4 pieces" (details will be described later) stops after the second special symbol (Special Figure 2) changes 6 times. This is a specific game in which the high base state (operating state of electric chew support function) continues until it is displayed. The player fires the game ball into the right area P501R in the same way as the "Breakthrough Zone" until the second special symbol is displayed fluctuating up to 10 times (6 times in the high base state + up to 4 times for the remaining pending). This is a specific game in which the aim is to obtain a "small hit V/jackpot (special figure 2)" during the period (FIG. 21(F)). In addition, if the second special symbol does not become a small hit V or a jackpot in the maximum 10 variable displays, the game shifts to the "normal game (low probability/low base)" (FIG. 21(G)).

"Pseudo jackpot_low probability/high base (special pattern 2: 95 times) + maximum remaining pending 4 pieces" (details will be described later) stops after the second special symbol (special pattern 2) changes 95 times. This is a specific game in which the high base state (operating state of electric chew support function) continues until it is displayed. The player fires the game ball into the right area P501R in the same way as in the "Breakthrough Zone" and "Battle Mode", and the second special symbol is fired a maximum of 99 times (95 times in the high base state + maximum 4 times for the remaining pending). This is a specific game in which the player aims to obtain a "small win V/jackpot (special figure 2)" before the variable display is performed (FIG. 21(I)). In the pachinko gaming machine P of this embodiment, the probability of a "small hit" in the special symbol lottery of the second special symbol is set to 1/9.1, so that the probability of a "small hit" is set to 1/9.1. By the time the special symbol lottery for the second special symbol is drawn 95 times, it can be said that it is virtually certain that a small hit V or a jackpot will be won, but it is a "pseudo jackpot". If the special symbol lottery result does not become a "small hit" or "big win" even if the second special symbol is displayed 94 times during the game, the game will shift to the "battle mode" production mode ( Figure 21(J)). The variation at the 95th spin of the "pseudo jackpot" is the same as the 6th variation in the "battle mode", and the variation display at the 95th spin and the variation display for up to 4 times of reservation related to the 2nd special symbol. If the game does not result in a "big hit" or "small win," the game shifts to the "normal game (low probability/low base)" (FIG. 21(G)). As a modified example, the transition timing of the performance mode to "battle mode" may be set to an earlier timing, for example, the timing when the second special symbol is displayed 89 times during the "pseudo jackpot". In other words, it is also possible to set the timing at a time when the number of times the high base state continues in the "battle mode" is equal to six times.

In addition, in the pachinko gaming machine P of this embodiment, during the period controlled by the specific games "Breakthrough Zone", "Battle Mode", and "Pseudo Jackpot", the variable display of the second special symbol is performed as an end condition for each. In addition to the ending condition based on the number of times, the game may be ended when the first special symbol is changed five times. 95 times, which is the end condition of a specific game based on the number of changes of the second special symbol of "pseudo jackpot", is the maximum duration of the electric chew support function under the current rules, which is the number of changes of the special symbol 100 times, It is set so that the specific game ending condition for either the symbol fluctuation display or the second special symbol fluctuation display is not exceeded without being satisfied, for example, the specific game ending condition based on the number of fluctuations of the first special symbol. If it is set to 3 times, etc., the period of the "pseudo jackpot" can be made until the second special symbol (special symbol 2) changes 97 times and is stopped and displayed.

The pachinko gaming machine P of this embodiment, which has the above-described game flow, has a "small prize" that has a high probability of winning in the special symbol lottery of the second special symbol in the "breakthrough zone", "battle mode", and "pseudo jackpot". Obtain a small hit V (or jackpot) based on "hit", and obtain a large amount of balls by looping "battle mode" or "pseudo jackpot" and "small hit V/jackpot (special map 2)" It is a gameplay that aims to. In particular, during the use of up to 4 remaining reservations that occurred in specific games of "Breakthrough Zone" and "Battle Mode", that is, after the high base state has ended, a "small hit" or " By acquiring the "Jackpot", the next small win V (or jackpot) will be transferred to the "pseudo jackpot", which is a specific game where the next small win (or jackpot) is virtually certain, and the balls for one small win V (or jackpot) will be transferred to the "pseudo jackpot". Furthermore, players can experience that depending on the timing of acquiring the small hit V (jackpot) during the execution of "Battle Mode", the ball will be paid out for one small hit V (jackpot), or the ball will be paid out for one small win It is possible to provide a game in which the difference is whether the ball is paid twice (V (jackpot)) or not.

In addition, in the game flow (FIG. 21) of the pachinko gaming machine P of the present embodiment described above, the second The number of times the special symbols are displayed is 1, 6, and 94 times, respectively, but in order to balance the interest of the production and the gameplay (specs), the high base state of "Breakthrough Zone" and "Battle Mode" has been changed. The number of fluctuating displays of the second special symbol, which is the end condition, is set to 4 times, which is the same as the number of reservations, or the probability of looping "battle mode" or "pseudo jackpot" and "small hit V/jackpot (special figure 2)" It is possible to adjust it as appropriate to 10 times in order to increase the number of times. (The number of rounds of the special game to be executed will also be adjusted as appropriate.)

In such a modified example, if the number of variable displays of the second special symbol, which is the end condition for the high base state, is less than the maximum number of reservations related to the second special symbol, it is possible to win in a lower base state. If the number of fluctuating displays of the second special symbol, which is the condition for ending the high base state, is the same as the maximum number of reservations related to the second special symbol, for example, "Small hit V/Jackpot ( You will be able to make it look like you have two chances to get "Special Map 2)". In addition, if the number of variable displays of the second special symbol, which is the end condition of the high base state, is greater than the maximum number of reservations related to the second special symbol, "Small hit V/Jackpot (special symbol 2)" will occur in the high base state. It is possible to provide interesting performances and game properties that allow players to enjoy the game with a sense of expectation of acquiring the same over and over again.

(Breakthrough zone)
Next, with reference to FIGS. 22 to 24, game control and production contents in the "Breakthrough Zone" will be explained.

In the "Breakthrough Zone", the second special symbol is displayed once in a high base state, and the second special symbol is displayed in a variable manner corresponding to a maximum of four pending second special symbols that occur during the high base state. This is a production mode that corresponds to the period.

In the "Normal Game (Low Probability/Low Base)" (see Figure 21), a "Jackpot" occurs in the special symbol lottery of the first special symbol, and when "Jackpot (Special Figure 1)" is executed, a "Jackpot" occurs. (Special Map 1)", the "Breakthrough Zone" will start.

After the "breakthrough zone" is started, when the first variable display of the second special symbol is performed, the performance display of the "reserved charge performance" shown in FIG. 22 is started. The first variation display of the second special symbol in the "breakthrough zone" takes about 60 seconds when the special variation pattern table (the variation pattern table for breakthrough zone 1 variation) is referred to in the variation pattern lottery on the main control board P40. It is configured so that a time fluctuation pattern is selected, and a "hold charge effect" is executed for a period of about 30 seconds from the start of fluctuation.

The “retention charge effect” prompts the player to generate a hold on the second special symbol and display the hold object P811 in the hold display area 810 during the effect display period of the “retention charge effect”. It's a performance. "Holding charge effect" is a character displayed on the screen and an effect (effect ) The performance is configured to change so as to improve the expectation level for winning, and the performance effect can also be used to urge the player to increase the retention of the second special symbol by hitting right.

When the "hold charge effect" ends during the first variation display of the second special symbol in the "Breakthrough Zone", the second special symbol continues to be displayed during the first variation display of the second special symbol in the "Breakthrough Zone". ``Small hit V/Jackpot (special hit)'' in the ``Breakthrough zone'' is based on the result of the winning/failure lottery of the first fluctuating display and the preliminary judgment information regarding the hold of the second special symbol that occurred during the execution of the ``hold charge effect''. An effect (in this embodiment, a "breakthrough zone battle effect", see FIG. 23) is performed to notify the result as to whether or not it is possible to obtain "Fig. 2)".

"Breakthrough Zone Battle Performance" is a performance that notifies the lottery results (including advance judgment information) of up to 5 variations in "Breakthrough Zone" all at once, and is effective against high base conditions (especially during execution of "Pending Charge Performance"). Regarding the suspension of the second special symbol that has occurred, other than the variable display of the simplified drawing P802, no presentational notification regarding the winning/failure lottery result is performed. In addition, regarding the remaining reservation of the second special symbol of the "Breakthrough Zone" (the reservation of the second special symbol that is consumed after transitioning to the low base state), the special fluctuation pattern table (special symbol 2 remaining reservation A short fluctuation pattern of about 1 second is selected by referring to the low base time special figure 2 fluctuation pattern table. In addition, like the "Breakthrough Zone Battle Production", all lottery results will be announced, including the lottery results of this fluctuating display and the preliminary determination information of one or more pending fluctuations from the next time onwards. The dramatic variable display performed in the first variable display is sometimes referred to as "summary variation."

If a winning variation that triggers a small hit V (jackpot) is executed during the 5 variations of the "breakthrough zone", in the "breakthrough zone battle production", a "breakthrough zone battle" as shown in FIG. "Victory Performance" will be displayed. The "breakthrough zone battle victory performance" is displayed if there is a "hit" among the remaining pending symbols even if the first variable display of the second special symbol in the "breakthrough zone" is "miss". In the example of FIG. 24, since the number of reservations of the second special symbol in the simple reservation display P814 is 1, the reservation that started changing when there were only two reservations of the second special symbol remaining is not a hit fluctuation. It shows that there was. In the "Breaking Zone Battle Victory Performance", if the result of the special symbol lottery is a "small win", the game ball enters (passes through) a specific area P760 within the big prize opening P751 during the small win game. ), the jackpot (small win V) is achieved only when the small win V is achieved. Notify the player that the execution right has been obtained. Further, although not shown, if no winning variation is executed during the five variations of the "breakthrough zone", a "breakthrough zone battle defeat performance" is executed.

Furthermore, when the first variable display of the second special symbol in the "Breakthrough Zone" ends, the gaming state will shift from the high base state to the low base state, but the gaming state will change from the high base state to the low base state. The transition timing is the timing when the variable display time of the second special symbol has elapsed, and in order to delay the variable display timing of the second special symbol for the first pending symbol that is remaining pending, the transition is made from the high base state to the low base state. After switching to the state, a certain waiting time (in the case of the pachinko game machine P of this embodiment, the symbol fixing time of the special symbol) is set, and the first variable display of the second special symbol in the "breakthrough zone" ends. Even if the normal electric accessory P770 of the second starting prize opening P721 is activated at the last minute, the operation of the ordinary electric accessory P770 is terminated during the waiting period (“pseudo jackpot” and “battle” described later). The same is true for the high base state final variation in "mode"). Therefore, even if the remaining reservations have started to be used and it becomes possible to reserve the second special symbol, there is a possibility that the normal electric accessory P770 of the second starting winning hole P721 will operate. Low probability/low base) as well as very few. Please note that the waiting time is set to be a long time of about 6 seconds, so the "Breakthrough Zone Battle Effect", "Breakthrough Zone Battle Victory Effect", and "Breakthrough Zone Battle Defeat Effect" will continue to be executed during the standby time. has been done.

In addition, although detailed explanation will be omitted, there is a case where there is no winning lottery result or advance judgment information during the execution of the "Pending Charge Effect", and the second special that occurs after the "Pending Charge Effect" has ended. Regarding the hold related to symbols, if a hit hold occurs, it is difficult to replace the performance content from the ``Breakthrough Zone Battle Defeat Effect'', so an alternative effect different from the ``Breakthrough Zone Battle Victory Effect'' will be performed. The player is notified of the acquisition of the right to receive a small win V (big win).

In addition, in the "Breakthrough Zone", the effect display on the effect display device P80 related to the variable display of the first special symbol, which is not the main character of the game, is only the variable display of the simple design P802, and the appearance of the effect is ``Breakthrough Zone''. A display that is recognized to be highly relevant to the "Breakthrough Zone" (such as a preview display related to the "Breakthrough Zone") will not be performed. If the timing is controlled by "Breakthrough Zone", "Battle Mode", or "Pseudo Jackpot", and it becomes "Jackpot (Special Figure 1)", it will not be "Breakthrough Zone" but "Battle Mode". It is also possible to control the transition to .

(Small hit V performance and pseudo jackpot)
Next, with reference to FIGS. 25 to 29, examples of performances related to the small hit V (jackpot) performance and the "pseudo jackpot" performance will be described. The production examples shown in FIGS. 25 to 29 are productions following FIG. 24, and are performed when a small hit V is won with the remainder of the "breakthrough zone" pending, and the game shifts to a "pseudo jackpot" as a specific game. , shows an example of the performance when a small hit V (jackpot) is obtained again during the "pseudo jackpot".

FIG. 25 shows a message that prompts the player to enter (pass) a game ball into a specific area P760 within the big prize opening P751 in order to activate the accessory continuous device during the small winning game of small winning V. A display example of "V winning promotion performance" is shown.

In the "V winning promotion effect", an image imitating the game board P5 is displayed in the approximate center area of the screen, and an arc-like arrow image and an emphasized "V" are displayed on the image display imitating the game area P501. " is displayed overlappingly with animation etc. added to the character image. In addition, on the right side of the screen, in addition to the right hit notification P832, a V winning promotion notification P837 is displayed. The effect is to encourage the ball to enter the area P760).

In addition, during the execution of the "V winning promotion performance", if a game ball enters (passes) into the specific area P760 in the grand prize opening P751, that is, there is a "V winning", the "V winning performance" is executed. is executed. As an example, the "V winning effect" is an effect in which the letter "V" (V winning display P837) displayed at the bottom right of the screen in FIG. can be mentioned.

The "V winning promotion performance" can be displayed from a period called "small winning start demonstration" of the small winning game to during execution of a round (special game) of the small winning game. In addition, in the small winning game round (special game) of the pachinko gaming machine P of this embodiment, the process of opening the big prize opening P751 for a short time (about 0.120 seconds) and closing it for about 1 second is repeated 13 times. Therefore, during the opening period of approximately 1.560 seconds, the opening mode is such that it is almost certain that 10 game balls will enter the big winning hole P751 if there is no abnormality such as ball clogging.

FIG. 26 is displayed during the execution of the winning combination operation start demo (jackpot start demo), which is the timing when the small winning game in the small winning V ends and the transition to the jackpot game state due to the operation of the accessory continuous operation device. This is the display mode of the "jackpot type notification effect" that notifies the amount of balls that are put out.

In the "Jackpot type notification effect" of FIG. 26, two icon displays (Jackpot type icon 1P861 displayed as "BONUS" and Jackpot type icon 2P862 displayed as "TWIN_BONUS") are displayed as the jackpot type icon P860. ing. The jackpot type icon 1P861 that is displayed as "BONUS" is a small hit in the "Breakthrough Zone" due to the first fluctuation display of the second special symbol, that is, the fluctuation display of the second special symbol that started fluctuating in a high base state. This is an icon that is selected when the result is V, and it is an icon that suggests a transition to "battle mode" after one small win of V.

On the other hand, the jackpot type icon 2P862 displayed as "TWIN_BONUS" is an icon that is selected in the small hit V when any of the remaining four reservations in the "breakthrough zone" is a hit. As shown in 21, this is an icon that suggests a transition to a pseudo-jackpot game state (specific game) after the small hit V. In addition, during the "pseudo jackpot", the small win V (or jackpot) obtained during the "pseudo jackpot" from the production of the small win V (or jackpot) that triggered the transition to the "pseudo jackpot" Since the performance mode is such that a series of performance contents are executed until the performance is executed, the player can feel that the balls of two small winning V (or jackpot) are different from one small winning V (or jackpot). ) will be performed as if it had been obtained.

In the pachinko gaming machine P of this embodiment, in some parts of the "Breakthrough Zone" and "Battle Mode" (described later), one variation of the second special symbol that starts variation in the high base state and the remaining 4 pending Since a summary change is performed for the minute, a "jackpot type notification performance" is performed for the acquired small win V, and the player is notified of the small hit (jackpot ) is executed as a performance to notify the player of whether the jackpot type notification performance has been achieved. In addition, by checking the number of times the change is displayed in the simple drawing P802 and the simple hold display P814 during the execution of the summary change, it becomes obvious which one will be selected in the "Jackpot type notification effect", but Pachinko Unless the player is familiar with the specifications of the gaming machine, he or she will only be able to learn about the amount of balls won and put out through the "Jackpot Type Notification".

Figure 27 shows the small hit V (jackpot) after “TWIN_BONUS”, which is a performance related to the small hit V (jackpot) that was won and executed with the remaining balance of “Breakthrough Zone”, “Battle Mode”, and “Pseudo Jackpot” pending. ) is a diagram showing an example of the effect inside. In the example of this figure, as shown by the round display P820 displayed on the right side of the screen, the first of the two "Small hit V/Jackpot (Special chart 2)" executed over the "pseudo jackpot" This shows that the fifth round of the small winning V to be executed (counting the small winning game as the first round) is being executed.

In the round display P820 shown in FIG. 27, the right column shows the number of rounds of small hit V (jackpot) executed in advance among the two “small hit V/jackpot (special figure 2)”, and the executed rounds. The left column shows the number of rounds scheduled to be executed in the small win V (big win) obtained in the "pseudo jackpot" which is a specific game. In addition, in FIG. 27, the left column of the round display P820 shows the number of rounds of the small win V (jackpot) being executed, since there is a considerable possibility that the small win V (jackpot) will not occur during the "pseudo jackpot". Compared to the round display P820 in the right column to be displayed, the display is configured so as not to be clearly displayed, such as a semi-transparent display.

FIG. 28 is a diagram showing an example of an effect display during a "pseudo jackpot" which is a specific game. During the "pseudo jackpot" of a specific game, although the game is not in a special game state (during a jackpot game or a small win game), a performance display is performed as if the special game is continuing.

In the effect display example during the "pseudo jackpot" shown in Figure 28, an animation of a group of cat-shaped spherical objects moving from the back of the screen to the front is displayed, and at the top of the screen, "TWIN_BONUS_V waiting... ” is displayed. In addition, the round display P820 continues to display the number of rounds of the small hit V (jackpot) that is executed in advance among the two "small hit V / jackpot (special figure 2)", and the left column of the round display P820 remains in a semi-transparent state to indicate that it is waiting for the subsequent small win V (big win). Note that the presentation display during the "pseudo jackpot" is not limited to the one that always executes the same animation as in the example shown, but can also be configured so that the player can select the content of the animation, the content of the BGM (song), etc. at any time. It's okay.

In addition, during the "pseudo jackpot", the player must win the small hit V (jackpot) by causing the ball to enter the second starting winning hole P721 and receiving the special symbol lottery of the second special symbol. Even during the performance of a "pseudo jackpot" that looks like between rounds of a jackpot, it is necessary for the player to shoot the game ball toward the right area P501R of the gaming area P501. Therefore, as shown at the bottom of the production example in Fig. 28, in addition to the normal right-handed hitting notification P832 in which the character says, ``Continue hitting right,'' there is also a production display that urges the need to shoot the game ball. It has become.

Furthermore, the pachinko gaming machine P of this embodiment has the setting suggestion shown in FIG. 28 in order to motivate the player to continue hitting right during the execution of a "pseudo jackpot" in which the performance display appears to be between rounds. A production object P870 is displayed. In this example, as the setting suggestion effect object P870, an object similar to the cat-shaped spherical object in the animation of the "pseudo jackpot" effect is displayed moving from the right to the left of the screen so that it can be easily distinguished from other objects. This is one example. In the pachinko gaming machine P of this embodiment, the display of the setting suggestion effect object P870 includes a specification in which a display lottery is performed with a predetermined probability for each set value every time a ball enters the second starting winning hole P721, and a second special symbol. Examples include a specification in which a display lottery is performed with a predetermined probability for each set value as a variation effect for each variation.

In addition, "pseudo jackpot" is a game state in which the high base state continues 95 times, but until the 94th variation display, the main control board P40 refers to the special variation pattern table (variation pattern table for pseudo jackpot). By doing so, the variation pattern related to the second special symbol is configured such that a short variation of about 0.5 seconds to 1 second is likely to be selected. Since the probability of winning a small hit is extremely high at 1/9.1, it is likely that a small hit (jackpot) will be obtained during the 94 fluctuations that repeat short-term fluctuations. If the small hit (jackpot) is not drawn until the fluctuation display of , the effect display during the "pseudo jackpot" shown in Figure 28 is stopped, and the final fluctuation of the high base state of the "battle mode" described later and the remaining 4 pieces are held. Shifts to an effect display state that is approximately the same as the summary fluctuation of minutes. At this time, the display of "TWIN_BONUS" at the top of the screen and the jackpot effect such as the round display P820 are also terminated.

The reason for shifting to the "battle mode" production display state (production mode) at the 95th rotation variation display is that the variation display of the second special symbol up to the 94th rotation is likely to be a short variation. Due to this trend, it is necessary to display a long-term fluctuating display at the 95th rotation to give the player some leeway to hold the second special symbol, while at the same time, during the long-term fluctuating display at the 95th rotation. By making effective use of the effects prepared in other production modes and performing effects for the final fluctuation of the high base state and for up to 4 remaining pendants, we will be able to provide players with even the slightest effect. The purpose is to provide interest.

Figure 29 shows a small hit V (jackpot) during the “pseudo jackpot” (within 94 rotations) which is a specific game, and a small hit when the second “small hit V/jackpot (special figure 2)” is being executed. This is an effect image that can be displayed during the winning game and the winning combination operation start demonstration period. For small hit V (jackpot) during "pseudo jackpot" and small hit V (jackpot) other than the summary fluctuation of battle mode described later, the specification is to shift to "battle mode" after small hit V (jackpot). , the above-described "jackpot type notification effect" is not executed, and an alternative effect display such as a blessing image by a character is displayed. Moreover, when the second "Small hit V/Jackpot (special figure 2)" is started, the round display P820 switches from a transparent state to a clear state. Note that the timing at which the "V" indicating a small winning game and the "○" indicating a jackpot game in the round display P820 become clear may be shifted. Specifically, when a small winning game is started, the display of "V" becomes clear, and when the game ball enters (passes) the specific area P760 in the big winning opening P751, "○" indicating the jackpot game is displayed. ” can be clearly displayed.

In addition, as a modified example, as a lottery result of the second special symbol, a plurality of small winnings V (jackpots) with different numbers of rounds and small winnings V (jackpots) with different types of specific game states after the end are provided. In this case, regarding the small win V (jackpot) that was a hit in the high base state, we will notify you about the number of rounds (ball amount) of the current small win V (jackpot) and the type of specific game after the end. It may also be configured to execute a jackpot type notification effect.

As a modification of the production example during the "pseudo jackpot", the production example shown in FIG. 28 is configured so that the remaining number of games display P841 of the specific game during the "pseudo jackpot" is not displayed. At the timing when the number of games becomes 10 or less, the remaining number of games display P841 may be configured to display "Remaining_10", and the second "Small hit V/Jackpot (special figure 2)" Regarding the round display P820, when the number of remaining games for the "pseudo jackpot" is low (below 10) or when the production mode switches to "battle mode", the display mode is made more unclear. Alternatively, it may be configured to be hidden.

As another modification of the production example during the "pseudo jackpot", if it is determined from the advance judgment information that a hold has occurred during the "pseudo jackpot" where the winning variation related to the second special symbol is executed, the production The control board P41 is configured to immediately notify the fact that the second special symbol that is a hit has been suspended using the effect display device P80, the effect lamp P82, the speaker P83, the effect accessory P560, etc. , Even if a reservation related to the second special symbol that becomes a hit occurs after the notification that a reservation related to the second special symbol that becomes a win occurs, the same notification will be continuously made, or a more noticeable production mode will be used. It may be configured such that it is possible to notify that multiple winning rights have been acquired.

(battle mode)
Next, an example of the effect display of the specific game "battle mode" will be explained using FIGS. 30 to 32. FIG. 30 is a diagram showing the first half of the battle mode, and FIGS. 31 and 32 are examples of the final fluctuation (sixth fluctuation) in the high base state of the "battle mode" and the summary fluctuation effect for the remaining maximum of 4 pieces. FIG.

《Battle mode first half》
FIG. 30 is an example of an effect display related to the first half of the battle mode (from the first variation to the fifth variation of the second special symbol of "battle mode"). The "battle mode" performance is a performance that notifies the player of the acquisition of a small win V (big win) depending on whether the friendly character can defeat the enemy character.

Specifically, the battle between the friendly character and the enemy character is staged with each change, and when the enemy gauge P883 reaches "0" (all gone), it becomes a small hit V (big win). will be notified. In addition, an ally gauge is displayed at the bottom right of the screen, and it can be increased or decreased using the special symbol lottery result of the second special symbol that is changing and the preliminary judgment information regarding the reservation of the second special symbol that is pending. The player is informed that the expectation level of winning V (big win) is increasing (or the expectation level is low).

On the right side of the screen in the production example shown in FIG. 30, a chance up icon display P880 is displayed. The display content of the chance up icon display P880 is determined using the special symbol lottery result of the second special symbol that is changing and the preliminary determination information regarding the suspension of the second special symbol that is being suspended. During a variable display that corresponds to the variable display of symbols or a variable display that corresponds to the variable display of special symbols from the next time onwards, an icon is displayed that suggests that a chance-up display will be displayed to give the ally character an advantage. It becomes.

Among the chance up icon display P880, the item chance up icon P881 is displayed in the upper row, and the character chance up icon P882 is displayed in the lower row. Item chance up icons are icons that suggest that an ally character's attack will be more advantageous (enemy gauge P883 will decrease more easily), such as an "attack power UP icon", "special move icon", or "weapon icon". The character chance up icon P882 is an icon that suggests that a chance up performance that increases the expectation of a jackpot will occur by performing a performance related to an increase or decrease in the ally gauge P884 according to the appearing character.

There are a plurality of icons in the item chance up icon P881 and the character chance up icon P882, which are the chance up icon display P880, and are configured so that the expected degree of small hit V (big hit) can differ depending on the type displayed. However, if a newly acquired higher-ranking icon is displayed where icon 1 is displayed, the item chance up icon P881 or character chance up icon P882 will be updated to the newly acquired icon. It may be configured to do so.

In addition, the item chance up icon P881 and the character chance up icon P882 may each indicate the occurrence of a different chance up effect, or if a specific combination is displayed, the two icons will work at the same time to increase the expectation of a jackpot. It may be configured such that a big chance up effect of 1, which greatly increases the chance, occurs.

《Last half of battle mode: summary change》
Next, an explanation will be given of a performance example of the "battle mode final fluctuation performance" executed for the high base state final fluctuation (sixth fluctuation) of the "battle mode" and the remaining maximum of four pending changes.

"Battle Mode Final Variation Production" is a production in which the winning/failure lottery results (including preliminary judgment information) for 5 variations are announced all at once, similar to the production of "Breakthrough Zone", and the composition of the production is the same as that of "Breakthrough Zone". , consists of a ``pending charge effect (battle mode)'' and a ``battle mode final battle effect.'' For the sixth variation display of the second special symbol of the specific game "Battle Mode" in which the "Battle Mode Final Variation Production" is executed, refer to the special variation pattern table (Variation Pattern Table for Battle Mode Final Variation), A fluctuation pattern of about 1 minute is selected, and about 30 seconds after the start of the fluctuation is composed of "holding charge effect (battle mode)", and after the end of "holding charge effect (battle mode)" Shift to "Battle Mode Final Battle Production". Incidentally, for the variable display of the second special symbols for the remaining four pending symbols, a variable pattern of about 1 second is selected, similar to the "breakthrough zone".

In the "retention charge effect (battle mode)" shown in FIG. 31, an effect display is performed that prompts the player to aim for the second starting prize opening P721 and generate a hold related to the second special symbol (for example, at the bottom center of the screen Nearby, there is a display that says ``Collect power (hold) by hitting right!!''). In addition, the ally gauge P884 moves from the bottom left of the screen to the center and displays the character string "CHARGE" and an arrow, thereby accumulating the ally gauge P884 (a mode that suggests that the expectation of a jackpot is high) ), a performance display is performed to urge the player to play right.

When the player causes the second special symbol to be suspended in accordance with the instructions for the "Hold Charge Performance (Battle Mode)", a "P" (Power A pending object P811 written as "Initials" is displayed, or a pending object P811 in a chance mode that suggests acquiring (stocking) an item chance up icon P881 (or character chance up icon P882) is displayed. These accumulated pending objects are displayed on the ally gauge P884 and the chance up icon display P880 at a predetermined timing (for example, 25 seconds after the fluctuation starts), and the ally gauge P884 increases or decreases and the chance increases. Acquire (stock) the icon display P880.

In addition, as a further application example of the effect using the hold display area P810 of the "hold charge effect (battle mode)", in a situation where 4 holds of the second special symbol have been accumulated, go to the second starting prize opening P721. When a ball enters, the once-displayed pending object P811 is displayed in a display mode that increases the expectation of a jackpot (for example, from "P" pending to "P" pending with a flame effect, or the character chance up icon It may be configured to perform an effect display (a display that increases the hold chance) such as a change to a hold that suggests acquisition.

In addition, as another application example, the pending display area P811 is moved and displayed in a FIFO (First In First Out) method, and the pending object P811 that has jumped out of the pending display area P811 while four second special symbols are being held is displayed. Depending on the mode, effects may be displayed on the ally gauge P884 and the chance up icon display P880 so as to increase the expectation of a jackpot.

When the "suspended charge effect (battle mode)" ends, the process shifts to the "battle mode final battle effect" shown in FIG. 32. "Battle mode final battle production" is a production display in which an ally character performs a special move, and is among the final ally gauge P884 display format and 5 variations subject to summary variation in "Pending charge production (battle mode)" Depending on whether there is a hit or not, the ally character performs an attack on the enemy character according to the expected degree of small hit V (big hit).

At this time, depending on the type of special move performed by the ally character, the player is prompted to operate the performance button P381 to create a performance to reduce the enemy gauge P883, and the content of the performance changes depending on the operating state of the performance button P381. It is possible to select from among several presentation patterns, such as a button effect that allows for a button effect, or a display of results without using a button effect. The types of button effects include a "single press" effect that displays the result by pressing the effect button P381 only once, a "sequential press effect" that displays the result by pressing the effect button P381 multiple times, and a effect lever P382. There are types such as "lever operation effects" that let you operate. In addition, in the "battle mode final variation effect" of the pachinko gaming machine P of this embodiment, the effect pattern that does not execute the button effect is configured to have a higher expectation level. For example, in the "hold charge effect" There is an example in which the button effect is not executed when a hit is definitively notified by the ally gauge P884 emitting light in rainbow colors.

In addition, as mentioned above, if the small hit V (jackpot) is not reached by the 94th spin during the "pseudo jackpot", the battle mode will be activated at the 95th spin. The control of rotation and remaining hold (variation pattern selection and production content) is the same as the summary variation in the latter half of the battle mode. That is, at the 95th rotation of the "pseudo jackpot", the "pending charge effect (battle mode)" and the "battle mode final battle effect" are performed with fluctuations of about one minute.

《Example of use of ally gauge P884》
The ally gauge P884 in the "battle mode" represents the energy of the ally character, and adopts a mode that suggests that the higher the number, the higher the expectation of a small hit V (big hit). As a modified example, during the pending charge performance of the summary fluctuation in the latter half of the battle mode, the blank area and colored area of the ally gauge P884 displayed at the start of the fluctuation are reversed, and the display of the ally gauge P884 at the beginning of the summary fluctuation is expected to be a jackpot. It is possible to adopt a presentation method in which the less the probability is, the higher the expectation of winning in the summary variation (up to 5 variations at the end of the battle mode).

By doing this, in the first half of the battle mode, the more the ally gauge P884 is, the higher the expectation of a jackpot will be, and when the second half of the battle mode starts (before the highlighted display), the less the ally gauge P884 is, the better the chance. It is possible to create a novel performance display.

Also, by configuring in this way, it is possible to display a character that decreases the ally gauge P884 of an ally character on the character chance up icon P882, for example, so that the character chance up icon P882 can be configured to display a character that decreases the ally gauge P884 of an ally character. It is possible to create more interest in the dramatic interference (increase/decrease in the ally gauge P884) on the ally gauge P884 by the character appearing in the up icon P882. For example, in the "Hold Charge Performance (Battle Mode)", a character chance up icon P882 is made to appear indicating a decrease in ally gauge P884, and after a performance to decrease ally gauge P884 is performed, a reversal of ally gauge P884 is performed. An example is given.

Here, several modifications that can be adopted for the pachinko gaming machine P of this embodiment will be explained. Note that the modifications described below may be applied to the Pachinko gaming machine P of this embodiment in combination with a plurality of modifications.

(Modification 1)
The pachinko game machine P of this embodiment is configured to control whether to control the "battle mode" or the "pseudo jackpot" after executing the "small hit V/jackpot (special figure 2)". (Special Figure 2)" was decided depending on the gaming state (base state) at the timing at which the winning variation started.

In order to adopt the method in this embodiment, information such as flags related to the special game to be executed is required when the result of the special symbol lottery performed at the start of fluctuation is "Small hit V / Jackpot (special symbol 2)". In addition to setting, information related to the gaming state (the number of times to control to the high base state, various setting values, It is necessary to also store the offset value for calling, etc., so that it can be executed.

Here, as a modification example 1 regarding whether to be controlled to "battle mode" or "pseudo jackpot" after executing "Small hit V/Jackpot (Special chart 2)", "Small hit V/Jackpot (Special chart 2)" is modified. )", it may be determined whether to control the "battle mode" or "pseudo jackpot" after the special symbol is stopped and displayed. As a specification to be determined after the special symbol is stopped and displayed, for example, the type of specific game of "Small hit V/Jackpot (special figure 2)" when winning a V prize during a small hit game, which is the timing when the transition to a jackpot is certain. One example is the specifications that determine the

Here, in the pachinko gaming machine P of this embodiment, as explained in this embodiment, the final game in the high base state is When the variation is executed, a control is adopted in which the gaming state (base state) is changed when the variation of the special symbol stops.

Therefore, as Modification 1, "Specification to determine after the special symbol is stopped and displayed (Specification to determine the type of specific game of "Small win V/Jackpot (special figure 2)" when winning V during small win game)" By adopting this, the final variation of a high base state such as the 1st variation of "Breakthrough Zone" and the 6th variation of "Battle Mode", and the variation display of special symbols that are collectively varied as a production, will be changed to "Small hit". When determining the type of specific game after executing "V/Jackpot (Special Figure 2)", the determination will be made under a situation where the base is controlled to be low, so there will always be a "pseudo jackpot" that is advantageous to the player. ” can be controlled so that the transition to ” is obtained as a judgment result.

In other words, if a player wins when a high-expectation performance is displayed in which a maximum of 5 fluctuations are executed as a lump sum fluctuation, the player will always move to an advantageous specific game called a "pseudo jackpot". ``Breakthrough Zone Battle Effect'' and ``Battle Mode Final Battle Effect'', which are effects that correspond to changes in the total, will be provided as effects that will further increase the attention of players and provide highly entertaining effects. Can be done.

(Modification 2)
The pachinko gaming machine P of this embodiment adopted a control method of changing the gaming state (base state) to a low base state in accordance with the stop display of the special symbol in the final variation of the high base state. The timing for changing the base state) from the high base state to the low base state may be set to a different timing.

Specifically, as a second modification, the timing for changing the gaming state (base state) from the high base state to the low base state in the final fluctuation of the high base state is set to "while the final fluctuation of the high base state is displaying the fluctuation." 2. When the reservation related to the special symbol reaches the upper limit value" may be adopted.

In the pachinko game machine P of this embodiment, when transitioning from a high base state to a low base state in a specific game, it is important to maximize the remaining reservation. A method is adopted in which the gaming state (base state) is changed from the high base state to the low base state when the hold value related to the second special symbol reaches the upper limit while the final fluctuation of the high base state is being displayed. However, there is no effect on the gameplay (degree of advantage for the player).

In addition, in the pachinko gaming machine P of this embodiment, the gaming state is shifted to the low base state when the special symbol is stopped and displayed, which is the final change of the high base state, and the symbol fixation time for the special symbol stop display is made longer. By doing so, it was possible to prevent the occurrence of a situation in which the normal electric accessory P770 was activated during the first fluctuation after transitioning to the low base state, but according to the specifications of modification 2, the special symbol Because it is possible to make the normal electric accessory P770 difficult to operate during the variable display without waiting for the stop display of the special symbol, the symbol fixing time when the special symbol is stopped is shortened. become.

In addition, when modification 2 is adopted and the symbol fixing time is shortened, by intentionally suspending the second special symbol just before the end of the final fluctuation in the high base state, the retention time after the transition to the low base state There is a concern that a state in which the normal electric accessory P770 is activated at the start of the first variation may be created, but it is possible to select multiple patterns of variation patterns (variation display time) of the special symbol in the final variation of the high base state, and the timing of the variation end. There is a method to avoid intentional capture by making it difficult to aim, or by setting the activation termination condition for the normal electric accessory P770 to be 1 or 2 balls (preferably 1 ball) entering the second starting prize opening P721. I can consider it.

(Modification 3)
The pachinko gaming machine P of this embodiment has small winning symbols that trigger a 10-round jackpot (small winning V) as a small winning game (small winning V) that is executed when the result of the special symbol lottery is a small winning. is selected, and as shown in FIG. 21, the configuration is configured so that the game always moves to a specific game, either "battle mode" or "pseudo jackpot". It may be configured to have a small winning symbol that executes a small winning V (jackpot) with a round number other than 10 rounds (for example, 4 rounds, 7 rounds, etc.) as the number of rounds of winning V, or the game state (base state) ), it may be configured to have a small winning symbol that does not activate the electric chew support function after the small winning V (big win), that is, does not cause the transition to the high base state.

When adopting a configuration having a small winning pattern (referred to as "small winning pattern without time saving" or "small winning pattern without support") that does not activate the electric chew support function after the small winning V (jackpot), as illustrated as modification 3, When the small winning symbol without time saving is stopped and displayed and the small winning V is executed, it becomes difficult to generate a hold related to the new second special symbol after the small winning V (jackpot), and the consecutive winning state continues. This becomes difficult. In addition, when configuring the small winning symbol without time saving to win with a certain probability (for example, about 10% of winning the small winning), the small winning itself should be It is preferable to increase the probability of winning and balance the ease of winning multiple games.

On the other hand, by mixing such small winning symbols without time saving, for example, if there are two or more reservations that will trigger a small win V in the second special symbol currently changing and the reservation related to the second special symbol. If the previous small hit V is a small winning symbol with no time saving, and the symbol that triggers the subsequent small winning V is not a small winning symbol with no time saving, the gaming state to which the next small winning V is transferred after the small winning V is a small winning symbol with no time saving. In the pachinko game machine P of this embodiment, which does not have winning symbols, it is a "battle mode", whereas in the third modification, it becomes a "pseudo jackpot", and the gameplay changes when multiple small wins occur in succession. There is also the advantage that it can be attached.

In addition, when adopting a small winning pattern with no time saving, if a player wins a small winning without time saving during a series of games and there is a remaining hold, the player will be very interested in whether or not he will win with the remaining hold. is possible. In the pachinko gaming machine P of this embodiment, the variation time of the special symbol when the remaining pending, which is the pending that occurred in the high base state, is extinguished is determined by the "Special symbol 2 remaining pending consumption variation pattern table" (or " The structure was such that a short-time fluctuation pattern was selected by the "Low Base Time Special Figure 2 Fluctuation Pattern Table"), but after the execution of the small hit V based on such a small winning pattern without time saving, the special fluctuation pattern By using a table, a variation time of about 10 seconds to 1 minute is selected for each variation, and an effect display indicating whether or not a small win V (or jackpot) has been won for each variation instead of a summary variation. It is preferable to configure the system to perform the following.

(Modification 4)
In the pachinko gaming machine P of this embodiment, in the "Breakthrough Zone" and "Battle Mode", a summary fluctuation is executed for the remaining fluctuations of up to 4 pending changes from the final fluctuation of the high base state, and the high base state and low Although we have adopted a performance specification that notifies in which of the base states a small hit V (jackpot) has been obtained using a "jackpot type notification performance", in the pachinko gaming machine P of this embodiment, fluctuations are not displayed in the high base state. Since the control of the specific gaming state after the small hit V (jackpot) is changed depending on whether it is started or when the fluctuation is started in a low base state, the small win V (jackpot) is set to a high base. It may be considered preferable to make it possible for the player to recognize whether the second special symbol is obtained in the state or low base state as the performance content during the variable display of the second special symbol.

Therefore, as modification example 4, regarding the "Breakthrough Zone" and "Battle Mode", the variable display of the second special symbol in the high base state and the variable display of the second special symbol in the low base state where the types of specific games after the small hit V (jackpot) are different. 2. By adopting a method in which different display modes (states in which at least a portion of the display contents are different from each other) are executed with the variable display of special symbols, it is possible to change the effect between the high base state and the low base state. It can be configured so that it becomes clear to the player whether he or she has won a small win V (big win).

《Example of production when variation 4 is adopted for “breakthrough zone”》
The "Breakthrough Zone" of the Pachinko gaming machine P of this embodiment is designed to display "Hold Charge Effect" and "Breakthrough Zone Battle Effect" as effects for one change in the high base state and the change for up to four remaining holds. However, if a method of separating the performances of the high base state and the low base state as in Modified Example 4 is adopted, the following examples of performances can be considered.

In other words, the interest is in whether or not to obtain "Small hit V/Jackpot (Special chart 2)" after "Jackpot (Special chart 1)" and move to a consecutive winning state ("Battle mode" or "Pseudo jackpot"). In the "Breakthrough Zone" where the level of power increases, the performance content that separates the performance of high base state and low base state is the "Hold Charge & Logo Step-up performance" that is performed with one change in the high base state, and the "Hold Charge & Logo Step-up performance" that is performed over the remaining 4 holds. An example of this is the "remaining pending battle production".

"Pending Charge & Logo Step-up Performance" encourages players to accumulate 4 pending charges in the "Breakthrough Zone", while also allowing players to enter the "Battle Mode" with the "Small Hit V/Jackpot (Special Figure)". 2)" is a performance that informs you whether you have won or not. For example, "Put the game ball into the second starting prize opening to complete the "Battle Mode" logo! ” is displayed, then the character string “Battle Mode” is displayed, and depending on the ball entering the second starting winning hole P721 (occurrence of reservation related to the second special symbol and over winning), “Battle Mode” is displayed. ” character string gradually changes its display mode, for example, it lights up one character at a time and switches to red display, and when all of them are lit, it is notified of a win (when all of them are lit, a rainbow color display is displayed) , the color of the character string "Battle Mode" changes from blue, green, red, and gold, and finally, by operating the production button P381, the rainbow-colored light is emitted to notify you of a win. A performance display is executed.

The "remaining pending battle performance" can be exemplified in a performance mode similar to the "breakthrough zone battle performance" of the pachinko gaming machine P of this embodiment. In addition, at this time, a configuration may be adopted in which an effect in which an ally character and an enemy character confront each other in a collective variation is performed for the remaining pending characters, which is a maximum of four characters. Alternatively, a configuration may be adopted in which an effect in which an ally character and an enemy character confront each other every time the remaining hold changes (a mode of effect similar to the "first half of battle mode") is executed. In addition, when making a maximum of 4 fluctuations of the remaining reservation into a lump fluctuation, it is necessary to configure the fluctuation pattern related to the first special symbol of the remaining reservation to be a special fluctuation pattern.

In addition, during the execution of "Hold Charge & Logo Step Up Effect", if the fluctuation display of the high base state is off and there is a hit in the preliminary determination information of the hold that will remain on hold, the logo step up mode will be changed. , After making a rainbow-colored mode to notify the win (first confirmed notification), add the characters "BURST!" to the "Battle Mode" character string and change the character string "Battle Mode_BURST!" to the rainbow color. The display mode (second confirmed notification) may be made displayable. When "Battle Mode_BURST!" is displayed, the game advances to "Remaining Pending Battle Performance" and enters a state where it waits for winning fluctuations. In addition, after the first confirmation notification, there is a possibility that the player will stop firing the game ball toward the second starting winning hole P721, and a situation may occur in which the step cannot be advanced. A second confirmed notification may be executed without going through the confirmed notification, or a button effect that causes the effect button P381 to be operated at the end of the effect, regardless of whether the rainbow color (first confirmed notification) has been reached. It may be configured such that the notification is generated and promoted to the second confirmed notification.

《Example of production when variation 4 is used in “battle mode”》
Next, in the "battle mode" of the pachinko gaming machine P of this embodiment, depending on the timing of acquiring the "small hit V/jackpot (special figure 2)", a specific game to be transferred after the special game (jackpot, small win V) In order to notify whether the is a "battle mode" or a "pseudo jackpot", a production mode that is in a high base state and a production mode in a low base state are separated, and at least partially different productions are displayed. Now, a method (modification 4) for making it easier for players to understand the type of specific game after the special game will be explained.

In the "battle mode" of the pachinko gaming machine P of this embodiment, the "battle mode first half" effect is performed during the first to fifth fluctuations of the high base state, and the final fluctuation of the high base state, the sixth fluctuation, and the low It consists of a "reserved charge effect (battle mode)" and a "battle mode final battle effect" that are performed with a summary change of up to 4 remaining holds that are displayed in the base state, but modification 4 has been adopted. In "Battle Mode", the "first half of Battle Mode" will be performed from the 1st variation in the high base state to the 6th variation (final variation), and the fluctuation display for up to 4 pending changes will be displayed in the low base state. It is possible to perform a "battle mode final battle performance" which is a summary variation.

Here, in the pachinko gaming machine P of this embodiment, a special variation pattern is selected by the special variation pattern table (variation pattern table for battle mode final variation) for the variation display of the special symbol, which is the final variation in the high base state. However, in Modification 4, the specification is such that the lump variation is executed for the maximum of 4 remaining pending symbols, so the second special symbol that is first consumed in the low base state is A special variation pattern is selected by a special variation pattern table (battle mode final variation variation pattern table) when a variation display is performed.

In addition, when executing the "battle mode" that adopts modification 4, the timing at which the summary variation is executed is after the start of variation of the remaining hold related to the second special symbol, so the gaming state is a low base state, It is already in a state where it is not possible to accumulate reservations. Therefore, in the case of the "battle mode" in which modification 4 is adopted, the "reserved charge performance (battle mode)" is not included as a summary variation performance. However, if the second special symbol is not held by the end of the sixth variation in the high base state, the probability that the player will be able to obtain the "Small hit V/Jackpot (special symbol 2)" will decrease significantly. Therefore, it is necessary to prompt the player to generate a reservation related to the second special symbol in the sixth variation of the high base state.

Therefore, in the "Battle Mode" that adopts Modification 4, in the final variation (6th variation) of the high base state, the "Battle Mode First Half" production, which is the same production mode production from the 1st variation to the 5th variation, is While this is being executed, in order to give the player time to suspend the second special symbol, a special variation pattern table ("Variation pattern table for final variation in the first half of battle mode") is used to start from 30 seconds. It is configured to display a variation of the special symbol for about 40 seconds, and in the final variation (6th variation) of the high base state, the number of reservations related to the current second special symbol is indicated, and the second starting prize opening P721 ``Second special symbol retention increase promotion performance'' is executed to encourage the player to enter the ball.

"Second special symbol retention increase promotion performance" is a "battle mode first half" performance in a situation where the "battle mode first half" performance is displayed in the same way as up to the fifth variation of the high base state on the performance display device P80. For example, an arrow image having a display area partition corresponding to the reservation related to the second special symbol divided into four parts in the lower right direction of the screen of the production display device P80 (near the second starting prize opening P721). A conceivable method is to display ``with reservation'' and change the display area divided into four sections to a mode indicating ``with reservation'' every time a reservation related to the second special symbol occurs. Furthermore, in addition to the arrow image, a character or a message such as "Aim for the second starting prize opening!" may be displayed to encourage the player to enter the second starting winning hole P721. , when there are four pending items related to the second special symbol, characters such as "OK" or "Ready" may be displayed to notify that the objective has been achieved.

In addition, in the "second special symbol holding increase promotion performance", the display area section divided into four of the arrow image indicating the presence of holding is made using advance determination information, as in the pachinko gaming machine P of this embodiment. An effect (see FIG. 31) may be performed, such as displaying an image for acquiring the icon displayed in the chance-up icon display P880 as a pending image.

(Modification 5)
The pachinko gaming machine P of this embodiment is configured with only 10 rounds of "Small hit V/Jackpot (Special figure 2)", but the special symbol that triggered the "Small hit V/Jackpot (Special figure 2)" It can also be configured to be able to execute "Small hit V/Jackpot (special figure 2)" with different numbers of rounds (for example, 4 rounds, 7 rounds) depending on the stop display mode.

At this time, the number of rounds is estimated based on the performance display during the fluctuating display of the special symbol that triggers "Small hit V / Jackpot (special figure 2)", the start demonstration performance of the small hit game, or the stop display mode of the special symbol. It is possible, and a look-ahead effect that guarantees a win, or a look-ahead effect that has an extremely high expectation of a win, can be configured to be executed against the subsequent hold during the execution of a win fluctuation, or multiple wins are confirmed ( Alternatively, if a look-ahead effect with a high expectation of winning is configured to be executed simultaneously on multiple holds, the preceding ``Small hit V/Jackpot (special map 2)'' is judged to be a hit with a small number of rounds. In this case, by intentionally not making a V win, and intentionally executing the subsequent "Small Hit V/Jackpot (Special Figure 2)" in a low base state, you can discard the winnings of a small number of rounds and make the subsequent winnings. It is estimated that a strategy (fraudulent game) can be executed in which the gaming state after 2000 is essentially a guaranteed win.

As a countermeasure against these strategies (illegal games), if you have already obtained winning information as preliminary judgment information or special symbol lottery result information regarding this variable display, we will suspend the newly generated second special symbol. The configuration is such that the pre-reading performance is not executed based on the advance judgment information for the game, or the number of rounds is determined without depending on the stop display mode of the special symbol, when a ball enters (passes through) the specific area P760 during the small winning game. It may also be configured such that the lottery is held at a certain timing.

(Modification 6)
In the pachinko game machine P of this embodiment, in the final variation of the high base state of the "Breakthrough Zone" and "Battle Mode" where the bulk variation is executed, and the variation display for the maximum of 4 remaining pending items, the pachinko game machine P can hit with any of the pending changes ( In the case of a small hit), the special symbol fluctuation display in the high base state will be displayed in the "Jackpot type notification performance" executed in the special game start demo of "Small hit V / Jackpot (special figure 2)". The system was configured to notify whether the fluctuating display of special symbols in the low base state was a hit (small hit) or whether the fluctuating display of the special symbol in the low base state was a hit (small hit). By displaying the content of an ally character defeating an enemy character by repeating a specific special move, etc.), or by promoting the promotion of decorative symbols, you can win with a fluctuating display of up to 4 remaining items (small win). It may be configured to notify that this has occurred.

In addition, before executing the "Jackpot type notification effect", if a hit (small hit) is announced within the fluctuating display of up to 4 remaining pending items, the "Jackpot type notification effect" will be executed. The jackpot type icons P860 of "Performance" may all be displayed as "TWIN_BONUS", or an alternative effect may be displayed for the period in which the "Jackpot type notification effect" is executed.

In the Pachinko game machine P of this embodiment and the Pachinko game machines P of Modifications 1 to 6 configured as described above, "small hit V" is adopted as the specification of the gaming machine, and a high base Although we adopted a method of changing the type of specific game to be played afterwards (after the jackpot game) depending on whether the small hit V (jackpot) was obtained in the state or the low base state, similar game characteristics, In other words, ``The jackpot depends on whether the timing of the jackpot in the special symbol lottery of the random value (random value of the second special symbol) obtained from the starting opening related to the normal electric accessory was in the high base state or the low base state. If the specification of the gaming machine is such that it can provide "gaming properties that vary the types of subsequent specific games," it is possible to implement controls and performances similar to those described in this embodiment and each modification example. Needless to say.

An example of the specifications of a gaming machine that can provide a similar game experience is a gaming machine in a low probability range where the jackpot probability at low probability (when the probability fluctuation function is not activated) is about 1/100, A V-ST machine (ST 10 times) with a jackpot probability of 1/18 at high probability (when the probability fluctuation function is activated), and the number of times the high base state of "Breakthrough Zone", "Battle Mode", and "Pseudo Jackpot" continues is , 1, 6, and 100 gaming machine specifications can be given as examples.

In the case of such a specification, a special period may occur even after the "Breakthrough Zone" ends, in which special drawing 1 is drawn with a high probability, but this period may be replaced by a special production period (for example, a low probability / It can also be set as a period of stay in the production mode that does not occur in the low base state. Note that after the 11th variation of the pseudo jackpot, the probability is low/high base state, so the probability of not being able to win the jackpot during the "pseudo jackpot" is higher compared to the pachinko game machine P of this embodiment. Since it is not a probability state, it is not appropriate to shift to the "battle mode" just before the end of the "pseudo jackpot", so it is preferable to configure the ending effect to occur while the "pseudo jackpot" screen remains.

[Second example]
The pachinko game machine P of the second embodiment has various characteristic structures in addition to having the above-mentioned basic technology and this embodiment as its basic structure. Hereinafter, the basic technology and the differences from this embodiment will be mainly explained, and the explanation of the common points will be omitted or simplified. Among the elements constituting the pachinko game machine P of the second embodiment, the same reference numerals are given to the elements that are the same as or correspond to the elements explained in the underlying technology or the present embodiment.

Although details will be described later, the pachinko game machine P of the second embodiment is a pachinko game machine that employs "small win V" like the present embodiment. In the pachinko gaming machine P of the second embodiment, the probability of winning a jackpot or small hit in the special symbol lottery related to the second special symbol is 100%, and "the reservation related to the second special symbol will occur." '' or ``Winning the normal symbol lottery, opening the normal electric accessory 770 provided in the second starting prize opening P721, and allowing the game ball to enter the ball'' is a jackpot game (including small winning V). This indirectly means acquiring the right to execute.

Therefore, the pachinko gaming machine P of the second embodiment generates a special period in which it is easy for the ball to enter the second starting prize opening P721 related to acquiring the right of special symbol lottery of the second special symbol, Based on the reservation related to the second special symbol generated in a special period, a jackpot game (small win V) is executed by the number of reservations corresponding to the special symbol lottery of the second special symbol. With this configuration, the pachinko game machine P of the second embodiment has the potential to execute multiple jackpot games (small win V) in succession and obtain a large amount of game balls at once. It is possible to provide a game experience to the player (*because the Pachinko gaming machine P of the second embodiment employs the second special symbol priority digestion control).

Below are three implementations that make up the pachinko gaming machine P of the second embodiment, which increases the interest by changing the possibility of reservation related to the special symbol lottery of the second special symbol with respect to the special period. An example will be explained, but before that, the basic configuration of the Pachinko gaming machine P of the second embodiment will be explained.

(Board configuration)
FIG. 33 is a diagram conceptually showing an example of a board configuration (arrangement of winning devices) that can be adopted in the Pachinko gaming machine P of the second embodiment.

Approximately in the center of the gaming area P501 of the pachinko gaming machine P of the second embodiment, an opening is formed so that the performance display device P80 can be viewed, and a frame member of a center decoration unit (not shown) is installed in the opening. It is attached to form a partition section inside the gaming area P501.

Below the performance display device P80, there is provided a first starting prize opening P711A into which a game ball flowing down the left side game area (left side area P501L) of the performance display device P80 enters, and further below that is a first winning opening P711A (not shown). An out port P790 is provided. Further, a general winning opening P731 is arranged in the lower area of the left side area P501L of the effect display device P80. In other words, when a game ball is fired into the left side game area of the production display device P80, the ball enters the first starting winning hole P711A or the general winning hole P731, and it can be expected that a winning will occur. There is.

On the other hand, in the game area on the right side of the effect display device P80 (right side area P501R), as shown in FIG. 711B, a big prize opening P751 is arranged, and a game ball fired toward the right side game area of the effect display device P80 can win a prize.

Here, the first starting winning hole P711A and the first starting winning hole P711B are starting winning holes for acquiring the right related to the special symbol lottery of the first special symbol, and the second starting winning hole P721 is the starting winning hole P721. This is the starting prize opening for acquiring the rights related to the special symbol lottery of 2 special symbols. That is, in the pachinko gaming machine P of the second embodiment, even if the game ball is fired toward either the left side area P501L or the right side area P501R of the game area P501, the first starting winning hole P711A and the first starting winning hole P711B is configured so that the right for the special symbol lottery of the first special symbol can be acquired.

(spec)
The pachinko gaming machine P of the second embodiment is a pachinko gaming machine that adopts the "small win V" similar to the present embodiment, and the major difference from the present embodiment in terms of playability (gameability) is that the pachinko gaming machine P of the second embodiment The probability of a "small hit" or "jackpot" in the special symbol drawing for the special symbol is 100%, and the reservation related to the special symbol lottery for the second special symbol is the right for the jackpot game (small win V). They are different.

In addition, similarly to the present embodiment, the pachinko gaming machine P of the second embodiment also activates the electric chew support function (electronic support) function after each type of jackpot (including small hit V) to play a specific game (high base state). However, as a condition for ending a specific game (high base state) in the pachinko gaming machine P of the second embodiment, "variation based on special symbol drawing of the prescribed number of times of the first special symbol or the second special symbol" "The display has ended," or "the jackpot game (small win V) is executed." For example, if the specified number of times is set to one, the first special symbol is displayed one time. The configuration is such that the high base state can end even if

Although not described in detail, other design values (jackpot probability, number of prize balls for various winning holes, etc.) are not limited to those described in this embodiment, but may be set as appropriate according to the nature of the game. In the pachinko game machine P of the second embodiment, it is preferable to adopt the second special symbol priority consumption control, and the reason will be described later.

(Game progress procedure)
Next, the procedure for playing a game and the progress of the game in the Pachinko game machine P of the second embodiment will be explained. Here, in order to simplify the explanation, the conditions for ending the specific game (high base state) will be explained assuming that the "prescribed number of times" is one.

First, the player operates the handle P204 and fires a game ball toward the left side game area (left side area P501L) of the effect display device P80. The game ball launched into the left side area P501L enters the first starting winning hole P711A, the right of special symbol lottery related to the first special symbol is generated, and the special symbol lottery of the first special symbol is executed.

When a jackpot game is executed by the special symbol lottery of the first special symbol, the player increases the amount of operation of the handle P204 and directs the game ball toward the right side game area (right side area P501R) of the effect display device P80. Shoot a game ball. A game ball fired into the right side area P501R during the jackpot game enters the jackpot P751 and the first start winning slot P711B. At this time, when a game ball is fired toward the jackpot P751 during the jackpot game, at least one ball or more is configured to enter the first starting jackpot P711B, and during the jackpot game, the first It is configured so that the right to draw a special symbol lottery for a special symbol occurs. In addition, during the jackpot game, since it is controlled to a low base state (non-electric chew support state), there is almost no possibility of winning a prize in the second starting prize opening P721 related to the normal electric accessory P770.

When the jackpot game ends and the specific game (high base state) starts, if there is no suspension related to the special symbol lottery of the second special symbol, the special symbol lottery of the first special symbol that occurred during the jackpot game will be held. Fluctuation display starts. In the pachinko gaming machine P of the second embodiment, since the second special symbol priority consumption control is adopted, if the special symbol lottery of the second special symbol is suspended at the end of the jackpot game, the jackpot After the end, a variable display related to the special symbol lottery of the second special symbol is started.

In the Pachinko gaming machine P of the second embodiment, in a specific game (high base state) after the end of the jackpot, there is a variation that results in a jackpot in the special symbol lottery of the first special symbol, or a small win in the special symbol lottery of the second special symbol. When a fluctuation resulting in a jackpot is started, a short-time fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time) of, for example, 1 second is selected by a fluctuation pattern lottery, and a jackpot game (small win V) is executed immediately after the jackpot ends.

On the other hand, in a specific game (high base state), if a fluctuation display (loss fluctuation) in which the result of the special symbol lottery of the first special symbol becomes "lost" is started, for example, a long fluctuation pattern of 100 seconds ( The high base state will continue for about 100 seconds until the variable display of the first special symbol stops and ends.

The pachinko game machine P of the second embodiment aims at the game ball at the operating port P741 during a period (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "specific period") in which the first special symbol loses variation in a specific game. By playing a game that fires a , the normal electric accessory 770 provided in the second starting prize opening P721 is opened by a normal symbol lottery, and the game ball is entered into the second starting winning opening P721 to win a 100 second specified prize. Accumulating the rights to the jackpot game (small win V) during the period is the main play feature (game feature) for acquiring a large amount of game balls in a specific game.

Here, in the Pachinko gaming machine P of the second embodiment, the probability of "winning" in the normal symbol lottery in the high base state is set to, for example, 1/20, and the probability of "winning" in the normal symbol lottery in the high base state is set to 1/20, and the One cycle of the fluctuating display period of symbols, or the fluctuating display period of regular symbols related to one regular symbol lottery (win) and the operation period of a normal electric accessory, is approximately 5 seconds, and in a specific period of 100 seconds, approximately It is possible to perform 20 regular symbol drawings. In addition, as the operation end condition for the normal electric accessory 770, "the elapse of the specified opening time" or "the winning of one game ball" is determined, and the "win" of one normal symbol lottery is It is possible to enter one game ball into the 2-start winning hole P721, that is, one “hit” in the normal symbol lottery corresponds to acquiring the right for the jackpot game (small win V) once. .

In the pachinko gaming machine P of the second embodiment, a new special symbol lottery is not executed during a specific period of a specific game, and the jackpot (small hit V ), the effect display device P80 displays, as a decorative pattern P801, a pattern that notifies the player of the result of the normal pattern lottery, and provides the player with the right to win a jackpot (small win V). The occurrence of a state in which it is possible to win (an open state of the normal electric accessory 770 provided in the second starting prize opening P721) is notified.

If during a specific period (a period during which the deviation fluctuation of the first special symbol in a specific game is being executed) a hold is placed on the special symbol lottery of one or more second special symbols, after the end of the specific period, The special symbol lottery of the second special symbol and the jackpot game (small win V) are repeatedly executed by the number of holds related to the special symbol lottery of the second special symbol.

When all the reservations related to the special symbol drawing of the second special symbol that occurred during the specific period are gone and the last jackpot game (small win V) ends, the special symbol lottery of the first special symbol in the specific game (high base state) will be started again. The fluctuation display related to will start and the specific period will occur again. In the specific period, if the reservation related to the special symbol lottery of the second special symbol cannot be obtained, the specific game ends and the game returns to the normal game.

In the pachinko gaming machine P of the second embodiment that proceeds as described above, by using the second special symbol priority extinguishing control, the reservations related to the special symbol lottery of the second special symbol that occurred during the specific period are continuously extinguished. However, by continuously playing jackpot games (small winning V), the period for acquiring game balls can be condensed into a short period of time, making it easier to feel that you have acquired a large amount of game balls. have.

If the first special symbol priority extinguishing control or ball entry order extinguishing control is used, the first starting prize opening P711B will be activated during the period when the game ball is fired to the right area P501R in a specific game or jackpot game (small hit V). Under the situation where a ball enters the ball and the special symbol lottery of the second special symbol is suspended, a specific period occurs again and the period until the next jackpot game (small win V) occurs. This takes a long time, and there is a risk that it may be difficult for the player to feel that he or she has acquired a large number of game balls. It should be noted that this does not negate changing the Pachinko gaming machine P of the second embodiment to the first special symbol priority extinguishing control or the entry order extinguishing control, and if these controls are installed, the second special A specific period can be generated when there is a hold related to the special symbol drawing of the symbol, and overall the period during which games can be executed during the specific period increases, making it easier to obtain the hold related to the special symbol drawing of the second special symbol. There are also benefits.

As described above, the Pachinko game of the second embodiment is a Pachinko game machine that allows you to expect to acquire a large amount of game balls by playing one or more jackpot games based on one or more balls held in a specific period. The machine P has been described, and below, a pachinko game machine P which is made more interesting by further applying the pachinko game machine P of the second embodiment will be explained based on three embodiments.

In addition, in normal electric accessory control, after the operation end condition of the ordinary electric accessory 770 is satisfied, an effective extension period is set for detecting the residual ball inside the electric accessory, but the second implementation In the example pachinko gaming machine P, the reservation related to the special symbol lottery of the second special symbol is the right to a jackpot game (small win V), and one jackpot game (small win V) is granted for a normal symbol lottery win in a specific period. Since the design intention is to grant the right to hit V), if the operation end condition of the normal electric accessory 770 is satisfied, it may be configured so that the validity extension period is not set (especially "1 ball"). It is preferable to control in this way when the operation of the normal electric accessory 770 ends when the game ball wins, and a valid extension period may be set for the elapse of the specified opening time).

[Example 2-1]
Regarding the Pachinko gaming machine P of the second embodiment, a first application example (2-1 embodiment) will be described using FIGS. 34 to 36. FIG. 34 is a diagram showing the game flow of the 2-1 embodiment, FIG. 35 is a diagram showing the distribution ratio of jackpot (small win) symbols of the 2-1 embodiment, and FIG. 37 is a diagram illustrating an example of a presentation of a long-time chance state in the 2-1 embodiment, and FIG. 37 is a diagram illustrating an example of a normal electric accessory opening presentation of the 2-1 embodiment.

The characteristic point of the 2-1 embodiment is that, in contrast to the pachinko gaming machine P of the 2nd embodiment, the length of the specific period (the fluctuation time of the deviation fluctuation of the first special symbol) that occurs after the jackpot (small hit) is This differs depending on the type of special symbol that triggered the execution of the jackpot (small win) just before the specific period.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to create a state in which the probability of holding the special symbol lottery of the second special symbol during a specific period is different, and the expectation for consecutive wins (again) can be created. , the expectation that a specific period will be given after the jackpot) and the number of reservations related to the special symbol drawing of the second special symbol (rights related to the occurrence of jackpot/small win) are different. The state can be provided to the player as a specific period, changes can be given as a specific game, and a highly entertaining Pachinko game machine can be provided.

The details of Example 2-1 will be described below. The board configuration of the gaming machine (arrangement of winning devices, etc.) will be described as being similar to the second embodiment, but it can be modified as appropriate as long as it can configure the game described below.

(game flow)
First, with reference to FIG. 34, the game flow (transition of gaming state) of the pachinko gaming machine P of the 2-1 embodiment will be explained.

The normal game (low probability/low base state) is a game state in which the special symbol lottery of the first special symbol is the main game, and the player enters the game into the left gaming area (left area P501L) of the effect display device P80. The game player aims to win a jackpot by firing a ball and entering the game ball into the first starting winning hole P711A, by drawing a special symbol of the first special symbol.

In a normal game, when a jackpot is obtained (Fig. 34 (A)), a "jackpot (special figure 1)" is executed, and depending on the type of special symbol that caused the jackpot to be executed, a "short chance state" is created after the jackpot game. ” or “long-term chance state” (FIGS. 34(B) and (E)).

FIG. 35 shows the result of the symbol lottery (at the time of jackpot) in the special symbol lottery of the first special symbol. In the pachinko gaming machine P of the 2-1 embodiment, when a jackpot is achieved by the special symbol lottery of the first special symbol, either "special symbol 1_jackpot symbol A" or "special symbol 1_jackpot symbol B" is selected by the symbol lottery. is selected. Note that although only two types of symbols are shown in FIG. 35, these are broadly classified depending on the type of jackpot to be executed and the specific game after the jackpot, and in reality, the first special symbol display device There may be two or more types of symbols that are stopped and displayed on P51.

“Special pattern 1_Jackpot pattern B” shown in FIG. 35 is a jackpot pattern that will cause a “short time chance state” to be executed as a specific game after the jackpot game, and “Special pattern 1_Jackpot pattern A” is a jackpot pattern that will be executed as a specific game after the jackpot game. This is a jackpot symbol in which a "long time chance state" is later executed as a specific game.

《Short-term chance state》
After the "Jackpot (Special Figure 1)", when the state shifts to "Short Time Chance State", when executing the jackpot game, the first special symbol is created based on the ball entering the first starting prize opening P711B located in the right area P501R. If the first special symbol lottery is held based on the reservation related to the special symbol lottery, or the reservation related to the special symbol lottery of the first special symbol remaining from before the jackpot game, and the first special symbol lottery is a loss, As a specific period, a one-minute chance state (low probability/high base state) occurs.

In the pachinko game machine P of the 2-1st embodiment, in the chance state (low probability/high base state), when the player fires the game ball to the right area P501R and the game ball passes through the operating port P741, the normal symbol is A lottery will be held. At this time, the lottery result of the normal symbol lottery is displayed as a stop display symbol of the regular symbol after the normal symbol is fluctuatedly displayed for one minute on the normal symbol display device P53, and the result of the regular symbol lottery is shown as a "hit" symbol. ”, the normal electric accessory 770 is opened and the ball can enter the second starting prize opening P721. Then, when the game ball enters the second starting winning hole P721, after a specific period has elapsed, the jackpot or small hit is won by the special drawing of the second special symbol, and the "small hit V / jackpot (special figure 2)" (FIG. 34(D)). When the result of the normal symbol lottery in the chance state is a "miss", or if the ball does not enter the second starting winning hole P721 even though the regular symbol lottery is a "win", the "normal" Game (low probability/low base state)" (FIG. 34(C)).

In the "short time chance state", one normal symbol lottery is carried out during a one minute chance state (low probability/high base state), which is a specific period, and depending on whether the normal symbol is a hit or not, a "small The allocation is made to ``Win V/Jackpot (Special Figure 2)'' or ``Normal Game (Low Probability/Low Base State)''. In addition, the winning probability of the normal symbol lottery of the pachinko gaming machine P of the 2-1 embodiment is set to 1/3.3, and in the "short time chance state", the "small hit V / jackpot (special figure The probability of moving to ``2)'' is 30% (see ``Continuation rate'' of ``Special pattern 1_Jackpot symbol B'' in Figure 35). After execution of "Small hit V/Jackpot (special figure 2)", the state shifts to "Long time chance state" (FIG. 34(G)).

《Long-term chance state》
The "Long Time Chance State" transitions to after "Jackpot (Special Figure 1)" (Figure 34 (E)) or after "Small Hit V/Jackpot (Special Figure 2)" (Figure 34 (G)) This is a specific game, and is a specific period in which the special symbol lottery of the first special symbol after the start of the specific game is a loss, and the fluctuation of the loss of the first special symbol is executed.

The duration of the specific period of the "long time chance state" varies depending on the type of special symbol that triggered the execution of the jackpot game (small win V) that was being executed immediately before the transition to the "long time chance state", A specific period (outset variation of the first special symbol) is executed at a duration of one minute, six minutes, or nine minutes. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 35, in the case of "Special drawing 1_ Jackpot symbol A" and "Special drawing 2_ Jackpot/Small winning symbol A", the duration of the specific period is 5 minutes, and "Special drawing 2_ The duration of the specific period is set to 6 minutes in the case of ``Jackpot/Small Hit Symbol B'', and 9 minutes in the case of ``Special Figure 2_Jackpot/Small Hit Symbol C''.

In the "long time chance state" as well as in the "short time chance state", a normal symbol lottery is performed by entering the game ball into the operating port P741 located in the right area P501R, and one normal symbol lottery is performed. At this time, a fluctuating display of normal symbols for one minute is performed on the normal symbol display device P53. In other words, if the duration of the specific period in the "long time chance state" is 5 minutes, you can receive 5 normal symbols, and if the duration of the specific period is 9 minutes, you can receive 9 normal symbols. You can take part in the lottery.

In the "long time chance state", if you win a "hit" in the normal symbol lottery and are able to enter the game ball into the second starting prize opening P721 based on the opening of the normal electric accessory 770, After the specific period has passed, the suspension related to the special symbol lottery of the second special symbol is extinguished, and the player wins the jackpot or small hit by the special symbol lottery of the second special symbol, and is called "Small hit V/Jackpot (special symbol 2)". (FIG. 34(F)). In addition, even after the suspension of the special symbol lottery for the second special symbol occurs, as long as the specified period continues, it is possible to receive the normal symbol lottery, and the special symbol lottery for the second special symbol will be held. It is possible to accumulate (stock) rights related to the execution of a jackpot or small win by the maximum number of reservations.

In the "long time chance state", the variation time of the normal symbol is explained as 1 minute, but if the normal symbol is a hit, the normal electric accessory 770 is activated (released) after the variation time of the normal symbol has elapsed. Therefore, it may be designed so that one cycle including the operating period of the normal electric accessory 770 is completed in about 1 minute, with the normal symbol variation time being somewhat shorter than the losing variation (for example, 55 seconds).

In the "Long Time Chance State", if a hold is placed on the special symbol drawing for one or more second special symbols, the second special symbol will be "Small hit V/big hit (special figure 2)" is executed a number of times corresponding to the number of reserved pieces accumulated (stocked) as reserved. In addition, when "Small hit V/Jackpot (special figure 2)" is repeated multiple times, each time it internally shifts to a low probability/high base state similar to the long chance state, but the second The variable display time of the jackpot (small win) based on the special symbol drawing of the special symbol is set to 1 second, and "Small win V / jackpot (special figure 2)" restarts immediately after the jackpot game (small win V) ends. be done.

Therefore, in "Small Hit V/Jackpot (Special Figure 2)", a jackpot effect called "STOCK-BONUS" is executed, and the jackpot effect is executed continuously until there is no hold regarding the special symbol drawing of the second special symbol. Even in the situation where there is an internal "long chance state", the performance for a specific period will not be executed, and the performance will notify that the jackpot (small win V) will occur continuously. Execute.

In the "long time chance state", if the normal symbol lottery is executed 5 to 9 times and all become "lost", or even if the normal electric accessory 770 is released, the second starting prize is won. If the ball does not enter the mouth P721, the game returns to the "normal game (low probability/low base state)".

Although not shown in FIG. 34, in the "short time chance state" or "long time chance state", if the special symbol lottery of the first special symbol becomes a "jackpot", the fluctuation time is 1 second. is set, and a "jackpot (special map 1)" is executed without a specific period of time occurring. In addition, in the "Long Time Chance State" and "Short Time Chance State", if the special symbol drawing that results in a jackpot or small win is displayed by the special symbol lottery of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, strictly A specific period of 1 second occurs, and during this period, a variable display of normal symbols may be performed based on the ball entering the operating port P741 or the suspension of the normal symbol lottery.

However, in the pachinko gaming machine P of the 2-1 embodiment, even if the result of the normal symbol lottery is "hit", the high base state (electronic chew support state) must be in place at the timing when the stop display is displayed. For example, the electric accessory 770 is not normally opened in a manner that makes it easy for the game ball to enter the second starting prize opening P721, and there is almost no possibility that the ball will enter the second starting winning opening P721. It is configured like this. Therefore, even if the normal symbol lottery becomes a "hit" due to the jackpot fluctuation (small hit fluctuation) of the first special symbol or the second special symbol in the "long time chance state" or "short time chance state", one minute later. Since the special symbol has stopped being displayed and the jackpot game is in progress, it has shifted to a low base state, so "Small hit V/Jackpot (special pattern 2)" and "Long time chance The configuration is such that no new suspension of the special symbol lottery of the second special symbol occurs during the winning fluctuation period of the special symbol in the "state" or "short time chance state".

In addition, in the "long time chance state", if a jackpot is achieved by the special symbol lottery of the first special symbol, the state will move to "jackpot (special symbol 1)", but this jackpot will be changed to "special symbol 1_ jackpot symbol". If it is based on ``B'', the player will be transferred to a disadvantageous ``short-time chance state,'' and there is a risk that the player may feel that he or she has suffered a disadvantage. In order to prevent such disadvantages, if you win "special pattern 1_jackpot symbol B" in the "long time chance state" or "short time chance state", the game after the "jackpot (special pattern 1)" will be canceled. The state may be controlled to be a "long time chance state" (specific period of 5 minutes).

(Example of long chance state)
FIG. 36 shows an example of performance in the "long time chance state" which is the most advantageous game state for the player (the game state where it is easiest to win a jackpot game) in the pachinko game machine P of the 2-1 embodiment. . In the Pachinko gaming machine P of the 2-1st embodiment, a "4 consecutive battle performance" is performed in the "long time chance state" (when the specific period is "5 minutes" and the normal symbol lottery is in the "long time chance state") (when executed five consecutive times after the start of ).

As mentioned above, the pachinko gaming machine P of the 2-1 embodiment performs N times during a specific period (N minutes) during which the first special symbol of a specific game in a low probability/high base state is fluctuating. In the "long time chance state" where you can receive a normal symbol lottery and the specific period is 5 minutes, one normal symbol performance is performed for one regular symbol lottery, and the second In the pachinko game machine P of the -1 embodiment, four "battle effects" and one "final chance" effect (the same effect as the short-time chance state) are executed.

The example screen in FIG. 36 shows a state in which the third "battle performance" of the "four consecutive battle performances" is being executed. More specifically, in the production mode display P840 on the upper left side of the screen, the production mode title of "Continuous Battle" indicating that it is a "4 consecutive battle" production is displayed, and as the remaining number of games display P841, the current 3rd play is displayed. The "battle performance" is being executed, which indirectly suggests to the player that there are two remaining "battle performances" (including the third) and a "final chance."

At the bottom right of the screen, two pending objects P811 are displayed in a pending display area P811, indicating that two pending objects related to the special symbol lottery of the second special symbol have been acquired.

In the center of the "battle production" screen, an image of the characters facing each other is displayed, and depending on whether the player's character placed on the right side can defeat the enemy character on the left side, the normal pattern To notify whether the lottery result is a "win" or a "loss".

A simple design drawing P802 is displayed at the upper right of the screen, and in the pachinko game machine P of the 2-1 embodiment, the result of the normal symbol lottery is displayed as a decorative pattern in the simple design drawing P802. The simple drawing P802 is for notifying the result of the normal symbol lottery, and if it is displayed in a fixed manner when it is a "win", there is a risk of giving the illusion that the player has won the jackpot at that point. For example, a "V" symbol such as "3V3" may be stopped and displayed in the center to notify that the result of the normal symbol lottery is a "win." In addition, during the "4 consecutive battle" production, since the first special symbol is out of line, the result of the special symbol lottery for the first special symbol is not announced with a decorative symbol, but the simple symbol for the special symbol lottery The drawing P802 may be separately facilitated and displayed.

A right hit notification P832 is displayed as a hit separation notification P830 below the simple installation drawing P802 of the normal symbol. In the "Long Time Chance State" and "Short Time Chance State", it is necessary to enter the ball into the operating port P741 for a limited time during the fluctuation display period of the first special symbol to receive the normal symbol lottery. , In order to prevent a specific period from passing without receiving the normal symbol lottery as many times as intended, control regarding the variation of the normal symbol or the operation of the normal electric accessory 770 is performed during the special symbol variation display period. If the control is no longer performed, after a relatively short period of about 3 seconds, the right-hand hit notification P832 is switched to a mode that emphasizes the game ball, and the player fires the game ball into the right area P501R and enters the operating port P741. An announcement may be made to encourage this.

In the "battle performance", if the player's character wins, a "normal electric accessory release performance" is performed as shown in FIG. 37. In the "normal electric role opening performance", an image imitating the second starting prize opening P721 and a character string such as "Aim" are displayed, and the game ball is launched towards the second starting winning opening P721. A performance will be held to encourage this. Since the normal electric accessory 770 has an end condition of "one game ball entering the second starting winning hole P721" or "elapse of a predetermined operating period", the pachinko game of the 2-1 embodiment In the machine, in the "normal electric accessory opening performance", an indicator display (recommended firing period display) that approximately corresponds to the operating period of the normal electric accessory is displayed below the image imitating the second starting prize opening P721, and the game It shows the period during which the player can enter the ball into the second starting prize opening P721.

In addition, the "normal electric accessory opening performance" takes into account the time from the launch of the game ball until it reaches the second starting prize opening P721, and the period when the winning pattern of the normal pattern is fluctuating and the pattern fixing time of the winning pattern of the normal pattern, etc. , may be configured to be performed before the normal electric accessory 770 is activated.

According to the pachinko gaming machine of the 2-1 embodiment configured as described above, it is possible to obtain a hold related to the special symbol lottery of the second special symbol that makes the jackpot (small win V) certain in a specific game. The duration of the specific period can be varied depending on the type of special symbol that caused the jackpot (small win V) that was executed immediately before the start of the specific game. We provide a gaming machine that allows you to acquire a large number of game balls in a short period of time, such as a pachinko machine, and at the same time, we provide a gaming machine that allows you to acquire a large number of game balls in a short period of time. This has the effect of providing a pachinko game machine that can provide different specific games and enhances the interest of the specific game.

(Modification 1 of the Pachinko gaming machine of Example 2-1)
In the pachinko gaming machine of the above-mentioned 2-1 embodiment, in the "short time chance state" and "long time chance state", the jackpot fluctuation or small hit fluctuation of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is set to 1 second. Therefore, it was configured so that the specific period does not occur, but (a) after the jackpot game (small hit V) executed with some special symbol types, the specific period ( For example, it may be configured to have a jackpot symbol with a jackpot fluctuation time set so that it can occur (for example, 5 minutes), or (a) the special symbol lottery in the "short-term chance state" and "long-term chance state" may be a jackpot or By configuring the fluctuating pattern lottery when there is a small hit so that the fluctuating time is 5 minutes with a probability of several percent, it is possible to win a jackpot in a "short-time chance state" or "long-time chance state." It may be configured to separately provide a "special chance state" in which a reservation related to the special symbol lottery of the second special symbol can be obtained during the variation (or small winning variation).

In such a "special chance state", if there is a reservation related to the special symbol lottery of the second special symbol at the start, the reservation related to the special symbol lottery of the second special symbol is held as a "recharge chance". The "4 consecutive battle performance" may be restarted while informing that there is a special symbol lottery for the second special symbol at the start. If the second special symbol is not pending at the time of battle, the occurrence of a jackpot (small hit V) will be announced as a revival effect, and if the second special symbol is pending during the "special chance state", the final It may be configured to display an effect in which a jackpot game (small win V) to be executed in "STOCK-BONUS" is added after the battle.

In addition, if the "special chance state" is triggered by (a) a jackpot game (small hit V) executed with some special symbol types, as another modification, In a jackpot game (small win V) triggered by the symbol type, or in a part (gase) of a jackpot (small win) that is not the target, a special battle effect is generated as a "STOCK-BONUS" effect, and the game is played in a special battle. The system may be configured to notify the occurrence of a "special chance state" when a successful mode in which the player's character wins is displayed.

(Modification 2 of the Pachinko gaming machine of Example 2-1)
The pachinko gaming machine of Example 2-1 is designed on the assumption that when the specified period continues for N minutes, N normal symbol drawings (1 minute/time) will be executed. After transitioning to the game, the first special symbol starts to fluctuate, and then there is a time until the ball enters the operating port P741 and the normal symbol lottery is performed, or the normal symbol fluctuates during a specific period. In consideration of the possibility that the player may not be able to receive the normal symbol drawing N times due to a continuous period in which the 1st special symbol is not drawn, the period of fluctuation of the first special symbol, which is a specific period, is set to N minutes + X seconds. By setting the symbol fixing time to X seconds after the first special symbol's variable display for N seconds, a guarantee time of "X seconds" will be established to ensure that the player does not lose the right to draw the normal symbol. may be configured.

When providing a guaranteed time in this way, the guaranteed time is defined as the time from when the N-time normal symbol lottery results are announced until the start of the jackpot (small win) game or the time before returning to the normal game. It is necessary to wait for the remaining time of " , it may be configured to execute a "result effect" that notifies the total number of balls obtained by playing consecutive games.

Further, in order for the player to receive N number of normal symbol drawings, the player may be configured to be alerted as the remaining time of the guarantee time "X seconds" decreases. As a warning effect, the right-handed hitting notification P832 may be changed to an emphasized mode, and a warning display or audio notification may be made that says, "If you do not hit right, you will lose the right to battle!". The guaranteed time "X seconds" is the period from the start of the deviation fluctuation of the first special symbol (after the start of the specific period) until the normal symbol lottery is performed, and the subsequent control regarding the normal symbol or the normal electric accessory is stopped. If "X seconds" have elapsed, a new "1 minute" (corresponding to the time of one cycle regarding the fluctuation display of normal symbol drawings and the operation of normal electric accessories) will be set as the guaranteed time, and the same will apply. Configure it to repeat the control.

[Example 2-2]
Next, a second application example (Embodiment 2-2) regarding the Pachinko gaming machine P of the second embodiment will be explained using FIGS. 38 to 41. FIG. 38 is a diagram showing the game flow of the 2-2 embodiment, FIG. 39 is a diagram showing an example of performance during the chance time of the 2-2 embodiment, and FIG. 40 is a diagram showing the game flow of the 2-2 embodiment. FIG. 41 is a diagram showing another example of performance during the chance time of the embodiment, and FIG. 41 is a diagram showing an example of performance during the super chance time of the 2-2 embodiment.

The characteristic point of the 2-2 embodiment is that, compared to the pachinko gaming machine P of the 2nd embodiment, the first specific period (a period in which reservations related to the special symbol lottery of the second special symbol can be acquired) is simplified. During the execution of the "chance time" which is the "first specific period"), the suspension of the special symbol lottery of the second special symbol is a predetermined condition (in the 2-2 embodiment, the second special symbol If the number of reservations related to the special symbol lottery is 2 or more) is met, the second specific period that occurs next time (the number of reservations related to the special symbol lottery of the second special symbol is easy to obtain) is satisfied. By controlling the player so that he or she is granted the right to be in a more advantageous state than the first specific period (which may be simply referred to as the "second specific period"), the player is given the right to play during the specific period. It is possible to increase the interest of the game by drawing attention to whether or not it is possible to move to a further advantageous state depending on the result (the number of reserved pieces obtained in the special symbol lottery of the second special symbol).

The details of Example 2-2 will be described below. The board configuration of the gaming machine (arrangement of winning devices, etc.) will be explained as being similar to the second embodiment and the 2-1 embodiment, but if it can configure the game described below, Changes can be made as appropriate.

(game flow)
First, with reference to FIG. 38, the game flow (transition of gaming state) of the Pachinko gaming machine P of the 2-2 embodiment will be explained. It should be noted that the pachinko game machine P of the 2-2 embodiment also employs the second special symbol priority extinguishing control like the pachinko game machines P of the 2nd embodiment and the 2-1 embodiment.

In the normal game (low probability/low base), a game ball is fired into the left side area P501L in the game area P501 of the pachinko game machine P of the 2-2 embodiment, and the game ball is entered into the first starting prize opening 711A. This is a game state in which the player aims to execute the special symbol lottery of the first special symbol and obtain the "jackpot (special symbol 1)" (FIG. 38(A)).

When the "Jackpot (Special Figure 1)" is executed, the "Chance Time" starts (FIG. 38(B)). "Chance time" is a game state with a low probability/high base state (one electric support), and like the pachinko gaming machines of the second embodiment and the second-first embodiment, the first special symbol loses fluctuation. This is a gaming state in which a specific period in which a reservation related to the special symbol lottery of the second special symbol can be obtained occurs during the period (80 seconds).

In the pachinko game machine P of the 2-2 embodiment, the "chance time" is composed of an 80 second deviation variation of the first special symbol. During this time, by entering the game ball into the operating port P741 located in the right side area P501R of the game area P501, you can receive a normal symbol lottery (probability of winning 1/9.99, variable time per round 10 seconds). is possible, and by drawing 8 normal symbols during the "chance time", you will have the right to play "STOCK-BONUS", which is a small hit V/jackpot game based on the special symbol lottery of the second special symbol, which will be described later. This is a game state in which the goal is to obtain. That is, in this specific period of 80 seconds, as mentioned above, the normal symbol lottery with a winning probability of 1/9.99 and a variation time of 10 seconds each can be received eight times.

In "Chance Time", if you win the normal symbol lottery with a probability of 1/9.99 mentioned above and the game ball enters P721 in the easy-to-enter state, you will be entered into the special symbol lottery for the second special symbol. The probability (continuation rate) of acquiring the right to execute "Chance Time" or "Super Chance Time" which will be described later by acquiring at least one hold is 56.9. % (in other words, the expected value of getting a hit with a probability of 1/9.99 once in 8 times (80 seconds/variation time 10 seconds)), probability of acquiring the right to execute "Super Chance Time" is 19% (in other words, the expected value of getting a hit with a probability of 1/9.99 at least twice in 8 times (80 seconds/variation time 10 seconds)). In the "chance time", if the reservation related to the special symbol lottery of the second special symbol cannot be obtained, the game returns to the normal game (FIG. 38(I)).

After the specific period in "Chance Time" has passed, if there is one pending special symbol drawing for the second special symbol, "STOCK-BONUS" (Small win V/Jackpot game based on the special symbol lottery for the second special symbol) ) (FIG. 38(D)), and after the end of "STOCK-BONUS", shifts to "chance time" (FIG. 38(E)).

In addition, in "chance time", if two or more reservations related to the special symbol lottery of the second special symbol are acquired, the right to execute "super chance time" can be acquired. "Super chance time" is a period during which the small hit variation or jackpot variation of the second special symbol is executed, which starts variation when there are two pending special symbol drawings for the second special symbol, and is 170 seconds long. A specific period occurs during which the special symbols are displayed. That is, in the specific period of 170 seconds, as mentioned above, the normal symbol lottery with a winning probability of 1/9.99 and a variation time of 10 seconds each can be received 17 times.

In the pachinko gaming machine P of the 2-2 embodiment, even during the specific period that is the small hit fluctuation or jackpot fluctuation period of the second special symbol, which is the execution period of "Super Chance Time", the special symbol of the second special symbol It will be possible to obtain reservations related to the lottery. "Super Chance Time" (170 seconds) is set to a longer period than the specific period in "Chance Time" (80 seconds), so the number of normal symbol drawings that can be executed is larger, and the second special symbol is more likely to be drawn. It can be said that the state is such that the possibility of obtaining a reservation related to the special symbol lottery is increasing.

In "Super Chance Time", the number of times the normal symbol lottery is executed is about 17 times, and it is possible to obtain the reservation related to the special symbol lottery of the second special symbol with a probability of approximately 83.3%. It is now possible to acquire the right to execute “Super Chance Time.” If you are unable to obtain a hold for the special symbol lottery for the second special symbol during the "Super Chance Time", the process will proceed to the "STOCK-BONUS" after the end of the "Super Chance Time" (Figure 38 (G)), and the If the reservation related to the special symbol lottery of 2 special symbols can be obtained, the process moves to "SUPER_STOCK-BONUS" (FIG. 38(F)). After executing "SUPER_STOCK-BONUS", the process returns to "Super Chance Time" (FIG. 38(H)).

"STOCK-BONUS", which is executed after "Super Chance Time", is repeated until the number of reservations related to the special symbol lottery of the second special symbol becomes 0 (the fluctuation related to the special symbol lottery of the second special symbol is 1). seconds, so the 80 second specific period does not occur even if the state is internally the same as "Chance Time"), "SUPER_STOCK-BONUS" executed after "Super Chance Time" is the second special symbol. It will be executed repeatedly until the number of pending special symbol drawings becomes 2 (because the fluctuation related to the special symbol drawing of the second special symbol is 1 second, even if it is in the same state as "Super Chance Time" internally, it will be 170 specified period of seconds does not occur).

In addition, if you obtain 2 reservations related to the special symbol lottery of the second special symbol during the "chance time", the 80 second deviation fluctuation based on the special symbol lottery of the first special symbol, which is the "chance time", will end. Later, "Super Chance Time" is to begin. In other words, the variable display period of the second special symbol is the base state which is the gaming state, in other words, the variable display time of the special symbol is determined by the number of reservations, regardless of whether or not the special symbol variable time shortening function (time saving state) is activated. When the second special symbol is drawn, a variable display period of 170 seconds is selected if the number of pending symbols is 2, and a variable display period of 1 second is selected if the number of pending symbols is other. It looks like this.

In addition, in the pachinko gaming machine P of the 2-2 embodiment, even if the reservation related to the special symbol lottery of the second special symbol cannot be obtained during the "super chance time" which is the most advantageous state for the player, Once "STOCK-BONUS" is executed, "chance time" will start, so it is a two-stage configuration from the most advantageous state to the normal game, and the most advantageous state Even when the ``super chance time'' has ended, the game flow allows the player to feel that ``there is still a chance'' and prevents the player from losing his or her desire to play.

(Example of production of pachinko gaming machine P of 2-2 embodiment)
Next, examples of effects of "chance time" and "super chance time" in the pachinko game machine P of the 2-2 embodiment will be explained using FIGS. 39 to 41.

《Example of chance time performance of pachinko gaming machine P in 2-2 Example》
FIG. 39 shows an example of an effect display during the chance time after "Jackpot (Special Figure 1)". At the top of the screen, a production mode display P840 (character string ``chance time'') and a remaining number of games display P841 (character string ``54 seconds left'') are displayed. In addition, in the pachinko gaming machine P of the 2-2 embodiment, since the specific period is the special symbol fluctuation display period, the "remaining fluctuation time" of the special symbol (or the special symbol fluctuation display period) is displayed as the remaining number of games display P841. The remaining time until the display ends and the electric chew support state ends) is displayed.

A reservation display area P810 is displayed at the bottom right of the screen, and in the example of FIG. 39, there is no reservation related to the special symbol lottery of the second special symbol, and the reservation object P811 (see FIG. 36) is not displayed. Also in the simple reservation display P814 at the center on the left side of the screen, "0" is displayed as the number of reservations related to the special symbol lottery of the second special symbol.

At the bottom left of the screen, a cumulative number of acquisitions display P824 (display of "Total_00600pt") and a jackpot icon display P821 (display of icon "V" and "x1" indicating the number) are displayed, and at the time shown in FIG. It shows the number of balls acquired and the jackpot game (small win V) in the game.

In the center of the screen, a situation is shown in which the "7" symbol with a character attached as a variable display of the decorative symbol P801 is stopped (temporarily stopped) in the right and middle rows, and the left symbol is fluctuating. It is shown that it is being displayed. Here, the decorative pattern P801 is to notify the lottery result of the normal pattern lottery, and the normal pattern is It is configured to notify a "win" as a result of the lottery.

In the example of FIG. 39, the first decorative pattern P801 (decorative pattern in the left column) is in an unstopped state, and the message "Aim for '7 (image)'" is displayed together with an image imitating the production button P381, and the player By operating the production button P381, you can determine whether three "7" symbols of the decorative symbols P801 will line up (hit), or whether decorative symbols P801 other than the "7" symbol will be stopped and displayed on the left symbol (miss). A button effect for notification is being executed. Note that even if a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the performance button was displayed (if the player did not press the performance button for a predetermined period of time), the final display scheduled image such as 7 set or 10 off is displayed.

In addition, the production example shown in FIG. 39 is not limited to the production example shown in FIG. 39, and as a production to notify the result of the normal symbol lottery during "chance time", for example, a production using a character (for example It may also be possible to notify that the normal symbol lottery has been won by executing a battle effect and displaying a success mode (battle victory).

FIG. 40 is a diagram showing another example of the performance of "Chance Time" of the Pachinko gaming machine P of the 2-2 embodiment. More specifically, in the "chance time", one pending object related to the special symbol lottery of the second special symbol is acquired (in FIG. 40, one pending object P811 is displayed in the pending display area P810 at the bottom right of the screen). This is an example of an effect display that is displayed under a situation where at least "STOCK-BONUS" has been executed and entry into "chance time" has been confirmed again, that is, under a situation where consecutive wins have been confirmed.

In the example of FIG. 40, the performance mode display P840 has been switched to "promotion chance", and a message in the form of a command "Destroy the seal!!" is displayed below the character string "promotion chance". In the center of the screen, a character with a heavy weapon is displayed, and it is announced that if the character succeeds in "destroying the seal" required as a performance, the result of the regular symbol lottery will be a win. It has been suggested that. That is, in the situation of "chance time", the tendency and mode of performance for notifying the result of the normal symbol lottery are configured to be switched before and after the reservation related to the special symbol lottery of the second special symbol is obtained. There is.

The reason for switching the performance mode in the middle of "chance time" is that in the pachinko gaming machine P of the 2-2 embodiment, a hold related to the special symbol lottery of the second special symbol occurs during the execution of "chance time". If not, the player is paying attention to whether or not the advantageous situation continues (whether or not he can obtain the right to enter the "chance time" again), and the suspension related to the special symbol drawing of the second special symbol is After this occurs, interest will be focused on whether or not there will be a hold on the special symbol drawing for the second special symbol, which is the right to execute "Super Chance Time," so the different interests of those players will be This is because, by displaying an optimal effect, it can be expected to increase interest.

The example in FIG. 40 shows an example of a performance using a character with a heavy weapon, but the performance may be performed using another character, or a different performance may be performed each time the normal symbol lottery is executed. The results of the lottery may also be shown. In addition, even after obtaining the reservation related to the special symbol lottery of the second special symbol, it is possible to perform the same effect display as before the reservation related to the special symbol lottery of the second special symbol as shown in FIG. 39 occurs. It may be configured so that.

Although not shown, in the situation shown in FIG. 40, if the player further acquires the hold related to the special symbol lottery of the second special symbol and acquires the right to two or more jackpot games (small win V), , and may be configured to change to a state in which the performance is determined based on a different performance tendency or performance mode.

《Example of super chance time performance of Pachinko gaming machine P in 2-2 Example》
FIG. 41 shows an example of the super chance time effect executed in the pachinko gaming machine P of the 2-2 embodiment.

In the example of FIG. 41, an example is shown in which, as the effect of "Super Chance Time", an effect substantially equivalent to the "Chance Time" shown in FIG. 39 is displayed. The difference is that in order to celebrate that the situation is under control in the most advantageous state, the display area of the fluctuating display of the decorative symbol P801 for informing the lottery results of the normal symbol lottery has been changed, and the display area has been changed to the background. The difference is that animation is displayed as the effect image. In addition, in the example of FIG. 41, the background animation is assumed to display an image that has no relation to the result of the normal symbol lottery, but the fluctuating display of the decorative symbol P801 notifies the expectation level that will be the mode of notifying the winning result. Therefore, a preview image (mini character action, addition of an effect to the variable display of the decorative pattern P801, etc.) may be displayed superimposed on the background animation image.

During the execution of "Super Chance Time", if there are 4 pending special symbol drawings for the second special symbol, the ball entered into the second starting prize opening P721 will be entitled to a new jackpot game (small win V). Since the decorative symbol P801 is not obtained, the variable display of the decorative symbol P801 for notifying the result of the normal symbol lottery may be hidden or may be changed to be displayed in a smaller display area. By lowering the visibility of the fluctuating display of the decorative pattern P801 in this way, it may be configured to further increase the visibility of the background animation display.

In addition, in the Pachinko gaming machine P of the 2-2 embodiment, the background animation during "Super Chance Time" is about 10 animations that are displayed in order according to the number of times (or consecutive times) the Super Chance Time is executed. is configured to be Then, in the situation where "Super Chance Time" is executed a specific number of times (for example, 5 or 10 times), if you obtain a hold related to the special symbol lottery of the second special symbol, in "SUPER_STOCK-BONUS" Even if it is configured so that a special performance (for example, a performance display related to the animation that was displayed in the previous "Super Chance Time") is executed as the performance of the jackpot game (small win V) that is executed. good.

In addition, if you are not able to obtain the hold related to the special symbol lottery of the second special symbol during the specific number of "Super Chance Time", after "STOCK-BONUS", it will be "Chance Time". If you acquire the right to perform "Super Chance Time" again, the same background animation as the previous specific number of times will be displayed again (separation effect), and the "Super Chance Time" in which the separation effect will be executed will be displayed again. At the time of execution, the background animation in the "super chance time" may not proceed unless the reservation related to the special symbol lottery of the second special symbol is obtained.

In addition, it is not limited to the effect display mode shown in FIG. 41, but also a preview effect that announces the result of the normal symbol lottery, such as the "chance time" shown in FIGS. 39 and 40, in the "super chance time". The player may be able to perform a performance mode that draws attention to things such as "chance time", or a performance mode similar to "chance time", or a performance mode that focuses on background animation as described above, or any other of a plurality of production modes. It may be configured to be arbitrarily selectable.

(Modification 1 of the Pachinko gaming machine of Example 2-2)
Next, a modification of the Pachinko gaming machine P of the 2-2 embodiment will be explained. First, as a first modification, the pachinko gaming machine P of the 2-2 embodiment has two specific periods with different degrees of advantage, but there are modifications that further increase the number of specific periods, such as three or four. Conceivable.

More specifically, as modification 1 of the pachinko gaming machine P of the 2-2 embodiment, when determining the variable display related to the special symbol lottery of the second special symbol, the variation is limited to the variation when the number of reservations is 2. First, even when there are 3 or 4 reservations related to the special symbol lottery of the 2nd special symbol, a specific period (a period in which reservations related to the special symbol lottery of the 2nd special symbol can be obtained) can be generated. It is conceivable to control so as to determine the period of variable display (variation pattern) related to the special symbol lottery of special symbols.

At this time, it may be configured such that the larger the number of reservations related to the special symbol lottery of the second special symbol, the longer the specific period (for example, 40 seconds when the number of reservations is 2, and 40 seconds when the number of reservations is 3). 50 seconds when the number of reservations is 4, and 60 seconds when the number of reservations is 4), and conversely, the specific period may be configured to be shorter when there are many reservations related to the special symbol lottery of the second special symbol. Good (for example, 100 seconds when the number of pending items is 2, 20 seconds when the number of pending items is 3, and 10 seconds when the number of pending items is 4).

(Modified example 2 of the Pachinko gaming machine of Example 2-2)
In the pachinko gaming machine P of the 2-2 embodiment, as described above, the second specific period (the special symbol lottery of the second special symbol when the number of pending symbols related to the special symbol lottery of the second special symbol is two) The jackpot based on the variable display period (small win V) is determined not depending on the gaming state (high base state or low base state), but depending on the number of reservations related to the special symbol lottery of the second special symbol. Although it has been explained that this is done according to the variable pattern (variable time) determined by the variable pattern lottery table, when "the number of reservations and the gaming state related to the special symbol lottery of the second special symbol are in a high base state" The second specific period may be generated using a variable pattern determined by a variable pattern lottery table that is referred to as a condition.

By configuring in this way, during the period of the first specific period (outside fluctuation of the first special symbol in a high base state), the number of reservations related to the special symbol lottery of the second special symbol will occur during the second specific period. Even if the number of conditions for generating the second specific period matches, the gaming state will transition to the low base state at the end of the first period, and one of the conditions for generating the second specific period will no longer be satisfied. After the end of the first specific period, it is possible to always move to the jackpot game (small win V), and the second specific period can be controlled so that it is always executed after the jackpot game (small win V) becomes.

At this time, in order to acquire the execution right for the second specific period, the conditions for generating the second specific period after the execution of the jackpot game (small win V) in the first specific period + 1 2. You will have to obtain the reservation related to the special symbol drawing of the special symbol, but as mentioned above, after the end of the first specific period and after the end of the second specific period, it will always move to the jackpot (small win V) However, the first specific period and the second specific period can be configured so that they always start after the jackpot (small win V) is executed, and the game state transition is easy for the player to understand. Can be done.

[Example 2-3]
Regarding the Pachinko gaming machine P of the second embodiment, a third application example (Embodiment 2-3) will be explained using FIGS. 42 and 43. FIG. 42 is a diagram showing the game flow of the 2-3rd embodiment, and FIG. 43 is a diagram showing the distribution ratio of jackpot (small winning) symbols in the 2-3rd embodiment.

The feature of the 2nd-3rd embodiment is that the pachinko game machine P of the 2nd embodiment has a special feature that triggered the execution of a jackpot game (small win V) immediately before shifting to a specific game (high base state). Depending on the type of symbol (big hit symbol, small winning symbol), one of a plurality of high base states (electronic support mode) with different controls related to the normal symbol lottery is set, so that a specific period in a specific game (second special symbol The ease of obtaining reservations related to the special symbol drawing of the second special symbol can be configured to be different during the period in which reservations related to the special symbol drawing of the second special symbol can be obtained (period in which reservations related to the special symbol drawing can be obtained), The objective is to increase the interest of a specific game by making a difference in control).

More specifically, in the pachinko gaming machine P of the 2-3 embodiment, the normal symbol lottery is a "win" type as a type of high base state (electronic support mode) in which the control related to the regular symbol lottery in a specific period is different. It consists of "Electric support mode 1" where the probability is 1/1 (100%), "Electric support mode 2" where the probability of a normal symbol lottery being "hit" is 1/10 (10%), and "Electric support mode 2" where the probability is 1/1 (10%). In the case of controlling to "Electric support mode 2", the number of games to maintain the high base state is set to be one to three times.

In other words, when controlled in "Electronic Support Mode 1", by playing the game as intended in the design, you can definitely obtain reservations related to the special symbol lottery of the 4 second special symbols, and then in "Electronic Support Mode 2". If it is controlled, a game will be developed in which the normal symbol lottery is received in hopes of continuation of the specific game (consecutive games).

The details of Example 2-3 will be explained below. The board configuration of the gaming machine (placement of winning devices, etc.) will be explained as being similar to the second embodiment, 2-1 embodiment, and 2-2 embodiment, but the game described below As long as it can be configured, changes can be made as appropriate.

(game flow)
FIG. 42 is a diagram showing the game flow of the Pachinko gaming machine P of the 2-3rd embodiment. In the "normal game (low probability/low base state)" in FIG. 42, the player fires a game ball into the left side area P501L of the game area P501, enters the game ball into the first starting prize opening P711A, and By receiving the special symbol lottery of 1 special symbol, the player aims to acquire the right to execute the "jackpot (special symbol 1)" (Figure 42 (A)).

When the "Jackpot (Special Figure 1)" starts, the player launches the game ball into the right area P501R of the game area P501, enters the game ball into the big prize opening P751, and uses the prize ball to release the game ball. Acquire. At this time, as in the second embodiment, the 2-1 embodiment, and the 2-2 embodiment, if you fire aiming at the big winning opening P751 during the jackpot game, you will also win against the first starting winning opening P711B. A ball is generated, and during the jackpot game (small win V), a hold related to the special symbol lottery of at least one first special symbol will occur. After "Jackpot (Special Figure 1)", the process moves to "STOCK-TIME 1" as shown in FIG. 42 (FIG. 42(B)).

"STOCK-TIME 1" is a specific game with a low probability/high base state (electronic chew support state), and it is a normal symbol lottery win based on the symbol that triggered the execution of "Jackpot (Special Figure 1)". In addition to controlling the game to one of two high base states (electric support mode) with different probabilities, a jackpot game (small win V) is executed based on the symbol that triggered the execution of the "jackpot (special figure 1)". The number of variable displays of the special symbol to maintain the high base state when the base state is not changed is also controlled to one to three times.

A specific example of the gaming state of “STOCK-TIME1” is shown in FIG. In the distribution of jackpot game (small hit V) symbols of the pachinko game machine P of the 2-3 embodiment shown in FIG. The jackpot symbol (group) which is "Jackpot Symbol D" is the jackpot symbol that will be controlled to "STOCK-TIME1".

Here, the "selection probability" in Figure 43 means that the jackpot symbol included in any of "Special symbol 1_ Jackpot symbol A" to "Special symbol 1_ Jackpot symbol D" as a jackpot symbol will be selected in the special symbol jackpot symbol lottery. It shows the probability of being determined, and the "den support number" is the number of games to maintain the high base state set after each jackpot game from "special pattern 1_jackpot pattern A" to "special pattern 1_jackpot pattern D" It shows.

“Normal symbol probability” in FIG. 43 is the probability that the normal symbol lottery will be a “hit” in a specific game (high base state) that is controlled after “Special symbol 1_Jackpot symbol A” to “Special symbol 1_Jackpot symbol D” The high base state where the normal symbol probability is 1/1 is defined as "Electric support mode 1", and the high base state where the normal symbol probability is 1/10 is defined as "Electric support mode 2".

In the pachinko gaming machine P of the 2-3rd embodiment, the fluctuation time of the loss variation based on the special symbol lottery of the first special symbol in the high base state is 30 seconds, and the fluctuation time of the loss variation based on the special symbol lottery of the first special symbol in the high base state is 30 seconds. The fluctuation time is approximately 4 seconds per fluctuation. In other words, approximately 7 normal symbol fluctuations are performed during one missed fluctuation of the first special symbol in the high base state (electronic support state), and the duration of the high base state is twice the special symbol fluctuation display. Or, in the case of 3 times, the maximum number of times that the normal symbol lottery can be executed increases to about 14 times and about 21 times.

The "continuation rate" in Figure 43 indicates the probability (expectation level) of being able to obtain a reservation related to the special symbol lottery of the second special symbol in a specific period (total period of deviation fluctuations of the first special symbol in a high base state). This indicates that the right to execute the specific game (STOCK-TIME 2) will be acquired at the indicated continuation rate (probability).

In addition, in the pachinko gaming machine P of the 2-3 embodiment, there are cases where the number of times the high base state is maintained is multiple times (cases where the number of electric support is 2 or 3 times). If you are able to obtain a reservation related to the special symbol lottery of the second special symbol during the execution of the first special symbol's deviation fluctuation, which is the first specific period, the second or third special symbol will be specified by the second special symbol priority digestion control. A jackpot game (small win V) is executed by the special symbol lottery related to the special symbol lottery of the second special symbol without executing the period (outside fluctuation of the first special symbol).

That is, in the pachinko gaming machine P of the 2-3 embodiment, in a specific game controlled by "Electric support mode 1", 4 reservations related to the special symbol lottery of the second special symbol are acquired in a short time (30 seconds). On the other hand, when controlled by "Electric support mode 2", even if the number of electric support increases, the specified period (first special At the moment when the symbol deviation variation) ends, the execution of the specific period in which you can obtain the reservation related to the special symbol lottery of the new second special symbol will be canceled, so if it is controlled to "Electronic support mode 2" In this case, it is a rare event to obtain a reservation related to the special symbol lottery of a plurality of second special symbols.

Returning to FIG. 42, the explanation of the gaming state (game flow) will be continued. In "STOCK-TIME 1", the special symbol of the second special symbol, based on the jackpot symbol that triggered the execution of "Jackpot (Special Figure 1)", before the specified number of games (den support number) is exhausted. If the reservation related to the lottery can be obtained, "Jackpot (Special Figure 2) 'STOCK-BONUS'" is executed (FIG. 42(C)). On the other hand, in "STOCK-TIME 1", it was not possible to obtain the hold related to the special symbol lottery for the second special symbol before the specified number of games (den support number) was exhausted by the special symbol lottery for the first special symbol. If so, the game returns to the "normal game" (FIG. 42(D)).

"Jackpot (Special Figure 2) 'STOCK-BONUS'" is a jackpot game (small hit V) is controlled to be executed repeatedly, and after the "Jackpot (Special Figure 2) 'STOCK-BONUS'" corresponding to the hold related to the special symbol lottery of all the second special symbols is executed, the process proceeds to "STOCK-TIME 2". (FIG. 42(E)).

In addition, every time "Jackpot (Special Figure 2) 'STOCK-BONUS'" is executed, "STOCK-TIME 2" is executed internally, but this is based on the reservation related to the special symbol lottery of the second special symbol. Since the jackpot (small hit) fluctuation of the second special symbol ends in a short period of about 1 second, there is no hold on the special symbol lottery of all the second special symbols, and the special symbol of the first special symbol Until the losing variation based on the lottery is executed, the specific period does not occur, and the normal electric accessory 770 is not released in a manner that makes it easy to enter the ball.

"STOCK-TIME2" is a specific game that moves after the jackpot game (small win V) based on the special symbol lottery of the second special symbol, and has three types of game states as shown in FIG. 43. "STOCK-TIME2", like "STOCK-TIME1", is a combination of the types of high base states, "Electric Support Mode 1" and "Electric Support Mode 2", and the number of games played to maintain the high base state (Electric Support Number). There is no difference in the mechanics of the game. However, "STOCK-TIME 2", which moves after the jackpot game (small win V) of "Special drawing 2_jackpot/small winning pattern A" to "Special drawing 2_jackpot/small winning pattern C", is better than the normal drawing lottery. The distribution frequency is controlled by "Electronic support mode 1" where the normal symbol probability of "hit" is 1/1, and "STOCK-BONUS" of 4 jackpot games (small win V) is executed. This is a gaming state where it is easy to get a large amount of balls in a short period of time.

In addition, "STOCK-TIME 2" is configured so that the number of electrical support in a specific game is at least 2 times even if it is "Electric support mode 2" where the probability of a regular symbol is 1/10, The number of times of electric support when "STOCK-TIME 1" is executed in the "electric support mode 2" is greater than the minimum number of one time, and the degree of expectation for continuation of the specific game (consecutive games) is also set high.

In "STOCK-TIME 2", when a reservation related to the special symbol lottery of the second special symbol is obtained, "Jackpot (special symbol 2) 'STOCK-BONUS'" is executed (Fig. 42 (F)), If the reservation related to the special symbol drawing of the special symbol cannot be obtained, the game returns to the "normal game" (FIG. 42(G)).

(Modified example of Pachinko gaming machine of Example 2-3)
Next, a modification of the Pachinko gaming machine P of the 2-3rd embodiment will be explained. In the Pachinko gaming machine P of the 2-3 embodiment, as a state in which the control related to the normal symbol lottery in the high base state is different, the "normal symbol probability" which is the probability of "winning" in the normal symbol lottery is different. Although we have explained ``Electric Support Mode 1'' and ``Electric Support Mode 2'', the types of ``Electric Support Mode'' are not limited to the two types, and also include ``Electric Support Mode 3'', ``Electric Support Mode 4'', etc., which have different ``normal symbol probabilities''. It may also be configurable.

In addition, as a method to vary the types of "Electric Support Mode", we have changed the type of "normal symbol fluctuation time shortening function (normal symbol time reduction)" instead of "normal symbol probability", and the fluctuation per one fluctuation of the normal symbol. Instead of 4 seconds, the time may be set to 2 seconds per fluctuation, or 8 seconds per fluctuation, or the fluctuation time of various normal symbols can be determined and the average is 4 seconds. Such cases may be provided. By enabling different "Electronic Support Modes" to be executed by "Reducing Normal Symbol Time", it is possible to vary the number of times the regular symbol lottery is executed in a specific period, and the shorter the normal symbol lottery can be executed, the more It can be sent out as a gaming state that can be expected to have a high continuation rate. Moreover, the "electric support mode" may be configured as a different specification by combining the types of "normal symbol probability" and "normal symbol time saving".

Above, regarding the Pachinko gaming machine P of the second embodiment, the 2-1 to 2-3 embodiments have been described as application examples thereof. The pachinko gaming machines P of Examples 2-1 to 2-3, which are application examples, and their modifications can be implemented as independent technologies, but the techniques disclosed in each can be combined as appropriate. It is also possible to implement it by

In addition, in the second embodiment and an application example of the second embodiment, a "win" in the normal symbol lottery occurs, that is, a state in which it is easy to enter the second starting winning hole P721, and a special symbol lottery in the second special symbol occurs. Although the embodiment has been described in which the acquisition of such a reservation has been described, as a modification to the second embodiment and an application example of the second embodiment, a "win" of the normal symbol lottery is a reservation related to the special symbol lottery of the second special symbol. It is also possible to configure a modified example as follows so as not to acquire the right to execute the jackpot game (small win V).

In the second embodiment and the application example of the second embodiment, a modification in which a "win" in the normal symbol lottery does not result in the acquisition of a reservation (the right to execute the jackpot game (small win V)) related to the special symbol lottery of the second special symbol As an example of a method for carrying out the example, a distributing device (such as a movable valve member) for distributing game balls into two channels is provided inside the winning device related to the normal electric accessory 770, and one channel is connected to the general winning port P731. A possible method is to adopt a board configuration in which one channel is configured to guide the game ball to the second starting prize opening P721, and the other is configured by a channel to guide the game ball to the second starting prize opening P721.

At this time, the operation pattern of the distributing device inside the winning device related to the normal electric accessory 770 is varied depending on the winning symbol lottery of the normal symbol in the normal symbol lottery, the type of "electric support mode", etc. A state is created in which the probability of winning a prize for the second start winning hole P721 when it becomes a "win" is different. As a specific example, the operation pattern of the normal electric accessory 770 and the distributing device inside the winning device is set so that the winning probability for the second starting winning hole P721 is 100% for “normal symbol_winning symbol A”, For "Normal symbol_winning symbol B", the winning probability for the second starting winning hole P721 is 50%, and for "normal symbol_winning symbol C", the winning probability for the second starting winning opening P721 is 10% (0% is also acceptable). An example of such a configuration is given.

In the second embodiment and the application example of the second embodiment configured in this way, if a "hit" is won in the normal symbol lottery during execution during a specific period, a "normal electric accessory release effect" is executed. Then, the player is prompted to enter the game ball into the normal electric accessory 770, and when the player enters the game ball into the winning device related to the ordinary electric accessory 770, the general winning hole P731 or the second starting prize is opened. Regardless of which part of the mouth P721 is entered, notification will be made to increase the level of expectation regarding whether or not a suspension has occurred regarding the special symbol lottery of the second special symbol (the color of the effect is "blue" ⇒ " It is configured to perform a step-up effect such as "Green" → "Red" → "Gold" → "Rainbow (confirmation of reservation acquisition related to special symbol lottery of 4 second special symbols)", and during a specific period. It may be configured to notify the number of pending acquisitions related to the special symbol lottery of the second special symbol as a game result at the timing of the end of the game (for example, a button effect is executed at the symbol fixed time of the special symbol at the expiration of a specific period). Then, by operating a button, "V x ○ pieces" is displayed as the number of pending acquisitions related to the special symbol lottery of the second special symbol, etc.).

When configured in this way, it is preferable not to display the number of reservations related to the special symbol lottery (display in the reservation display area P810, simple reservation display P814). In addition, by adopting such a modification, even if the normal symbol is a hit, the suspension related to the special symbol lottery of the second special symbol does not necessarily occur, so that the ordinary electric accessory 770 opens. A pachinko gaming machine P which is a modification of the second embodiment and the applied example of the second embodiment, which can send out many situations in which , and increase the frequency of normal symbol lottery wins in a specific period and have many dramatic changes. will be available.

(“Relief function” which activates the variable time reduction function triggered by the number of activations of the special symbol)
Activation of the variable time shortening function triggered by the number of special symbols activated "Relief function", when the variable display of the special symbol is executed for a predetermined number of games in a low base state (so-called "normal game") This is a function that generates a high base state (operating state of the electric chew support function).

More specifically, after the transition to the low base state (immediately after the RAM is cleared, after the game end condition is satisfied in the high base state, after the execution of a special game that will lead to the transition to the low base state), a predetermined game When a special game that is the number of times is executed, by generating a high base state, the starting winning hole related to the normal electric accessory 770 (starting winning hole related to the first special symbol or starting winning hole related to the second special symbol) This is a function that makes it easier to win a prize in the game's opening), makes it easier to acquire the right to draw special symbols, and suppresses players from consuming too many game balls.

The "relief function" sets multiple number of games as a predetermined number of games, and the number of times saved when the relief function is activated for the first time (number of games to maintain a high base state), and the number of times saved for the second time (number of games to maintain a high base state) The number of time reductions given when the rescue function is activated (third time) may be configured to be different.

In addition, if the "relief function" is configured to always operate when a special symbol lottery is executed a predetermined number of times, depending on the performance of the "relief function" that operates, it may cause the player to play excessively. Therefore, when a special symbol lottery is executed for a predetermined number of games, a lottery related to the activation of the "relief function" is executed. The "relief function" may be configured to operate at 1/2 with a probability of 50%.

(Activation of special symbol fluctuation time shortening function by “time saving symbol”)
In the pachinko game machine based on the premise and in this embodiment, a pachinko game machine P is described in which the special symbol fluctuation time shortening function (time saving function) and the electric chew support function are activated after a jackpot game (special game) is executed. . The special symbol fluctuation time reduction function (time saving function) and electric chew support function are not only activated after executing such special games, but also when certain types of special symbols (missing symbols, small winning symbols) are stopped and displayed. It may be configured such that the operation is started even when the jackpot game is executed and the jackpot game is not executed.

For example, in the special symbol lottery of the first special symbol, if the winning symbol lottery (missing symbol lottery) when the win/fail lottery is "losing", you win the "time saving __ losing symbol" which is won at 1/800. Additionally, it may be configured to generate a high base state (time saving state, electric chew support state) that continues until the special symbol lottery is executed 100 times.

Further, it is also possible to provide different types of "loss symbols with time saver" and configure the number of games to maintain a high base state to be different depending on the type of "loss symbol with time saver". For example, up to 50 times with "time saver_losing symbol A", 100 times with "time saver_losing symbol B", and 10,000 times with "time saver_losing symbol C" (*substantially the next jackpot is guaranteed). It is also possible to do this.

The special symbol fluctuation time reduction function (time saving function), the "relief function" related to the electric chew support function, and the "time saving pattern" are the technology disclosed in this embodiment, the second embodiment, and the application example of the second embodiment. It is also possible to apply it to

In particular, for this embodiment, the second embodiment, and the application example of the second embodiment, in which the small hit V is adopted as the specifications of the gaming machine, the special symbol fluctuation time shortening function (time saving function) and the electric chew support function are concerned. By adopting the "relief function" and the "time-saving symbol", the situation in which it is easy to obtain the hold related to the special symbol lottery of the second special symbol, which has a high probability of winning the jackpot game (small hit V), is created in the "normal game". This can occur even when a "big hit" is not achieved in the special symbol lottery of special symbols, and it can be expected that the player's consumption of game balls can be more effectively suppressed.

[Third example]
The pachinko gaming machines P of the present embodiment and the second embodiment are configured such that the player can change the performance content or display a new performance content by actually operating the performance button P381. However, the performance using the performance button P381 is not limited to this. In addition, the simple pattern P802 was displayed as a display object indicating the lottery result of the special pattern, but it not only plays such a role, but also plays the role of ensuring visibility to give diversity to the presentation of the decorative pattern P801. It is also possible to configure it to be displayed as a display object. Furthermore, it is possible to widen the range of games by applying not only the gameplay of "Small win V" mainly based on special symbols, but also the gameplay of "Small win V" mainly based on normal symbols. Therefore, an example of such a configuration will be referred to as a third embodiment. Hereinafter, only the underlying technology and the differences from this embodiment will be described in detail, and the explanation of common features will be omitted or simplified. It should be noted that among the elements constituting the Pachinko gaming machine P of the third embodiment, the same reference numerals are given to the elements that are the same as or correspond to the elements explained in the underlying technology or the present embodiment.

《Button production and automatic operation function》
As described above, a performance in which the performance content is changed or new performance content is displayed by operating the performance button P381 is referred to as a button performance. Depending on the type of button effect, the presence or absence of display of an operation promotion image (details will be described later), operation type, and effect content type differ. This button presentation allows the player to estimate the degree of expectation of a jackpot. In other words, the jackpot expectation level is configured to vary depending on the performance content changed by the button performance and the type of performance content newly displayed (performance content type).

The operation promotion image is a performance image for encouraging the player to operate the performance button P381 or the performance lever P382, and includes a button image that is a performance image that imitates the performance button P381, or a performance image that imitates the performance lever P382. In the lever image, there is an operation mode (for example, as described above, "single press" which is an operation mode in which the production button P381 is operated only once, or "sequential press" which is an operation mode in which the production button P381 is pressed multiple times). , "Lever operation" to press the production lever P382, etc.) (for example, "Press!" for "Single press", or "Press!" for "Single press", or "Press!" for "Single press", or "Press!" for "Single press", or "Press!" for "Multiple presses") Refers to an image with an accompanying image (image of text such as ``Map repeatedly!'' or ``Pull the lever!'' in the case of ``lever operation''). When displaying the operation promotion image, at the same time, a dedicated voice is used to instruct the operation mode (for example, "Press!" for "single press", "Tap repeatedly" for "multiple presses"). , if it is a "lever operation", a voice such as "Pull the lever!" may be output. Whether or not an operation promotion image is displayed indicates whether the button effect displays an operation promotion image or the button effect does not display an operation promotion image. (also referred to as a first operation effect), and a button effect in which no operation promotion image is displayed is referred to as a back button effect (also referred to as a second operation effect). Regarding the back button effect, which is a button effect that does not display an operation promotion image, the operation promotion image is not displayed (therefore, the sound instructing the operation mode described above is not output), but the effect button P381 and the effect lever P382 This is a performance that changes the performance content or displays new performance content by being operated.

The operation type is the type of operation mode described above, and is the operation mode of the production button P381 or the production lever P382 for changing the production content or displaying a new production content. In addition to "single press," "repeated press," and "lever operation," the operation types also include "long press," which continues to press the production button P381, and "lever pull," which continues to pull the production lever P382. In the case of "long press", the operation promotion image corresponding to such operation type is an image with the text "Press and hold!" attached to the button image (in this case, "Press and hold!") (You may output a voice saying "Keep pulling the lever!"), and if it is "Long pull the lever", an image with the words "Keep pulling the lever!" (In this case, output a voice saying "Keep pulling the lever!" ).

The performance content type is the type of performance content that is displayed when the performance button P381 or the performance lever P382 is operated. The type of performance content differs depending on the type of operation promotion image or operation mode in the case of a front button performance, and differs depending on the other performance contents at the time of execution of the back button performance in the case of a back button performance {For example, the level of expectation as described above is high Whether a reach effect (developmental effect that develops after the formation of a reach state, so-called super reach effect) is being executed, or whether an image of a specific character that is displayed immediately before execution of a highly anticipated reach effect is being displayed. For example, the performance content type for the front button performance is a "single press performance" (also referred to as a "single operation performance"), a dialogue performance before the formation of a reach state, and a development content type after the formation of a reach state (among several development performances). If it is a cut-in production of production A), a "repeated hit production" (also referred to as a "continuous hit operation production"), the meter production before the reach state is formed, or the meter production after the reach state is formed (development production B among the multiple development productions). In the case of an enemy annihilation performance or a "lever operation performance," these include a darkening performance before the reach state is formed, and an object falling performance after the reach state is formed (development performance C among multiple development performances). Note that details of these front button effects will be described later. In addition, as for the type of performance content in the back button performance, for example, the reach performance with high expectations as described above (development performance that develops after the formation of a reach state, so-called super reach performance) is in progress, and the reach performance is developed. Performance D (a reach performance with a lower jackpot expectation than development performance A, development performance B, and development performance C, and a performance that has the possibility of further developing from development performance D to either development performance A or development performance B) ), the back button effect can be pressed repeatedly for 10 seconds while the advanced effect D is being executed (operation valid period is 10 seconds), and repeated presses indicate that the advanced effect D is being executed. A title color change effect in which the color of the title (the color of the title display that is always displayed during the execution of advanced effect D) changes (the color of the title is displayed by emitting light with each operation, and as the color of the title display changes) , the color of the title may change in the order of blue → green → red → gold, and the latter color suggests a higher expectation of jackpot or development to development performance A or development performance B) , and when the image of a specific character is being displayed, which is displayed immediately before the execution of the highly anticipated reach effect, the back button effect is performed by pressing the button once when the specific character smiles (the operation period is 0.5 This is a timing single-press effect where the words "Confirmed" are displayed in rainbow colors only if the variation executing this effect is a jackpot.

A specific example of the button effect in the third embodiment is as follows. (1) Display of dialogue production operation promotion image: Yes (front button production), operation valid period is 3 seconds (operation validity period ends with button operation) Operation type: single press Production content type: before reaching state is formed , a character and a button image (no display of "Press!") are displayed, and when the production button P381 is pressed single-shot, a "dialogue image with a speech bubble" is displayed. The expectation of a jackpot is high in the order of blue < green < red < gold for the color of the image (color of the speech bubble). (2) Display of cut-in production operation promotion image: Yes (front button production), valid operation period is 3 seconds (operation validity period ends with button operation) Operation type: single press Production content type: Advanced production A During execution, a button image (with a display of ``Press!'') is displayed, and when the production button P381 is pressed single-shot, ``Cut-in of ally character'' is displayed. The expectation of a jackpot is high in the order of green < red < gold for the color of the image (cut-in color). After the cut-in performance, you will be notified whether it is a jackpot or not (for example, if your ally character wins against the enemy character, it is a jackpot, and if you lose, you lose.) (3) Display of meter performance operation promotion image: Yes (Front button effect), operation valid period is 5 seconds (button operation does not end the operation valid period, but when the meter reaches 20 stages, the operation valid period ends) Operation type: Repeated hit Performance content type: Before reaching state is formed , a 20-level meter and a button image (with a display of ``hit repeatedly!'') are displayed, and when the production button P381 is repeatedly hit, a message ``the meter accumulates'' is displayed according to the number of times the performance button P381 is hit repeatedly. The more the meter accumulates, the higher the chance of winning a jackpot. (4) Display or not of enemy annihilation performance operation promotion image: Yes (front button performance), operation valid period is 7 seconds (operation validity period does not end with button operation) Operation type: continuous hit performance content type: Execution of advanced performance B Inside, a message saying "100 enemies remaining" and a button image (with the message "Continuously hit!") are displayed, and when the production button P381 is repeatedly pressed, the message "The number of remaining enemies decreases" is displayed depending on the number of consecutive hits. ” is displayed. When the number of remaining enemies becomes 0, a jackpot is announced. (5) Display of blackout effect operation promotion image: Yes (front button effect), valid operation period is 3 seconds (operation valid period ends with button operation) Operation type: lever operation Production content type: Before forming the reach state , the lever image (with the message "Close!" displayed) is displayed, and when the production lever button P382 is operated, the screen goes dark with a sound of "Puchun", and then "Very hot" is written in large white letters. "Character" is displayed. Although the jackpot is not guaranteed, the expectation of a jackpot is relatively high compared to the dialogue production and meter production (only when the dialogue production and meter production are golden, the jackpot expectation is higher with the dialogue production and meter production) ). Note that if the image has the words "confirmed", the jackpot is confirmed. (6) Display or not of the operation promotion image for the effect of falling objects: Yes (front button effect), valid operation period is 3 seconds (operation valid period ends with button operation) Operation type: lever operation Production content type: Advanced production C During execution, a lever image (with a display of ``Close!'') is displayed, and when the production lever button P382 is operated, the role object will fall only if it is a jackpot, and the production display device P80 will display a rainbow-colored screen. This is the performance. Note that if it is not a jackpot, the accessory does not fall and the effect display device P80 becomes a gray screen. Compared to cut-in productions and enemy annihilation productions, the expectation of a jackpot is relatively high (than when an ally character wins after a cut-in production or when the number of enemies remaining becomes 0 after an enemy annihilation production). There is a higher possibility that the objects will fall during the production, but if the cut-in is gold, the victory of the ally character may be confirmed).

Furthermore, regarding the meter effects, enemy annihilation effects, and title color change effects that are "repeated hit effects," the contents of the effects change based on the player's actual repeated hit operations, but even if the aforementioned "auto continuous hit" operation is possible, good.

In this way, when executing a button effect, the effect is generated or changed based on the actual player operation, but in the third embodiment, even if there is no player operation, the player operation can be performed. It is possible to generate and change effects in the same way as before. Specifically, it is as follows.

When a predetermined period of time (for example, 3 seconds) has elapsed since the fluctuation of the first special symbol or the second special symbol stopped in a situation where neither the reservation corresponding to the first special symbol nor the reservation corresponding to the second special symbol exists. , enters a fluctuation standby state. When the performance button P381 is pressed single-shot in this fluctuation standby state, two item screens of "automatic operation function ON" and "automatic operation function OFF" are displayed as shown in FIG. 44 (in other words, , in a situation where there is neither a hold corresponding to the first special symbol nor a hold corresponding to the second special symbol, a predetermined period of time (for example, 3 seconds) has elapsed since the fluctuation of the first special symbol or the second special symbol stopped. Until then, it is not in the fluctuation standby state, so even if the production button P381 is pressed single-shot, the two item screens "Automatic operation function ON" and "Automatic operation function OFF" are not displayed. However, as a modification, the first In a situation where neither the hold corresponding to the special symbol nor the hold corresponding to the second special symbol exists, the fluctuation standby state may be set immediately after the fluctuation of the first special symbol or the second special symbol stops; in that case, the fluctuation Immediately after the button P381 stops, two item screens of "Automatic operation function ON" and "Automatic operation function OFF" are displayed by single pressing of the production button P381. This item screen can be selected with the cursor by operating the cross key in the left and right directions, and when the cursor is placed on the item screen of "Automatic operation function ON" and the production button P381 is pressed once again, the screen shown in Fig. 45 is displayed. As shown, the screen changes to the message "The automatic operation function has been turned on" and the automatic operation function is set. In addition, if you move the cursor to the item screen for "Automatic operation function OFF" and press the production button P381 again, the screen will change to "The automatic operation function has been turned OFF" and the automatic operation function will be displayed. The function is not set (unset). Although not shown, in the variable standby state, the decorative pattern P801 and the simple pattern P802 continue to be displayed, and then the "Automatic operation function ON", "Automatic operation function OFF" item screen, and "Automatic operation function OFF" are displayed. Even if the "Function ON" screen is displayed, the decorative pattern P801 and the simple pattern P802 continue to be displayed on the rear layer.

With the automatic operation function set, even if there is no actual operation by the player, the front button effect may be activated even if the player actually operates it at a predetermined timing within the operation validity period. In the same way, it generates and changes effects. Specifically, when executing a dialogue production, a "dialogue image with a speech bubble" is automatically displayed 1.5 seconds after the start of the effective operation period, and when executing a meter production, 0.2 seconds after the start of the effective operation period. Afterwards, the display will automatically show that the meter is accumulating as a continuous hit at 0.2 second intervals, and during the enemy annihilation performance, after 0.2 seconds from the start of the operation period, it will be treated as a continuous hit at 0.1 second intervals. ``The number of remaining enemies is decreasing'' will be displayed automatically, and when the blackout effect is executed, 1.5 seconds after the start of the operation period, ``Very hot'' will be displayed in large white letters (or ``Confirmed'' will appear). ”) will be displayed automatically. In this way, even if there is no actual operation by the player, the front button effect can generate or change the effect at a predetermined timing within the operation validity period in the same way as if there was an actual operation by the player. You can do that. Note that if the automatic operation function is not set and there is no actual operation by the player, the "dialogue image with speech bubbles" will not be displayed when the dialogue production is executed, and the "meter" will not be displayed when the meter production is executed. ``The number of remaining enemies is decreasing'' is not displayed during the enemy annihilation performance (however, the process of decreasing is not displayed, and if you are a loser, 1 person remains, If it is a jackpot, 0 people will be displayed in the end), and when the blackout effect is executed, ``large white letters with ``super hot'' (or ``confirmed'') will be displayed. Do not show.

Here, the cut-in effect and the falling role effect, which are part of the front button effect, and the two types of back button effects are button effects that are not subject to the automatic operation function. In other words, even if the automatic operation function is set, if there is no actual operation by the player, it will not be assumed that there has been an actual operation by the player. However, for the cut-in effect and the two types of back button effects, whether the automatic operation function is set or not, the effect will not occur unless there is an actual operation by the player; Regardless of whether the automatic operation function is set or not, if there is no operation by the player, the valid operation period expires (that is, the timing 3 seconds after the start of the valid operation period), If it is a jackpot, the accessory falls and the performance display device P80 becomes a rainbow colored screen, and if it is not a jackpot, the accessory does not fall and the performance display device P80 becomes a gray screen. With this configuration, we deliberately do not apply the automatic operation function to button effects that are closely related to jackpot confirmation or jackpot notification, as these are effects that can give the player the feeling of winning the jackpot themselves. , the generation of effects is made to depend on the player's operations.

In addition, regarding whether or not to set the automatic operation function (setting and canceling the setting), it is not limited to selecting from the two item screens that are displayed from a single press of the production button P381 in the variable standby state, but also by selecting the first special symbol or the second It can be set even during special symbol fluctuations (hereinafter referred to as symbol fluctuations). Specifically, it is as follows.

In a state where the automatic operation function is not set, and during a period that is not the operation valid period during symbol fluctuation (a period that is a symbol fluctuation period and is not the operation valid period for front button production and back button production), the production button P381 is not activated. The automatic operation function is set by long pressing (also referred to as "continuation operation" or "continuation of single operation") for a predetermined period of time (for example, 2 seconds). In that case, the screen that says "Automatic operation function has been turned on" as shown in Figure 45 will be displayed during the fluctuation, but it will be smaller than the screen displayed in the fluctuation standby state and will be located at the bottom left of the screen instead of in the center. will be displayed. In addition, if the automatic operation function is set, if the production button P381 is pressed single-shot while the symbol is changing, the automatic operation function setting will be cancelled. It can also be canceled by pressing the button P381 once). In that case, a screen saying "The automatic operation function has been turned OFF" is displayed during the fluctuation, but it is smaller than the screen displayed in the fluctuation standby state and is displayed at the bottom left of the screen instead of in the center. However, in some situations, these settings and cancellations cannot be made. (1) Situations where the automatic operation function cannot be set (1-1) If the long press of the effect button P381 to set the automatic operation function reaches the predetermined time, the operation validity period of the front button effect overlaps ( (1-2) If the operation validity period of the front button effect starts before the predetermined time elapses) (1-2) The operation of the back button effect will become effective until the predetermined time period for long pressing the effect button P381 to set the automatic operation function is reached. (1-3) By the time the predetermined time for long pressing the production button P381 to set the automatic operation function is reached, When the next symbol variation starts after the current symbol variation (the symbol variation that started with a long press) (2) A situation in which the automatic operation function cannot be canceled (2-1) During the operation validity period of the back button effect When the production button P381 is pressed single-shot

With this configuration, automatic operation can be set and canceled in an appropriate situation without waiting for the symbol fluctuation to stop (more precisely, the fluctuation standby state). In addition, as a modified example, the automatic operation function is not set, and the operation of the production button P381 is changed from the valid operation period during symbol fluctuation (the valid operation period for front button production and back button production in the symbol variation period). It may be configured such that the automatic operation function is set by starting a long press and then reaching a predetermined time period (for example, 2 seconds) after the operation validity period ends. In such a configuration, in the single press effect of the front button, the valid operation period ends at the time of single press. 2 seconds) If the button is pressed for a long time, the automatic operation function will be set when the predetermined period of time has been reached, but if the production button P381 is held down after the operation validity period of the continuous press effect has started, the "auto continuous press" operation will be performed. , the automatic operation function is not set even after the predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the long press, and only if the long press continues even after the operation valid period has ended, the long press after the operation valid period has ended. The automatic operation function is set when the press reaches a predetermined time (for example, in the case of a meter effect that is a continuous press effect, the long press starts when there are 4 seconds remaining in the 5 seconds of the operation validity period) In this case, if you continue to press and hold the button for a long time, the auto operation function will be executed for the remaining operation period of 4 seconds, but even if 2 seconds have passed since the start of the long press, the automatic operation function will not be set. If you continue to press and hold for 2 seconds after the remaining operation valid period of 4 seconds has elapsed, and continue to press and hold for another 2 seconds after the remaining operation valid period of 4 seconds has elapsed, The automatic operation function is set at the timing when an additional 2 seconds have elapsed after the 4 seconds that are the valid operation period have elapsed.) In addition, in the case of such a configuration, as a modification of (1-1), by the time the long press of the effect button P381 for setting the automatic operation function reaches a predetermined time, the operational validity period of the front button effect is changed. Even in the case of overlap (when the operation validity period of the front button effect starts before the elapse of a predetermined time), the automatic operation function may be settable, and furthermore, the effect button P381 for setting the automatic operation function may be set. The automatic operation function can be set even if the operation validity period of the back button effect overlaps with the operation validity period of the back button effect (when the operation validity period of the back button effect starts before the predetermined time elapses) until the predetermined time of long press is reached. It's good as well.

In the third embodiment, the automatic operation timing can be set by the player in order to reflect the player's hobbies and preferences in the automatic operation function. In other words, it is possible to set the timing of production generation and production change (timing at which it is assumed that a button operation has occurred) in the front button production when the automatic operation function is set.

As mentioned above, with the automatic operation function set, even if there is no actual operation by the player for the front button production, when the dialogue production is executed, the " ``Speech images with speech bubbles'' will be automatically displayed, and when the meter effect is executed, 0.2 seconds after the start of the operation period, ``the meter will accumulate'' will be displayed automatically as continuous hits at 0.2 second intervals. 0.2 seconds after the start of the effective period of operation, the display "The number of enemies remaining is decreasing" will be displayed automatically as continuous hits at 0.1 second intervals, and when performing a blackout effect, the operation 1.5 seconds after the start of the validity period, the message "Very hot" written in large white letters (or the word "confirmed") will be automatically displayed, but this automatic operation timing {automatic The timing of production occurrence or production change in front button production in a state where the operation function is set (timing at which it is assumed that a button operation has been made) is referred to as the normal setting state of the automatic operation function. From the normal setting state of this automatic operation function, the automatic operation timing in front button performances to which the automatic operation function can be applied {timing of production occurrence and production change in front button performances in a state where the automatic operation function is set (button operation is The state in which the automatic operation timing is changed is the automatic operation timing change state of the automatic operation function. Note that this automatic operation timing change can be arbitrarily set for each front button effect to which the automatic operation function is applicable. Specifically, it is as follows.

When a predetermined period of time (e.g., 3 seconds) has elapsed since the first special symbol or the second special symbol stopped changing in a situation where there is neither a reservation corresponding to the first special symbol nor a reservation corresponding to the second special symbol, , enters a fluctuation standby state. When the performance button P381 is single-pressed in this variable standby state, two item screens of "automatic operation function ON" and "automatic operation function OFF" are displayed as described above. When the cursor is placed on the "Automatic operation function ON" item screen on this item screen and the user presses up on the cross key, an automatic operation timing setting item screen as shown in FIG. 46 is displayed. More specifically, as a setting item screen for automatic operation timing, four item screens are displayed: "line generation timing", "meter accumulation start timing", "enemy annihilation start timing", and "blackout occurrence timing". When this 4-item screen is displayed, use the up/down/left/right operations on the cross key to move the cursor to any item screen and press the production button P381 single-shot, the table button production corresponding to that item will be displayed. A dedicated screen for setting the occurrence timing is displayed for setting the occurrence timing (occurrence timing when the automatic operation function is set). Furthermore, "line generation timing" corresponds to dialogue production, "meter accumulation start timing" corresponds to meter production, "enemy annihilation start timing" corresponds to enemy annihilation production, and "dark transition occurrence timing" corresponds to blackout production.

As shown in Figure 47, on the generation timing setting screen for "line generation timing", three item screens are displayed: "beginning", "midway", and "last", so use the left and right arrow keys to When the cursor is placed on any item screen and the production button P381 is pressed once, the generation timing corresponding to that item screen is set. Here, "first" is the timing immediately after the start of the operation valid period (timing 0 seconds after the start of the operation valid period), and "midway" is the timing 1.5 seconds after the start of the operation valid period. , "last" is the end timing of the valid operation period (timing 3 seconds after the start of the valid operation period). Note that the screen dedicated to setting the occurrence timing of "blackout occurrence timing" is also the same, and can be selected from three item screens: "beginning", "midway", and "last". On the screen dedicated to setting the occurrence timing of "Meter accumulation start timing", three item screens are displayed: "First", "Intermediate 1", and "Intermediate 2", so use the left/right arrow keys to select any of the When the cursor is placed on the screen and the performance button P381 is pressed once, the generation timing corresponding to that item screen is set. Here, "first" is the timing immediately after the start of the operation valid period (timing 0 seconds after the start of the operation valid period), and "midway 1" is the timing 1.5 seconds after the start of the operation valid period. Yes, and "midway 2" is the timing 3 seconds after the start of the valid operation period. On the screen dedicated to setting the occurrence timing of "Enemy annihilation start timing", 3 item screens are displayed: "First", "Middle 1", and "Middle 2", so use the left/right arrow keys to select any of the items. When the cursor is placed on the screen and the performance button P381 is pressed once, the generation timing corresponding to that item screen is set. Here, "first" is the timing immediately after the start of the operation valid period (timing 0 seconds after the start of the operation valid period), and "midway 1" is the timing 2.5 seconds after the start of the operation valid period. Yes, and "midway 2" is the timing 5 seconds after the start of the valid operation period.

In addition, as a modification, the automatic operation timing may be changed uniformly. For example, the automatic operation timing may be uniformly changed to the valid operation period regardless of the type of front button effect to which the automatic operation function can be applied. Can be set in 0.5 second increments from immediately after the start (0 seconds after the start of the valid period) to 2 seconds after the start of the valid operation period (0 seconds after the start of the valid period, 1 second after the start of the valid operation period) (can be set to 1.5 seconds later, 2 seconds later).

With this configuration, it is possible for the player to set the automatic operation timing for each of the multiple types of front button effects at any timing, so it is convenient for the player to set the automatic operation timing to the timing that suits his or her hobbies. It becomes possible to enjoy the production occurrence of.

In addition, in the front button effect, immediately before displaying the operation promotion image, an operation promotion promotion effect indicating that the operation promotion image will be displayed soon may be executed. Specifically, by displaying a silhouette image representing the silhouette of the button image or lever image in advance immediately before displaying the button image or lever image, the button image or lever image will appear afterward (i.e., the button image or lever image will not appear). This is an effect that suggests that a promotional image will be displayed. Note that when displaying a button image or a lever image, it is not always necessary to perform such an operation promotion effect, and the button image or lever image may be displayed immediately without going through the operation promotion effect. Here, regarding this operation promotion promotion performance, multiple types of display modes may be provided, and when configured in such a manner, for example, an operation promotion promotion performance with a blue effect (the silhouette of the button image or lever image glows faintly blue). The operation promotion effect with a red effect (the operation promotion effect where the silhouette of the button image or lever image is displayed as a faint red glow) is better than the operation promotion effect with a red effect (the operation promotion effect where the silhouette of the button image or lever image is displayed as if it were glowing in red) It may be configured so that the expectation level of jackpot is high. In addition, as another modification, multiple types of button images and lever images may be provided (for example, a button image may include a blue button image and a red button image, with the red button image having a higher expectation level than the blue button image). For example, a warning effect is more likely to be executed (for example, a red line effect is more likely to be executed than a blue line effect), and an operation promotion and incitement effect with a red effect is more likely to be executed than a control promotion and incitement effect with a blue effect. It may be configured so that it is likely to be an image (for example, a red button image). In addition to the above, it may be configured such that a long-term (for example, 4 seconds) operation promotion and incitement performance is higher in the expectation of a jackpot than a short-time (for example, 2 seconds) operation promotion and incitement performance. , it is configured such that a long-term (for example, 4 seconds) operation promotion and incitement effect is more likely to result in a specific button image (for example, a red button image) than a short-time (for example, 2 seconds) operation promotion and incitement effect. It's okay. In addition, when configuring to provide multiple types of display modes for operation promotion promotion effects, the latter half of the variable display (specific timing after the formation of the reach state) is more effective than the first half of the variable display (predetermined timing before the formation of the reach state). ) may be configured so that the operation promotion promotion performance with high expectations is more likely to be executed, or the operation promotion promotion performance may not be executed in the first half of the fluctuating display (predetermined timing before the formation of the reach state). , it may be configured such that the operation promotion inciting effect can be executed only in the latter half of the variable display (specific timing after the ready-to-reach state is formed). In addition, as a further modified example, it is possible to execute the line performance even during execution of one or more variable displays (pre-read variable display) before the suspension that is the target of the pre-read display is completed, and (display a button image). (possible), and the operation promotion inciting effect is executed more easily when the prefetched variable display is being executed than during the execution of the variable display when the hold that is the target of this prefetched effect is exhausted (the said variable display). You may lower the possibility that the look-ahead fluctuation display is in progress, and the expectations are higher when the look-ahead fluctuation display is being executed than during the execution of the fluctuation display when the action pending ball targeted for this look-ahead is exhausted (the fluctuation display). The possibility that the operation promotion inciting effect will be executed may be reduced. As another modification example, the operation promotion promotion effect is not executed in the first half of the variable display (predetermined timing before the formation of the reach state) (or the operation promotion effect with a high expectation level is not executed and the operation promotion effect with a low expectation level is promoted) Execute an incitement effect), and execute an operation promotion incitement effect in the latter half of the fluctuating display (specific timing after the reach state is established) (or perform an operation promotion incitement effect with a high expectation level instead of an operation promotion incitement effect with a low expectation level) (for example, 60 seconds. 90 seconds) may be configured so that the expectation of a jackpot is high, and the button image at a specific timing after the formation of the reach state, which is the latter half of the fluctuating display, is likely to be an image with a high expectation ( For example, it may be configured such that the red button image is more likely to be displayed instead of the blue button image.

《Decorative designs and simple designs》
The decorative pattern P801 is a pattern displayed in a larger size than the simple pattern P802. The combination of stopping symbols of the decorative pattern P801 is composed of three symbols, and as a general rule, they are stopped one by one in order after being displayed in a variable manner. The combination of stopped symbols of the simple symbol P802 is also composed of three symbols, but the three symbols are stopped at the same time after the variable display. As the combination of the stop symbols of the simple symbol P802, the same combination as the combination of the stop symbols of the decorative symbol P801 is displayed.

Note that while the development effect is being executed, the decorative pattern P801 may be configured to be displayed in a small size (an alternative pattern may be displayed) for at least a part of the period, or the decorative pattern P801 may be hidden (the alternative pattern may also be displayed). However, in such a situation, the simple symbol P802 is always displayed in a variable manner. This simple symbol P802 is displayed in a small size at the upper right of the effect display device P80, and is displayed in a variable manner while the first special symbol or the second special symbol is fluctuating, and the first special symbol or the second special symbol is stopped. While it is being displayed, the display is stopped, and like the decorative pattern P801, the three symbols are displayed in a variable manner and in a stopped manner. By providing this simple pattern P802, situations where you want to make the decorative pattern P801 smaller or hide it (for example, when performing an advanced effect, or when performing an effect using movable accessories and the center of the effect display device P80 is hidden) etc.), it is possible to notify that it is changing (in other words, that the result is not determined). In other words, this simple pattern P802 can be said to be a pattern for display guarantee (for compensating the display state of the decorative pattern P801). In addition, when this simple symbol P802 is displayed in a variable manner, it is preferable to always continue the variable display from the start of variation of the first special symbol or the second special symbol until the display is stopped, that is, the decorative symbol P801 is Even if a temporary stop is made at (for example, when a special decorative pattern P801 displaying characters such as "NEXT" is temporarily stopped when performing a pseudo-continuous performance), the simple pattern P802 is temporarily stopped in the middle. (For this reason, the simple symbol P802 is not provided with a special symbol that displays characters such as "NEXT", and the simple symbol P802 only performs a fixed stop), In addition, in order to prevent players from misinterpreting a losing fluctuation as a jackpot, and to prevent players from knowing in advance that a jackpot fluctuation is a jackpot, whether it is a losing fluctuation or a jackpot fluctuation, the player The symbol combinations that indicate an error are displayed in a fluctuating manner (for example, if the type of the simple symbol P802 is "1" to "7", "123" → "234" → "345" → "456") ” → “567” → “671” → “712” → “123” → etc.) is preferable.

In addition, when the decorative pattern P801 and the simple pattern P802 start to fluctuate from a fixed stop, the symbol combination that becomes the starting point (the first symbol combination immediately after the start of the fluctuation) is one step forward from the symbol combination at the fixed stop. However, when the simple symbol P802 starts to fluctuate from a situation where it is fixed and stopped, the symbol combination that becomes the starting point is a predetermined symbol combination, regardless of the combination at the time of fixed and stopped. For example, when the decorative pattern P801 and the simple pattern P802 start to fluctuate in a situation where both the number combinations related to the decorative pattern P801 and the simple pattern P802 are fixed and stopped at "243", the pattern that becomes the starting point of the decorative pattern P801 The combination is "354", but the symbol combination that is the starting point of the simple symbol P802 is fixed at "123", and both the number combinations related to the decorative symbol P801 and the simple symbol P802 are fixed and stopped at "333". When the decorative pattern P801 and the simple pattern P802 start to fluctuate, the pattern combination that becomes the starting point of the decorative pattern P801 becomes "444", but the pattern combination that becomes the starting point of the simple pattern P802 is fixed at "123". In addition to this, the role of the simple pattern P802 can be clearly differentiated from the decorative pattern P801 by having the following characteristics. Specifically, it is as follows.

The display area of the decorative pattern P801, which is easy for the player to recognize, is larger than the display area of the simple pattern P802 for display guarantee (for compensating the display state of the decorative pattern P801). This is a situation where the decorative pattern P801 and the simple pattern P802 are fixed and stopped, the decorative pattern P801 is immediately after forming a reach state (a reach state without developing into an advanced effect), and the simple pattern P802 is a variable display. This configuration is suitable not only for situations in which the decorative pattern P801 is a small pattern during an advanced presentation, but also in a situation where the simple pattern P802 is displayed in a variable manner. be.

The display position of the decorative pattern P801 is whether it is in the first production mode (for example, normal mode or stage A in normal mode) or in the second production mode (for example, rush mode or stage B in normal mode, which will be described later). By setting the display position to be different depending on the display mode, it is possible to realize a variety of presentations with the decorative pattern P801 depending on the presentation mode. On the other hand, since the simple pattern P802 only needs to play the role of compensating the display state of the decorative pattern P801, unnecessary development is required as the simple pattern P802 remains in the same display position regardless of whether it is in the first presentation mode or the second presentation mode. Preferably, no design is required. Note that details of the production mode in the third embodiment will be described later.

The display mode of the decorative pattern P801 depends on whether it is the first production mode (for example, normal mode or stage A in normal mode) or the second production mode (for example, rush mode or stage B in normal mode). By using different display modes, it is possible to realize a variety of presentations with the decorative pattern P801 depending on the presentation mode. For example, in the first presentation mode, the decorative pattern P801 is composed of only the decorative pattern P801 of numbers (decorative patterns P801 such as "1", "2", ..., "7"), and in the second presentation mode, the decorative pattern P801 is composed of decorative patterns P801 of numbers only (decorative patterns P801 such as "1", "2", ..., "7") A decorative pattern P801 is constructed by combining the pattern P801 and the decorative pattern P801 of an ally character ("1" + "character a", "2" + "character b", ..., "7" + "character g") ” decorative pattern P801). On the other hand, the simple pattern P802 only needs to play the role of compensating the display state of the decorative pattern P801, so regardless of whether it is the first presentation mode or the second presentation mode, the simple pattern P802 only needs to be displayed in the same manner, such as numbers. It is preferable to configure the simple pattern P802 with only the decorative pattern P801, thereby eliminating the need for unnecessary development and design.

The display area of the decorative pattern P801 can be changed (moved, made into a small pattern) depending on the changing situation (for example, whether or not it is before the development performance, whether or not it is in the development performance, etc.). It is possible to give diversity to the presentation of the symbol P801. On the other hand, the simple pattern P802 only needs to play the role of compensating the display state of the decorative pattern P801, so the display area of the simple pattern P802 should not be changed (not moved, not made into a small pattern) to avoid unnecessary development design. It is preferable not to do this.

The decorative pattern P801 can vary in speed such as slow, medium, high, or super high speed depending on the fluctuation situation (for example, whether it is at the start of the fluctuation, in the middle of the fluctuation, or just before the end of the fluctuation, etc.). , it is possible to give diversity to the presentation of the decorative pattern P801. On the other hand, since the simple pattern P802 only needs to play the role of compensating the display state of the decorative pattern P801, the variation speed of the simple pattern P802 should not be made variable, or the number of variable steps should be reduced (for example, only low and high speeds should be used). It is preferable to avoid unnecessary development and design by doing so. Also, regarding the direction of variation, the decorative pattern P801 allows variation not only from top to bottom but also from bottom to top (allows variation in multiple directions), while the simple pattern P802 allows variation from top to bottom. It is preferable to make the fluctuation only downward. In addition, the decorative pattern P801 fluctuates from top to bottom in the first presentation mode, but in the second presentation mode, it rotates on the spot and is switched and displayed in order. Alternatively, the simple symbol P802 may only vary from top to bottom whether in the first production mode or the second production mode.

The decorative pattern P801 is a temporary stop (a temporary stop during the fluctuation of the first special symbol or the second special symbol) before a fixed stop (a stop at the timing when the first special symbol or the second special symbol stops), (temporary stop accompanied by slight fluctuations), and at that time, a specific pattern that is a decorative pattern P801 other than numbers (for example, a decoration with the word "Super" written on it that foretells the development to a further development) By temporarily stopping the symbol P801), it is possible to create a relationship between the performance of the decorative symbol P801 and other performances. On the other hand, since the simple pattern P802 only needs to play the role of compensating the display state of the decorative pattern P801, the simple pattern P802 does not temporarily stop, nor does it temporarily stop a specific pattern, which requires unnecessary development and design. It is preferable to avoid doing this.

The decorative pattern P801 overlaps with the display area of other preview performances (for example, dialogue performances, meter performances, etc.), that is, is displayed in a superimposed manner. This kind of superimposed display is allowed in order to use as much of the area on the performance display device P80 as possible to create a powerful performance, but the simple pattern P802 is used to compensate for the display state of the decorative pattern P801. It is desirable that the display area of the simple symbol P802 is designed so as not to overlap (display in a superimposed manner) with the display area of the other preview effects. However, regarding the relationship with special preview effects that inevitably overlap (for example, a blackout effect displayed on the entire effect display device P80, a falling effect effect, etc.), the display priority of the simple pattern P802 may be changed to the special notice effect. It is preferable to set the display priority higher than the display priority of the special preview performance (the simple pattern P802 is set to be displayed on the front layer rather than the special preview performance). In addition, a right-handed hitting notification image (a right-handed hitting notification image exclusively for the high base state that is displayed during the high base state, unlike the image displayed during the special game; however, an image that is common to the image during the special game may also be used. , which may be the above-mentioned right-handed hitting notification P832), it is also desirable to ensure that it is visible to the player, so the display area of the simple symbol P802 and the display area of the right-handed hitting notification image do not overlap ( It is desirable to design the display so that it does not overlap. However, if the display area of the decorative pattern P801 is moved or expanded, the display area of the decorative pattern P801 and the display area of the right-hand hit notification image may be overlapped (displayed in a superimposed manner). It is preferable to set the display priority of the decorative pattern P801 to be lower than the display priority of the right-handed hitting notification image (setting the decorative pattern P801 to be displayed on the rear layer rather than the right-handed hitting notification image). be.

During the special game, only one decorative pattern P801 may be displayed instead of being displayed in combination. For example, if a special game is executed after "777" has been confirmed and stopped, "7" will be displayed during the special game, and if a special game is executed after "222" has been confirmed and stopped, "2" is displayed during the special game. Thereby, it is possible to recognize which decorative pattern P801 has won the jackpot during the special game. As a modified example, only the decorative pattern P801 corresponding to a jackpot with a high advantage (for example, "333", "555", "777", etc. indicating a jackpot of 7R or more or a jackpot of 10R) is displayed during a special game. May be displayed. In this way, the display area that displays one decorative pattern P801 displayed during the special game is the other display area during the special game, such as the round display area, the right-handed display area, the prize ball acquisition display area, and the cumulative prize ball display area. It is desirable that the display area not overlap with the number display area, that is, be configured not to be displayed in an overlapping manner (however, the highlighted display may be displayed in an overlapping manner, and in that case, the highlighted display has a higher display priority). Furthermore, although it is preferable that the simple symbols P802 be hidden during the special game (because the variable display is not performed during the special game), they may be displayed during the special game.

In the decorative pattern P801, in addition to performing fluctuations (for example, moving from top to bottom), it is also displayed with predetermined actions at the start of fluctuation, immediately after a temporary stop, after a ready-to-reach state is formed, during a temporary stop, etc. (The actions in each situation may be referred to as a fluctuation start action, a temporary stop action, a ready-to-reach state formation action, and a swinging action). For example, if it becomes a non-reach (when the decorative pattern P801 and the simple pattern P802 are displayed as "624" at the time of fixed stop), all of the left, middle, and right symbols in the decorative pattern P801 are displayed at the start of fluctuation. starts to fluctuate after performing a movement that expands, and then when the left symbol temporarily stops, it performs a bouncing movement, and after the "6" temporarily stops, it continues the swinging movement. Then, when the right symbol temporarily stops, it performs a bouncing motion, and after "4" temporarily stops, it continues the shaking motion, and then, when the middle symbol temporarily stops, it makes a bouncing motion. After performing the action, "2" temporarily stops and makes a slight swinging action, and then, at the final stop timing, all the actions of the left, middle, and right symbols are completed. In this case, the simple symbol P802 does not perform any operation. In addition, if it does not develop into a development effect after forming a reach state (when the decorative pattern P801 and simple pattern P802 are displayed as "212" at the time of fixed stop), the left symbol in the decorative pattern P801 at the start of fluctuation , the middle symbol and the right symbol all perform an expanding action and then begin to fluctuate, and then, when the left symbol temporarily stops, it performs a bouncing motion and then "2" temporarily stops. Then, when the right symbol temporarily stops, it performs a bouncing motion, and after "2" temporarily stops, it continues the shaking motion, and then it is a reach. To signal this, the left and right symbols perform a rotating motion and then continue the shaking motion again, and then, when the middle symbol temporarily stops, they perform a bouncing motion and the "1" temporarily appears. It stops and makes a slight swinging motion, and then, at the fixed stop timing, all the motions of the left, middle, and right symbols are completed (the middle symbol does not rotate). In this case, the simple symbol P802 does not perform any operation. In addition, when it develops into a development effect (when the decorative pattern P801 and simple pattern P802 are displayed as "232" at the time of fixed stop), when the variation starts, the left pattern, middle pattern, and right pattern in the decorative pattern P801 After performing an action in which everything expands, it starts to fluctuate, and then when the left symbol temporarily stops, it performs a bouncing action, and after “2” temporarily stops, it continues the swinging action. Then, when the right symbol temporarily stops, it performs a bouncing motion, and after "2" temporarily stops, it continues the shaking motion, and then the left symbol stops to notify that it is reach. The right symbol performs a rotating motion and then continues the shaking motion again, and then, while the left and right symbols are performing the shaking motion, the middle symbol changes (at this time, the middle symbol expands). (The pattern changes from top to bottom in the state, and the left and right symbols that did not overlap or had a low overlap rate until now overlap or have a high overlap rate), then the development effect In order to execute this, it moves from the normal background to the reach background, and when it is notified by the development effect that the result is a loss, it moves from the reach background to the normal background, and after the transition, the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol. The symbol continues its swinging motion for a predetermined period of time, and then, at the fixed stop timing, all the motions of the left symbol, middle symbol, and right symbol are completed (the middle symbol does not perform bouncing motion or rotating motion). In this case, the simple symbol P802 does not perform any operation. With this configuration, it is possible to give diversity to the presentation of the decorative pattern P801, while the simple pattern P802 only needs to play the role of compensating the display state of the decorative pattern P801. It is preferable to configure the system so that it does not operate in particular, so that unnecessary development and design can be avoided. Further, a specific pattern among the decorative patterns P801 (for example, the medium pattern "7") may be configured so that a predetermined action is not performed or the probability of performing it is low compared to other symbols. This predetermined motion may be, for example, the above-mentioned temporary stop motion (bouncing motion) (particularly regarding the middle symbol "7" after the ready-to-reach state is formed). By configuring in this way, it is possible to increase the rarity of the motion in a specific symbol. The decorative pattern P801 is constructed by combining the numerical decorative pattern P801 and the ally character decorative pattern P801 ("1" + "character a", "2" + "character b", ..., "7"). ” + “Character g” P801), both the number decorative pattern P801 and the ally character decorative pattern P801 perform the swinging motion, but the swinging width (oscillation width) For example, if the decorative pattern P801 is swaying up and down, by varying the distance width between the state where the decorative pattern P801 is displayed at the top and the state where it is displayed at the bottom during the swaying motion, A shaking motion with a sense of dynamism may be realized, and when configured in this way, the swing width of the decorative pattern P801 of the number is made smaller than the swing width of the decorative pattern P801 of the ally character, or the decorative pattern of the number P801 may not perform the shaking motion, and only the decorative pattern P801 of the ally character may be configured to perform the shaking motion.

Here, in the third embodiment, the effect is the effect using the decorative pattern P801, and it is possible to execute a effect different from the pseudo continuous effect. At least one symbol (for example, the right symbol) among the left symbol, middle symbol, and right symbol in the decorative symbol P801 is temporarily displayed from the start of fluctuation of the first special symbol or the second special symbol until the stop display is performed. Fixed in a stopped state {For other symbols (for example, the left symbol and the middle symbol), it will be fixed according to the fluctuation situation from the start of the fluctuation of the first special symbol or the second special symbol until the stop display is performed. It fluctuates or temporarily stops while the fluctuating speed changes from slow, medium, high, or super high speed (i.e., as an example, while the left and middle symbols are fluctuating, the right symbol fluctuates. The temporary stop has continued since the start). Such a variation of the decorative pattern P801 is referred to as a fixed special variation. When a fixed special fluctuation is performed, the expectation level of a jackpot in the hold is higher than when a fixed special fluctuation is not performed, or the expectation that the fluctuation with a fixed special fluctuation is a jackpot fluctuation is higher. It is configured. In addition, when a fixed special variation is performed, it is preferable that the simple symbol P802 always continues to display the variation from the start of variation of the first special symbol or the second special symbol until the stop display is performed (the variation speed is It is preferable not to make it variable, or to reduce the number of steps in which it is made variable, and to make a definite stop when the first special symbol or the second special symbol is stopped and displayed). In this fixed special variation, since the decorative pattern P801 is fixed (temporarily stopped) from the start of the variation, it is difficult for the player to understand whether it is changing or not, so the simple pattern P802 is always displayed in a variable manner. By doing so, the player can check the status of the fluctuating display. In addition, a skilled player (a player who knows the existence and role of fixed special fluctuations) can detect in advance that the fixed (temporarily stopped) decorative pattern P801 will come to a fixed stop. If it is a fixed special fluctuation such as fixing (temporarily stopping) at "7", if the right symbol and left symbol form a reach state with "7", the effect is that the jackpot can be detected in advance. .

In the third embodiment, there are multiple types of performance modes, and it is determined which type of performance can be performed for each performance mode. To specifically explain the performance mode and the performance content executed in the performance mode, for example, there are multiple types of performance modes, ``normal mode'' and ``rush mode'', and changes in the game state and special symbols. Depending on the number of times of display, etc., one of a plurality of types of performance modes is alternatively set, and a variable performance is executed according to the set performance mode. Basically, the "normal mode" is set when the gaming state is the normal state (low base state), and the "rush mode" is set when the gaming state is the time saving state (high base state). When any production mode is set, a background image dedicated to the production mode (a background that is displayed behind the decorative pattern 61 image) is displayed, and BGM dedicated to the production mode is output from the speaker 83. In this way, the background image and BGM are set to be different for each production mode, so it is possible for the player to recognize which production mode the player is currently in based on the type of background image or BGM. ing. Specifically, "Normal Mode" has four stages: "Stage A," "Stage B," "Stage C," and "Look-ahead Stage," and is triggered by the failure of a progression or development performance of 20 or more fluctuations. , transition from "Stage A" to "Stage B", transition from "Stage B" to "Stage C", transition from "Stage C" to "Stage A", and move from "Stage A" to "Stage A" based on the preview performance judgment. If you win the execution (transition), you will move from the stage you are currently staying at to the "pre-reading stage" (the execution of the development performance is confirmed when you move to the "pre-reading stage", and if you win the jackpot, you will move to the "pre-reading stage") (If the number is off, a number other than the number zero will be displayed in the "look-ahead stage," and the next change will return to the stage before the transition to the "look-ahead stage.") The BGM (stage BGM) is different for each of "Stage A", "Stage B", "Stage C", and "Look-ahead stage" (also different from the stage BGM of "Rush mode"), but in "Stage A", the The stage BGM is interrupted (ends) when the variation stops (determined stop) when the reach is out of reach (it is a deviation without forming the reach state, for example, a random number such as "351"), and the stage BGM is interrupted (ends) when the next variation starts. BGM starts from the beginning, and in "Stage B", "Stage C", and "Look-ahead stage", the stage BGM will not be interrupted (it will not end) even if there is a fluctuation stop (determined stop) due to non-reach. ), the stage BGM is output continuously after the next fluctuation (the "rush mode" is also configured to be output continuously).

Here, although it is possible to perform a pseudo continuous performance in any of "Stage A", "Stage B", "Stage C", and "Look-ahead stage", in any stage, when temporarily stopping in a pseudo continuous performance, (When a predetermined pseudo-continuous symbol (for example, a symbol with the letters "NEXT") as a middle symbol is fluctuated and displayed in the vicinity of a predetermined temporary stop position and then temporarily stopped), the stage BGM is not output. (interruption), the stage BGM is started from the beginning with the re-fluctuation display (re-fluctuation after a temporary stop), or it is switched to a specific BGM different from the one before the re-fluctuation display. After that, when progressing to a development performance in "Stage A," "Stage B," "Stage C," or "Pre-reading stage," the background image of each stage (the stage you were staying at) switches to the background image of the development performance. (At the same time, the stage BGM is not output while the development performance is being executed, and a performance indicating a failure in the development performance is displayed.) The background image of each stage will be switched again (the background image of the stage that was displayed before the development performance development), but in that situation, even if the background image of the stage is displayed until the next variable display starts. , the stage BGM is not output, and the BGM dedicated to the development performance is also not output (it is silent, or a specific BGM that is different from the stage BGM and the BGM dedicated to the development performance is output). Therefore, even if the fluctuation stops (determined stop) due to non-reach, the stage BGM will not be interrupted (will not end), and the stage BGM will continue to be output after the next fluctuation. C", "Look-ahead stage" (even if it is not "Stage A"), if it is lost through the development stage, the stage BGM will be played before the fluctuation stop (determined stop). will be interrupted, and the stage BGM will start from the beginning with the start of the next variation.

In addition, in the "rush mode", the pseudo continuous effect is not executed. Here, special effects that suggest that a pseudo continuous effect will be executed (for example, a continuation dialogue notice, ``Continue!'', which confirms the execution of the subsequent pseudo continuous effect, By executing unconfirmed performances such as "Maybe it will continue?", it is suggested that a pseudo-continuation performance (re-fluctuation display) will be performed afterwards, but this special performance is limited to "Stage A" and " It is displayed only in "Stage C" and not in "Stage B" and "Look-Ahead Stage". In other words, by preparing in advance both stages where the possibility of a pseudo-continuous performance can be detected and stages where the possibility cannot be detected, and by repeating stage transitions between these stages, a performance that does not make the player bored is realized. are doing. Note that in "Stage A", a special performance using character A as a motif is performed, while in "Stage C", a special performance using character B as a motif is performed. In addition, this is a different effect from a special effect, and it is a pseudo continuous effect that confirms that the pseudo continuous effect will be executed after that just by occurring (for example, when character C appears, the line "Continuation confirmed!" is always displayed) Furthermore, there is also a development confirmation effect (displayed effect) that is different from the special effect and the pseudo-continuation confirmation effect, and which only occurs when it is confirmed that the pseudo-continuation effect will not be executed afterward and will develop into an advanced effect. For example, an effect is provided in which whenever character D appears, the line ``Development confirmed!'' is displayed. This pseudo-continuation confirmation performance and development confirmation performance can be executed in any of "Stage A", "Stage B", "Stage C", and "Look-Ahead Stage". In this way, when a pseudo continuous effect is performed or when a pseudo continuous effect is not performed, by displaying a combination of one or more of the special effect, the pseudo continuous effect, and the advanced confirmed effect, the expectation of execution of the pseudo continuous effect, It is possible to diversify the degree of development expectations for development performance. In addition, during one fluctuation display, all of the special effects, pseudo-continuation confirmation effects, and development confirmation effects may be executed. ) may include a pattern in which a special effect is executed, a pattern in which a pseudo-continuation confirmation effect is executed, and a pattern in which a development confirmation effect is executed. In a pattern in which a special effect is executed during the first or second time (the first or second time), after the special effect is executed during the certain re-fluctuation display, the pseudo-continuation confirmation effect may be further executed during the certain re-fluctuation display.

《Playability of “Small win V” based on normal symbols》
In the gaming machines of this embodiment and the second embodiment (including application examples), the gameplay is mainly based on special symbols in the low base state, and the gameplay is mainly based on both special symbols and normal symbols in the high base state. Regarding the gameplay, in the third embodiment, in both the low base state and the high base state, the gameplay is mainly based on the normal symbols, so that the expectation is only on the result of the lottery performed by the gaming machine. Focusing on the operating mode of the ordinary electric accessory P770, rather than the passive gameplay, it is possible to expect a jackpot based on the operating mode, and visually increase expectations for a jackpot. becomes. Specifically, it is as follows.

Although the details will be described later, the pachinko game machine P of the third embodiment is a pachinko game machine that employs "small win V" like the present embodiment. The pachinko game machine P of the third embodiment does not have the second special symbol, but only has the first special symbol. The probability of winning a jackpot or small hit in the special symbol lottery related to the 1st special symbol is 100%, and there are 100% probability of winning a jackpot or small hit in the special symbol lottery related to the 1st special symbol, and ``the reservation related to the 1st special symbol will occur'' or ``If you win the normal symbol lottery, 1. Opening the normal electric accessory P770 provided in the starting prize opening P711 and letting the game ball enter" indirectly means acquiring the right to execute the jackpot game (including the small win V). Yes (effectively a jackpot). In addition, in the third embodiment, one reservation related to the first special symbol is provided, but four reservations may be provided. In addition, as a modified example, it is not necessary to provide a reservation (retention function) related to the first special symbol (in this case, when the regular symbol lottery is won, the ordinary electric accessory P770 provided in the first starting prize opening P711 is released. As a state, when a game ball enters, a lottery is performed, but since it does not have a hold function, if you perform the lottery again, you will win the normal symbol lottery again and it will be placed in the first starting prize opening P711. Normally, it is necessary to open the electric accessory P770 and insert the game ball again.)

Therefore, the pachinko gaming machine P of the third embodiment has a normal period in which it is difficult to enter the first starting winning hole P711 related to the acquisition of the special symbol drawing right for the first special symbol, and A special period is generated in which it is easy for the ball to enter the first starting winning hole P711 related to acquiring the right for the special symbol lottery of the special symbol. With this configuration, the number of necessary winning holes can be reduced by creating a state in which the ease of entering the ball in the first starting winning hole P711 is different without requiring the second starting winning hole P721. , it becomes possible to make it appear as if the probability variation function is operating in the small win V.

In the following, an embodiment of the Pachinko gaming machine P of the third embodiment will be explained, in which the ease of entering the first special symbol into the special symbol lottery is changed in relation to a special period, thereby making the game more interesting. do.

FIG. 48 is a diagram conceptually showing an example of a board configuration (arrangement of winning devices) that can be adopted in the Pachinko gaming machine P of the third embodiment. An opening is formed in the upper center of the gaming area P501 of the pachinko gaming machine P of the third embodiment so that the performance display device P80 can be viewed, and a frame member of a center decoration unit (not shown) is installed in the opening. It is attached to form a partition section inside the gaming area P501. A specific ball entry port P910 is attached below the production display device, and a sorting device P900 is provided that distributes game balls that enter the specific ball entry port P910 to either an operating port P741 or an out port P790 (not shown). It is being In addition, at the upper left of the gaming area P501, there is a first starting winning hole P711 (the first starting winning hole P711 is a starting winning hole for acquiring the right related to the special symbol lottery of the first special symbol) and a normal The electric accessory P770 is located at the lower left of the gaming area P501, and a big prize opening P751 is arranged. That is, in the pachinko game machine P of the third embodiment, there is no need to switch from left-handed to right-handed, or from right-handed to left-handed, and the game progresses only by left-handed.

The pachinko gaming machine P of the third embodiment is a pachinko gaming machine that adopts the "small win V" similar to the present embodiment, and the major difference from this embodiment regarding playability (gameability) is the second The major difference is that there is no special symbol, and the probability of a "small hit" or "big hit" in the special symbol lottery of the first special symbol is 100%.

In addition, similarly to the present embodiment, the pachinko gaming machine P of the third embodiment also activates the electric chew support function (den support) function after each type of jackpot (including small hit V) to perform a specific game (high base state). However, the condition for ending the specific game (high base state) in the pachinko gaming machine P of the third embodiment is that ``the variable display based on the specified number of special symbol drawings of the first special symbol has ended. ”, or “a jackpot game (small win V) is executed”. Note that the prescribed number of times is set to one (the configuration is such that the high base state can be ended even if the first special symbol is displayed fluctuating once). Although not described in detail, other design values (jackpot probability, number of prize balls for various winning holes, etc.) are not limited to those described in this example, but may be set as appropriate according to the gameplay. .

Next, the procedure for playing a game and the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine P of the third embodiment will be explained. First, in the low base state, the player operates the handle P204 and fires a game ball toward the left side game area (left side area P501L) of the effect display device P80. The game ball fired into the left side area P501L can enter the specified ball entry port P910, and when the ball enters the specific ball entry port P910, the game ball is sent to the operating port P741 or the unillustrated output port P790 by the sorting device P900. can be sorted into one of the following. In the third embodiment, one first route toward the operating port P741 and nine routes toward the output port P790 are provided in the distribution device P900. When the game ball is sorted to the first route and enters (passes) the operating port P741, a normal symbol lottery is executed. In the third embodiment, the probability of "winning" in the normal symbol lottery is set to, for example, 1/1 (100%) in both the low base state and the high base state. However, in the case of a "win" in a normal symbol drawing in a low base state, the fluctuation display period of the normal symbol for one normal symbol drawing is 120 seconds on average, and one normal symbol drawing (win) The operating period of the normal electric accessory P770 is selected to be 5 seconds at 10% and 0.01 seconds at 90%. The reason why the average fluctuating display period of normal symbols related to one normal symbol lottery is 120 seconds is because during this time, the operating period of the normal electric accessory P770 related to one normal symbol lottery (win) is 5 seconds. This is to execute an effect on the effect display device P80 that notifies whether it is 0.01 seconds or 0.01 seconds (in other words, suggests an expectation level of 5 seconds). In addition, in both the low base state and the high base state, "the elapse of the specified opening time" or "the winning of one game ball" is determined as a condition for terminating the operation of the normal electric accessory 770. Here, if 5 seconds is selected as the operating period of the normal electric accessory P770, it becomes easy for the player to enter the normal electric accessory P770, so the player aims to enter the normal electric accessory P770 and actually By entering the ball, you will acquire the right to participate in the special symbol lottery of the first special symbol. (Since it is extremely difficult to obtain the right related to the special symbol lottery of the first special symbol). Since the probability of a "small hit" or "big hit" in the special symbol lottery of the first special symbol is 100%, if you acquire the right related to the special symbol lottery of the first special symbol, it is the spec of small win V. Therefore, it is virtually always a jackpot.

After a jackpot (small win V) from the low base state, the game always shifts to the high base state (as a modification, it may shift to the high base state at 50% and shift to the low base state at 50%). Even in the high base state, as in the low base state, the aim is to let the ball enter the specific ball entrance P910 and enter (pass) the ball into the operating port P741 via the distribution device P900, but in the high base state In the case of a "win" in the normal symbol drawing, the average symbol fluctuation display period for one normal symbol drawing is 1 second, and the normal electric accessory related to one normal symbol drawing (win) The operating period of P770 is 5 seconds at 100%, so in the high base state, unlike the low base state, when the ball enters (passes through) the operating port P741, it always hits the normal electric accessory P770. Since the ball enters easily, by entering (passing) the ball into the operating port P741, the player substantially acquires the right to draw the special symbol of the first special symbol, and also the special symbol of the first special symbol. Since the probability of a "small win" or "big win" in a lottery is 100%, there is virtually always a jackpot. The reason why the average fluctuating display period of the normal symbols related to one normal symbol lottery is 1 second is because the operating period of the normal electric accessory P770 related to one normal symbol lottery (win) is always 5 seconds. Therefore, we produce an effect that informs whether the operating period of the ordinary electric accessory P770 related to one ordinary symbol lottery (win) is 5 seconds or 0.01 seconds (suggesting the expectation that it will be 5 seconds). This is because it is not necessary to execute it on the display device P80, so that the operation can be immediately shifted to the operation of the normal electric accessory P770. In addition, even after a jackpot (small win V) from a high base state, the state always shifts to the high base state, so the situation where the high base state ends and shifts to the low base state is after the jackpot (small win V). If the jackpot or small hit is not won before the fluctuating display based on the specified number of special symbol drawings of the first special symbol (one time in the third embodiment) ends in the high base state (the fluctuating display continues as it is) ). In other words, the high base state remains until the variable display based on the special symbol lottery of the specified number of times (once in the third embodiment) of the first special symbol in the high base state ends, so by the time this situation ends, It is possible to create a game in which a ball enters (passes through) the operating port P741 from the distribution accessory P900.

As a supplement, if 5 seconds is selected as the operating period of the normal electric accessory P770, the effect display device P80 will display "Aim for the electric chew!" before and after the normal electric accessory P770 operates. is displayed, and when the small win is won, "Aim for the attacker!" is displayed on the effect display device P80 before and after the start of the small win game. In addition, as a modification, it may be configured such that there is no jackpot and only a small win (the probability of a "small win" in the special symbol lottery of the first special symbol is 100%). Further, as a modified example, after a jackpot (small win V) from the high base state, the system may be configured to shift to the high base state at 80% and shift to the low base state at 20%. In this case, the specified number of times for the first special symbol that ends the high base state may be set to 99 times instead of 1 time, but when configuring it like this, it is desirable not to have a hold function, but it is desirable to increase the successive winning performance. If so, there is no problem with installing it. In addition, when configuring, the number of times specified for the first special symbol is very large, so the possibility that the high base state will end at the number of times specified for the first special symbol is low, so the number of times specified for the first special symbol is It is not a game feature in which the ball enters (passes through) the operation port P741 from the distribution accessory P900 until the variable display based on the special symbol lottery ends, but a jackpot (small win V) that shifts to a low base state of 20%. The key to gameplay is how to avoid this.

[Fourth example]
By being equipped with the above-mentioned "relief function," the pachinko gaming machines P (including the underlying technology) of this embodiment, the second embodiment, and the third embodiment can further expand the range of games. Become. Therefore, an example of such a configuration will be referred to as a fourth embodiment, and hereinafter, only the underlying technology and the differences from this embodiment will be described in detail, and the explanation of common features will be omitted or simplified. It should be noted that among the elements constituting the Pachinko gaming machine P of the fourth embodiment, the same reference numerals are given to the elements that are the same as or correspond to the elements explained in the base technology or the present embodiment.

The pachinko game machine P of the fourth embodiment employs the above-mentioned "second special symbol priority digestion control" and "ST (number of times cut probability variable)". The gaming machine is in the low-probability, low-base state, and after the special game ends, it shifts to the high-probability, high-base state, and the state continues until 100 rotations (the special symbol lottery related to the first special symbol and the second special symbol). This will continue until the total number of special symbol drawings (the total number of variable display times of the first special symbol and the second special symbol) reaches 100. Note that after 100 rotations, the transition will be to the low probability high base state, but if you hit the jackpot within this 100 rotations, after the execution of the special game related to the jackpot is completed, the ST number (the number of times in the high probability high base state) will be changed again. ) is reset 100 times. In addition, in the low probability high base state, the electric chew support function is not activated, so the player can determine whether the first special symbol is correct or not by firing the game ball at the special symbol 1 starting hole and letting it enter. The game progresses by lottery (and fluctuation), and in the high probability high base state, the electric chew support function is activated, so the player shoots the game ball at the special map 2 starting hole and makes it enter the ball. As a result, the game progresses through the lottery (and fluctuations) regarding the second special symbol. As a supplement, if the first special symbol is changing, the second special symbol will not change (even if there is a hold related to the second special symbol, it will wait for the lottery or the start of fluctuation), and the second special symbol will not change. When the special symbol is changing, the first special symbol does not change (even if there is a hold related to the first special symbol, it waits for the lottery or start of variation). In addition, as a modification, by adopting "V probability variation", it may be configured such that it is possible to shift not only to the high probability high base state but also to the low probability high base state after the special game ends. More specifically, by letting the ball enter the "specific area P750" during the execution of the special game, the state will be shifted to a high probability high base state, and by not letting the ball enter, the state will be shifted to a low probability high base state. In this case, in the special game that is executed when the result of the lottery concerning the first special symbol becomes a jackpot, the special game in which the ball enters the specific area P750 easily (the inhibiting member blocking the specific area P750 For special games that drive the ball for a long time to a position that does not prevent the ball from entering, or for a first guide position that guides the game ball outside the specific area 750P and a second guide position that guides the game ball to the specific area P750. A special game in which the displaceable guide member is in the second guide position) and a special game in which it is difficult to enter the ball (it is difficult to enter the ball because the inhibiting member blocking the specific area P750 does not operate or only operates for a very short time) In a special game where the ratio is 50:50 and the result of the winning/failure lottery regarding the second special symbol is a jackpot, (1) it is easy to enter the specific area P750; It is preferable that the ratio of special game jackpots that are easy to enter and jackpots that are difficult to enter is 80:20, or (2) that only special games that allow easy entry of balls into the specific area P750 are provided.

In this way, the trigger for entering the high base state in the pachinko game machine P of the fourth embodiment is the jackpot (special game), but in addition to that, a "relief function" is provided, and after the special game ends, There are other opportunities to enter a high base state. Specifically, after the high probability high base state ends (after 100 rotations have passed since the end of the special game), and after another 599 rotations have passed (the next change after the 699th rotation after the end of the special game) In other words, at the 700th rotation after the end of the special game, the game enters the high base state (in other words, when the number of fluctuations displayed after the end of the special game reaches 700, it enters the high base state, which is a "relief function") However, hereinafter, the number of fluctuation displays that enter this high base state (700 times in the above example) may simply be referred to as the "starting number"). However, the high base state in this "relief function" is not given to the high probability state, that is, the state shifts to the low probability high base state. In addition, regarding this low probability high base state that enters from the 700th rotation, up to 100 rotations (total number of special symbol drawings related to the first special symbol and special symbol drawings related to the second special symbol (the total number of special symbol drawings related to the first special symbol and the second special symbol) 2 until the total number of times the special symbols are displayed (total number of times) reaches 100 times), that is, from the 700th rotation to the 799th rotation after the end of the special game (in other words, the high base that is a ``relief function'') The number of times the state continues to display fluctuations is 100, and hereinafter, the number of times the high base state continues to display fluctuations (100 times in the above example) may simply be referred to as the "number of times it continues"). From the next fluctuation (from the 800th rotation after the end of the special game), the transition will be to the low probability low base state (in other words, when the number of fluctuations displayed after reaching the specified number of times reaches 100) It can be said that the high base state that is the "relief function" ends and shifts to the low base state, but from now on, the number of fluctuation displays (799 times in the above example) at which the high base state that is the "relief function" ends is " (sometimes referred to as "the number of completions") Of course, in the low probability high base state which is this "relief function", the electric chew support function is activated, so the player cannot aim the game ball at the special map 2 starting hole and let it enter the ball. In this case, the game will proceed based on the lottery (and fluctuations) related to the second special symbol, and in the low probability low base state that will be transferred after that, the electric chew support function is not activated, so the special symbol 1 By firing a game ball aiming at the starting hole and letting it enter, the game progresses through a winning lottery (and variation) related to the first special symbol. It should be noted that in the following description, what is written as "○○○ rotation number" is the number of rotations counted from after the end of the special game.

FIG. 49 shows performance modes (performance contents displayed on the performance display device P80) regarding the state immediately before and after the "relief function" occurs. In addition, in FIG. 49, in FIG. 49(a) which is the 699th rotation, which is the state immediately before the "relief function" occurs, there is at least one hold related to the first special symbol (or the second special symbol). (There is one or more reservations related to the symbol.)

FIG. 49(a) shows a situation where the fluctuation has stopped at the 699th rotation (one time before the start number of entering the high base state (the "relief function" occurs)). Note that the symbol fixing time has not yet elapsed (this is the timing right after the variation ends). At the 699th rotation, the first special symbol has finished changing and stopped, and the decorative symbol is in a stopped state. In this situation, the background of the production mode (production stage) corresponding to the low probability low base state is displayed before reaching the 699th rotation (for example, from the 697th rotation, the 698th rotation, etc.), and the decorative pattern A mountain background is displayed behind the image. Triggered by this fluctuation stop (more precisely, triggered by the elapse of the symbol fixing time after the fluctuation stop), the low probability low base state shifts to the low probability high base state.

FIG. 49(b) shows the situation where the fluctuation started and the situation during the fluctuation at the 700th revolution (the number of times when the high base state is entered (the "relief function" occurs)). This is a situation where the first special symbol starts to fluctuate at the 700th rotation due to the suspension of the first special symbol being extinguished from the situation shown in FIG. 49(a). More precisely, this is a situation where the symbol fixing time of the 699th rotation has elapsed and the 700th rotation, which is a new variation of the first special symbol, has started. Here, at the start of the variation (or just before the start of the variation), the words "Right hit" (hitting separation notification A) are displayed in small size at the upper right of the screen. After that (or at the same timing), the mountain background that is the background of the production mode (production stage) corresponding to the low probability low base state is hidden, and the transition is made to the low probability high base state instead. A stage change effect will occur. This stage change effect is a background for a stage change in which the screen immediately turns black from the mountain background that had been displayed up until then, and the white text "STAGE CHANGE" is displayed on a black background. Almost at the same time as this stage change background is displayed, the speaker 83 outputs a voice saying "SEVEN RUSH is in!". This "SEVEN RUSH" is the name of the production mode (production stage) corresponding to the low probability high base state. Also, almost at the same time as this background for stage change is displayed, the words "Please hit right" (hitting separation notification B) are displayed in large size. As a modified example, after a predetermined period of time has elapsed (for example, 2 seconds) after the stage change background has been displayed, or after the stage change background has become hidden (in other words, the display shown in FIG. 49 (described later)) At approximately the same time as the background corresponding to "SEVEN RUSH" shown in c) starts to be displayed, the speaker 83 outputs a voice saying "SEVEN RUSH enters!" and the words "Please hit right!" appear in large letters. It may be displayed in a larger size. As a modified example, the words "SEVEN RUSH enters!" may be displayed. In that case, after a predetermined time has elapsed (for example, 2 seconds) after the stage change background is displayed, or after the stage change background is displayed, the text "SEVEN RUSH enters!" It is desirable to display the image after the background is hidden.

FIG. 49(c) shows the situation during the 700th revolution. The background for the stage change at the 700th rotation is hidden, and instead a sky background is displayed, which is the background corresponding to the low probability high base state of "SEVEN RUSH". At this time, the large letters "Please hit right" may be hidden, but it is preferable that they continue to be displayed from the stage change background (or until the fluctuation stops at the 700th rotation). (or it is desirable that the display continues until the 701st rotation starts). Note that the small letters "Hit the right hand" are always displayed during the low probability high base state, unlike the large letters "Please hit the right hand."

FIG. 49(d) shows a situation where the fluctuation has stopped at the 799th rotation (the number of times the high base state ("relief function") ends). Note that the symbol fixing time has not yet elapsed (this is exactly the timing immediately after the variation ends). As mentioned above, the 700th rotation was a variation of the first special symbol, but since the 701st to 798th rotation (not shown) is already in the high base state (low probability high base state), the second special symbol This is a variation in the design. However, there is no problem even if all or part of the rotation from the 701st rotation to the 798th rotation is a variation of the first special symbol. The 799th rotation is also a variation of the second special symbol. Therefore, FIG. 49(d) shows that the second special symbol has finished changing at the 799th rotation. At this time, the words "SEVEN RUSH end..." may be displayed. In addition, in FIG. 49(d), which is the 799th rotation immediately before the end of the "relief function", there is at least one hold related to the second special symbol (or there is a hold related to the first special symbol). (There is one or more pending items.) Note that from the 700th rotation to the 799th rotation, a sky background, which is the background of "SEVEN RUSH", is displayed. In addition, in this situation where the symbol fixing time has not yet passed, the low probability high base state is maintained.

FIG. 49(e) shows the situation where the fluctuation started at the 800th rotation and the situation during the fluctuation. FIG. 49(d) shows a situation where the second special symbol starts to fluctuate at the 800th rotation as the suspension of the second special symbol is extinguished. More precisely, the situation is such that after the symbol fixing time of the 799th rotation has elapsed, the fluctuation of the 800th rotation, which is a new variation of the second special symbol, has started. Here, the small characters "Right hit" (Right hit notification A) that were displayed at the top right of the screen at the start of the variation (or just before the start of the variation) are no longer displayed. Then (or at the same timing), the sky background that is the background of the production mode (production stage) corresponding to the low probability high base state is hidden, and the transition is made to the low probability low base state instead. A stage change effect will occur. This stage production is the same production (background) as the 700th rotation stage production (background for stage change). As a modified example, the stage production (background for stage change) may be different from the stage production (background for stage change) at the 700th rotation, for example, a stage change background with black letters of "STAGE CHANGE" displayed on a white background. Also good. After that, the background for stage change is hidden, and instead a mountain background corresponding to the low probability low base state is displayed. As a modified example, the background of the sea may be used instead of the mountain background (the background may be different from the background before the "relief function" occurs), or it may be the background of the mountains, or the background of the sea may be used. It may be designed so that it may be a background (it may be configured to have cases where it is different from the background before the "relief function" occurs and cases where it is not different). In addition, in order to make it clear that the mountain background (or sea background), which is the background corresponding to the low probability low base state at this time, is not a "relief function", it is used as a high base state ("relief function"). It is desirable that the process be configured so that it always ends within 100 rotations, which is the number of consecutive rotations, and switches to a background of a different production mode (production stage) (for example, a grassland background, a space background, etc.).

By configuring as described above, it is possible to clearly indicate to the player that the "relief function" has occurred, and the resulting change in the base state and production mode (production stage) can be smoothly performed. As a result, the player can recognize the switching of the base state without feeling any discomfort in the performance. Additionally, as the base state changes, the type of starting opening that the player aims at will change (as it will switch from the special drawing 1 starting opening to the special drawing 2 starting opening), so regarding the notification of the different shots, Separation notification A is displayed immediately and continuously, and separation notification B is displayed conspicuously when the stage changes, so that the separation notification can be appropriately and emphasized when the base state changes. (Aiming at the special figure 2 starting hole) and continuously informing the player of the winning (aiming at the special figure 2 starting hole) even in the subsequent high base state. Appropriate announcements have been made.

In FIG. 49, explanation will be given on the premise that there is a hold related to the first special symbol or the second special symbol at the timing when the base state switches (the timing when the "relief function" occurs and the timing when the "relief function" ends). did. Next, in FIG. 50, a situation in which there is no reservation related to the first special symbol or the second special symbol at the timing when the base state changes (timing when the "relief function" occurs and timing when the "relief function" ends) is shown. explain.

FIG. 50 shows performance modes (performance contents displayed on the performance display device P80) regarding the state immediately before and after the "relief function" occurs. In addition, in FIG. 50, in FIG. 50(a) which is the 699th rotation, which is the state immediately before the "relief function" occurs, there is no reservation related to at least the first special symbol (there is no reservation related to the second special symbol). does not exist).

FIG. 50(a) shows a situation where the fluctuation has stopped at the 699th rotation. Note that the symbol fixing time has not yet elapsed (this is exactly the timing immediately after the variation ends). At the 699th rotation, the first special symbol has finished changing and has stopped, and the decorative symbol is in a stopped state. In this situation, the background of the production mode (production stage) corresponding to the low probability low base state is displayed before reaching the 699th rotation (for example, from the 697th rotation, the 698th rotation, etc.), and the decorative pattern A mountain background is displayed behind the image. Triggered by this fluctuation stop (more precisely, triggered by the elapse of the symbol fixing time after the fluctuation stop), the low probability low base state shifts to the low probability high base state.

FIG. 50(b) shows a situation in which the 699th rotation has ended (the symbol fixing time has also elapsed) and the first special symbol and the decorative symbol maintain the stopped display. As mentioned above, this situation continues because there is no reservation related to the first special symbol (there is also no reservation related to the second special symbol). In this situation, the words "Right-handed hit" (hitting separation notification A) are displayed in small size at the upper right of the screen. The display start timing of the small characters "Right hit" is immediately after the fluctuation of the 699th rotation is completed and the symbol fixing time has elapsed. Note that the base state at this time has already been switched to the high base state, and is now the low probability high base state. However, the mountain background continues to be displayed as the background in the production mode (production stage).

FIG. 50(c) shows a situation where fluctuations have started at the 700th revolution. From the situation in FIG. 50(b), the second special symbol has started to fluctuate due to the ball entering the special symbol 2 starting hole. By starting the change, the mountain background that is the background of the production mode (production stage) corresponding to the low probability low base state will be hidden, and the stage change will indicate the transition to the low probability high base state instead. A performance occurs. This stage change effect is a background for a stage change in which the screen immediately turns black from the mountain background that had been displayed up until then, and the white text "STAGE CHANGE" is displayed on a black background. Almost at the same time as this stage change background is displayed, the speaker 83 outputs a voice saying "SEVEN RUSH is in!". This "SEVEN RUSH" is the name of the production mode (production stage) corresponding to the low probability high base state. Also, almost at the same time as this background for stage change is displayed, the words "Please hit right" (hitting separation notification B) are displayed in large size. As a modified example, after a predetermined period of time has elapsed (for example, 2 seconds) after the stage change background has been displayed, or after the stage change background has been hidden (in other words, in FIG. 50 (described later)) At approximately the same time as the display of the background corresponding to "SEVEN RUSH" shown in d) starts, the speaker 83 outputs a voice saying "SEVEN RUSH enters!", and the words "Please hit right" appear in large letters. It may be displayed in a larger size. As a modified example, the words "SEVEN RUSH enters!" may be displayed. In that case, after a predetermined time has elapsed (for example, 2 seconds) after the stage change background is displayed, or after the stage change background is displayed, the text "SEVEN RUSH enters!" It is desirable to display the image after the background is hidden.

FIG. 50(d) shows the situation during the 700th revolution. The background for the stage change at the 700th revolution is hidden, and instead a sky background corresponding to the low probability high base state of "SEVEN RUSH" is displayed. At this time, the large letters "Please hit right" may be hidden, but it is preferable that they continue to be displayed from the stage change background (or until the fluctuation stops at the 700th rotation). (or it is desirable that the display continues until the 701st rotation starts). Note that the small text "Hit the right hand" is always displayed during the low probability high base state, unlike the large text "Please hit the right hand".

FIG. 50(e) shows a situation where the fluctuation has stopped at the 799th rotation. Note that the symbol fixing time has not yet elapsed (this is the timing right after the variation ends). As mentioned above, the 700th rotation was a variation of the first special symbol, but since the 701st to 798th rotation (not shown) is already in the high base state (low probability high base state), the second special symbol This is a variation in the design. However, there is no problem even if all or part of the rotation from the 701st rotation to the 798th rotation is a variation of the first special symbol. The 799th rotation is also a variation of the second special symbol. Therefore, FIG. 50(e) shows that the second special symbol has finished changing at the 799th rotation. At this time, the words "SEVEN RUSH end..." may be displayed. In addition, in FIG. 50, in FIG. 50(e) which is the 799th rotation immediately before the end of the "relief function", there is no reservation related to at least the second special symbol (there is also no reservation related to the first special symbol). ). Note that from the 700th rotation to the 799th rotation, a sky background, which is the background of "SEVEN RUSH", is displayed. In addition, in this situation where the symbol fixing time has not yet passed, the low probability high base state is maintained.

FIG. 50(f) shows a situation in which the 799th rotation has ended (the symbol fixing time has also elapsed) and the second special symbol and the decorative symbol maintain the stopped display. As mentioned above, this situation continues because there is no reservation related to the second special symbol (there is also no reservation related to the first special symbol). In this situation, the small letters "Right hit" (Right hit notification A) that had been displayed in the high base state until then are no longer displayed in the upper right corner of the screen. The display end (non-display) timing of the small "Right hit" character is immediately after the 799th rotation is completed and the symbol fixing time has elapsed. Note that the base state at this time has already been switched to the low base state, and is the low probability low base state. However, the sky background continues to be displayed as the background in the production mode (production stage).

FIG. 50(g) shows the situation where the fluctuation started at the 800th rotation and the situation during the fluctuation. From the situation shown in FIG. 50(f), the first special symbol has started to fluctuate due to the ball entering the first starting port. By starting the fluctuation, the first special symbol starts to fluctuate at the 800th rotation. More precisely, the situation is such that after the symbol fixing time of the 799th rotation has elapsed, the fluctuation of the 800th rotation, which is a new variation of the first special symbol, has started. In this situation, the small characters "Right hit" (Right hit notification A) that had already been displayed at the top right of the screen are no longer displayed. Then (or at the same timing), the sky background that is the background of the production mode (production stage) corresponding to the low probability high base state is hidden, and the transition is made to the low probability low base state instead. A stage change effect will occur. This stage production is the same production (background) as the 700th rotation stage production (background for stage change). As a modified example, the stage production (background for stage change) may be different from the stage production (background for stage change) at the 700th rotation, for example, a stage change background with black letters of "STAGE CHANGE" displayed on a white background. Also good. After that, the background for stage change is hidden, and instead a mountain background corresponding to the low probability low base state is displayed. As a modified example, the background of the sea may be used instead of the mountain background (the background may be different from the background before the "relief function" occurs), or it may be the background of the mountains, or the background of the sea may be used. It may be designed so that it may be a background (it may be configured to have cases where it is different from the background before the "relief function" occurs and cases where it is not different). In addition, in order to make it clear that the mountain background (or ocean background), which is the background corresponding to the low probability low base state at this time, is not a "relief function", it must be finished within 100 rotations. , it is desirable to be configured to switch to a background of a different production mode (production stage) (for example, a grassland background, a space background, etc.).

In addition, as a modification of the pachinko gaming machine P of the fourth embodiment, the timing at which the "relief function" ends is set at the start of the symbol fixing time (or when the fluctuation stops) instead of after the symbol fixing time of the 799th rotation has elapsed. (Immediately before the symbol fixing time starts) may be used. In other words, it may be configured to shift from the low probability high base state to the low probability low base state at the start of the symbol fixing time of the 799th rotation (or when the fluctuation is stopped and immediately before the symbol fixing time starts). If configured in this way, at the start of the symbol fixing time (or immediately before the symbol fixing time starts when the fluctuation is stopped), the small "Right hit" text (hitting separation notification A) will be hidden, and the symbol will be fixed. It is desirable that the small characters "Right-handed" (batting separation notification A) be hidden during the time.

In the pachinko game machine P of the fourth embodiment, as described above, the game shifts to the high probability high base state which is the high base state even after the special game ends. This high probability high base state continues for 100 rotations, so being in a "high base state of 100 revolutions" means that even if it is a high base state after the end of the special game, it is a high base state of the "relief function". (In addition, as a modification, (1) 100 rotations of the high base state (high probability high base state) after the end of the special game and the high base state (low probability high base state) of "relief function" It may be 200 rotations instead of 100 rotations, or (2) the high base state (high probability high base state) after the special game is 200 rotations instead of 100 rotations and the high base state (low probability high base state) of the "relief function" (state) may be set to 100 rotations).

In the high base state after the end of the special game, there is a fluctuation pattern table that is referred to at the final fluctuation of the high base state (for example, the 100th rotation), and a fluctuation pattern table that is referred to at the final fluctuation of the high base state (for example, from the 1st rotation to the 99th rotation). In the high base state of the "relief function", the fluctuation pattern table is configured to be different from the fluctuation pattern table that is referred to in the final fluctuation of the high base state (for example, the 799th rotation) and the fluctuation pattern table that is referred to in the high base state The variation pattern table referred to in variations before the final variation (for example, from the 700th rotation to the 798th rotation) is configured to be the same. The fluctuation pattern table that is referenced in the high base state of the "relief function" (for example, from the 700th rotation to the 799th rotation) is referenced in (1) the final fluctuation of the high base state after the end of the special game (for example, the 100th rotation). The fluctuation pattern table to be used may be different from the fluctuation pattern table to be referred to in the fluctuations before the final fluctuation (for example, from the 1st rotation to the 99th rotation), or (2) the high base after the special game ends. The variation pattern may be the same as the variation pattern referred to in the variation before the final variation of the state (for example, from the 1st rotation to the 99th rotation). Note that the variation pattern described here is a variation pattern of the second special symbol.

Here, the fluctuation pattern table to be referred to in the final fluctuation of the high base state after the end of the special game (for example, the 100th rotation) is the "fluctuation pattern table A", and the fluctuation before the final fluctuation of the high base state after the end of the special game is The fluctuation pattern table to be referred to in the high base state of the "relief function" (for example, from the 700th rotation to the 799th rotation) is "variation pattern table B". For example, if the number of reservations related to the second special symbol at the start of fluctuation is a predetermined number (for example, 4, and the number of reservations related to the second special symbol at the start of fluctuation is 4, and the number of reservations related to the second special symbol at the start of fluctuation is When the number of reserved pieces related to the second special symbol at the start of the fluctuation is a specific number (for example, 1 piece, and the number of reserved pieces decreases from 1 to 0 when the fluctuation starts and the reserved number decreases from 1 piece to 3 pieces) When the number of reservations related to the second special symbol at the start of variation is a predetermined number for "variation pattern table B" and "variation pattern table C", (For example, when the number of pieces is 4 and it decreases from 4 to 3 when the hold is consumed at the start of the change), and when the number of pieces held for the second special symbol at the start of the change is a specific number (for example, it is 1 and the number is reduced from 4 to 3). , the case where the number decreases from 1 to 0 due to pending consumption associated with the start of the fluctuation), the selection tendency of the fluctuation pattern is the same. The fluctuation pattern table is simply shown in FIG. 51, but FIG. 51(a) shows the case where "fluctuation pattern table B" and "fluctuation pattern table C" are set as different fluctuation pattern tables. , FIG. 51(b) shows a case where "variation pattern table B" and "variation pattern table C" are set as the same variation pattern table. Note that the variation pattern described here is a variation pattern of the second special symbol. Further, when referring to the "variation pattern table A", that is, at the final variation of the high base state after the end of the special game (for example, the 100th rotation), the aforementioned "result display effect" is executed. However, even in the final variation of the same high base state, it is preferable not to execute the "result display performance" in the final variation of the high base state of the "relief function" (for example, at the 799th rotation).

As a modification, all high base states after the end of the special game (for example, for 100 rotations) refer to the "variation pattern table B", and all high base states for the "relief function" (for example, for 100 rotations) are set to "variation pattern table B". Pattern table C" may be referred to, and the symbol fixing time may be extended for a long time only for the final change in the high base state after the end of the special game (for example, at the 100th rotation). Specifically, only the final fluctuation of the high base state after the end of the special game (for example, the 100th rotation) is fixed for 10 seconds, and the other fluctuations of the high base state (the final fluctuation of the high base state after the end of the special game) are fixed for 10 seconds. For all fluctuations in the high base state of the "relief function" except for this), set the symbol fixing time to 0.5 seconds. With this configuration, the number of variable pattern tables can be reduced and the development burden can be reduced, while the "result display performance" can be executed with a symbol fixation time of 10 seconds.

In the pachinko game machine P of the fourth embodiment, the look-ahead effect can be executed both in the low base state and in the high base state. However, in the low base state, it is possible to perform a pre-reading effect for the hold related to the first special symbol, but the pre-read effect is not executed for the hold related to the second special symbol, and in the high base state, Although a pre-read performance can be executed for the reservation related to the second special symbol, the pre-read performance is not performed for the reservation related to the first special symbol.

Here, in some situations where the "relief function" occurs (before and after the "relief function" occurs), execution of the pre-reading effect is restricted. This is because before the "relief function" occurs, the game is in a low base state mainly consisting of games with the first special symbol (win/fail lottery and fluctuations), but after the occurrence of the "relief function", the game with the second special symbol The system switches to a high base state mainly based on winning/failure drawings and fluctuations, in other words, the special symbol that can perform the look-ahead effect switches from the first special symbol to the second special symbol, so if a "relief function" occurs If the reservation related to the first special symbol that occurred previously is not cleared before the "relief function" occurs, a pre-reading effect is executed for the reservation related to the first special symbol even after the "relief function" occurs. This is because an event that would cause a problem to occur will occur. In order to prevent this, the system is configured so that the pre-read performance for the hold related to the first special symbol is not executed even in a low base state from 5 fluctuations before the occurrence of the "relief function". More specifically, for the 5 fluctuations from the 695th rotation to the 699th rotation, it is configured not to execute the pre-read performance for the hold related to the first special symbol. As a supplementary note, the reservation related to the first special symbol that occurred during the fluctuation of the 695th rotation, the fluctuation of the 696th rotation, the fluctuation of the 697th rotation, the fluctuation of the 698th rotation, and the fluctuation of the 699th rotation. The pre-reading effect is not executed for the 1st special symbol that occurred in the variation before the 695th rotation (for example, the 694th rotation), even if the pre-reading effect is executed. good. Specifically, when a new hold related to the third first special symbol occurs due to the 694th rotation and a look-ahead effect is performed for the new hold, the new hold is consumed and the 3 In the 695th rotation change from the first hold to the second hold, and the 696th change from the second hold to the first hold after the new hold is expired, the new hold changes. The prefetch effect for is executed. In other words, it is sufficient to execute the look-ahead effect until a predetermined number of times, which is the number of fluctuation displays that is less than the start number, is executed, and not to execute the look-ahead effect from this predetermined number of times until the start number is reached. It can be said that it is possible to set an appropriate number of times. Note that the "variation" described in this paragraph is the variation of the first special symbol.

For one variation immediately after the "relief function" occurs, the system is configured not to execute a pre-read performance for the hold related to the second special symbol even in a high base state. More specifically, for the 700th rotation, a look-ahead effect is not performed for the hold related to the second special symbol, that is, a look-ahead effect is not performed for the hold related to the second special symbol that occurred during the fluctuation of the 700th spin. Not executed. The configuration is such that a look-ahead effect can be executed for the reservation related to the second special symbol that occurred during the fluctuation from the 701st rotation to the 799th rotation, but as a modified example, a part of the effect before the end of the "relief function" can be executed. During the period (for example, from the 796th rotation to the 799th rotation, or from the 790th rotation to the 799th rotation, etc.), the system is configured so that the look-ahead effect is not executed for the hold related to the second special symbol that occurs during the fluctuation. It's okay. Also, instead of in the high base state of the "relief function", in the high base state after the end of the special game, the look-ahead effect may be executed from the first variation, that is, the first fluctuation in the high base state after the end of the special game. It may be possible to execute a pre-reading performance for the suspension related to the second special symbol that occurs during the change of the eyes. In addition, when comparing the look-ahead effect in the high base state after the end of the special game and the look-ahead effect in the high base state of the "relief function", even if it has one or more of the following features (A) to (F), good. (A) The pre-read performance is more likely to be executed in the high base state after the end of the special game than in the high base state of the "relief function". (B) The number of types of look-ahead effects is smaller in the high base state after the end of the special game than in the high base state of the "relief function." (C) The high base state after the end of the special game has a higher expectation of a jackpot when the look-ahead effect is executed than the high base state of the "relief function." (D) Pre-read effects are less likely to be executed in the high base state after the end of the special game than in the high base state of the "relief function." (E) The high base state after the end of the special game has more types of look-ahead effects than the high base state of the "relief function." (F) The high base state after the end of the special game has a lower expectation of a jackpot when the look-ahead effect is executed than the high base state of the "relief function."

The pachinko game machine P in the fourth embodiment does not adopt the above-mentioned "normal symbol probability variation", and the probability of activating the normal electric accessory P770 (probability of winning the normal symbol) is low base. This is common to both states and high base states, and the probability thereof is set to 2/3. As a modification, it may be set to 1/1 (probability of winning for sure). In addition, the above-mentioned ``Permanent design time reduction'' and ``Extension of opening of ordinary electric accessories'' are adopted.

FIG. 52 shows the winning/failure, symbols, and fluctuation patterns regarding the normal symbol lottery in each of the low base state and the high base state (including both the high base state after the end of the special game and the high base state of the "relief function").

FIG. 52(a) shows the winning/failure, symbols, and fluctuation patterns regarding the normal symbol lottery in the low base state. The probability of winning a normal symbol in a low base state is set to 2/3 as described above. In addition, there are three types of normal symbols in the low base state, specifically, three types: winning symbol 1, winning symbol 2, and losing symbol. In addition, the winning probability is 1/3 for each (if the normal symbol is 2/3 and it is a hit, each 1/2 will be the winning symbol 1 and the winning symbol 2, and the normal symbol will be 1/3 and it will be a miss) In some cases, the pattern will be out of place). The opening pattern of the normal electric accessory P770 when the winning symbol is 1 in the low base state is one opening of 0.05 seconds, and the opening pattern of the ordinary electric accessory P770 when the winning symbol is 2 in the low base state. The opening pattern of the object P770 is also one opening for 0.05 seconds. In addition, the number of types of normal symbol fluctuation patterns in the low base state is greater than the number of normal symbol fluctuation patterns in the high base state, which will be described later (in other words, the number of types of normal symbol fluctuation display times in the low base state is There are 18 types (more than the number of types of fluctuating display times of normal symbols in the high base state), specifically, there are 18 types of fluctuating patterns 1 to 18, each with a different fluctuating time, and each fluctuating time is 1 second to 18 seconds (different in 1 second increments). Note that the winning probability is 1/18 for each (the selection probability is the same whether it is a winning symbol or a losing symbol).

FIG. 52(b) shows the winning/failure, symbols, and fluctuation patterns regarding the normal symbol lottery in the high base state. The winning probability of normal symbols in the high base state is set to 2/3 as described above. In addition, the symbol types of the normal symbols in the high base state are the same as in the low base state, and there are three types, specifically, the same as in the low base state, there are three types: winning symbol 1, winning symbol 2, and losing symbol. In addition, the winning probability is 1/3 for each (if the normal symbol is 2/3 and it is a hit, each 1/2 will be the winning symbol 1 and the winning symbol 2, and the normal symbol will be 1/3 and it will be a miss) In some cases, the pattern will be out of place). When the winning pattern is 1 in the high base state, the opening pattern of the normal electric accessory P770 is 1.8 seconds of opening three times (0.6 seconds of closing between openings), and the winning pattern is 2. In this case, the opening pattern of the normal electric accessory P770 is two openings of 2.9 seconds (there is a closing of 1 second between openings). In addition, there are two types of fluctuation patterns of the normal symbols in the high base state, specifically, two types of fluctuation patterns 19 to 20, each with a different fluctuation time, and each fluctuation time is 0. 1 second and 0.2 seconds. The winning probability is 3/4 for the variable pattern 19 and 1/4 for the variable pattern 20 (the selection probability is the same whether it is a winning symbol or a losing symbol).

In this way, both the high base state after the end of the special game and the high base state of the "relief function" have the same winning/failure, symbols, and fluctuation patterns related to the normal symbol lottery, so that the high base state after the end of the special game is exclusive to the high base state. There is no need to develop winning/failure, symbols, fluctuation patterns related to normal symbol drawings, symbols, fluctuation patterns for normal symbol drawings exclusively for the high base state of "relief function", and since "normal symbol probability variation" does not exist in the first place, it is low There is no need to have a probability of hitting a normal symbol for each of the base state and high base state. In addition, by preparing a large number of fluctuation patterns in the low base state where the normal symbol is likely to stop at the winning symbol (in the fourth embodiment, the winning symbol stops at 2/3), the normal symbol in the low base state can be easily stopped. By adding randomness to the stop timing (opening timing of the normal electric accessory P770), it is possible to make it difficult to enter the special figure 2 starting hole (target hit) in a low base state (in other words, the low base It is possible to prevent fraudulent acts that attempt to change the second special symbol, which is not the main character in the state).

Here, in the Pachinko game machine P in the fourth embodiment, the time for the special game end demonstration (jackpot end demonstration) when the special game is executed is set to 30 seconds. In addition, since the base state during execution of the special game is a low base state, when the normal symbols fluctuate, a maximum fluctuation time of 18 seconds can be selected. However, since the special game end demo (jackpot end demo) lasts for 30 seconds, even if the player stops firing the game ball after the final round game immediately before the special game end demo (jackpot end demo) ends, this By setting such a time value, even if the ball enters the normal pattern operation port P741 immediately before the player stops firing the game ball and the normal pattern starts to fluctuate, the special game end demo ( Since the fluctuation of the normal symbols ends before the end of the special game end demo (jackpot end demo), the player can play the game after the special game end demo (jackpot end demo) ends and the transition to the high base state after the special game ends. When a ball enters the normal pattern operation port P741 by firing a ball, it is possible to immediately start the normal pattern fluctuation (0.1 second or 0.2 second fluctuation) in the high base state. can.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 51, in the high base state after the end of the special game, if the number of reservations related to the second special symbol at the start of fluctuation is a predetermined number (2 to 4) (for example, 4) , the shortest fluctuation time of the second special symbol is 2 seconds (in the case of a reduction from 4 to 3 due to the retention extinguishment at the start of fluctuation), and the number of reservations related to the 2nd special symbol at the start of fluctuation is the predetermined number (1 piece) In this case (when there is 1 symbol and it decreases from 1 symbol to 0 symbol due to the pending consumption associated with the start of variation), the shortest variation time of the second special symbol is 15 seconds. Therefore, in the first 4 fluctuations in the high base state after the end of the special game, the second special symbol when the ball does not enter the special symbol 2 starting hole (when the ball cannot enter the normal electric accessory 770 because it is not released) The total time of the shortest variation time is "the shortest variation time of the second special symbol when it decreases from 4 to 3 due to pending consumption + the shortest variation time of the 2nd special symbol when it decreases from 3 to 2 due to pending consumption" The shortest fluctuation time + the shortest fluctuation time of the second special symbol when it decreases from 2 to 1 due to pending consumption + the shortest fluctuation time of the 2nd special symbol when it decreases from 1 to 0 due to pending consumption. It is 21 seconds, which is "2 seconds + 2 seconds + 2 seconds + 15 seconds", and this time is longer than 18 seconds, which is the longest fluctuation time of the normal symbol in the low base state. Therefore, even if the player stops firing the game balls just before the end of the special game end demo (jackpot end demo), by setting such a time value, the time will be set immediately before the player stops firing the game balls. Even if the ball enters the normal pattern operation port P741 and the normal pattern starts to fluctuate, the second special in the high base state after the end of the special game after the special game end demo (jackpot end demo) ends. Since the fluctuation of the normal symbol ends before the 4 fluctuations of the symbol (a situation where 4 reservations related to the second special symbol have occurred after the end of the special game), the special game end demonstration (jackpot end demonstration) ) ends and the special game transitions to the high base state after the end of the special game, if the player fires a game ball and the ball enters the normal pattern operation port P741, the hold related to the second special symbol Until all (4) are digested and all (4 times) second special symbol fluctuations are completed, the normal symbol fluctuation (0.1 second or 0.2 second fluctuation) in the high base state Since it can be started immediately, the reservation related to the second special symbol will be completed by the time all (four) of the reservations related to the second special symbol are used up and all (four times) of the fluctuations of the second special symbol are completed. It becomes possible to cause

[Fifth example]
In the fourth embodiment, a pachinko gaming machine P equipped with a "relief function" has been described, but the pachinko gaming machine P equipped with a "relief function" is not limited to such a mode. Therefore, a pachinko gaming machine P equipped with a "relief function" different from that of the fourth embodiment is defined as a fifth embodiment, and the differences from the fourth embodiment (including the underlying technology and the differences from this embodiment) will be described below. ), and omit or simplify the explanation of common points. It should be noted that among the elements constituting the pachinko game machine P of the fifth embodiment, the same reference numerals are given to the elements that are the same as or correspond to the elements explained in the underlying technology or the present embodiment.

The pachinko game machine P in the fifth embodiment differs from the pachinko game machine P in the fourth embodiment by employing the above-mentioned "parallel control (parallel processing)". Therefore, the first special symbol and the second special symbol can be changed simultaneously. However, during the fluctuation where the winning/failure drawing result of the 1st special symbol is a jackpot, the winning/failure drawing result of the 2nd special symbol will not become a jackpot, and during the fluctuation where the winning/failure drawing result of the 2nd special symbol is a jackpot. The lottery result of the first special symbol inside will not be a jackpot. Furthermore, the pachinko gaming machine P in the fifth embodiment is configured so that a small hit is won with a high probability (for example, 1/2) as a result of the lottery of the second special symbol.

FIG. 53 is a diagram showing an example of the arrangement of winning devices, etc. in the gaming area of the pachinko gaming machine P in the fifth embodiment.

Approximately in the center of the gaming area P501 of the pachinko gaming machine P of the fifth embodiment, an opening is formed so that the performance display device P80 can be visually recognized, and a frame member of a center decoration unit (not shown) is installed in the opening. It is attached to form a partition section inside the gaming area P501.

Below the performance display device P80, there is provided a first starting prize opening P711A into which a game ball flowing down the left side game area (left side area P501L) of the performance display device P80 enters, and further below that is a first winning opening P711A (not shown). An out port P790 is provided. Further, a general winning opening P731 is arranged in the lower area of the left side area P501L of the effect display device P80. In other words, when a game ball is fired into the gaming area on the left side of the effect display device P80, the ball enters the first start winning hole P711A or the general winning hole P731, and the player can expect to win a prize. There is. On the other hand, in the game area on the right side of the production display device P80 (right side area P501R), as shown in FIG. 712, a grand prize opening P751 is arranged, and a game ball fired toward the right side gaming area of the effect display device P80 can win a prize (the first starting winning opening and the second starting winning opening , also referred to as special figure 1 starting port and special figure 2 starting port, respectively). In addition, as a modification, the normal electric accessory P770 may be attached to the first starting prize opening P711A without providing the first starting winning opening P711B, or the ordinary electric accessory P770 may be attached directly below the first starting winning opening P711A. You may arrange the 1st starting prize opening P711B which concerns.

Here, the first starting winning hole P711A and the first starting winning hole P711B are starting winning holes for acquiring the right related to the special symbol lottery of the first special symbol, and the second starting winning hole P721 is the first starting winning hole P711B. 2. This is the starting prize opening for acquiring the rights related to the special symbol lottery of 2 special symbols. That is, in the pachinko game machine P of the fifth embodiment, even if the game ball is fired toward either the left side area P501L or the right side area P501R of the game area P501, the first starting prize opening P711A and the first starting winning opening P711B is configured to allow you to acquire the special symbol lottery right for the first special symbol, but unless the base is in a high base state, it is difficult to enter the second starting winning hole P711B, so the special game may not be executed. If the "relief function" does not occur, the game based on the ball entering the first starting winning hole P711B cannot be substantially progressed (or it is difficult to progress). In addition, the second starting winning hole P712 is arranged in the right side game area (right side area P501R) like the first starting winning hole P711B, but unlike the first starting winning hole P711B, the normal electric accessory P770 is provided. Therefore, regardless of whether there is a high base state or a low base state, if a game ball is fired toward the right side game area (right side area P501R), it is possible to enter the ball.

Furthermore, the pachinko gaming machine P of the fifth embodiment has the following features. (A) The lottery results for the first special symbol include "hit" and "lost". (B) The lottery results for the second special symbol include "hit," "small win," and "miss." (C) The jackpot probability in the low probability state is 1/300, the jackpot probability in the high probability state is 1/50, and the small win probability in the low probability state and the high probability state is 1/1.2. (D) "Parallel control (parallel digestion)" is adopted. (E) In the low probability low base state, the low probability high base state, and the high probability high base state, the game progresses based on the first special symbol, so in these game states, the first special symbol is The fluctuation time is relatively shorter than the second special symbol (the average fluctuation time of the first special symbol is 20 seconds on average in the low probability low base state, and an average of 3 seconds in the low probability high base state and the high probability high base state) seconds, but the average time of the second special symbol is 10 minutes on average in the low probability low base state, the low probability high base state, and the high probability high base state). (F) In the high probability low base state, the game progresses mainly with the second special symbol, so in this game state, the second special symbol has a relatively shorter fluctuation time than the first special symbol ( The average fluctuation time of the second special symbol is 2 seconds on average in the high probability low base state, but the average time of the first special symbol is 5 minutes on average in the high probability low base state). (G) As the jackpot symbol related to the first special symbol, "10R probability variable jackpot A" which is the trigger to move to the high probability low base state which is variable probability until the next time is 10%, and to the high probability high base state which is variable probability until the next time. ``3R Probable Variable Jackpot B'', which triggers the transition, is selected at 60%, and ``3R Normal Jackpot'', which triggers the transition to the low probability high base state of 100 rotations, is selected at 30%. (H) As the jackpot symbol related to the second special symbol, "10R probability variable jackpot A", which is the trigger for transitioning to the high probability low base state which is variable probability until the next time, is 35%, and the transition to the high probability high base state which is variable probability until the next time. ``3R Probable Variable Jackpot B'', which is the trigger for transition, is selected at 35%, and ``3R Normal Jackpot'', which is the trigger for transition to the low probability high base state of 100 rotations, is selected at 30%. (I) When the second special symbol stops as a small winning symbol, the big prize opening P751 opens for 1.5 seconds, and on average 2 game balls can enter (30 game balls can be paid out). be.

By having the above features, in the high probability low base state, the fluctuation efficiency of the second special symbol that has a high probability of winning the "small hit" is high, so you can play the game mainly using the second special symbol for a short time. You can make small wins occur frequently, and opportunities to win game balls can occur frequently by opening the big winning hole P751 based on the small winning winnings (small winning game), so you can wait for the next jackpot to win. You can also increase the number of game balls by winning small hits. Such specifications are called "small hit rush." On the other hand, in the low-probability low-base state, low-probability high-base state, and high-probability high-base state, the fluctuation efficiency of the second special symbol that has a high probability of winning a "small hit" is low, so the small hit can be achieved in a short time. The game cannot be made to occur frequently, and the game will proceed based on the first special symbol instead of the second special symbol. In other words, the pachinko gaming machine P in the fifth embodiment has a gameplay that aims to shift to a high probability low base state using the special game related to the first special game as an opportunity in a game mainly using the first special symbol. .

The number of times the "relief function" occurs (the number of low probability high base states) when the "relief function" is installed in the pachinko gaming machine P in the fifth embodiment, and the performance mode when the "relief function" occurs. (Production stage) transition will be explained below.

Unlike the pachinko gaming machine P in the fourth embodiment, the pachinko gaming machine P in the fifth embodiment is configured so that a "relief function" occurs at the start of fluctuation (the pachinko gaming machine P in the fourth embodiment is configured so that the "relief function" occurs when the fluctuation stops (when the symbol fixed time has elapsed). Specifically, the pachinko game machine P in the fifth embodiment changes to a low probability high base state after the end of the special game related to "3R normal jackpot" at the start of the fluctuation at the 500th rotation (low probability after 100 rotations have passed). The "relief function" occurs at the start of the next fluctuation after 399 rotations of the low-probability low-base state after transitioning to the low-probability low-base state, and the low-probability low-base state changes to the low-probability high-base state Transition. Please note that in the following description, "○○○ rotation number" is the number of rotations calculated from the end of the special game (after the end of the special game related to "3R regular jackpot"). put.

FIG. 54 shows performance modes (performance contents displayed on the performance display device P80) regarding the state immediately before and after the "relief function" occurs. In addition, in FIG. 54, unlike the Pachinko game machine P in the fourth embodiment, the "relief function" occurs at the start of fluctuation at the 500th rotation, so the 499th rotation, which is the state immediately before the "relief function" occurs, The performance mode when the "relief function" occurs does not change depending on whether there is a hold related to the first special symbol or a hold related to the second special symbol in the situation where the eyes stop.

FIG. 54(a) shows a situation where the fluctuation of the first special symbol, which is the fluctuation of the 499th rotation, has stopped. It should be noted that the symbol fixing time has already passed. In this situation, the background of the production mode (production stage) corresponding to the low probability low base state is displayed before reaching the 499th rotation (for example, from the 497th rotation, the 498th rotation, etc.), and the decorative pattern A mountain background is displayed behind the image.

FIG. 54(b) shows a situation where the variation of the first special symbol, which is the variation of the 500th rotation, has started. This is a situation where the first special symbol starts to fluctuate at the 500th rotation due to the suspension of the first special symbol being extinguished from the situation shown in FIG. 54(a). By starting the fluctuation, a "relief function" occurs, and from the start of this fluctuation, the state shifts to a low probability high base state. At this point, at the start of the fluctuation (or just before the start of the fluctuation), the "→" symbol (distribution notification C) indicating an arrow is displayed very small in the upper right corner of the screen (it is displayed smaller than division notification A, which will be described later). , displayed in an unobtrusive manner). Then (or at the same time), although the "relief function" is occurring, that is, the situation has shifted to the low probability high base state, there is still a production mode (production stage) corresponding to the low probability low base state. ) is displayed, which is the mountain background.

FIG. 54(c) shows a situation where the variation of the first special symbol, which is the variation of the 501st rotation, has started. After the first special symbol that was fluctuating from the situation in FIG. 54(b) is stopped, the suspension of the first special symbol is extinguished, and the first special symbol starts to fluctuate at the 501st rotation. By starting the fluctuation, a stage change effect occurs that suggests a switch to a sky background, which is a background corresponding to a low probability high base state, which is "SEVEN RUSH", which will be described later. This stage change effect is a background for a stage change in which the screen immediately turns black from the mountain background that had been displayed up until then, and the white text "STAGE CHANGE" is displayed on a black background. Almost at the same time as this stage change background is displayed, the speaker 83 outputs a voice saying "SEVEN RUSH is in!". This "SEVEN RUSH" is the name of the production mode (production stage) corresponding to the low probability high base state. Also, at approximately the same time that the background for this stage change is displayed, the "→" symbol indicating an arrow at the top right of the screen (battle separation notification C) disappears, and instead, the "Right batting" symbol is displayed at the top right of the screen. The characters (separation notification A) are displayed in small size. Furthermore, at approximately the same time, the words "Please hit to the right" (hitting separation notification B) are displayed in a large size. As a modified example, after a predetermined period of time has elapsed (for example, 2 seconds) after the stage change background has been displayed, or after the stage change background has been hidden (in other words, "SEVEN RUSH") (Substantially at the same time as the display of the corresponding background starts), the speaker 83 may output a voice saying "SEVEN RUSH is in!", or the words "Hit right!" may be displayed in large letters. As a modified example, the words "SEVEN RUSH enters!" may be displayed. In that case, after a predetermined time has elapsed (for example, 2 seconds) after the stage change background is displayed, or after the stage change background is displayed, the text "SEVEN RUSH enters!" It is desirable to display the image after the background is hidden. In addition, when the variation at the 501st rotation is a variation of the second special symbol, the stage change effect and the separation notifications A and B are not displayed, and the background of the mountain and the separation notification C are continuously displayed.

FIG. 54(d) shows the situation during the 501st rotation. The background for the 501st stage change is hidden, and instead a sky background is displayed, which is the background corresponding to the low probability high base state of "SEVEN RUSH". At this time, the large letters "Please hit right" may be hidden, but it is preferable that they continue to be displayed from the stage change background (or until the fluctuation stops at the 501st rotation). (or it is desirable that the display continues until the 502nd rotation starts). Note that the small letters "Hit the right hand" are always displayed during the low probability high base state, unlike the large letters "Please hit the right hand."

In addition, the timing at which the "relief function" ends is when the variation of the specified number of times (the "first number" or "second number" described in detail later) starts (when the first special symbol starts to fluctuate or the second special symbol It does not matter whether it is at the start of the fluctuation), and during the fluctuation it has already shifted to the low probability low base state (the base state changes at the start of the fluctuation, so it is already in the low base state during the fluctuation) Therefore, as the production mode (production stage), a sky background is displayed, which is the background corresponding to the low probability high base state of "SEVEN RUSH". However, the characters "right-handed hit" (hitting division notification A) in the upper right corner of the screen are not displayed at the start of the fluctuation. At this time, the words "SEVEN RUSH end..." may be displayed. If the next change after the specified number of changes is a change in the first special symbol, the sky background, which is the background of the production mode (production stage) corresponding to the low probability high base state, will be hidden when the variation starts. At the same time, a stage change effect indicating a transition to a low probability low base state occurs instead (in other words, if the next change after the specified number of changes is the second special symbol change, the sky background will continue to be displayed, and no stage change effects will occur). This stage production is the same production (background) as the 501st stage production (background for stage change). As a modified example, it may be a different effect (background) from the 501st stage effect (background for stage change), for example, a background for stage change with black letters of "STAGE CHANGE" displayed on a white background. Also good. After that, the background for stage change is hidden, and instead a mountain background corresponding to the low probability low base state is displayed. As a modified example, the background of the sea may be used instead of the mountain background (the background may be different from the background before the "relief function" occurs), or it may be the background of the mountains, or the background of the sea may be used. It may be designed so that it may be a background (it may be configured to have cases where it is different from the background before the "relief function" occurs and cases where it is not different). In addition, in order to make it clear that the mountain background (or ocean background), which is the background corresponding to the low probability low base state at this time, is not a "relief function", it must be finished within 100 rotations. , it is desirable to be configured to switch to a background of a different production mode (production stage) (for example, a grassland background, a space background, etc.).

FIG. 55 shows performance modes (performance contents displayed on the performance display device P80) regarding the state immediately before and after the "relief function" occurs. In addition, in FIG. 55, unlike the pachinko game machine P in the fourth embodiment, the "relief function" occurs at the start of fluctuation at the 500th rotation, so the 499th rotation, which is the state immediately before the "relief function" occurs, The performance mode when the "relief function" occurs does not change depending on whether there is a hold related to the first special symbol or a hold related to the second special symbol in the situation where the eyes stop.

Similar to FIG. 54, FIG. 55 shows performance modes (performance contents displayed on the performance display device P80) regarding the state immediately before and after the "relief function" occurs. However, in FIG. 55, unlike FIG. 54, the variation at the 500th rotation is the variation in the second special symbol.

FIG. 55(a) shows a situation where the fluctuation of the first special symbol, which is the fluctuation of the 499th rotation, has stopped. It should be noted that the symbol fixing time has already passed. In this situation, the background of the production mode (production stage) corresponding to the low probability low base state is displayed before reaching the 499th rotation (for example, from the 497th rotation, the 498th rotation, etc.), and the decorative pattern A mountain background is displayed behind the image. However, regarding FIG. 55(a), the variation may be in progress (the first special symbol is in variation) instead of being stopped.

FIG. 55(b) shows a situation where the variation of the second special symbol, which is the variation of the 500th rotation, has started. This is a situation in which the second special symbol starts to fluctuate at the 501st rotation due to the suspension of the second special symbol being extinguished from the situation shown in FIG. 55(a). By starting the fluctuation, a "relief function" occurs, and from the start of this fluctuation, the state shifts to a low probability high base state. At this point, at the start of the fluctuation (or just before the start of the fluctuation), the "→" symbol (distribution notification C) indicating an arrow is displayed very small in the upper right corner of the screen (it is displayed smaller than division notification A, which will be described later). , displayed in an unobtrusive manner). Then (or at the same time), although the "relief function" is occurring, that is, the situation has shifted to the low probability high base state, there is still a production mode (production stage) corresponding to the low probability low base state. ) is displayed, which is the mountain background. As mentioned above, when the first special symbol is stopped changing at the 499th rotation, the second special symbol in Figure 55(b) is fluctuating independently (it is not fluctuating simultaneously with the first special symbol) ), when the first special symbol is changing at the 499th rotation, the second special symbol in FIG. 55(b) is changing in parallel (it is changing at the same time as the first special symbol). In addition, in FIG. 55(b), the decorative symbols are not displayed in a variable manner in response to the variation in the second special symbol (only the decorative symbols that correspond to the first special symbol are displayed in a variable manner or in a static manner); As a modified example, the decorative pattern corresponding to the second special pattern may also be configured to be displayed in a variable manner or stopped, and in such a configuration, for example, the decorative pattern may be configured to be displayed in a small size at the lower left of the effect display device P80. Also good.

FIG. 55(c) shows a situation where the variation of the first special symbol, which is the variation of the 501st rotation, has started. When the second special symbol that had been fluctuating from the situation in Figure 55(b) is still fluctuating, the suspension of the first special symbol is extinguished, and the first special symbol begins to fluctuate at the 501st rotation. It's a situation. By starting the fluctuation, a stage change effect occurs that suggests a switch to a sky background, which is a background corresponding to a low probability high base state, which is "SEVEN RUSH", which will be described later. This stage change effect is a background for a stage change in which the screen immediately turns black from the mountain background that had been displayed up until then, and the white text "STAGE CHANGE" is displayed on a black background. Almost at the same time as this stage change background is displayed, the speaker 83 outputs a voice saying "SEVEN RUSH is in!". This "SEVEN RUSH" is the name of the production mode (production stage) corresponding to the low probability high base state. Also, at approximately the same time that the background for this stage change is displayed, the "→" symbol indicating an arrow at the top right of the screen (battle separation notification C) disappears, and instead, the "Right batting" symbol is displayed at the top right of the screen. The characters (separation notification A) are displayed in small size. Furthermore, at approximately the same time, the words "Please hit to the right" (hitting separation notification B) are displayed in a large size. As a modified example, after a predetermined period of time has elapsed (for example, 2 seconds) after the stage change background has been displayed, or after the stage change background has been hidden (in other words, "SEVEN RUSH") (Substantially at the same time as the display of the corresponding background starts), the speaker 83 may output a voice saying "SEVEN RUSH is in!", or the words "Hit right!" may be displayed in large letters. As a modified example, the words "SEVEN RUSH enters!" may be displayed. In that case, after a predetermined time has elapsed (for example, 2 seconds) after the stage change background is displayed, or after the stage change background is displayed, the text "SEVEN RUSH enters!" It is desirable to display the image after the background is hidden. Regarding the stage change effect and the display of the separation notifications A and B (the non-display of the separation notification C) due to the first special symbol starting to fluctuate as described above, the second special symbol is not changing. This is done even during fluctuations. In addition, when the variation at the 501st rotation is a variation of the second special symbol, the stage change effect and the separation notifications A and B are not displayed, and the background of the mountain and the separation notification C are continuously displayed.

FIG. 55(d) shows the situation during the 501st rotation. The background for the 501st stage change is hidden, and instead a sky background is displayed, which is the background corresponding to the low probability high base state of "SEVEN RUSH". At this time, the large letters "Please hit right" may be hidden, but it is preferable that they continue to be displayed from the stage change background (or until the fluctuation stops at the 501st rotation). (or it is desirable that the display continues until the 502nd rotation starts). Note that the small letters "Hit the right hand" are always displayed during the low probability high base state, unlike the large letters "Please hit the right hand." Note that the timing at which the "relief function" ends and the presentation display mode (performance transition) are the same as those described above, and will therefore be omitted.

In the pachinko game machine P of the fifth embodiment, as described above, even after the special game ends, the game shifts to the low probability high base state which is the high base state. This low probability high base state continues for 100 rotations. In the high base state after the end of the special game, there is a fluctuation pattern table that is referred to at the final fluctuation of the high base state (for example, the 100th rotation), and a fluctuation pattern table that is referred to at the final fluctuation of the high base state (for example, from the 1st rotation to the 99th rotation). In the high base state of the "relief function", the fluctuation pattern table is configured to be different from the fluctuation pattern table that is referenced in the final fluctuation of the high base state, and the fluctuation pattern table that is The variation pattern tables referred to in the variations are configured to be the same. Furthermore, the fluctuation pattern table referred to in the high base state of the "relief function" is the same as the fluctuation pattern table referred to in (1) the final fluctuation of the high base state after the end of the special game (for example, the 100th rotation), and the fluctuation pattern table referred to before the final fluctuation. (2) The fluctuation pattern table may be different from the fluctuation pattern table referenced in the fluctuations of (for example, from the 1st rotation to the 99th rotation), or (2) the fluctuations ( For example, it may be the same as the variation pattern referenced from the 1st rotation to the 99th rotation.

Here, the fluctuation pattern table to be referred to in the final fluctuation of the high base state after the end of the special game (for example, the 100th rotation) is the "fluctuation pattern table A", and the fluctuation before the final fluctuation of the high base state after the end of the special game is (for example, from the 1st rotation to the 99th rotation) is referred to as "variation pattern table B," and the variation pattern table referred to in the high base state of the "relief function" is "variation pattern table C." Regarding "Pattern Table A", if the number of reservations related to the second special symbol at the start of fluctuation is a predetermined number (for example, 4, and the number decreases from 4 to 3 by the reservation extinguishment at the start of fluctuation), , the selection tendency of the fluctuation pattern when the number of reservations related to the second special symbol at the start of fluctuation is a specific number (for example, 1, and the number decreases from 1 to 0 when the reservation is exhausted at the start of fluctuation) are configured to be different, and for "variation pattern table B" and "variation pattern table C", if the number of reservations related to the second special symbol at the start of variation is a predetermined number (for example, 4 pieces, When the number of reserved pieces related to the second special symbol at the start of fluctuation is reduced from 4 to 3 due to pending consumption), and when the number of reserved pieces related to the second special symbol at the start of fluctuation is a specific number (for example, 1 piece, and 1 piece is reduced due to reserved consumption accompanying the start of fluctuation) (from 0 to 0), the selection tendency of the variation pattern is the same. The details of the fluctuation pattern table are shown in FIG. 55. Regarding FIG. 55(a), FIG. (b) shows a case where "variation pattern table B" and "variation pattern table C" are set as the same variation pattern table. When referring to the "variation pattern table A", that is, at the final variation of the high base state after the end of the special game (for example, the 100th rotation), the aforementioned "result display performance" is executed. However, even if the final variation is in the same high base state, it is preferable not to execute the "result display performance" in the final variation in the high base state of the "relief function".

As a modification, all high base states after the end of the special game (for example, for 100 rotations) refer to "variation pattern table B", and all high base states of "relief function" refer to "variation pattern table C". It may also be configured such that the symbol fixing time is extended for a long time only at the final change in the high base state after the end of the special game (for example, at the 100th rotation). Specifically, only the final fluctuation of the high base state after the end of the special game (for example, the 100th rotation) is fixed for 10 seconds, and the other fluctuations of the high base state (the final fluctuation of the high base state after the end of the special game) are fixed for 10 seconds. For all fluctuations in the high base state of the "relief function"), set the symbol fixing time to 0.5 seconds. With this configuration, the number of variable pattern tables can be reduced and the development burden can be reduced, while the "result display performance" can be executed with a symbol fixation time of 10 seconds.

By configuring as described above, in a pachinko gaming machine P that employs "parallel control (parallel digestion)" and in which a "relief function" occurs at the start of fluctuation, it is possible to inform the player that a "relief function" has occurred. In addition to making it possible to clearly indicate the change in the base state and the change in the production mode (production stage), the player can recognize the change in the base state without feeling any discomfort in the production. I can do it. In addition, due to the change in the base state, the type of starting hole that the player is aiming for will differ (as it will switch from the first starting winning hole P711A to the first starting winning hole P711B), so regarding the distribution notification for this. , Regardless of whether the symbol that triggers the base state switch is the first special symbol or the second special symbol, the striking notification C is displayed at the same time as the base state switches, but is displayed inconspicuously, and then At the start of variation of the first special symbol (at the start of variation of the symbol corresponding to the main game progress in the high base state), the striking separation notification A is immediately and continuously displayed, and the striking separation notification B is displayed. By displaying this conspicuously along with the stage change, it is possible to appropriately and emphatically notify the driver of the shot (aiming at the starting point of special map 2) when the base state changes, and at the same time, in the subsequent high base state. Since it is possible to continuously notify players of the winnings (aiming at the special figure 2 starting hole), appropriate notification of winnings can be provided to the player.

In addition, the number of times the "relief function" is performed in the pachinko gaming machine P in the fifth embodiment is the first number of times that targets only the variation of the first special symbol, and the number of times that the "relief function" is performed only for the variation of the first special symbol and the variation of the first special symbol and the variation of the second special symbol. and a second number of times targeting the total. Specifically, the first number of times is set to 300 times, and the second number of times is set to 759 times. The pachinko game machine P in the fifth embodiment adopts "parallel control (parallel processing)" and has the first start related to the normal electric accessory P770 in the right side game area (right side area P501R) of the performance display device P80. Since both the winning hole P711B and the second starting winning hole 712 are arranged, if you hit the right ball aiming at the first starting winning hole P711B in a high base state, there is a possibility that the ball will enter both starting winning holes. Furthermore, there is a possibility that the first special symbol and the second special symbol change simultaneously during the high base state of the "relief function". In this case, although it would be desirable to consume the high base state by fluctuations in the first special symbol, which is the main component of game progress in the high base state, fluctuations in the second special symbol will interrupt. If this occurs, the number of fluctuations in the high base state related to the first special symbol (originally expected) cannot be performed as expected (300 times in the fifth embodiment). Therefore, as described above, by setting not only the first number of times but also the second number of times, it is possible to almost certainly guarantee the fluctuation of the first special symbol in the first number of times.

In addition, while the "relief function" is occurring, a notification effect that notifies the remaining number of times of the "relief function" may be executed. In that case, the effect display device P80 displays "Remaining ” is displayed. This notification effect basically targets the first number of times (for example, if the remaining number of times of the first time is 120, it will be displayed as "120 times remaining"), but if the remaining number of times of the second time is 300, If the number is less than the number of times, the second number of times may also be considered. For example, the remaining number of times for the first time is 290 (the number of times remaining is 290 because the first special symbol changes 10 times after the "relief function" occurs), and the number of times remaining for the second time is 290. The remaining number of times is 100 (for example, after the "relief function" occurs, the first special symbol changes 10 times and the second special symbol changes 649 times, so the remaining number of times becomes 100) In some cases, the first special symbol has changed only 10 times, and normally it would be displayed as "290 times remaining," but since the number of times remaining in the second time is 100, it will be displayed as "100 times remaining." ' will be displayed. In other words, if the remaining number of times of the second time exceeds the remaining number of times of the first time, the remaining number of times of the second time becomes the target of notification of the notification effect, and in that case, until then, only the number of fluctuations of the first special symbol is Although it was subject to subtraction in the notification performance (each time the first special symbol changes, the display of "remaining ○○○ times" is subtracted by 1), after that only the first special symbol In addition, the number of fluctuations of the second special symbol is also subject to subtraction in the notification performance (each time the first special symbol or the second special symbol fluctuates once, the display of "Remaining ○○○ times" is subtracted by 1. ).

[Sixth Example]
As the pachinko gaming machine P of the present embodiment to the fifth embodiment, we have described the pachinko gaming machine P having various playability, but for the purpose of further improving the playability, we set high base state termination conditions (time-saving termination conditions). Embodiment 6 is an example of an example in which further improvements have been made to the ``relief function'' and new gameplay has been incorporated.Hereinafter, only the underlying technology and the differences from this embodiment will be detailed, and the common points will be explained below. Omit or simplify the explanation. It should be noted that among the elements constituting the Pachinko gaming machine P of the sixth embodiment, the same reference numerals are given to the elements that are the same as or correspond to the elements explained in the underlying technology or the present embodiment.

[Example 6-1]
The pachinko game machine P in the 6-1 embodiment employs the above-mentioned "small hit V" specifications. The pachinko gaming machine P of the 6-1st embodiment has the following features. (A) The lottery results for the first special symbol include "hit,""smallwin," and "miss." (B) The lottery results for the second special symbol include "hit,""smallwin," and "miss." (C) The jackpot probability is 1/300 (no high probability state), the small hit probability is 1/50 for the first special symbol, 1/10 for the second special symbol, and The number of reserved symbols is four, and the number of second special symbols reserved is four. (D) "Second special pattern (special pattern 2) priority digestion control" is adopted. (E) Both the small winning game with the first special symbol and the small winning game with the second special symbol are small winning games where it is easy to win a V prize in a specific area (there is no small winning game that makes it difficult to win a V prize) ). In other words, if a ball enters the big winning device P750 during execution of a small winning game, it is almost certain that the ball will enter a specific area, and this will be used as an opportunity to play a jackpot game (also referred to as a small winning V jackpot or a small winning V jackpot game). ) is executed. (F) It has a low base state and a high base state. (G) Small win of the 1st special symbol executed by winning a small win of the 1st special symbol in the low base state. The small win of the first special symbol is executed by winning the small win of the first special symbol in the base state.V The small win of the first special symbol is executed after winning the jackpot (after special game) or by winning the small win of the second special symbol. After the small hit V jackpot of the second special symbol (after the special game), the game shifts to a high base state of 15 rotations (the high base state is maintained at least until the second special symbol fluctuates 15 times). (H) After the jackpot game of the first special symbol (after the special game), which is executed by winning the jackpot of the first special symbol in the low base state, the state shifts to the high base state of one rotation (at least 2) The high base state is maintained until the special symbol changes once), but after the first special symbol jackpot game (special game After) or after the second special symbol jackpot game (after special game) which is executed by winning the second special symbol jackpot, the state shifts to a high base state of 15 rotations (at least when the second special symbol is 15 (The high base state is maintained until the change occurs.) (I) The first special symbol jackpot (special game) executed by winning the first special symbol jackpot and the first special symbol small win executed by winning the first special symbol small win The V jackpot (special game) is a 3R special game, and is executed by winning the jackpot of the second special symbol (special game) and the small hit of the second special symbol, which is executed by winning the jackpot of the second special symbol. The small hit V jackpot (special game) of the second special symbol to be executed is a 10R special game. (J) Equipped with a "relief function" that occurs when the fluctuation stops at the 600th rotation (after the symbol fixing time has elapsed) after the special game ends (after a small hit V jackpot or after a jackpot game), and until the 700th rotation. The high base state continues (as a modification, the "relief function" may occur when 600 rotations have passed after the end of the high base state after the end of the special game).

By having the above features, during the execution of the first special symbol small hit game that is executed by winning the first special symbol small win in a low base state, (1) the ball enters a specific area; By doing so, you can obtain 3R worth of balls, or (2) by intentionally not letting the ball enter a specific area, you cannot get 3R worth of balls, but you can get closer to the "relief function" (Small hit V jackpot) Then, by executing the special game, the conditions for the occurrence of the "relief function" are reset. In other words, the conditions for the occurrence of the "relief function" are reset at the 600th rotation after the end of the special game. If the ball does not enter the area, it will not be reset, so the player can select a function similar to a "relief function". In addition, as a modified example, by letting a ball enter a specific area during execution of a small winning game of the first special symbol, which is executed by winning a small winning of the first special symbol in a low base state, a high base state can be achieved. It may be configured so that it can be acquired once. In addition, as a further modification, during the execution of the small winning game of the first special symbol which is executed by winning the small winning of the first special symbol in the low base state, the player is given the big prize device. We do not perform a display that encourages the player to fire a game ball aiming at P750 (aiming at a specific area) (to leave it to the player's discretion), and the second special symbol is displayed in a high base state. During the execution of the small winning game with the second special symbol, which is executed by winning the small winning, the player is instructed to fire the game ball at the big winning device P750 (aiming at a specific area). It may also be configured to perform a performance that notifies the user of the prompting.

[Example 6-2]
The pachinko game machine P in the 6-2 embodiment employs the above-mentioned "small hit V" specifications. The pachinko gaming machine P of the 6-1st embodiment has the following features. (A) The lottery results for the first special symbol include "hit" and "miss". (B) The lottery results for the second special symbol include "hit,""smallwin," and "miss." (C) The jackpot probability is 1/300 (no high probability state), the small hit probability is 1/3, the number of reservations for the first special symbol is 4, and the reservation for the second special symbol. The number is 4. (D) "Second special pattern (special pattern 2) priority digestion control" is adopted. (E) The small winning game is a small winning game in which it is easy to win a V prize in a specific area (it does not have a small winning game that makes it difficult to win a V prize). In other words, if a ball enters the big winning device P750 during execution of a small winning game, it is almost certain that the ball will enter a specific area, and this will be used as an opportunity to play a jackpot game (also referred to as a small winning V jackpot or a small winning V jackpot game). ) is executed. (F) It has a low base state and a high base state, the winning probability of the normal symbol is 1/1, the number of reserved symbols for the normal symbol is 4, and the normal electric role corresponding to the winning symbol of the normal symbol. Opening pattern of object P770 (operation pattern corresponding to one operation of ordinary electric accessory P770 triggered by the normal symbol stopping at a winning symbol, that is, "one operation of ordinary electric accessory P770") = "Execute one set of opening patterns that open one or more normal electric accessories P770") is an opening pattern of 0.01 second opening x 1 time in the low base state, and 1.5 seconds in the high base state. This is an opening pattern of 3 seconds of opening, but in any of the opening patterns, when one ball enters the ordinary electric accessory P770, the operation of the ordinary electric accessory P770 is forcibly terminated (for example, 1.5 If one ball is detected during the second 1.5 second release in a second x 3 release, the remaining time of the second release, which is the subsequent release, will be forcibly ended, and the third ). (G) After the jackpot game of the first special symbol (after the special game) which is executed by winning the jackpot of the first special symbol in the low base state, the state shifts to the high base state and the second special symbol is 1 The high base state is maintained until the second special symbol changes once or until the normal electric accessory P770 operates twice (as a modification, until the second special symbol changes once or the normal electric accessory P770 operates twice) (The high base state may be maintained until the first special symbol changes 10 times, or until the first special symbol and the second special symbol change 10 times in total.) . (H) After the second special symbol jackpot game executed by winning the second special symbol jackpot in the low base state (after the special game), win the second special symbol jackpot in the low base state After the small hit V jackpot (after the special game) of the second special symbol executed by The high base state is maintained until the second special symbol is activated once (as a modification, until the second special symbol is activated once, or until the normal electric accessory P770 is activated 10,000 times, or the first special symbol is activated 10 times. (It may be configured such that the high base state is maintained until the base changes or until the first special symbol and the second special symbol change 10 times in total). (I) After the first special symbol jackpot game (after the special game), which is executed by winning the first special symbol jackpot in the high base state, winning the second special symbol jackpot in the high base state After the jackpot game of the second special symbol (after the special game) executed by this, after the small hit V jackpot of the second special symbol executed by winning the small win of the second special symbol in the high base state ( After the special game), the state shifts to a high base state, and the high base state is maintained until the second special symbol changes 99 times or until the normal electric accessory P770 operates 10,000 times (as a modification, the 2 Until the special symbol changes 99 times, or until the normal electric accessory P770 operates 10,000 times, or until the 1st special symbol changes 99 times, or the total of the 1st special symbol and the 2nd special symbol (The high base state may be maintained until it fluctuates 99 times.) However, if the jackpot game or small hit V jackpot occurs three times in a row during the high base state, the player will be forcibly shifted to the low base state after the third jackpot game or small win V jackpot ends (the third jackpot game Or, if the number of reserved 2nd special symbols is accumulated 4 before the small hit V jackpot is executed, after shifting to the low base state, play the jackpot game or small hit again within the 4 reserved. There is a possibility of winning the V jackpot).

By having the above features, it is possible to limit the number of variable second special symbols in the high base state after the first hit (jackpot game or small hit V jackpot related to the first special symbol in the low base state). Therefore, it is possible to suppress the consecutive winnings after the first hit, and in the case of a jackpot game or a small hit V jackpot during the high base state after the first hit, the conditions for ending the subsequent high base state are set to the high base after the first hit. By relaxing the end conditions of the state, it is possible to increase the number of consecutive wins, and therefore it is possible to realize a rich gameplay experience. More specifically, after the first hit, the high base state will end if the normal electric accessory P770 is activated twice, and as mentioned above, if one ball enters the ordinary electric accessory P770, the high base state will be forced. Since the operation of the normal electric accessory P770 ends, after the first hit, if the high base state starts from a situation where the second special symbol is not pending, the second special symbol will be applied twice (after the high base state starts). Only the fluctuation of the second special symbol due to the first ball entering the normal electric accessory P770 and the fluctuation related to the suspension of the second special symbol due to the ball entering the ordinary electric accessory P770 during that fluctuation) It is configured so that it cannot be done. On the other hand, after the second special symbol jackpot game (after the special game), which is executed by winning the second special symbol jackpot in the low base state, the second special symbol wins the small hit in the low base state. After the small hit V jackpot (after the special game) of the second special symbol executed by this, the high base state ends when the normal electric accessory P770 is activated 10,000 times, so the high base state ends first after the high base state starts. During the fluctuation due to the ball entering the normal electric accessory P770, it is possible to cause the reservation of the 4 second special symbols (However, even if the second special symbol fluctuates once, the high base state Therefore, a total of 5 fluctuations of the second special symbol are possible, including this first fluctuation and 4 fluctuations of the 4 reserved portions that are consumed after the high base state ends). Also, after the first special symbol jackpot game (after the special game), which is executed by winning the first special symbol jackpot in the high base state, winning the second special symbol jackpot in the high base state. After the jackpot game of the second special symbol (after the special game), the small win of the second special symbol that is executed by winning the small win of the second special symbol in the high base state (after the special After the game), the high base state is maintained until the second special symbol changes 99 times or until the normal electric accessory P770 operates 10,000 times, and the small hit probability is 1/3, so the high base state During this state, you can get a small hit V jackpot with a fairly high probability.

[Example 6-3]
The pachinko game machine P in the 6-3 embodiment employs the above-mentioned "small hit V" specifications. The pachinko gaming machine P of the 6-3rd embodiment has the following features. (A) The lottery results for the first special symbol include "hit" and "lost". (B) The lottery results for the second special symbol include "hit,""smallwin," and "miss." (C) The jackpot probability is 1/300 (no high probability state is provided), the small hit probability is 1/1 (approximately 1/1), and the number of reserved first special symbols is 4, The number of second special symbols reserved is four. (D) "Second special pattern (special pattern 2) priority digestion control" is adopted. (E) The small winning game is a small winning game in which it is easy to win a V prize in a specific area (it does not have a small winning game that makes it difficult to win a V prize). In other words, if a ball enters the big winning device P750 during execution of a small winning game, it is almost certain that the ball will enter a specific area, and this will be used as an opportunity to play a jackpot game (also referred to as a small winning V jackpot or a small winning V jackpot game). ) is executed. (F) It has a low base state and a high base state, the winning probability of the normal symbol is 1/1, the number of reserved symbols for the normal symbol is 4, and the winning symbol for the normal symbol is the winning symbol A and the winning symbol. Symbol B (selection ratio is 3:1), and the opening pattern of normal electric accessory P770 corresponding to winning symbol A and winning symbol B in the low base state is 0.01 second opening x 1 opening. The opening pattern of the normal electric accessory P770 corresponding to the winning symbol A in the high base state is an opening pattern of 0.01 seconds × 1 opening, and the opening pattern of the ordinary electric accessory P770 corresponding to the winning symbol A in the high base state is the opening pattern of the ordinary electric accessory P770 corresponding to the winning symbol B in the high base state. The release pattern of the object P770 is a 1.5 second release x 3 release pattern, but in any of the release patterns, the release is forced to end when one ball enters the normal electric accessory P770 (for example, If one ball is detected during the second 1.5 second release in a 1.5 second x 3 release, the remaining time for the second release will be forcibly terminated. Moreover, the third opening will not take place). (G) After the first special symbol jackpot game (after the special game), which is executed by winning the first special symbol jackpot in the low base state or high base state, winning the second special symbol jackpot. After the jackpot game (after the special game) of the second special symbol executed by this, after the small hit V jackpot of the second special symbol executed by winning the small win of the second special symbol (after the special game) , the high base state is maintained until the second special symbol changes once, or until the normal electric accessory P770 operates four times (as a modification, the second special symbol changes once). or until the normal electric accessory P770 operates 4 times, or until the 1st special symbol changes 10 times, or until the 1st special symbol and the 2nd special symbol change 10 times in total. (It may be configured so that a high base state is maintained).

By having the above features, it is possible to realize the gameplay of whether or not the winning symbol B can be won while the normal electric accessory P770 is activated 4 times (in other words, while the normal symbol is won 4 times) (By winning the winning symbol B, it becomes possible to enter the normal electric accessory P770, one second special symbol is held, and the second special symbol is almost a small hit. Therefore, winning the winning symbol B is almost at the same time as winning the small winning V jackpot). In addition, even if you win the winning symbol B once, if there are still the number of openings of the normal electric accessory P770 remaining, you may win another winning symbol B, and if you win the winning symbol B again, , since the second special symbol is further held, a plurality of successive small-hit V jackpots will be obtained.

[Example 6-4]
The pachinko game machine P in the 6-4th embodiment employs the above-mentioned "small hit V" specifications. The pachinko gaming machine P of the 6-4th embodiment has the following features. (A) The lottery results for the first special symbol include "hit" and "lost". (B) The lottery results for the second special symbol include "hit,""smallwin," and "miss." (C) The jackpot probability is 1/300 (no high probability state), the small hit probability is 1/3, the number of reservations for the first special symbol is 4, and the reservation for the second special symbol. The number is 4. (D) "Second special pattern (special pattern 2) priority digestion control" is adopted. (E) The small winning game is a small winning game in which it is easy to win a V prize in a specific area (it does not have a small winning game that makes it difficult to win a V prize). In other words, if a ball enters the big winning device P750 during execution of a small winning game, it is almost certain that the ball will enter a specific area, and this will be used as an opportunity to play a jackpot game (also referred to as a small winning V jackpot or a small winning V jackpot game). ) is executed. (F) It has a low base state and a high base state, the winning probability of the normal symbol is 1/1, the number of reserved symbols for the normal symbol is 4, and the normal electric role corresponding to the winning symbol of the normal symbol. Opening pattern of object P770 (operation pattern corresponding to one operation of ordinary electric accessory P770 triggered by the normal symbol stopping at a winning symbol, that is, "one operation of ordinary electric accessory P770") = "Execute one set of opening patterns that open one or more normal electric accessories P770") is an opening pattern of 0.01 second opening x 1 time in the low base state, and 1.5 seconds in the high base state. This is an opening pattern of 3 seconds of opening, but in any of the opening patterns, when one ball enters the ordinary electric accessory P770, the operation of the ordinary electric accessory P770 is forcibly terminated (for example, 1.5 If one ball is detected during the second 1.5 second release in a second x 3 release, the remaining time of the second release, which is the subsequent release, will be forcibly ended, and the third ). (G) After the first special symbol jackpot game (after the special game), which is executed by winning the first special symbol jackpot in the low base state or high base state, winning the second special symbol jackpot. After the jackpot game (after the special game) of the second special symbol executed by this, after the small hit V jackpot of the second special symbol executed by winning the small win of the second special symbol (after the special game) , the high base state is maintained until the second special symbol changes once or until the normal electric accessory P770 operates N times (as a modification, the second special symbol changes once). until the normal electric accessory P770 operates N times, or until the first special symbol changes 10 times, or until the first special symbol and the second special symbol change 10 times in total. (It may be configured so that a high base state is maintained). Here, N=1, 2, 3, or 4, and is configured to differ depending on the type of special game (type of jackpot symbol or small win symbol).

By having the above-mentioned features, it is possible to vary the degree of expectation of occurrence of reservation related to the small hit of the second special symbol depending on the type of the jackpot symbol or the type of the small win symbol. That is, depending on the type of jackpot symbol or the type of small win symbol, the expected degree of acquisition of the small win V jackpot and the expected value of the number of small win V jackpots to be obtained can be made different. As a modified example, the high base state is maintained until the second special symbol changes 99 times, or the normal electric accessory P770 operates 10,000 times (or the second special symbol changes). Until it fluctuates 99 times, or until the normal electric accessory P770 operates 10,000 times, or until the first special symbol fluctuates 99 times, or the first special symbol and the second special symbol fluctuate a total of 99 times. A special game (a jackpot symbol or a small prize symbol) such as a high base state maintained until the end of the game may be included.

In addition, as a modification, if there is a jackpot symbol or a small win symbol that makes the high base state end condition "1 variation of the 2nd special symbol or 12 activations of the normal electric accessory P770", the 2nd special The variation of the symbol is set to 300 seconds, and every time the normal electric accessory P770 is operated three times, the player is prompted to stop firing the game ball (in other words, the normal electric accessory P770 (a performance that encourages players not to let game balls into the ball) is executed. By doing this, one of the "number of operations of the normal electric accessory P770", which is one of the time-saving termination conditions by letting the ball enter the ordinary electric accessory P770 in a situation where the number of reserved ordinary symbols is 4, is wasted. Counting up can be prevented. More specifically, even if you put a ball into the normal electric accessory P770 in a situation where there are 4 normal symbols on hold, the number of normal symbols on hold is already 4, so it will not increase, and it will simply be in a high base state. However, by configuring as described above, it is possible to prevent this disadvantage.

[Example 6-5]
The pachinko game machine P in the 6-5th embodiment employs the above-mentioned "small hit V" specifications. The pachinko gaming machine P of the 6-5th embodiment has the following features. (A) The lottery results for the first special symbol include "hit" and "lost". (B) The lottery results for the second special symbol include "hit,""smallwin," and "miss." (C) The jackpot probability is 1/300 (no high probability state is provided), the small hit probability is 1/5 (small winning symbol A is 1/6, small winning symbol B is 1/30), The number of reserved first special symbols is four, and the number of reserved second special symbols is four. (D) "Second special pattern (special pattern 2) priority digestion control" is adopted. (E) Small winning games include small winning game A (small winning game corresponding to small winning symbol A) where it is easy to win a V in a specific area, and small winning game B (corresponding to small winning symbol B) where it is difficult to win a V prize. It has a small winning game). In other words, if a ball enters the big winning device P750 during the execution of the small winning game A, the ball will almost definitely enter the specific area, and this will be used as an opportunity to play the jackpot game (also known as the small winning V jackpot or small winning V jackpot game). However, even if the ball enters the big winning device P750 during execution of the small winning game B, the ball does not enter the specific area, and this triggers a jackpot game (small winning V jackpot or small winning (also referred to as V jackpot game) is not executed. (F) It has a low base state and a high base state, the winning probability of the normal symbol is 1/1, the number of reserved symbols for the normal symbol is 4, and the normal electric role corresponding to the winning symbol of the normal symbol. Opening pattern of object P770 (operation pattern corresponding to one operation of ordinary electric accessory P770 triggered by the normal symbol stopping at a winning symbol, that is, "one operation of ordinary electric accessory P770") = "Execute one set of opening patterns that open one or more normal electric accessories P770") is an opening pattern of 0.01 second opening x 1 time in the low base state, and 1.5 seconds in the high base state. This is an opening pattern of 3 seconds of opening, but in any of the opening patterns, when one ball enters the ordinary electric accessory P770, the operation of the ordinary electric accessory P770 is forcibly terminated (for example, 1.5 If one ball is detected during the second 1.5 second release in a second x 3 release, the remaining time of the second release, which is the subsequent release, will be forcibly ended, and the third ). (G) After the jackpot game of the first special symbol (after the special game), which is executed by winning the jackpot of the first special symbol in the low base state, the state shifts to the high base state and the fluctuation of the second special symbol The high base state is maintained until either the small winning symbol A or the small winning symbol B is won five times. (H) After the second special symbol jackpot game executed by winning the second special symbol jackpot in the low base state (after the special game), win the second special symbol jackpot in the low base state After the small hit V of the second special symbol executed by The high base state is maintained until symbol B is won five times. (I) After the first special symbol jackpot game (after the special game), which is executed by winning the first special symbol jackpot in the high base state, winning the second special symbol jackpot in the high base state After the jackpot game of the second special symbol (after the special game) executed by this, after the small hit V jackpot of the second special symbol executed by winning the small win of the second special symbol in the high base state ( After the special game), the player shifts to the high base state, and until the second special symbol changes 99 times or the small winning symbol A or B wins once, A high base condition is maintained.

By having the above features, while the first hit (jackpot game related to the first special symbol in a low base state) can be used as a trigger to transition to a high base state, a jackpot game or a small hit during a high base state The V jackpot is used as a trigger to shift to the high base state 99 times, and the jackpot game related to the second special symbol in the low base state or the small win V jackpot (the second remaining when shifting from the high base state to the low base state) It is possible to create a gaming property in which a jackpot or small win won in a reservation related to a special symbol is used as an opportunity to shift to a high base state five times, that is, a high base state with a plurality of successive winning expectations. In addition, when a high base state of 99 times is given, there is a very high probability that a small winning symbol A of 1/6 will be won within 99 times, so "99 times high base state → small winning symbol A" Small hit V jackpot → high base state of 99 times → small hit V jackpot related to small win symbol A →...”, it seems that the expectation level of consecutive winnings is very high, but small hit V is difficult. Since it is equipped with the (practically impossible) small winning symbol B and the high base state ends with the winning of the small winning symbol, the extreme consecutive winnings are suppressed, and by the time the small winning symbol B is won, the small winning symbol B is small. It is possible to realize a game that determines how many times the winning symbol A is won. In addition, in the case of a high base state of 5 times, in order to ensure that the high base state of 5 times can be executed, even if the small winning symbol wins once (even if the small winning symbol B wins once) The configuration is configured so that the high base state is not terminated even if the

[Example 6-6]
The pachinko game machine P in the 6-6th embodiment has the same board configuration as that shown in FIG. 53, and adopts the "small hit rush" specification. However, unlike the Pachinko gaming machine P of the fifth embodiment, the purpose is not to increase the number of balls that come out by making small wins occur frequently, so even when a small hit is won, the big winning opening P751 is Since the opening is only 0.01 seconds, it is extremely difficult to enter the game ball. The pachinko gaming machine P of the 6-6th embodiment has the following features. (A) The lottery results for the first special symbol include "hit" and "lost". (B) The lottery results for the second special symbol include "hit,""smallwin," and "miss." (C) The jackpot probability in the low probability state is 1/300, the jackpot probability in the high probability state is 1/50, and the small win probability in the low probability state and the high probability state is 1/1.2. (D) "Parallel control (parallel digestion)" is adopted, and "V probability variation" is adopted. This is a jackpot symbol, and the "10R normal jackpot" is a jackpot symbol that is virtually impossible as it is difficult for the ball to enter a specific area). (E) In the low probability low base state, the low probability high base state, and the high probability high base state, the game progresses based on the first special symbol, so in these game states, the first special symbol is The fluctuation time is relatively shorter than the second special symbol (the average fluctuation time of the first special symbol is 20 seconds on average in the low probability low base state, and an average of 3 seconds in the low probability high base state and the high probability high base state) seconds, but the average time of the second special symbol is 10 minutes on average in the low probability low base state, the low probability high base state, and the high probability high base state). (F) In the high probability low base state, the game progresses mainly with the second special symbol, so in this game state, the second special symbol has a relatively shorter fluctuation time than the first special symbol ( The average fluctuation time of the second special symbol is 2 seconds on average in the high probability low base state, but the average time of the first special symbol is 5 minutes on average in the high probability low base state). (G) As the jackpot symbol related to the first special symbol, "10R probability variable jackpot A", which is the trigger for transitioning to the high probability low base state which will be variable probability until the next time, is 40% and transition to the low probability high base state with 100 rotations. The trigger "10R normal jackpot" is selected at 60%. (H) As the jackpot symbol related to the second special symbol, "10R probability variable jackpot A", which is the trigger for transitioning to the high probability low base state which is variable probability until the next time, is 40%, and the transition to the high probability high base state which is variable probability until the next time. “10R Probable Variable Jackpot B”, which triggers the transition, is selected at 60%.

With the above features, when the first hit (jackpot game related to the first special symbol in the low base state) is shifted to the high probability low base state, the game progresses mainly with the second special symbol, and the second special symbol becomes the main character. If the winning/failure lottery results of the two special symbols are jackpots, they are all ``probable and variable jackpots'', so the game is such that the execution of the special game is guaranteed at least two more times. Specifically, when the second special symbol wins "10R Probable Variable Jackpot A", the state shifts to the high probability low base state again, and the execution of two more special games is guaranteed, resulting in "10R Probable Variable Jackpot B". By winning, the game moves to a high-probability base state, and the game progresses based on the first special symbol. Furthermore, after switching to the high probability high base state and switching to the game progress mainly based on the first special symbol, if the first special symbol wins "10R probability variable jackpot A", the high probability low base state again This provides an innovative gaming experience in which the player is guaranteed to be able to play the special game two more times.

[Example 6-7]
The pachinko game machine P in the 6th to 7th embodiments has a board configuration similar to that shown in FIG. 53, and adopts the "small hit rush" specification. However, unlike the Pachinko gaming machine P of the fifth embodiment, the purpose is not to increase the number of balls that come out by making small wins occur frequently, so even when a small hit is won, the big winning opening P751 is Since the opening is only 0.01 seconds, it is extremely difficult to enter the game ball. The pachinko gaming machine P of the 6-6th embodiment has the following features. (A) The lottery results for the first special symbol include "hit" and "lost". (B) The lottery results for the second special symbol include "hit,""smallwin," and "miss." (C) The jackpot probability in the low probability state is 1/300, the jackpot probability in the high probability state is 1/50, and the small win probability in the low probability state and the high probability state is 1/1.2. (D) "Parallel control (parallel digestion)" is adopted, and "V probability variation" is adopted ("10R probability variation jackpot", which will be described later, is a jackpot symbol that allows the ball to easily enter a specific area, and "10R regular variation" is adopted. "Jackpot" is a jackpot symbol that is difficult to enter into a specific area and is virtually impossible.) (E) In the low probability low base state, the low probability high base state, and the high probability high base state, the game progresses based on the first special symbol, so in these game states, the first special symbol is The fluctuation time is relatively shorter than the second special symbol (the average fluctuation time of the first special symbol is 20 seconds on average in the low probability low base state, and an average of 3 seconds in the low probability high base state and the high probability high base state) seconds, but the average time of the second special symbol is 10 minutes on average in the low probability low base state, the low probability high base state, and the high probability high base state). (F) In the high probability low base state, the game progresses mainly with the second special symbol, so in this game state, the second special symbol has a relatively shorter fluctuation time than the first special symbol ( The average fluctuation time of the second special symbol is 2 seconds on average in the high probability low base state, but the average time of the first special symbol is 5 minutes on average in the high probability low base state). (G) As the jackpot symbol related to the first special symbol, "10R probability variable jackpot", which is the trigger for transitioning to the high probability high base state that will remain variable until the next time, is selected at 100%, but the high base state has been in the high base state 50 times. Then, it shifts to a low base state, and then switches to a high probability low base state. (H) As the jackpot symbol related to the second special symbol, the "10R probability variable jackpot" which is the trigger to transition to the high probability high base state which is variable probability until the next time is the trigger to transition to the low probability high base state with 50% and 100 rotations. ``10R normal jackpot'' is selected at 50%.

By having the above features, the first hit (jackpot game related to the first special symbol in the low base state) will always transition to the high probability state, so the execution of the special game again is guaranteed, and the 50 times In the high-probability, high-base state, the game progresses mainly with the first special symbol, so that if you hit the jackpot (with the first special symbol) within 50 times, you can create a gameplay in which you are sure to shift to the high-probability state again.

[Seventh Example]
As the pachinko gaming machine P of the present embodiment to the sixth embodiment, we have described the pachinko gaming machine P having various playability. The seventh embodiment is an example in which the content has been further improved.Hereinafter, only the underlying technology and the differences from this embodiment will be described in detail, and the explanation of common points will be omitted or simplified. It should be noted that among the elements constituting the pachinko game machine P of the seventh embodiment, the same reference numerals are given to the elements that are the same as or correspond to the elements explained in the underlying technology or the present embodiment.

The pachinko game machine P in the seventh embodiment employs the above-mentioned "small hit V" specifications. Further, an opening is formed in the approximate center of the gaming area P501 of the pachinko gaming machine P of the seventh embodiment so that the performance display device P80 can be visually recognized, and the opening is provided with a frame for a center decoration unit (not shown). The members are attached to form a partition section inside the game area P501.

Below the effect display device P80, there is provided a first starting prize opening P711 into which a game ball flowing down the left side game area (left side area P501L) of the effect display device P80 enters, and further below that is a first winning opening P711 not shown. An out port P790 is provided. Further, a general winning opening P731 is arranged in the lower area of the left side area P501L of the effect display device P80. In other words, when a game ball is fired into the gaming area on the left side of the effect display device P80, the ball enters the first starting winning hole P711 or the general winning hole P731, and it can be expected that a winning will occur. There is. On the other hand, in the game area on the right side of the performance display device P80 (right side area P501R), as shown in FIG. The game balls that are placed and fired towards the right side game area of the effect display device P80 can win prizes (in addition, the first starting prize opening and the second starting winning opening are each special figure 1 starting prize opening). (Also referred to as the opening and special figure 2 starting opening). In addition, as a modified example, without providing the second starting winning hole P721, it is provided with another first starting winning hole different from the first starting winning hole P711, and the other first starting winning hole is equipped with a normal electric role. You may also attach the object P770.

Here, the first starting winning hole P711 is a starting winning hole for acquiring the right related to the special symbol drawing of the first special symbol, and the second starting winning hole P721 is the special symbol drawing of the second special symbol. This is the starting prize opening for acquiring the rights related to. That is, in the pachinko game machine P of the seventh embodiment, in the low base state, the game ball is fired toward the left side area of the game area P501, and the special symbol lottery of the first special symbol is generated by the first starting prize opening P711. The gameplay is such that you can win the right, and in the high base state, the game ball is fired towards the right side area of the game area P501, and the right to special symbol lottery of the second special symbol is obtained through the second starting prize opening P721. It is a gameplay that allows you to win.

Inside the big winning hole P751, a first sorting member P900A and a second sorting member P900B are provided, and the game ball that enters the big winning hole P751 is transferred to the first sorting member P900A or the second sorting member P900B. It is guided to one of the branch members P900B. In addition, there are two cases in which the second distribution member P900B is guided via the first distribution member P900A and a case in which the second distribution member P900B is guided without going through the first distribution member P900A (that is, to the grand prize opening P751. and a case where the entered game ball is directly guided to the second distribution member P900B). The game balls guided by the first distribution member P900A are distributed to any of the five ball entry ports. Among these, if the ball enters the entrance with a circle drawn around it, it will be guided to the second distribution member P900B, and if the ball enters any other entrance, it will penetrate the game board P5 in the front and back. The balls flow down to the rear side of the game board P5 through the through holes (not shown) formed in the process, and are collected in the collection channel (played ball path) at the bottom of the front frame P2, and the total number of shot game balls is detected. After passing through an out ball sensor P792 (launched ball number sensor) provided at the lower part of the front frame of the game machine, the ball is discharged to the outside of the game machine. The game balls guided by the second distribution member P900B are distributed to one of the four ball entry ports. Among these, when the ball enters the specific area P760, which is the ball entrance with a circle drawn around it, a jackpot game (also referred to as a small hit V jackpot or a small hit V jackpot game) is executed using this as an opportunity. If the ball enters the entrance other than the ball entrance, it flows down to the rear side of the game board P5 through a through hole (not shown) formed through the front and back of the game board P5, and goes to the recovery channel ( After passing through an out ball sensor P792 (fired ball number sensor) provided at the lower part of the front frame for detecting the total number of shot game balls, they are discharged to the outside of the game machine.

Furthermore, the pachinko gaming machine P of the seventh embodiment has the following features. (A) The lottery results for the first special symbol include "hit," "small win," and "miss." (B) The lottery results for the second special symbol include "hit," "small win," and "miss." (C) The jackpot probability is 1/300 (no high probability state), the small hit probability is 1/3 for the first special symbol, 1/2 for the second special symbol, and The number of reserved symbols is four, and the number of second special symbols reserved is two. In addition, as a modification, the small hit probability of the first special symbol may be set to 1/2, and the number of reservations of the second special symbol may be set to one. (D) "Second special pattern (special pattern 2) priority digestion control" is adopted. (E) The small winning game with the first special symbol is small winning game A (opening time of the big winning opening P751 is 0.2 seconds x 1 time), small winning game B (opening time of the big winning opening P751 is 0.2 seconds x 1 time). 5 seconds x 2 times), small winning game C (opening time of the big prize opening P751 1.5 seconds x 1 time) are executed at a rate of 60%, 30%, and 10%, respectively. As for the special symbol small winning game, one type of small winning game C (opening time of the big winning hole P751 is 1.5 seconds x 1 time) is executed at a rate of 100%. As a modified example, the small winning game with the second special symbol is small winning game A (opening time of the big winning opening P751 is 0.2 seconds x 1 time), small winning game B (opening time of the big winning opening P751 is 0). .5 seconds x 2 times) and small winning game C (opening time of big prize opening P751 1.5 seconds x 1 time) are executed at a rate of 35%, 35%, and 30%, respectively. may be configured. As mentioned above, by letting the ball enter the big winning device P750 during the execution of the small winning game and then entering the specific area P760, this can be used as an opportunity to play the jackpot game (also known as the small winning V jackpot or the small winning V jackpot game). ) is executed. (F) It has a low base state and a high base state. In addition, the high base state continues 99 times, but if you win a small hit or jackpot in the high base state and the small win V jackpot game or jackpot game is executed 4 times in a row (for example, if you win a small hit or jackpot in the high base state, If a small hit is won and a small win V jackpot game is executed 4 times in a row), after the 4th small win V jackpot game or after a jackpot game, the game always shifts to a low base state (so-called " ). As a modified example, without applying the time saving limiter, if a small hit V jackpot game or a jackpot game is never executed in a high base state that continues 99 times, a transition to a low base state or a transition to a low base state. It is also possible to provide a small win V jackpot game or jackpot game as a trigger, and to shift to a low base state when such a small win V jackpot game or jackpot game is executed. (G) Small win of the 1st special symbol executed by winning the small win of the 1st special symbol in the low base state. After the first special symbol jackpot (after the special game), which is executed by winning the first special symbol jackpot in the low base state, the high base state is 50%. (transition to low base state at 50%). In addition, in any of the small winning games A to C, the ratio of shifting to the high base state after the small winning V jackpot game remains the same (all small winning games shift to the high base state at 25%). (H) Small win of the second special symbol executed by winning the small win of the second special symbol in the low base state After the V jackpot (after the special game), the transition to the high base state is 100%, After winning the second special symbol jackpot (after the special game), which is executed by winning the second special symbol jackpot in the low base state, the game shifts to the high base state at 100%. In addition, in any of the small winning games A to C, the proportion of shifting to the high base state after the small winning V jackpot game does not change (all small winning games shift to the high base state at 100%). (I) After winning the small hit of the first special symbol V in the high base state by winning the small win of the first special symbol (after the special game), the transition to the high base state is 100%, After winning the jackpot of the first special symbol (after the special game), which is executed by winning the jackpot of the first special symbol in the high base state, the game shifts to the high base state at 100%. In addition, in any of the small winning games A to C, the proportion of shifting to the high base state after the small winning V jackpot game does not change (all small winning games shift to the high base state at 100%). In addition, after reaching the time saving limiter (after the fourth consecutive small hit V jackpot or jackpot in the high base state), regardless of the type of small winning game (type of small winning V jackpot game) and the type of jackpot game, Always transition to a low base state. (J) After winning the small hit of the second special symbol V which is executed by winning the small win of the second special symbol in the high base state (after the special game), it will shift to the high base state at 100%, After winning the second special symbol jackpot (after the special game), which is executed by winning the second special symbol jackpot in the high base state, the game shifts to the high base state at 100%. In addition, in any of the small winning games A to C, the proportion of shifting to the high base state after the small winning V jackpot game does not change (all small winning games shift to the high base state at 100%). In addition, after reaching the time saving limiter (after the fourth consecutive small hit V jackpot or jackpot in the high base state), regardless of the type of small winning game (type of small winning V jackpot game) and the type of jackpot game, Always transition to a low base state. (K) The second special symbol jackpot (special game) executed by winning the second special symbol jackpot is a 10R special game, and the first special symbol jackpot (special game) executed by winning the first special symbol jackpot is a 10R special game. Winning the special symbol jackpot (special game), the first special symbol small win V jackpot (special game) executed by winning the first special symbol small win, and winning the second special symbol small win. The small hit V jackpot (special game) of the second special symbol executed in is a 4R special game. (L) When the small winning game A and the small winning game B are executed, when the big winning hole P751 opens and a game ball enters, the game ball is guided to the first distribution member P900A and the small winning game is played. When the big prize opening P751 is opened and a game ball enters when the game C is executed, it is configured to be guided to the second distribution member P900B. More specifically, inside the big prize opening P751, a first guide path leading to the first distribution member P900A and a second guide path leading to the second distribution member P900B are provided, and the small winning game is The first taxiway is open and the second taxiway is blocked for 3 seconds after the small winning start demonstration ends, and after the small winning start demonstration of the small winning game ends. Starting from 3 seconds later, the first guideway is blocked and the second guideway is opened for 5 seconds, and small win game A and small win game B are played immediately after the small win start demonstration ends. Since the big prize opening P751 opens, the first guideway is open and the second guideway is closed, and the game ball enters the ball and enters the first guideway via the first guideway. Guided by the distributing member P900A, the small winning game C opens the big prize opening P751 3 seconds after the end of the small winning demonstration, so the first guiding path is blocked and the second guiding path is open. The game ball enters the ball in the state where the game ball is held and is guided to the second distribution member P900B via the second guide path.

FIG. 57 shows the production mode when the small winning game is executed and the big winning hole P751 is opened. In FIG. 57(a-1), the first special symbol or the second special symbol stops in a stop mode corresponding to a small win, the small win game starts, the big winning hole P751 opens, and the big winning hole P751 This is a situation where a game ball enters the ball. A very small "→" symbol indicating an arrow is displayed in the upper right corner of the screen, informing you that the current gaming situation is one in which you should hit right (during a small winning game). Then, the effect (first distribution member P900A or second distribution member P900A or second distribution member P900A or second distribution member As an effect indicating that the game balls are staying in the member P900B, the words "Challenging to break through the clone" are displayed. The performance in this situation is referred to as the "big winning opening ball entry performance".

In FIG. 57(a-2), the first special symbol or the second special symbol stops in a stop mode corresponding to the small win, the small win game starts, and the big winning hole P751 is opened, but the big winning hole This is a situation where the game ball did not enter within P751. A very small "→" symbol indicating an arrow is displayed in the upper right corner of the screen, informing you that the current gaming situation is one in which you should hit right (during a small winning game). Then, the words "Unfortunate..." are displayed to the player as an effect indicating that the game ball did not enter the grand prize opening P751. The performance in this situation is referred to as the "big prize opening no entry performance".

FIG. 57(b-1) is a situation following FIG. 57(a-1), and is a situation in which the game ball has finally entered the specific area. A very small "→" symbol indicating an arrow will be displayed at the top right of the screen, indicating that the current gaming situation is a situation where you should hit right (a situation where you are transitioning from playing a small winning game to playing a small winning V jackpot game). is being announced. Then, the character "V" is displayed as an effect indicating to the player that the game ball has entered the specific area. The performance in this situation is referred to as a "specific area entry performance."

FIG. 57(b-1) is a situation following FIG. 57(a-1), and is a situation in which the game ball has finally entered the specific area. A very small "→" symbol indicating an arrow will be displayed at the top right of the screen, and the current gaming situation will be a situation where you should hit right (during a small winning game, more precisely, from a small winning game to a small winning V jackpot game). This alerts the public that the situation is transitioning to the inside. Then, the character "V" is displayed as an effect indicating to the player that the game ball has entered the specific area. The performance in this situation is referred to as the "specific area non-entering performance".

FIG. 57(b-2) is a situation following FIG. 57(a-1), and is a situation in which the game ball did not enter the specific area in the end. A very small "→" symbol indicating an arrow is displayed in the upper right corner of the screen, informing you that the current gaming situation is one in which you should hit right (during a small winning game). Then, the words "Unfortunate..." are displayed to the player as an effect indicating that the game ball did not enter the specific area. This character is displayed in the same manner as in FIG. 57(b-2).

By configuring in this way, it is possible to perform a well-defined performance in the process from winning a small hit to acquiring the small winning V jackpot game, and in the first process until acquiring the small winning V jackpot game. By making a common effect in case of failure (in case of ball not entering) in the case of whether or not the ball enters a certain big winning hole P751 and whether or not the ball enters a specific area in the second step, the small hit V This makes it easier to visually understand that a jackpot game was not won, and also contributes to reducing the performance capacity.

In the seventh embodiment, by providing setting values in multiple stages, the jackpot probability can be set to one of multiple types. There are two types of setting values: "1" and "6", and when the setting value is "1", the jackpot probability is 1/300 as mentioned above, and when the setting value is "6", the jackpot probability is 1/300. is 1/150. Note that the small hit probability does not change even if the set value is different.

FIG. 58 shows that the above-mentioned "big prize opening no-ball entry effect" and "specific area no-ball entry effect" are provided in multiple types in addition to those shown in FIG. Rather, it also serves as a setting suggestion that suggests to the player whether the setting value is "1" or "6".

FIG. 58(a-1) shows the same "big winning opening no-ball entry effect" and "specific area no-ball entry effect" as shown in FIG. 57. When this mode (referred to as mode A) is displayed, it does not also serve as a setting suggestion.

FIG. 58(a-2) shows a "big winning opening no-ball entry performance" and a "specific area no-ball entry performance" in which the words "Unfortunate!" are displayed. When this aspect (referred to as aspect B) is displayed, it is suggested that the setting value is somewhat likely to be "6".

FIG. 58(a-3) shows a ``big prize opening no-ball entry effect'' and a ``specific area no-ball entry effect'' in which the words ``Unfortunate!!!'' are displayed. When this aspect (referred to as aspect C) is displayed, it is suggested that the setting value is quite likely to be "6".

FIG. 58(a-4) shows a "big winning opening no-ball entry performance" and a "specific area no-ball entry performance" in which the words "Unfortunate!!!!!!" are displayed. When this aspect (referred to as aspect D) is displayed, it is suggested that the set value is definitely "6".

These effects may be displayed both when the ball does not enter the big winning hole P751 and when the ball does not enter the specific area, or may be displayed only in one of the cases.

Note that when the setting value is "1", the appearance ratios of aspect A, aspect B, aspect C, and aspect D are 90/100, 8/100, 2/100, and 0/100, respectively. When the value is "1", the appearance ratios of aspect A, aspect B, aspect C, and aspect D are 82/100, 10/100, 7/100, and 1/100, respectively. This appearance rate applies to both the "big prize opening no-ball entry effect" and the "specific area no-ball entering effect," but as a modified example, the "specific area no-ball entering effect" is more When the set value is ``6'', the appearance rate of aspect B, aspect C, and aspect D may be configured to be higher than in the case of ``mouth-to-ball-not-entering effect''. In addition, as a further modification, when the number of fluctuations in the low base state reaches a predetermined number (for example, 100 times), and the set value is "6", the appearance rate of aspects C and D will increase. may be configured. In addition, as a further modification, if the setting value is "6" in small winning game C than in small winning game A or small winning game B, the appearance rate of aspect B, aspect C, and aspect D will be higher. It may be configured as follows.

In this way, by suggesting the setting value when winning a small win that triggers a jackpot game (small win V jackpot game), it is possible to draw more attention to the movement of the game ball (whether or not the ball enters the ball) during the small win game. In addition, by making it possible to suggest settings in both the "specific area no-ball entry performance" and the "big winning opening no-ball entry performance," it is possible to reliably give a setting suggestion opportunity when winning a small hit.

Figure 59 shows when the time saving limiter is reached (during the 4th consecutive small hit V jackpot or jackpot in the high base state) and after reaching the time saving limiter (after the 4th consecutive small hit V jackpot or after the jackpot in the high base state). ) shows the performance mode in the situation. After the time-saving limiter, the system always moves to the low base state, so the game allows you to continuously win the jackpot or small win related to the second special symbol in the high base state (maximum 4 times in a row), and the jackpot or small win in the low base state. The game will switch to a game that aims to move to a high base state by winning a small hit. In addition, the second special symbol has a higher winning rate for the small winning game C than the first special symbol, and therefore the small winning V jackpot game is more likely to be executed, so the second special symbol is a high base state where the main part of the game is , there is a high possibility of successive purchases (a high possibility of reaching the time saving limiter).

FIG. 59(a) shows the execution of the jackpot end demonstration when the time saving limiter is reached (during the fourth consecutive small hit V jackpot or jackpot in the high base state). A very small "→" symbol indicating an arrow is displayed at the upper right of the screen, informing that the current gaming situation is a situation in which the player should hit right (during a small hit V jackpot game or a jackpot game). In addition, the words "4 sets completed!" are displayed as an effect to notify that the time saving limiter has been reached and a shift to the low base state has been reached.

Figure 59 (b-1) shows a jackpot in a situation where one or more reservations related to the second special symbol remain when the time saving limiter is reached (during the fourth consecutive small hit V jackpot or jackpot in a high base state). This is the performance during execution of the end demo, and is the performance following FIG. 59(a). As mentioned above, the second special symbol has a higher winning rate for the small win game C than the first special symbol, and therefore the small win V jackpot game is more likely to be executed. By executing the small hit V jackpot game or the jackpot game while on hold, it can be expected to shift to the high base state again immediately after shifting to the low base state. Therefore, on the screen, after the currently running small hit V jackpot game or jackpot game ends, there is a possibility that the pending state related to the second special symbol will be exhausted and the state will shift to the high base state again immediately after the shift to the low base state. The words ``Next time, pull back challenge'' will be displayed, indicating that there will be a challenge. Figure 59 (b-2) shows that the small hit V jackpot game or the jackpot game ends (the jackpot end demo ends) and the state shifts to a low base state, and the hold on the remaining second special symbol is extinguished. This shows a situation where the second special symbol is fluctuating, and the decorative symbol and the simple symbol are being fluctuated and displayed in response to the fluctuating display of the second special symbol. In addition, in Figure 59 (b-1), the "→" symbol indicating an arrow is displayed in the upper right corner of the screen in a very small size, and the current gaming situation is a situation where you should hit right (small hit V jackpot game or jackpot). (playing in progress).

Figure 59 (b-2) shows when the time saving limiter is reached (during the fourth consecutive small hit V jackpot or jackpot in a high base state)

Figure 59 (c-1) shows a jackpot end demonstration in a situation where there is no reservation remaining regarding the second special symbol when the time saving limiter is reached (during the fourth consecutive small hit V jackpot or jackpot in a high base state). This is the performance that is being executed, and is the performance that continues from FIG. 59(a). Since there is no reservation remaining regarding the second special symbol, after the currently running small hit V jackpot game or jackpot game ends, the reservation pertaining to the second special symbol will be extinguished and it will be restarted immediately after the transition to the low base state. There is no transition to a high base state. Therefore, the effect as shown in FIG. 59(b-1) is not displayed, and a black background is displayed. Figure 59 (c-2) shows a situation where the small hit V jackpot game or the jackpot game has ended (the jackpot end demonstration has ended), the state has shifted to a low base state, and the fluctuation has stopped ( Decorative patterns and simple patterns are stopped and displayed at the combination of "357"). In addition, since there is no hold related to the second special symbol immediately after transitioning to the low base state, in order to indicate that the base state has changed and to prompt the hold related to the first special symbol to occur, the "Left hit" ``Ne'' is displayed.

With this configuration, the performance of the jackpot end demonstration can be varied depending on whether or not the second special symbol is on hold, so that a performance that does not feel strange to the player and is appropriate according to the situation can be executed. can do.

The time for the jackpot end demo is 20 seconds when the time saving limiter is reached (during the 4th consecutive small hit V jackpot or jackpot in the high base state), but before the time saving limiter is reached (1 consecutive The duration of the jackpot end demonstration (from 3rd small hit V during jackpot or during jackpot) is 5 seconds. By doing this, it is possible to smoothly advance the continuous game state before the time saving limiter is reached, and when the time saving limiter is reached, it is possible to secure enough time to display "Next time, pull back challenge".

As a modified example, when the time saving limiter is reached (during the fourth consecutive small hit V jackpot or jackpot in the high base state), one or more reservations related to the second special symbol remain, and the lottery result of the reservation is determined to be a jackpot. If this is the case, the text "Jackpot?" may be displayed faintly in the background of the text "Next time, pullback challenge" in FIG. 58(b-1). In addition, as a further modified example, if a small hit V jackpot game or a jackpot game is never executed in a high base state that continues 99 times, if the reservation related to the second special symbol remains in the 99th rotation, then ( b-1) and FIG. 59(b-2), and if there is no reservation remaining regarding the second special symbol at the 99th rotation, the effects shown in FIG. 59(c-1) and FIG. 59(c-2) are executed. It may be configured to perform a performance.

Here, in the seventh embodiment, there are three types of small winning games: small winning game A, small winning game B, and small winning game C. While the special symbols are changing (before stopping), for example, before a super reach effect is executed or a combination of decorative symbols indicating a small win (such as "357") is displayed, any type of small win It is configured to be able to execute a special performance that suggests to the player whether a game is scheduled to be played. However, the player can set whether or not to execute this special effect (for example, when the player is in a state where the special effect can be executed by pressing and holding the upper button of the cross key for 2 seconds or more while the variation is in progress or stopped) , and can be set to a state where special effects can be executed by pressing and holding the lower button of the cross key for 2 seconds or more). As a modified example, the player can set the execution probability of the special effect rather than whether or not the special effect will be executed (for example, when the upper button of the cross key is pressed once while changing or stopping the change, the special effect will be executed. It may be configured such that the execution probability is increased by 10% and the execution probability of the special effect is decreased by 10% each time the lower button of the cross key is pressed.

More specifically, while the execution schedule of the small winning game A is changing, a crescent moon mark is displayed on the screen while the first special symbol or the second special symbol is changing (before stopping). Further, while the execution schedule of the small winning game B is changing, a half-moon mark is displayed on the screen while the first special symbol or the second special symbol is changing (before stopping). Further, while the execution schedule of the small winning game C is changing, a full moon mark is displayed on the screen while the first special symbol or the second special symbol is changing (before stopping). Further, if a small winning game C is scheduled to be executed, and the ball enters a specific area during the execution of the small winning game C, and a small winning V jackpot game is executed, and after the execution of the small winning V jackpot game is completed, the high base state is established. During the fluctuation that can be shifted to , a full moon mark with a rabbit silhouette is displayed on the screen while the first special symbol or the second special symbol is fluctuating (before stopping). Note that this special effect is preferably configured to be executable only in the low base state, but may be configured to be executable also in the high base state.

By configuring this way, when winning a small hit, it is possible to check whether a small winning game is scheduled to be executed in which it is easy for the ball to enter the big winning hole P751, and whether the ball will shift to a high base state if the ball enters a specific area. By allowing the player to know in advance whether or not the game will be announced, and by allowing the player to select whether or not to execute such advance notification, the gameplay will be expanded more than ever before.

FIG. 60 shows the time series of effects from the fluctuating display of the first special symbol at the time of winning a small hit, through the stop display, to the execution of the small winning game in the low base state and high base state. be.

FIG. 60(a-1) shows a situation where the first special symbol is changing in the low base state, and the decorative symbols and simple symbols are changing on the screen in response to the fluctuation of the first special symbol. After that, in FIG. 60(a-2), the first special symbol is stopped and displayed as a small winning symbol, and the corresponding decorative symbol combination and simple symbol combination (for example, "357") are displayed on the screen. The display is stopped. After that, in FIG. 60(a-3), the words "Aim at the attacker!" are displayed to urge the player to shoot the game ball toward the big winning hole P751. In addition, a very small "→" symbol indicating an arrow is displayed at the upper right of the screen to notify that the current gaming situation is one in which the player should hit right (during a small winning game). After that, in FIG. 60 (a-4) after the game ball enters the big winning hole P751, similarly to FIG. 57 (a-1), the first distribution member P900A and the A production that incites whether or not the ball will finally enter a specific area via the second distribution member P900B (a production that indicates that the game ball is staying in the first distribution member P900A or the second distribution member P900B) The message ``Challenging to break through Cloon'' is displayed. In addition, a very small "→" symbol indicating an arrow is displayed at the upper right of the screen to notify that the current gaming situation is one in which the player should hit right (during a small winning game).

Figure 60 (b-1) shows a situation where the first special symbol is changing in the high base state, and the simple symbol is changing on the screen in response to the change in the first special symbol (the decorative symbol is Do not show). This is because in the high base state, it is easy to enter the second starting winning hole P721 and it is easy to win the small hit related to the second special symbol, so it is easy to win the small hit or jackpot with the decorative symbol. This is because there is little need to stimulate the game in a dramatic manner, and giving priority to smooth game progression is more suitable for a consecutive game situation in which special games are executed continuously. In addition, a very small "→" symbol indicating an arrow is displayed at the upper right of the screen to notify that the current gaming situation is a situation in which players should play right (in a high base state). After that, in FIG. 60(b-2), the first special symbol is stopped and displayed as a small winning symbol, and the corresponding combination of simple symbols (for example, "357") is stopped and displayed on the screen. It's a situation. In addition, a very small "→" symbol indicating an arrow is displayed at the upper right of the screen to notify that the current gaming situation is a situation in which players should play right (in a high base state). After that, in FIG. 60 (b-3), the text "Aim at the attacker!" is not displayed, and a very small "→" symbol indicating an arrow is displayed at the top right of the screen, indicating the current gaming situation. It notifies you that you are in a situation where you should hit right (during a small winning game and in a high base state). This is because if the player is in a high base state, it is assumed that the player is already hitting the right hand even before winning the small hit, so there is no need to display the message "Aim at the attacker!" This is because giving priority to smooth game progress is more suitable for a consecutive game state in which special games are executed continuously. After that, in FIG. 60 (b-4) after the game ball enters the big winning hole P751, the words "Challenging to break through the Cloon" are not shown, but the arrow "→" is shown in the upper right corner of the screen. The symbol is displayed in a very small size to notify that the current gaming situation is a situation where you should hit right (in a small winning game and in a high base state). This is because in a high base state, the main character of the game is the second special symbol, so it is rare that a small winning game related to the first special symbol is executed in a high base state, so the second special symbol In order to prevent the game from being misinterpreted as a small winning game, the words ``Challenging to break through the Cloon'' are not used to create any excitement.

Figure 61 (a-1) shows a situation where the second special symbol is changing in the low base state, and the simple symbol is changing on the screen in response to the change in the second special symbol (the decorative symbol is Do not show). This is because it is difficult to enter the second starting winning hole P721 in the low base state and the main character of the game is the first special symbol, so it is rare for the second special symbol to change in the low base state. Since this is an event, in order to prevent it from being mistaken as a fluctuating display of the first special symbol, the decorative symbols are not designed to stimulate the winning of a small hit or a jackpot. However, as mentioned above, if the remaining hold on the second special symbol is extinguished after reaching the time saving limiter (during or after the fourth consecutive small hit V jackpot in the high base state), Decorative designs are also displayed (varied). After that, in FIG. 61(a-2), the second special symbol is stopped and displayed as a small winning symbol, and the corresponding combination of simple symbols (for example, "357") is stopped and displayed on the screen. It's a situation. After that, in FIG. 61(a-3), the words "Aim at the attacker!" are displayed to urge the player to shoot the game ball toward the big winning hole P751. In addition, a very small "→" symbol indicating an arrow is displayed at the upper right of the screen, informing that the current gaming situation is one in which the player should hit right (during a small winning game). After that, in FIG. 61 (a-4) after the game ball enters the big winning hole P751, the first distribution member P900A and the A production that incites whether or not the ball will finally enter a specific area via the second distribution member P900B (a production that indicates that the game ball is staying in the first distribution member P900A or the second distribution member P900B) The message ``Challenging to break through Cloon'' is displayed. In addition, a very small "→" symbol indicating an arrow is displayed at the upper right of the screen, informing that the current gaming situation is one in which the player should hit right (during a small winning game).

Figure 61 (b-1) shows a situation where the second special symbol is changing in the high base state, and the simple symbol is changing on the screen in response to the change in the second special symbol (the decorative symbol is Do not show). This is because in the high base state, it is easy to enter the second starting winning hole P721 and it is easy to win the small hit related to the second special symbol, so it is easy to win the small hit or jackpot with the decorative symbol. This is because there is little need to stimulate the game in a dramatic manner, and giving priority to smooth game progression is more suitable for a consecutive game situation in which special games are executed continuously. In addition, a very small "→" symbol indicating an arrow is displayed at the upper right of the screen to notify that the current gaming situation is a situation in which players should play right (in a high base state). After that, in FIG. 61(b-2), the second special symbol is stopped and displayed as a small winning symbol, and the corresponding combination of simple symbols (for example, "357") is stopped and displayed on the screen. It's a situation. In addition, a very small "→" symbol indicating an arrow is displayed at the upper right of the screen to notify that the current gaming situation is a situation in which players should play right (in a high base state). After that, in FIG. 61(b-3), the words "Aim at the attacker!" are displayed to urge the player to shoot the game ball toward the big winning hole P751. As a result, in a small winning game related to the second special symbol that is the main part of the game in a high base state, by encouraging the ball to enter the big winning hole P751 without fail, it is possible to prevent the consecutive winning state from being prolonged. It is prevented. After that, in FIG. 61 (b-4) after the game ball enters the big winning hole P751, the words "Challenging to break through the Cloon" are not shown, but the arrow "→" is shown in the upper right corner of the screen. The symbol is displayed in a very small size to notify that the current gaming situation is a situation where you should hit right (in a small winning game and in a high base state). This is because in a high base state, prioritizing smooth game progress is more suitable for a continuous game state in which special games are executed continuously (in particular, the second special symbol is a small winning game C Since the ball is likely to be executed easily, there is a high possibility that the ball will land in a specific area, and smoother game progress can be expected). As a modification, in order to realize even smoother game progress, the text "Aim at the attacker!" may not be displayed in the situation shown in FIG. 61(b-3). Also, regardless of the low base state or high base state, and regardless of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, if small winning game C is executed, the words "Aim for the attacker!" will always be displayed. When the small winning game A or the small winning game B is executed, the small winning game A or the small winning game is executed when the winning/failure lottery result of the first special symbol becomes a small winning in the low base state. In the case of game B, and in the case of small winning game A or small winning game B, which is executed when the winning/failure lottery result of the second special symbol becomes a small winning in the high base state, "Aim for the attacker!" On the other hand, when the winning lottery result of the first special symbol becomes a small hit in the high base state and the small winning game A or small winning game B is executed, and when the low base In the case of a small winning game A or a small winning game B that is executed when the winning/failure lottery result of the second special symbol becomes a small winning in the state, the text "Aim for the attacker!" is not displayed. It's okay.

[Eighth Example]
As the pachinko gaming machine P of the present embodiment to the seventh embodiment, we have described the pachinko gaming machine P having various playability. An eighth embodiment is an example in which the content has been further improved.Hereinafter, only the underlying technology and the differences from this embodiment will be described in detail, and the explanation of common points will be omitted or simplified. It should be noted that, among the elements constituting the pachinko game machine P of the eighth embodiment, the same reference numerals are given to the elements that are the same as or correspond to the elements explained in the underlying technology or the present embodiment.

(Board configuration)
First, the configuration of the board configuration (configuration of the gaming area) of the pachinko gaming machine P of the eighth embodiment will be explained.

The pachinko game machine P of the eighth embodiment can be implemented with almost the same board configuration as the pachinko game machine shown in FIG. 1. The pachinko game machine P of the eighth embodiment is configured to include a specific area P760 inside the big prize opening (attacker) P751 in order to adopt the gaming characteristics (specs) described later. Note that a different board configuration may be adopted as appropriate as long as the change does not change the gameplay (or is a minor change) as disclosed below.

(spec)
Next, the gaming performance (specs) of the pachinko gaming machine P of the eighth embodiment will be explained. In addition, in this explanation, regarding the "settings" (setting values) that affect the ball dispensing performance, only the specifications related to "Setting 1" will be explained, but various numerical values related to other setting values will be set as appropriate. It is.

As shown in FIG. 62, the pachinko gaming machine P of the eighth embodiment has a jackpot probability of 1/200 (common to the first special symbol and the second special symbol) and a small probability of 20/200 (common to the second special symbol). (design only) is set. In addition, the number of prize balls is 4 balls for the first starting prize opening (first starting opening) P711, 3 balls for the second starting winning opening (second starting opening) P721, 3 balls for the left general winning opening P731L, and 3 balls for the right general winning opening The winning hole P731R is set to 2 balls, and the big winning hole (attacker) P751 is set to 15 balls.

In addition, the pachinko gaming machine P of the eighth embodiment employs ball entry order processing control in which balls entered first are given priority, and both the first special symbol and the second special symbol are reserved. If it exists, the reservation that occurred first is given priority and displayed in a variable manner (regardless of whether the reservation is related to the first special symbol or the second special symbol, the reservation is consumed in the order in which the reservation occurs). In addition, in the pachinko gaming machine P of the eighth embodiment, only the second special symbol is configured to have a "small win" as a special symbol lottery result, but the first special symbol may be configured to have a "small win". is also possible. In addition, if the game performance of the pachinko gaming machine P of the eighth embodiment is not lost, the first special symbol priority digestion control may be applied as a modification, instead of the ball entry order digestion control, or the first special symbol priority digestion control may be applied. 2 Special symbol priority digestion control may be applied. In addition, in the external information output process, when outputting information (referred to as a high base signal) corresponding to the operating state (base state) of the electric chew support function as a signal related to the gaming state, when the high base state ends and the low base signal Even if the state is shifted to, if there is a hold related to the second special symbol, the output of the high base signal may be continued until all the holds related to the second special symbol are extinguished. In addition, in such a configuration, when transitioning from the high base state to the low base state, there are two reservations related to the first special symbol and four reservations related to the second special symbol. , the order of digestion is "Reservation related to the second special symbol → Reservation related to the second special symbol → Reservation related to the first special symbol → Reservation related to the first special symbol → Reservation related to the second special symbol → Second special symbol If the hold related to the second special symbol is ``reserved'', (1) the output of the high base signal may be continued until all of these are extinguished, or (2) the output of the high base signal may be temporarily changed to the first special symbol after the reservation related to the second special symbol is extinguished. In the case of extinguishing such a hold, even if the hold relating to the second special symbol still remains, the output of the high base signal may be interrupted after the hold relating to the second special symbol is extinguished.

The pachinko gaming machine P of the eighth embodiment adopts the gameplay (spec) called "Small hit V" described as the underlying technology, and in addition to the case of "Jackpot" in the special symbol lottery, A "small win" occurs in the special symbol lottery, and when a game ball passes through a specific area P760 inside the big prize opening P751 (also referred to as an entering ball) during a small win game that is subsequently executed, the accessory continuous operation device is activated and a jackpot game is executed. In the eighth embodiment, when a small winning game develops into a jackpot game, a series of special game states from the start of the small winning game to the end of the jackpot game are referred to as "small winning V" or "small winning development jackpot". ” etc.

The types of jackpots (including small hit V) in the special gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine P of the eighth embodiment are 3R jackpot (first special symbol jackpot, second special symbol jackpot V) and 10R jackpot (second special symbol jackpot). A special symbol jackpot and a second special symbol small win V) are provided. In addition, regarding a specific game that is an advantageous normal game state, the pachinko gaming machine P of the eighth embodiment does not have a probability variation function, and has an electric chew support function (electronic support) after each jackpot (including small hit V). A specific game (high base state) is executed by activating the function.

In the pachinko gaming machine P of the eighth embodiment, as shown in FIG. 62, when a small hit is won in the lottery for the second special symbol, the small winning symbols A to E are selected as the symbol lottery for the second special symbol. You will be elected to one of them. In other words, when a small hit is won in the winning/failure lottery for the second special symbol, the stopping mode of the second special symbol is the stopping mode corresponding to the small winning symbol A (for example, 8 LEDs on the second special symbol display device P52 Among them, the stop mode in which the 1st, 2nd, 7th, and 8th are lit and the others are off), the stop mode corresponding to the small winning symbol B (for example, among the 8 LEDs in the second special symbol display device P52) A stop mode in which the 2nd, 3rd, 6th, 7th, and 8th symbols are lit and the others are off), a stop mode corresponding to the small winning symbol C (for example, among the 8 LEDs in the second special symbol display device P52) A stop mode in which the 3rd, 5th, and 7th symbols are lit and the others are off), a stop mode corresponding to the small winning symbol D (for example, 1, 2, and 2 out of 8 LEDs in the second special symbol display device P52), A stop mode in which the 3rd, 4th, 5th, 6th, and 7th symbols are lit and the others are off), a stop mode corresponding to the small winning symbol E (for example, among the 8 LEDs in the second special symbol display device P52) A stop mode in which the first light is on and the others are off) will be stopped. When a small hit is won, the small winning symbols A to E are allocated to 10%, 30%, 30%, 15%, and 15%.

Here, the small winning games that are executed when the small winning symbols A to D stop (referred to as small winning games A to D) are the "small winning games that are easy to win V" as described above. A small winning game (referred to as a small winning game E) that is executed when the small winning symbol E stops is a "small winning game in which it is difficult to win a V prize" as described above. In addition, the small winning V jackpot game (referred to as small winning V jackpot game A) when the ball enters a specific area in small winning game A is a 3R jackpot, and when the ball enters a specific area in small winning game B The small hit V jackpot game (referred to as the small hit V jackpot game B) is 10R, and the small hit V jackpot game (referred to as the small hit V jackpot game C) when the ball enters a specific area in the small win game C. is 3R, and the small win V jackpot game (referred to as small win V jackpot game D) when the ball enters the specific area in the small win game D is 10R. Although the small winning game E is a small winning game in which it is difficult to win a V prize, if the ball enters a specific area (the jackpot in this case is referred to as the small winning V jackpot game E), it becomes a 3R jackpot. Jackpot games (3R jackpot which is jackpot game A corresponding to jackpot pattern A in the first special pattern, 10R jackpot which is jackpot game B corresponding to jackpot pattern B in the second special pattern) and small win V jackpot games A to D After the end of the jackpot game that is, the player shifts to the high base state, but after the end of the jackpot game that is the small win V jackpot game E, it may be configured so that the player does not shift to the high base state but shifts to the low base state. , jackpot games (3R jackpot which is a jackpot game corresponding to jackpot symbol A in the first special symbol, 10R jackpot which is a jackpot game corresponding to jackpot symbol B in the second special symbol) and small win V jackpot games A to E. It may be configured such that the state always shifts to the high base state after the end of a certain jackpot game.

FIG. 63 shows a game flow in the pachinko gaming machine P of the eighth embodiment. Here, the "normal mode" is a low base state, and the game progresses mainly using the first special symbol. "ST Mode", "Battle Mode", "Invincible Battle Mode", and "Super Invincible Battle Mode" are in a high base state (however, they will occur pending during a high base state and will change to a low base state immediately after the high base state ends) (including symbol variations corresponding to reservations related to the second special symbol that is consumed), and the game progresses with the second special symbol as the main character. Although the details will be described later, in the pachinko gaming machine P of the eighth embodiment, the conditions for transitioning from the high base state to the low base state are as follows: The second special symbol changes 7 times or 255 times. fluctuation or the first special symbol fluctuates 10 times) and winning a specified number of small winnings (for example, small winning game A is executed once or 255 times, or small winning game B is executed once) or 255 times, or small win game C is played once, or small win game D is played once, or small win game E is played 1 time, 7 times, or 255 times). It has become.

By hitting the jackpot with the first special symbol in the normal mode (FIG. 63(a)), the game shifts to the ST mode after the jackpot game A ends (FIG. 63(b)). The termination condition a, which is the termination condition of the high base state in the ST mode, is the following (a1) to (a9). Note that the high base state does not end when all of (a1) to (a9) are satisfied, but when any one of (a1) to (a9) is satisfied. (a1) The number of fluctuations of the second special symbol (the number of consecutive losing fluctuations) is 7 times (a2) The number of executions of the small winning game A (the number of winnings of the small winning symbol A) is 1 time (a3) The small winning game B The number of executions (number of wins of small winning symbol A) is 1 time (a4) The number of executions of small winning game C (number of winnings of small winning symbol A) is 1 time (a5) The number of executions of small winning game D (number of winnings of small winning symbol A) Number of winnings of symbol A) is 1 time (a6) Number of executions of small winning game E (number of winnings of small winning symbol A) is 7 times, maintaining a high base state for the 1st to 6th times (a7) 1st special The number of symbol fluctuations (the number of consecutive losing fluctuations) is 10 times (a8) A jackpot game (either jackpot game A or B) is executed, however, after the jackpot game or small hit V jackpot game ends, the high base state is reached. Transition again to (a9) Small hit V jackpot game (any of small hit V jackpot games A to E) is executed, however, after the jackpot game or small hit V jackpot game ends, it will shift to the high base state again.

In addition, when (a1) is satisfied, the end timing of the high base state is the timing when the seventh symbol variation of the second special symbol ends (symbol stop timing, timing immediately before the start of the symbol fixed time), When (a2) is satisfied, the timing at which the small winning symbol A stops is the end of the symbol fluctuation (symbol stop timing, the timing immediately before the start of the symbol fixed time), and when (a3) is satisfied, the small winning symbol This is the timing at which the symbol variation in which the winning symbol B stops ends (symbol stop timing, the timing immediately before the start of the symbol fixed time), and if (a4) is satisfied, the symbol variation in which the small winning symbol C stops ends. Timing (symbol stop timing, timing immediately before the start of the symbol fixing time), and when (a5) is satisfied, the timing at which the symbol variation at which the small hit symbol D stops (symbol stop timing, immediately before the start of the symbol fixing time) When (a6) is satisfied, the timing is the timing at which the symbol variation at which the seventh small hit symbol E stops (symbol stop timing, the timing immediately before the start of the symbol fixing time), and (a7) ), the timing is the end of the 10th symbol change of the first special symbol (symbol stop timing, the timing immediately before the start of the symbol fixing time), and when (a8) is satisfied, the jackpot symbol This is the timing at which symbol variation at which A or B stops ends (symbol stop timing, timing immediately before the start of symbol fixing time). Here, in the case that (a9) is satisfied, the high base state is ended at the timing when the symbol fluctuation at which the small hit symbols A to D stop has already ended (the symbol stop timing, the timing immediately before the symbol fixing time starts). I will omit it because it is From the above, in ST mode, in any of the small winning games A to D, the high base state has ended at the start of the small winning game, so it is possible to enter the specific area (big winning hole P751 is open). In addition, the base state in the situation in which the opening/closing member P761 (valve member) is switched to the downstream path guiding toward the specific area is the low base state. In addition, in the small winning game E, the situation in which the ball can enter the specific area (big prize opening P751 is open and the opening/closing member P761 (valve member) guides the ball to the specific area side until the specified number of times reaches 7 times) The base state is a high base state in the situation in which the ball has switched to the downstream path (when the ball has switched to the downstream path), and after reaching the specified number of times of 7, the ball can enter the specific area (when the big prize opening P751 is open and the opening/closing member P761 ( The base state in the situation in which the valve member (valve member) switches to the downstream path that guides to the specific area side is a low base state, but the small winning game E is a "small winning game in which it is difficult to win a V prize", and in terms of design. Since it is almost impossible for a ball to enter a specific area during execution of the small winning game E, there is no need to consider the base state in the small winning game E.

The ST mode is basically a high base state that continues until (a1) to (a9) are satisfied, but it occurs pending during this high base state and immediately after the high base state ends, it changes to a low base state. It should be noted that the ST mode also applies to the period of symbol variation corresponding to the reservation of the second special symbol that is consumed by the ST mode. Specifically, if (a1) is satisfied and there are 4 reservations related to the second special symbol, the ST mode will not be activated until all 4 reservations are exhausted even if the state shifts to the low base state. becomes. As will be described later, this is because the mode to which the jackpot game related to the second special symbol won in the low base state or the small win V jackpot game, which is executed after winning, shifts to the high base state corresponding to the ending condition a. Since it is common to the mode that shifts to the jackpot game related to the second special symbol won and executed in the small win V jackpot game, the hold occurs during the high base state corresponding to ending condition a and the high base This is because it is preferable to use the same production mode as in the high base state before the end even during symbol variation corresponding to the hold on the second special symbol that is consumed in the low base state immediately after the end of the state. Therefore, if there is a hold related to the second special symbol that occurs during the high base state corresponding to end condition a and is extinguished in the low base state immediately after the high base state ends, the hold will be matched. After all the symbol variations are executed as miss variations, the mode shifts to the normal mode (FIG. 63(d)). In addition, the symbol fluctuation corresponding to the reservation related to the second special symbol that occurs during the high base state corresponding to end condition a and is consumed in the low base state immediately after the high base state ends is as described above. It may be performed as a summary change.

By hitting the jackpot (including the small hit V jackpot) with the first special symbol or the second special symbol in the ST mode (Fig. 63(c)), the game shifts to the battle mode after the jackpot game (including the small hit V jackpot game) ends. (FIG. 63(e)), or shift to super invincible battle mode (FIG. 63(g)).

Specifically, when any of the small hit V jackpot games A, B, C, and E is executed in the ST mode, a transition is made to the battle mode, and the jackpot game A or the jackpot game B is executed in the ST mode, or , When the small hit V jackpot game D is executed, the game shifts to the super invincible battle mode.

Termination condition b, which is the termination condition of the high base state in battle mode, is the following (b1) to (b9). Note that the high base state does not end when all of (b1) to (b9) are satisfied, but the high base state ends when any one of (b1) to (b9) is satisfied. (b1) The number of fluctuations of the second special symbol (the number of consecutive losing fluctuations) is 255 (b2) The number of executions of the small winning game A (the number of winnings of the small winning pattern A) is 1 (b3) The small winning game B The number of executions (number of wins of small winning symbol A) is 1 (b4) The number of executions of small winning game C (number of winnings of small winning symbol A) is 1 (b5) The number of executions of small winning game D (number of winnings of small winning symbol A) The number of winnings of symbol A) is 1 time (b6) The number of executions of small winning game E (number of winnings of small winning symbol A) is 1 time (b7) The number of fluctuations of the first special symbol (number of consecutive losing fluctuations) is 10 times (b8) A jackpot game (either jackpot game A or B) is executed, however, after the jackpot game or small hit V jackpot game is finished, the high base state re-enters (b9) Small win V jackpot game (small win Any of the hit V jackpot games A to E) will be executed, however, after the jackpot game or the small win V jackpot game ends, the game will switch to the high base state again.

In addition, when (b1) is satisfied, the end timing of the high base state is the timing at which the 255th symbol variation of the second special symbol ends (symbol stop timing, timing immediately before the start of the symbol fixed time), When (b2) is satisfied, the timing at which the small hit symbol A stops is the end of the symbol fluctuation (symbol stop timing, the timing immediately before the start of the symbol fixing time), and when (b3) is satisfied, the small This is the timing when the symbol variation in which the winning symbol B stops ends (symbol stop timing, the timing immediately before the start of the symbol fixed time), and if (b4) is satisfied, the symbol variation in which the small winning symbol C stops ends. timing (symbol stop timing, timing immediately before the start of the symbol fixing time), and when (b5) is satisfied, the timing at which the symbol variation at which the small winning symbol D stops (symbol stop timing, immediately before the start of the symbol fixing time) When (b6) is satisfied, it is the timing at which the symbol variation at which the small hit symbol E stops (symbol stop timing, the timing immediately before the start of the symbol fixing time), and (b7) is satisfied. In this case, the timing is the end of the 10th symbol variation of the first special symbol (symbol stop timing, timing immediately before the start of symbol fixing time), and if (b8) is satisfied, the jackpot symbol A or B This is the timing at which the symbol fluctuation ends (symbol stop timing, timing immediately before the start of the symbol fixing time). Here, in the case that (b9) is satisfied, the high base state is ended at the timing when the symbol fluctuation at which the small hit symbols A to E have already stopped (symbol stop timing, timing immediately before the start of the symbol fixing time). I will omit it because it is From the above, in the battle mode, in any of the small winning games A to E, the high base state has ended at the start of the small winning game, so it is possible to enter the specific area (big winning hole P751 is open) In addition, the base state in the situation in which the opening/closing member P761 (valve member) is switched to the downstream path guiding toward the specific area is the low base state.

Battle mode is basically a high base state that continues until (b1) to (b9) are satisfied, but it occurs pending during this high base state, and immediately after the high base state ends, it changes to a low base state. It should be noted that the ST mode also applies to the period of symbol variation corresponding to the reservation of the second special symbol that is consumed by the ST mode. Specifically, when (b1) is satisfied, if there are 4 reservations related to the second special symbol (in addition, the small win is won first, or the small win V jackpot game is executed first) If (b6) is satisfied and there are 4 reservations related to the second special symbol, the low base will be used until all 4 reservations are exhausted. Even if it changes to the state, it will be in battle mode. As will be described later, this is because the mode that shifts to the jackpot game or small win V jackpot game related to the second special symbol that is won and executed in the low base state is in the high base state corresponding to the ending condition b. Since it is common to the mode that shifts to the jackpot game related to the second special symbol won and executed in the small win V jackpot game, the hold occurs during the high base state corresponding to ending condition b and the high base This is because it is preferable to use the same production mode as in the high base state before the end even during symbol variation corresponding to the hold on the second special symbol that is consumed in the low base state immediately after the end of the state. Therefore, if there is a hold related to the second special symbol that occurs during the high base state corresponding to end condition b and is extinguished in the low base state immediately after the high base state ends, that hold will be supported. After all the symbol fluctuations are executed as losing fluctuations, the mode shifts to the normal mode (FIG. 63(i)). In addition, the symbol fluctuation corresponding to the second special symbol that occurs during the high base state corresponding to end condition b and is consumed in the low base state immediately after the end of the high base state is as described above. It may be performed as a summary change.

Furthermore, the termination condition c, which is the termination condition of the high base state in the super invincible battle mode, is the following (c1) to (c9). Note that the high base state does not end when all of (c1) to (c9) are satisfied, but the high base state ends when any one of (c1) to (c9) is satisfied. (c1) The number of times the second special symbol fluctuates (the number of consecutive losing fluctuations) is 255 (c2) The number of times the small winning game A is executed (the number of winnings of the small winning symbol A) is 255, for the 1st to 254th times maintains a high base state (c3) The number of executions of small winning game B (number of winnings of small winning symbol A) is 255, and maintains a high base state for the 1st to 254th times (c4) Execution of small winning game C The number of times (number of wins of small winning symbol A) is 1 (c5) The number of executions of small winning game D (number of winnings of small winning symbol A) is 1 (c6) The number of executions of small winning game E (number of winnings of small winning symbol A) The number of winnings) is 255 times, and the high base state is maintained for the 1st to 254th times (c7) The number of fluctuations of the first special symbol (number of consecutive winning fluctuations) is 10 times (c8) Jackpot game (Jackpot game A , B) is executed, however, after the end of the jackpot game or small win V jackpot game, the game returns to the high base state (c9) Small win V jackpot game (any of small win V jackpot games A to E) is executed, however, after the end of the jackpot game or small win V jackpot game, it will switch to the high base state again.

In addition, when (c1) is satisfied, the end timing of the high base state is the timing at which the 255th symbol variation of the second special symbol ends (symbol stop timing, timing immediately before the start of the symbol fixed time), When (c2) is satisfied, the timing is the end of the symbol fluctuation at which the 255th small hit symbol A stops (symbol stop timing, the timing immediately before the start of the symbol fixed time), and when (c3) is satisfied, is the timing at which the symbol variation at which the 255th small hit symbol B stops (symbol stop timing, the timing immediately before the start of the symbol fixed time), and when (c4) is satisfied, the small win symbol C stops. This is the timing at which the symbol fluctuation ends (symbol stop timing, the timing immediately before the start of the symbol fixing time), and when (c5) is satisfied, the timing at which the symbol fluctuation at which the small winning symbol D stops (symbol stop timing) , the timing immediately before the start of the symbol fixing time), and when (c6) is satisfied, the timing at which the symbol variation at which the 255th small hit symbol E stops (symbol stop timing, the timing immediately before the start of the symbol fixing time) ), and when (c7) is satisfied, the timing is the end of the 10th symbol variation of the first special symbol (symbol stop timing, timing immediately before the start of the symbol fixed time), and (c8) is satisfied. In this case, the timing is the timing at which the symbol variation at which the jackpot symbol A or B stops (the symbol stop timing, the timing immediately before the symbol fixing time starts). In the case where (c9) is satisfied, from the above, in the super invincible battle mode, in both small winning games C and D, the high base state has ended at the start of the small winning game, so it is possible to move to a specific area. The base state in a situation where the ball can enter (a situation where the big winning hole P751 is open and the opening/closing member P761 (valve member) is switched to the downstream path guiding to the specific area side) is a low base state. On the other hand, in the small winning games A, B, and E, the situation in which the ball can enter the specific area (big winning opening P751 is open and the opening/closing member P761 (valve member) is The base state is a high base state (the situation in which the ball has switched to the downstream path that guides it to the area), and after reaching the specified number of times of 255, the ball can enter the specific area (the big prize opening P751 is open and The base state in the situation in which the opening/closing member P761 (valve member) has switched to the downstream path that guides to the specific area side is a low base state (the small winning game E is a "small winning game in which it is difficult to win a V prize", In terms of design, it is almost impossible for a ball to enter a specific area during execution of the small winning game E, so there is no need to consider the base state in the small winning game E).

Super invincible battle mode is basically a high base state that continues until (c1) to (c9) are satisfied, but it occurs pending during this high base state, and immediately after the high base state ends, the low base state continues. It should be noted that the period of symbol variation corresponding to the suspension of the second special symbol that is consumed in the state corresponds to the battle mode. Specifically, when (c1) is satisfied, if there are 4 reservations related to the second special symbol (in addition, the small win is won first, or the small win V jackpot game is executed first) ), or if (c4) or (c5) are satisfied and the game ball does not enter the specific area, there are four reservations related to the second special symbol In this case, it is preferable to shift to a low base state and enter battle mode until all four reservations are exhausted. In addition, in FIG. 63, it is possible to shift to the normal mode by proceeding with the game normally (by ensuring that the player does not lose the opportunity to hit the ball into a specific area by continuing to hit the ball to the right). Since it cannot happen, the transition (route) from super invincible battle mode to normal mode is omitted.

When any of the small hit V jackpot games A, B, C, and E is executed in the battle mode (FIG. 63(f)), the transition to the battle mode occurs again (FIG. 63(e)), and the jackpot game A is executed in the battle mode. Alternatively, when the jackpot game B is executed or the small win V jackpot game D is executed (FIG. 63(f)), the game shifts to the super invincible battle mode (FIG. 63(g)). In addition, when any of the small hit V jackpot games A, B, C, and E is executed in the battle mode (Fig. 63 (f)), the transition to the battle mode again (Fig. 63 (e)) occurs, and the jackpot game in the battle mode is executed. When game A or jackpot game B is executed, or small win V jackpot game D is executed (FIG. 63(f)), the game shifts to the super invincible battle mode (FIG. 63(g)). In addition, in the super invincible battle mode, when jackpot game A or jackpot game B is executed, or when any of small hit V jackpot games A, B, D, and E is executed (FIG. 63 (h)), The game shifts to the invincible battle mode again (FIG. 63(g)), and when the small hit V jackpot game C is executed (FIG. 63(h)), the game shifts to the battle mode (FIG. 63(e)).

Furthermore, the pachinko game machine P of the eighth embodiment is equipped with a "relief function". Specifically, after the end of the special game (after the small hit V jackpot or after the jackpot game), the "relief function" occurs when the fluctuation stops at the 600th rotation (when the symbol fixation time elapses) (as a modification, the special The "relief function" may occur after 600 revolutions have passed after the end of the high base state after the end of the game), thereby transitioning from the normal mode to the invincible battle mode (FIG. 63(j)).

End conditions d, which are the end conditions for the high base state in the invincible battle mode, are (d1) to (d9) below. Note that the high base state does not end when all of (d1) to (d9) are satisfied, but when any one of (d1) to (d9) is satisfied. (d1) The number of fluctuations of the second special symbol (the number of consecutive losing fluctuations) is 255 (d2) The number of executions of the small winning game A (the number of winnings of the small winning symbol A) is 1 (d3) The small winning game B The number of executions (number of wins of small winning symbol A) is 1 (d4) The number of executions of small winning game C (number of winnings of small winning symbol A) is 1 (d5) The number of executions of small winning game D (number of winnings of small winning symbol A) Number of winnings of symbol A) is 1 (d6) Number of executions of small winning game E (number of winnings of small winning symbol A) is 255, maintaining a high base state for the 1st to 254th times (d7) 1st special The number of fluctuations in the symbol (the number of successive fluctuations) is 10 times (d8), the jackpot game (either jackpot game A or B) is executed, however, after the end of the jackpot game or small hit V jackpot game, the high base state is reached. Transition again to (d9) Small hit V jackpot game (any of small hit V jackpot games A to E) is executed, however, after the end of the jackpot game or small hit V jackpot game, it will shift to the high base state again.

In addition, when (d1) is satisfied, the end timing of the high base state is the timing at which the 255th symbol variation of the second special symbol ends (symbol stop timing, timing immediately before the start of the symbol fixing time), When (d2) is satisfied, the timing at which the small winning symbol A stops is the end of the symbol fluctuation (symbol stop timing, the timing immediately before the start of the symbol fixing time), and when (d3) is satisfied, the small winning symbol This is the timing when the symbol variation in which the winning symbol B stops ends (symbol stop timing, the timing immediately before the start of the symbol fixed time), and when (d4) is satisfied, the symbol variation in which the small winning symbol C stops ends. Timing (symbol stop timing, timing immediately before the start of the symbol fixing time), and when (d5) is satisfied, the timing at which the symbol variation at which the small winning symbol D stops (symbol stop timing, immediately before the start of the symbol fixing time) When (d6) is satisfied, it is the timing at which the symbol fluctuation at which the 255th small hit symbol E stops (symbol stop timing, the timing immediately before the start of the symbol fixing time), and (d7). ), the timing is the end of the 10th symbol change of the first special symbol (symbol stop timing, the timing immediately before the start of the symbol fixing time), and when (d8) is satisfied, the jackpot symbol This is the timing at which symbol variation at which A or B stops ends (symbol stop timing, timing immediately before the start of symbol fixing time). Here, in the case that (d9) is satisfied, the high base state is ended at the timing when the symbol fluctuation at which the small hit symbols A to D stop has already ended (the symbol stop timing, the timing immediately before the symbol fixing time starts). I will omit it because it is From the above, in the invincible battle mode, in any of the small winning games A to D, the high base state has ended at the start of the small winning game, so the situation where the ball can enter the specific area (big winning opening P751 is The base state in the open state (in which the opening/closing member P761 (valve member) switches to the downstream path guiding toward the specific area) is a low base state. In addition, in the small winning game E, until the prescribed number of times reaches 255, the ball can enter the specific area (the big prize opening P751 is open and the opening/closing member P761 (valve member) guides the ball to the specific area side). The base state is a high base state in the situation in which the ball has switched to the downstream path (when the ball has switched to the downstream path), and after reaching the specified number of times of 255, the ball can enter the specific area (when the big prize opening P751 is open and the opening/closing member P761 ( The base state in the situation in which the valve member (valve member) switches to the downstream path that guides to the specific area side is the low base state, but the small winning game E is a "small winning game in which it is difficult to win a V prize", and in terms of design. Since it is almost impossible for a ball to enter a specific area during execution of the small winning game E, there is no need to consider the base state in the small winning game E.

Invincible battle mode is basically a high base state that continues until (d1) to (d9) are satisfied, but it occurs pending during this high base state and immediately after the high base state ends, it enters a low base state. It should be noted that the period of symbol variation corresponding to the suspension of the second special symbol to be consumed in is a battle mode. Specifically, when (d1) is satisfied, if there are 4 reservations related to the second special symbol (in addition, the small win is won first, or the small win V jackpot game is executed first) ), or if (d4) or (d5) are satisfied and the game ball does not enter the specific area, there are 4 reservations related to the second special symbol. In this case, it is preferable to shift to a low base state and enter battle mode until all four reservations are exhausted. In addition, in FIG. 63, it is possible to shift to the normal mode by proceeding with the game normally (by ensuring that the player does not lose the opportunity to hit the ball into a specific area by continuing to hit the ball to the right). Since it cannot happen, the transition (route) from invincible battle mode to normal mode is omitted.

FIG. 64 shows the conditions for ending the high base state that are set after the end of the jackpot game. Note that the termination condition c when the "relief function" is activated is not set in response to a jackpot game or a small win V jackpot game, so it is omitted in FIG. 64.

In FIGS. 64(a-1) and (a-2), regarding the ending conditions of the high base state that transitions after the end of the jackpot game (part of the above-mentioned ending conditions a to d), the gaming state immediately before the start of the jackpot (in other words, This shows what end conditions are set depending on the game state at the start of jackpot fluctuation) and the jackpot game type (whether it is jackpot symbol A or B).

Figure 64 (a-1) shows that when jackpot game A or B is executed by starting fluctuations in a low base state and stopping at jackpot symbol A or B, jackpot game A or B ends. It shows the end condition of the high base state that will be transferred later. After the jackpot game A ends, the end condition a is set (transition to ST mode), and after the jackpot game ends, the end condition c is set (super invincible battle). mode).

FIG. 64 (a-2) shows that when jackpot game A or B is executed by starting fluctuation in a high base state and stopping at jackpot symbol A or B, jackpot game A or B ends. It shows the end condition of the high base state that will be transferred later. After the jackpot game A ends, the end condition c is set (transition to super invincible battle mode), and even after the jackpot game ends, the end condition c is set (super (transition to invincible battle mode).

In FIGS. 64(b-1) and (b-2), regarding the ending conditions of the high base state (part of the ending conditions a to d mentioned above) that transition after the small hit V jackpot game ends, entry into the specific area What are the ending conditions depending on the gaming state immediately before the ball (immediately before winning the V prize) (in other words, the gaming state at the start of the small winning game) and the small winning game type (which of the small winning symbols A to E)? is set.

FIG. 64(b-1) shows a small winning game in which one of the small winning symbols A to E stops after the fluctuation starts in the low base state or the high base state, and one of the small winning games A to E in the low base state. is executed and the ball enters a specific area during the execution of the small winning games A to E (in Fig. 64, it is expressed as "small winning game A → jackpot game", but this is the small winning game V It shows the end condition of the high base state that transitions to the jackpot game A (synonymous with jackpot game A, etc.), and after the small hit V jackpot game A ends, the ending condition b is set (transfers to battle mode), and the small hit V jackpot After game B ends, ending condition b is set (transfers to battle mode), after small win V jackpot game C ends, ending condition b is set (transfers to battle mode), and after small win V jackpot game D ends. indicates that end condition c is set (transition to super invincible battle mode). In addition, the small winning game E is a "small winning game where it is difficult to win a V prize", and because it is almost impossible to enter a specific area during the design of the small winning game E, the small winning game E is a small winning game that makes it difficult to win a V jackpot. Although the base state after the end of game E is not shown in FIG. 64 (indicated by "-"), end condition b or end condition c may be set.

FIG. 64(b-2) shows a small winning game A to E in which one of the small winning symbols A to E stops after starting fluctuation in the low base state or the high base state. is executed and the ball enters a specific area during the execution of the small winning games A to E (in Fig. 64, it is expressed as "small winning game A → jackpot game", but this is the small winning game A to E). It shows the ending condition of the high base state that transitions to the jackpot game A), and after the small hit V jackpot game A ends, the ending condition b is set (transfers to battle mode), and the small hit V jackpot This indicates that after game B ends, termination condition b is set (transition to battle mode). As for the small winning game C and the small winning game D, as described above, there is no high base state during execution of the small winning game, so in FIG. 64, it is annotated as "no corresponding event". In addition, the small winning game E is a "small winning game where it is difficult to win a V prize", and because it is almost impossible to enter a specific area during the design of the small winning game E, the small winning game E is a small winning game that makes it difficult to win a V jackpot. Although the base state after the end of game E is not shown in FIG. 64 (indicated by "-"), end condition b or end condition c may be set.

By configuring the pachinko game machine P of the eighth embodiment as described above, even if the high base state is the same, the end conditions of the high base state are different, thereby realizing various gaming characteristics. I can do it. Specifically, the small winning game D is always in a low base state when the ball enters a specific area, regardless of the base state at the time the small winning symbol D is won (at the start of fluctuation), and after that, the end condition is a high base state. Termination condition c is set as follows. In addition, in small hit games A and B, even if the base state at the time of winning the small winning symbols A and B (at the start of fluctuation) is a high base state, when the ball enters a specific area, it will always be in a low base state and a high base state. In case of base state (first small winning symbol A.B winning variation when ending conditions a, b, d are set, or 255th small winning symbol A when ending condition c is set) , B. Regarding the fluctuation of winning, there is a transition to the low base state when the fluctuation stops), and if the ball enters the specific area in the low base state, then the end condition b is set as the end condition of the high base state. If the ball is in a high base state when it enters the specific area, then an end condition c is set as a condition for ending the high base state. Furthermore, the small winning game D is always in a low base state when the ball enters a specific area, regardless of the base state at the time the small winning symbol D is won (at the start of fluctuation), and after that, the ending condition is set as the ending condition for the high base state. b is set. Since these small winning games A to D are small winning games where it is easy to win a V prize, the player can almost win a small winning V jackpot. In addition, the small winning game E (winning of the small winning symbol E) in which it is difficult to win the V jackpot in a high base state is used as a trigger, that is, the small winning game where it is almost impossible for the player to win the small winning V jackpot. When a high base state is maintained or when a transition to a low base state is triggered by a game (changes in the 7th small winning symbol E winning when end condition a is set, or end condition b is set) Regarding the fluctuation of the first small winning symbol E winning when the winning symbol E is changed, or the fluctuation of the 255th small winning symbol E winning when the ending conditions c and d are set, the fluctuation is stopped and the state shifts to a low base state. ) can be achieved.

More specifically, in the "ST mode", while the second special symbol fluctuates seven times, the jackpot symbol or the small prize symbol (small prize symbols A to D) stops, resulting in a jackpot game or a small prize. It is possible to realize the gaming property of whether or not it is possible to obtain a V jackpot game. In "Battle Mode", you can almost definitely win the jackpot symbol or the small winning symbol (small winning symbol A to E) until the second special symbol changes 255 times, so the small winning symbol E (V winning prize) Whether or not the jackpot symbol or the small winning symbols A to D (small winning symbols corresponding to the small winning game where it is easy to win V) are won before winning the small winning symbol (corresponding to the small winning game where it is difficult to win). It is possible to realize the gameplay. In addition, in the "Invincible Battle Mode", until the second special symbol fluctuates 255 times or until the small winning symbol E is won 255 times, the jackpot symbol or small winning symbol (small winning symbol A to D) is almost guaranteed. Since it is possible to win, it is possible to realize a gaming experience in which it is possible to almost certainly win a jackpot game or a small win V jackpot game. Furthermore, if you win the small winning symbol D in "ST mode", "battle mode", or "invincible battle mode", and then the small winning V jackpot game D is executed, after the small winning V jackpot game D ends, " Shift to "Super Invincible Battle Mode". In this "super invincible battle mode", until the second special symbol fluctuates 255 times or until the small winning symbol E is won 255 times, the jackpot symbol or small winning symbol (small winning symbol A to D) is almost guaranteed. Since it is possible to win, it is possible to realize a game in which it is almost certain to win the jackpot game or the small win V jackpot game, and also to execute the jackpot games A and B and win the small win symbol A. In executing the small hit V jackpot game A by winning the small winning symbol B, executing the small winning V jackpot game B by winning the small winning symbol B, and executing the small winning V jackpot game D by winning the small winning symbol D, then It is possible to realize the gameplay of shifting to the "super invincible battle mode" (in other words, unless the small win V jackpot game C is executed by winning the small win symbol C, the number of fluctuations and the small Except for the number of winnings of the winning symbol E, it is possible to realize a gameplay in which the "super invincible battle mode" loops.

FIG. 65 shows an example of production in the ST mode. In FIG. 65(a), decorative symbols and simple symbols are displayed in a variable manner corresponding to the variable display of the second special symbol, and a "→" symbol indicating an arrow is displayed in a very small size at the top right of the screen. It is reported that the game situation is such that the player should play right (in a high base state). In addition, by displaying the message "Find the treasure within 7 spins!", the player is given a hint or message that the game is aimed at hitting the jackpot or small hit (excluding small winning symbol E) within 7 spins. I am informing you. Next, in FIG. 65(b), decorative symbols and simple symbols are stopped and displayed corresponding to the stopped display of the second special symbol winning any of the small winning symbols A to C. Both simple symbols are displayed as "666". By displaying one treasure box (not shown) at the timing (while fluctuating) before "666" stops displaying, and then displaying "Treasure found! Battle mode GET!", you can win the small winning symbol. If one of A to C is won, and the ball enters a specific area in the small winning game that will be executed after this, the small winning V jackpot game will be executed, and after the small winning V jackpot game ends, the battle mode will be activated. It is suggested or notified to players that the game will shift to Next, in FIG. 65(c), decorative symbols and simple symbols are stopped and displayed corresponding to the stop display of the second special symbol that has won either the small hit symbol D or the jackpot symbol B. Both the symbol and the simple symbol are displayed as "777". By displaying 5 treasure chests (not shown) at a timing (while fluctuating) before "777" stops displaying, and then displaying the message "Found a huge amount of treasure! Get super invincible battle mode!" , either the small winning symbol D or the jackpot symbol B has been won, and by letting the ball enter a specific area in the small winning game to be executed after this, the small winning V jackpot game is executed, and the small winning V jackpot game is executed. The player is suggested or informed that the game will shift to the super invincible battle mode after the end of the jackpot game, or that the super invincible battle mode will shift to the super invincible battle mode after the end of the jackpot game. Next, in FIG. 65(d), the decorative symbols and simple symbols are stopped and displayed corresponding to the stop display of the second special symbol in the 7th rotation in ST mode, and both the decorative symbols and the simple symbols are "323". Displayed. A mouse is displayed (not shown) at a timing (while fluctuating) before "323" stops displaying, and then the message "No treasure found...Returning to normal mode..." is displayed. This suggests or informs the player that the jackpot symbol B and the small prize symbols A to D were not won during the ST mode, and that the game will return to the normal mode.

In addition, since the ST mode shifts after the execution of the jackpot game A, which is executed when the winning/failure lottery of the first special symbol in the low base state becomes a jackpot, immediately after transitioning to the ST mode, the suspension related to the first special symbol There is a possibility that there is (remains), but in order to smoothly move on to the game mainly based on the second special symbol, the lottery related to the reservation related to the existing first special symbol is canceled. In this case, it is desirable that the fluctuation time be extremely short (eg, 1 second for a uniform deviation, 2 seconds on average for a deviation fluctuation, etc.).

FIG. 66 shows an example of production in battle mode. In FIG. 66(a), decorative symbols and simple symbols are displayed in a variable manner corresponding to the variable display of the second special symbol, and a "→" symbol indicating an arrow is displayed in a very small size at the top right of the screen. It is reported that the game situation is such that the player should play right (in a high base state). In addition, by displaying the message "Continue until you encounter an enemy!", the game aims to achieve a jackpot or small hit (small winning symbols A to E) within 255 rotations (within a rotation speed that is almost impossible to reach). In addition to this, it is suggested or informed to the player that the game does not shift to the normal mode until the small winning symbol E is won. Next, in FIG. 66(b), decorative symbols and simple symbols are stopped and displayed corresponding to the stopped display of the second special symbol winning any of the small winning symbols A to C. Both simple symbols are displayed as "666". At a timing before “666” stops displaying (while it is changing), a victory effect is displayed in which an ally character counterattacks and wins after being attacked by an enemy character in a battle effect between an ally character and an enemy character. (not shown), and then displays the message "Destroy! Battle mode continues!", indicating that one of the small winning symbols A to C has been won, and in the small winning game to be executed after this, the specified area By letting the ball enter, the small win V jackpot game is executed, and the player is suggested or informed that the small win V jackpot game will be shifted to the battle mode after the small win V jackpot game is finished. Next, in FIG. 66(c), decorative symbols and simple symbols corresponding to the stop display of the fluctuation of the second special symbol won by either the small hit symbol D or the jackpot symbol B are displayed. Both the symbol and the simple symbol are displayed as "777". At a timing before "777" stops displaying (while it is changing), a victory effect is displayed in a battle between an ally character and an enemy character in which the ally character overwhelms and wins without any attacks from the enemy character ( (not shown), then by displaying "Complete victory! Get super invincible battle mode!", either the small winning symbol D or the jackpot symbol B has been won, and in the small winning game to be executed after this. By letting the ball enter a specific area, a small hit V jackpot game is executed, and after the small hit V jackpot game ends, the game shifts to a super invincible battle mode, or after the jackpot game ends, it moves to a super invincible battle mode. is suggested or notified to the player. Next, in FIG. 66(d), the decorative pattern and the simple pattern are stopped and displayed corresponding to the stop display of the second special pattern that won the small winning pattern E, and both the decorative pattern and the simple pattern are "323 ” is displayed. At a timing (while fluctuating) before "323" is stopped and displayed, a defeat effect in which the ally character is defeated by being attacked by the enemy character in a battle effect between an ally character and an enemy character is displayed (not shown). , After that, by displaying "Defeat...Return to normal mode...", it indicates to the player that the small winning symbol E has been won and that the player will move to normal mode after this. I am informing you.

In addition, the battle mode can be used after the jackpot game A is executed when the first special symbol in the high base state becomes a jackpot, or after the second special symbol is in the low base state or high base state. After the completion of the jackpot game B that is executed when the lottery becomes a jackpot, or during a small win game that is executed when the winning/failure lottery of the second special symbol in the low base state or high base state becomes a small win. The small hit V jackpot game is executed when a ball enters a specific area. Because the transition is made after the execution of the jackpot games A, B, and C, and because the transition is made to the battle mode after passing through the ST mode, the order of entry is In the pachinko game machine P of the eighth embodiment that adopts the control, there is no hold related to the first special symbol at the time of transitioning to the battle mode (when the player intentionally hits the left hand (unless the ball enters the first starting prize hole P711). Therefore, in order to draw attention to smoothly proceeding with the game centered on the second special symbol in the battle mode (more specifically, even though the situation should be right-handed, by hitting left-handed, the first start will be If the ball enters the winning hole P711, the progress of the battle mode will be delayed due to the long-time fluctuating display of the first special symbol, so the player can experience the event and repeat the same event. (You will need to be careful not to repeat the game as you play), and the first special symbol during battle mode will have a very long fluctuation time (e.g. 300 seconds for a flat change, is preferably 90 seconds on average). At that time, instead of not having a special effect, for example, in the case of a 300-second deviation variation, for the first 270 seconds, a special effect dedicated to long-term variation that does not appear in the variation display of the second special symbol (for example, when an ally character It is preferable to always perform a performance in which the friendly character is looking for an enemy character (a performance in which the enemy character is not found) during the remaining 30 seconds, or to perform it with a high probability (for example, 75%). It is. This effect in which the ally character searches for the enemy character is also executed during the fluctuating display of the second special symbol during battle mode, and during the off-flight variation of the second special symbol, the ally character searches for the enemy character. may be executed with a low probability (for example, 20%). Furthermore, the production in which the friendly character searches for the enemy character suggests or informs the player that if the enemy character is not found, it is a loss, and if the enemy character is found, it is suggested to the player that it is a jackpot or small win. Or it is being notified. In addition, for example, if the difference is 300 seconds, during the special performance mentioned above, a remaining time display that suggests or informs the player how many seconds remain until the special performance ends (for example, "270 seconds remaining") The number of seconds may be gradually subtracted from "seconds"). Note that during the battle mode, the player may have a specification that allows the player to arbitrarily select a song to be played by operating the production button P381 or the cross key P383, and the period during which the song can be selected is limited. , is a period other than the "performance in which an ally character searches for an enemy character" and the "battle performance" during the variation of the first special symbol and the variation of the second special symbol. Therefore, during the special performance, music is always selectable, and although it varies over a long period of time, it is designed to prevent players from getting bored. In addition, the maximum variation time of the second special symbol during battle mode is 120 seconds, and during that 120 seconds, either the "effect where an ally character searches for an enemy character" or the "battle effect" is always executed. , only the first 20 seconds during which these effects are not performed are the period in which music can be selected.

FIG. 67 shows an example of production in the super invincible battle mode. In FIG. 67(a), decorative symbols and simple symbols are displayed in a variable manner corresponding to the variable display of the second special symbol, and a "→" symbol indicating an arrow is displayed in a very small size at the top right of the screen. It is reported that the game situation is such that the player should play right (in a high base state). In addition, by displaying the message "Continue until you encounter an enemy! Moreover, there is no loss!", you can achieve a jackpot or small hit (small hit symbol A - D), and also suggests or informs the player that the game does not shift to the normal mode even if the small winning symbol E is won. Next, in FIG. 67(b), the decorative pattern and the simple pattern are stopped and displayed corresponding to the stop display of the second special pattern that won the small winning pattern C, and both the decorative pattern and the simple pattern are "666 ” is displayed. At the timing before "666" stops displaying (currently fluctuating), a battle between an ally character and an enemy character is performed, and even though the ally character is attacked by the enemy character, the ally character counterattacks and the result is a draw. (not shown), and then displaying "Die! Next time, battle mode!" indicates that the small winning symbol has been won, and the ball enters a specific area in the subsequent small winning game. This suggests or informs the player that the small win V jackpot game will be executed and that the transition to the battle mode will occur after the small win V jackpot game ends. Next, in FIG. 67(c), decorative symbols and simple symbols corresponding to the stop display of the fluctuation of the second special symbol won in either the small hit symbols A, B, D or the jackpot symbol B are displayed. Both the decorative pattern and the simple pattern are displayed as "777". At a timing before "777" stops displaying (while it is changing), a victory effect is displayed in a battle between an ally character and an enemy character in which the ally character overwhelms and wins without any attacks from the enemy character ( After that, by displaying "Complete victory! Super invincible battle mode continues!", it means that either the small winning symbols A, B, D or the jackpot symbol B has been won, and the small winning symbol that will be executed after this will be displayed. By letting the ball enter a specific area in the winning game, the small winning V jackpot game is executed, and after the small winning V jackpot game ends, the transition to super invincible battle mode, or after the jackpot game ends, the super invincible battle mode It is suggested or notified to players that the game will shift to Next, in FIG. 67(d), the decorative pattern and the simple pattern are stopped and displayed corresponding to the stop display of the second special pattern that won the small winning pattern E, and both the decorative pattern and the simple pattern are "461". ” is displayed. In this case, no particular battle effect will occur, and the effect will be the same as when the lottery is a loss (no effect), and the display of ``Continue until you encounter the enemy!Furthermore, there is no loss!'' will continue. There is. This suggests or informs the player that the player has lost or won the small winning symbol E, and that the super invincible battle mode will continue.

FIG. 67 shows an example of production in the super invincible battle mode. In FIG. 67(a), decorative symbols and simple symbols are displayed in a variable manner corresponding to the variable display of the second special symbol, and a "→" symbol indicating an arrow is displayed in a very small size at the top right of the screen. It is reported that the game situation is such that the player should play right (in a high base state). In addition, by displaying the message "Continue until you encounter an enemy! Moreover, there is no loss!", you can achieve a jackpot or small hit (small hit symbol A - D), and also suggests or informs the player that the game does not shift to the normal mode even if the small winning symbol E is won. Next, in FIG. 67(b), the decorative pattern and the simple pattern are stopped and displayed corresponding to the stop display of the second special pattern that won the small winning pattern C, and both the decorative pattern and the simple pattern are "666 ” is displayed. At the timing before "666" stops displaying (currently fluctuating), a battle between an ally character and an enemy character is performed, and even though the ally character is attacked by the enemy character, the ally character counterattacks and the result is a draw. (not shown), and then displaying "Die! Next time, battle mode!" indicates that the small winning symbol has been won, and the ball enters a specific area in the subsequent small winning game. This suggests or informs the player that the small win V jackpot game will be executed and that the transition to the battle mode will occur after the small win V jackpot game ends. Next, in FIG. 67(c), decorative symbols and simple symbols corresponding to the stop display of the fluctuation of the second special symbol won in either the small hit symbols A, B, D or the jackpot symbol B are displayed. Both the decorative pattern and the simple pattern are displayed as "777". At a timing before "777" stops displaying (while it is changing), a victory effect is displayed in a battle between an ally character and an enemy character in which the ally character overwhelms and wins without any attacks from the enemy character ( After that, by displaying "Complete victory! Super invincible battle mode continues!", it means that either the small winning symbols A, B, D or the jackpot symbol B has been won, and the small winning symbol that will be executed after this will be displayed. By letting the ball enter a specific area in the winning game, the small winning V jackpot game is executed, and after the small winning V jackpot game ends, the transition to the super invincible battle mode, or after the jackpot game ends, the super invincible battle mode It is suggested or notified to players that the game will shift to Next, in FIG. 67(d), the decorative pattern and the simple pattern are stopped and displayed corresponding to the stop display of the second special pattern that won the small winning pattern E, and both the decorative pattern and the simple pattern are "461". ” is displayed. In this case, no particular battle effect will occur, and the effect will be the same as when the lottery is a loss (no effect), and the message ``Continue until you encounter the enemy!Furthermore, there is no loss!'' will continue to be displayed. There is. This suggests or informs the player that the player has lost or won the small winning symbol E, and that the super invincible battle mode will continue.

FIG. 68 shows an example of performance in the invincible battle mode. In FIG. 68(a), decorative symbols and simple symbols are displayed in a variable manner corresponding to the variable display of the second special symbol, and a "→" symbol indicating an arrow is displayed in a very small size at the top right of the screen. It is reported that the game situation is such that the player should play right (in a high base state). In addition, by displaying the message "Continue until you encounter an enemy! Moreover, there is no loss!", you can achieve a jackpot or small hit (small hit symbol A - D), and also suggests or informs the player that the game does not shift to the normal mode even if the small winning symbol E is won. Next, in FIG. 68(b), decorative symbols and simple symbols are stopped and displayed corresponding to the stopped display of the second special symbol that has won any of the small winning symbols A to C. Both simple symbols are displayed as "666". At a timing before “666” stops displaying (while it is changing), a victory effect is displayed in which an ally character counterattacks and wins after being attacked by an enemy character in a battle effect between an ally character and an enemy character. (not shown), and then displays the message "Defeated! Next time, battle mode!", indicating that one of the small winning symbols A to C has been won, and it can be specified in the small winning game to be executed after this. By letting the ball enter the area, the small win V jackpot game is executed, and the player is suggested or informed that the small win V jackpot game will be shifted to the battle mode after the small win V jackpot game is finished. Next, in FIG. 68(c), decorative symbols and simple symbols are stopped and displayed corresponding to the stopped display of the fluctuation of the second special symbol that has won either the small hit symbol D or the jackpot symbol B. Both the symbol and the simple symbol are displayed as "777". At a timing before "777" stops displaying (while it is changing), a victory effect is displayed in a battle between an ally character and an enemy character in which the ally character overwhelms and wins without any attacks from the enemy character ( (not shown), then by displaying "Complete victory! Next time, super invincible battle mode!", it means that either the small winning symbol D or the jackpot symbol B has been won, and in the small winning game to be executed after this. By letting the ball enter a specific area, a small win V jackpot game is executed, and after the small win V jackpot game ends, the game shifts to super invincible battle mode, or after the jackpot game ends, it shifts to super invincible battle mode. This is suggested or notified to the player. Next, in FIG. 68(d), the decorative pattern and the simple pattern are stopped and displayed corresponding to the stop display of the second special pattern that won the small winning pattern E, and both the decorative pattern and the simple pattern are "461". ” is displayed. In this case, no particular battle effect will occur, and the effect will be the same as when the lottery is a loss (no effect), and the display of ``Continue until you encounter the enemy!Furthermore, there is no loss!'' will continue. There is. This suggests or informs the player that he has lost or won the small winning symbol E, and that the invincible battle mode will continue after this.

In addition, in the pachinko gaming machine P of the eighth embodiment, the winning variation time of the normal symbols in the high base state (including the symbol fixing time) is 2 seconds, and the normal electric accessory P770 opens once for 3 seconds. (Please note that the gate will be forcibly closed if one ball enters). Furthermore, normally, regardless of whether it is a low base state or a high base state, the symbol fixing time of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is independent of the symbol type (whether it is a jackpot symbol, a small win symbol, or a miss symbol). First, the symbol fixing time is uniformly set to 0.5 seconds, but in some situations, the symbol fixing time becomes a long time of 7 seconds. These partial situations are (1) If the 10th rotation of the first special symbol in ST mode, battle mode, invincible battle mode, or super invincible battle mode is a miss variation, (2) the second special symbol in ST mode (3) If the 255th rotation of the second special symbol in the battle mode is a loss variation, (4) The second special symbol in the battle mode If the change in the special symbol is a variation in which the small hit symbol E is stopped and displayed, (5) the 255th rotation of the second special symbol in the invincible battle mode/super invincible battle mode is missed or the small win symbol E is stopped and displayed. If it is a fluctuation, then it is. With this configuration, changes in the opportunity to transition from a high base state to a low base state (to be precise, opportunities to transition from a high base state to a low base state other than winning a small winning game that is likely to win a V prize) ), the first special symbol or the second special symbol does not begin to fluctuate until 7 seconds have passed after transitioning to the low base state. In other words, the second special symbol does not start changing for 7 seconds after transitioning to the low base state. Since the hold related to the 2nd special symbol is not expired and the base is already low during the 7 seconds of symbol fixing time, the hold related to the 2nd special symbol is held up to the upper limit number (4 pieces) and the base is high. Even in the case of transitioning from the base state to the low base state, an event will not occur in which one reservation related to the second special symbol is consumed in the low base state and one new symbol is generated accordingly (for example, Even if the normal symbol hits in the high base state immediately before the start of the symbol fixing time and the symbol stops and the normal electric accessory P770 is released for 3 seconds, it will remain in the low base state during the 3 seconds of release.During the symbol fixing time Therefore, even if the ball enters the normal electric accessory P770, the number of reservations related to the second special symbol is still at the upper limit, so in the low base state, one reservation related to the second special symbol is consumed and that An event such as one new event occurring per minute does not occur).

[Ninth Example]
As the pachinko gaming machine P of the present embodiment to the eighth embodiment, we have described the pachinko gaming machine P having various playability. The ninth embodiment is an example in which the content has been further improved.Hereinafter, only the underlying technology and the differences from this embodiment will be described in detail, and the explanation of common points will be omitted or simplified. It should be noted that among the elements constituting the pachinko game machine P of the ninth embodiment, the same reference numerals are given to the elements that are the same as or correspond to the elements explained in the base technology or the present embodiment.

[9-1 Example]
The pachinko game machine P in the 9th-1st embodiment employs the above-mentioned "small hit V" specifications. The pachinko gaming machine P of the 9th-1st embodiment has the following features. (A) The lottery results for the first special symbol include "hit" and "lost". (B) The lottery results for the second special symbol include "hit,""smallwin," and "miss." (C) The jackpot probability is 1/300 (no high probability state is provided), the small hit probability is 299/300, the number of reservations for the first special symbol is 4, and the reservation for the second special symbol. The number is 1. (D) "Second special pattern (special pattern 2) priority digestion control" is adopted. (E) The small winning game is a small winning game in which it is easy to win a V prize in a specific area (it does not have a small winning game that makes it difficult to win a V prize). In other words, if a ball enters the big winning device P750 during execution of a small winning game, it is almost certain that the ball will enter a specific area, and this will be used as an opportunity to play a jackpot game (also referred to as a small winning V jackpot or a small winning V jackpot game). ) is executed. The number of prize balls of the big winning device P750 is 10 balls, and the specified number (count) is 10 balls. (F) The types of jackpot games executed in the jackpot related to the first special symbol include jackpot game A and jackpot game B, and the ratio thereof is 51:49. The types of jackpot games executed in the jackpot related to the second special symbol include jackpot games C and jackpot games D, and the ratio thereof is 50:50. The types of small win V jackpot games that are executed in response to the small win related to the second special symbol are small win V jackpot game A (executed when a ball enters a specific area during execution of small win game A). The game has a small win V jackpot game B (which is executed when a ball enters a specific area during execution of the small win game B), and the ratio is 50:50. The jackpot games A and B are 5R jackpot games, the jackpot games C and D are 10R jackpot games, and the small win V jackpot game A and the small win V jackpot game B are 10R small win V jackpot games. (G) It has a low base state and a high base state. Jackpot game A, jackpot game B, and small win V jackpot game A shift to a high base state after the jackpot game ends. Jackpot game B, jackpot game D, and small win V jackpot game B shift to a low base state after the jackpot game ends. The high base state continues until the first special symbol changes 10 times, or until the second special symbol changes 255 times, or until small win A or B is won once (small win V jackpot game A or small win V jackpot game B is executed and the ball does not enter the specific area, or the ball shifts to a low base state before the start of small win game A or small win game B).

FIG. 69 shows the game flow in the Pachinko gaming machine P of the 9th-1st embodiment. "Battle mode" is a mode corresponding to the high base state to which the first special symbol becomes a jackpot in the low base state and shifts after the jackpot game A is executed. Immediately after transitioning to the battle mode, the second special symbol is not changed, and there is no reservation related to the second special symbol. Here, by letting the ball enter the second starting winning hole P721 by opening the normal electric accessory P770 that has become easy to enter the ball, the fluctuation of the second special symbol (referred to as the fluctuation) is started, and further By letting the ball enter the 2-start winning hole P721, one reservation related to the second special symbol occurs (referred to as reservation 1).

In the battle mode, if the fluctuation is a fluctuation that triggers the execution of small winning game A, and Pending 1 is also a suspension that triggers the execution of small winning game A, or the fluctuation is a fluctuation that triggers the execution of small winning game B. If the fluctuation is such that Pending 1 is a suspension that triggers the execution of small winning game A, the small winning type of Pending 1 is pre-read and determined during the fluctuation or during the small winning game that is executed after the fluctuation stops. (pre-determination), and based on the result of the pre-read determination (result of the pre-determination), during the execution of the small hit V jackpot game A or the small hit V jackpot game B that is executed after the fluctuation has stopped, the ally character The effect of winning against the enemy character is displayed, and after the execution of the small win V jackpot game A that is executed after the suspension 1 is extinguished, it is suggested or announced that the game will shift to the high base state again, that is, the battle mode will continue. (Fig. 69(a), (b)).

In the battle mode, if the fluctuation is a fluctuation that triggers the execution of small winning game B, and Pending 1 is also a suspension that triggers the execution of small winning game B, the fluctuation will be executed during the fluctuation or after the fluctuation stops. The small win type of Pending 1 is pre-read (pre-determined) during the small win game, and based on the result of the pre-read judgment (result of the pre-determination), the small win V jackpot game B is executed after the fluctuation has stopped. During execution, a production in which the ally character is defeated by the enemy character is displayed, and after the small win V jackpot game B is executed after the hold 1 is extinguished, the game shifts to a low base state, that is, the battle mode ends. It is suggested or announced that the mode will shift to the normal mode in which the base state is low and there is no reservation related to the second special symbol (FIGS. 69(c) and 69(d)).

In the battle mode, if the fluctuation is a fluctuation that triggers the execution of small winning game A, and Pending 1 is a fluctuation that triggers the execution of small winning game B, the fluctuation is executed during the fluctuation or after the fluctuation stops. A small win V jackpot game B that is executed after the fluctuation stops based on the preread judgment (preliminary judgment) of the small win type of pending 1 during the small win game During the execution, a production where the friendly character draws with the enemy character is displayed, and in the high base state where pending 1 is being used up (changing), the normal electric accessory P770, which is easier to enter, is released. By this, it is suggested or notified that by allowing the ball to enter the second starting winning hole P721 again, a situation will arise in which a reservation regarding a new second special symbol can be caused (FIG. 69(e)). After that, if the reservation related to the newly generated second special symbol is a reservation that triggers the execution of small hit game A, during the execution of small hit V jackpot game B that is executed after reservation 1 is extinguished, A production in which the ally character wins over the enemy character is displayed, and after the small hit V jackpot game A is executed after the suspension related to the newly generated second special symbol is exhausted, the game shifts to the high base state again, that is. , it is suggested or announced that the battle mode will continue (FIGS. 69(f) and (g)). On the other hand, if the reservation related to the newly generated second special symbol is a reservation that triggers the execution of small hit game B, during the execution of small hit V jackpot game B that is executed after reservation 1 is extinguished, A production in which an ally character is defeated by an enemy character is displayed, and after the suspension related to the newly generated second special symbol is exhausted, the small hit V jackpot game B is executed, and then the game shifts to a low base state, that is, It is suggested or announced that the battle mode is over and a transition is made to the normal mode in which the base state is low and there is no reservation related to the second special symbol (FIGS. 69(h) and (i)).

By configuring as described above, the pachinko gaming machine P in the 9th-1st embodiment can realize various performances according to the combination of the fluctuation in the high base state and the hold 1 (combination of small hit types) At the same time, it is possible to give the feeling of a ball coming out (two small winning V jackpot games) accompanying the performance. In addition, the small win V jackpot game that is executed after the end of the fluctuation is referred to as the "previous small win V jackpot game", and the small win V jackpot game that is executed after the reservation 1 is used up is referred to as the "later small win V jackpot game". may be called.

FIG. 70 shows an example of a performance corresponding to the battle winning route in the battle mode (when the fluctuation is a fluctuation that triggers the execution of the small winning game A, and the hold 1 is also a suspension that triggers the execution of the small winning game A). An example of a performance) is shown.

First, the decorative symbols and simple symbols that correspond to the variable display of the second special symbol are displayed in a variable manner, and a very small "→" symbol indicating an arrow is displayed at the top right of the screen, and the current gaming status is displayed on the right. It alerts you that you are in a situation where you should hit (in a high base state). In addition, an instruction "Charge!" is displayed, prompting the user to place the second special symbol on hold. Here, the circle image at the bottom right of the screen indicates whether or not the variation in question is being executed (the circle image on the left side indicates whether the variation in question is being executed), and the circle image on the right side indicates whether the variation in question is being executed. The circle image indicates whether or not reservation 1 has occurred (presence or absence of reservation) (if it is filled in black, it indicates that reservation 1 has occurred) (FIG. 70(a)).

After that, when Pending 1 occurs, the message "Charge completed!" indicating that Pending 1 has occurred is displayed, and after that, the fluctuation stops, which corresponds to the stop display of the fluctuation of the second special symbol. The decorative symbols and simple symbols are displayed in a stopped state, and both the decorative symbols and the simple symbols are displayed as "6V6". After that, "Aim for V!!!" is displayed, which is an instruction display instructing you to shoot the game ball aiming at the big prize opening P751 (specific area), and furthermore, by entering the specific area, you can win a small hit. ``Battle Bonus Preparation'' is displayed, indicating that the V jackpot game will be executed (FIG. 70(b)).

Thereafter, by entering a specific area during the execution of the small winning game, a message "Battle Bonus" indicating that the small winning V jackpot game will be executed is displayed, and the first round is started. At this point, the player will win or lose the battle (Whether the small win V jackpot game scheduled to be executed by the expiration of pending 1 is the small win V jackpot game A or the small win V jackpot game B) It is unknown. In addition, "If you win, you will get a victory bonus! Furthermore, the battle mode will continue! ” is displayed (FIG. 70(c)).

After that, by progressing to the 5th round, you will be notified that you have won the battle, and at the same time, the "Next , Victory Bonus!'' is displayed (FIG. 70(d)).

After that, when the execution of the previous small hit V jackpot game is completed, it will move to a high base state, and the pending 1 will be extinguished, and the small hit V jackpot game A will be executed as the next small hit V jackpot game. ``Waiting for victory bonus...'' is displayed (FIG. 70(e)).

After that, when the fluctuation associated with the expiration of reservation 1 is stopped, the decorative and simple symbols are stopped and displayed corresponding to the stop display of the second special symbol's fluctuation, and both the decorative and simple symbols are displayed as "3V3". Displayed. After that, "Aim for V!!!" is displayed, which is an instruction display instructing you to shoot the game ball aiming at the big prize opening P751 (specific area), and furthermore, by entering the specific area, you can win a small hit. ``Victory bonus preparation in progress!'' indicating that V jackpot game A will be executed is displayed (FIG. 70(f)).

Thereafter, when the ball enters a specific area during execution of the small winning game, a "victory bonus" indicating that the small winning V jackpot game A will be executed is displayed, and the first round is started. In addition, after the small hit V jackpot game A ends, the message "Battle mode continues after bonus" is displayed, which indicates that the state will shift to the high base state again, that is, the battle mode will continue (FIG. 70(g)). . After that, during the jackpot end demonstration of the small win V jackpot game A, after the small win V jackpot game A ends, the state shifts to the high base state again, that is, "Battle mode continues!!!" indicating that the battle mode continues. is displayed (FIG. 70(h)).

FIG. 71 shows an example of production corresponding to the route of battle defeat in the battle mode (when the fluctuation is a fluctuation that triggers the execution of small winning game B, and the hold 1 is also a suspension that triggers the execution of small winning game B). An example of a performance) is shown. Note that FIGS. 71(a) to 71(c) are the same as FIGS. 70(a) to 70(c), so a description thereof will be omitted.

After FIG. 71(c), by progressing to the 5th round, it is announced that the battle has been defeated, and at the same time, due to the expiration of pending 1, the small hit V jackpot game scheduled to be executed becomes the small win V jackpot game B. A message indicating that "next time, defeat bonus" is displayed (FIG. 71(d)).

After that, when the execution of the previous small hit V jackpot game is completed, it will move to the high base state, and the pending 1 will be extinguished, and the small hit V jackpot game B will be executed as the next small hit V jackpot game. ``Waiting for defeat bonus...'' is displayed (FIG. 71(e)).

After that, as the fluctuations associated with the expiration of Pending 1 are stopped, the decorative symbols and simple symbols are stopped and displayed corresponding to the stop display of the fluctuations of the second special symbol, and both the decorative symbols and the simple symbols are displayed as "4V4". Displayed. After that, "Aim for V" is displayed, which is an instruction display instructing to shoot the game ball aiming at (the specific area of) the big winning hole P751, and furthermore, by entering the specific area, you can win a small hit V jackpot game. ``Defeat Bonus Preparing'' is displayed, indicating that B will be executed (FIG. 71(f)).

Thereafter, by entering the specific area during the execution of the small winning game, a "defeat bonus" indicating that the small winning V jackpot game B will be executed is displayed, and the first round is started. In addition, after the small hit V jackpot game B ends, a message “After bonus, normal mode...” is displayed indicating that the state will shift to a low base state, that is, the battle mode will end and the mode will shift to normal mode. (Figure 71(g)). After that, during the jackpot end demonstration of the small hit V jackpot game B, after the small hit V jackpot game B ends, it will transition to a low base state, that is, the battle mode will indicate that the battle mode is over and the transition to the normal mode. "End...Go to normal mode" is displayed (FIG. 71(h)).

FIG. 72 shows an example of a production corresponding to the battle draw route (final decisive battle route) in the battle mode (the fluctuation is the fluctuation that triggers the execution of the small winning game A, and the pending 1 is the fluctuation that triggers the execution of the small winning game B. An example of a performance in the case of a hold situation) is shown. Note that FIG. 72(a) is the same as FIG. 70(c) following FIGS. 70(a) to 70(b), so a description thereof will be omitted.

After Figure 72(b), when the battle progresses to the 5th round, it is announced that the battle is a draw, and at the same time, Pending 1 is extinguished in a high base state (Pending in a high base state) In other words, the previous small hit V jackpot game is a small win V jackpot game A, and the subsequent small win V jackpot game is a small win V jackpot game. ``Next time, final battle mode'' is displayed indicating that it is jackpot game B (FIG. 72(b)).

After that, during the jackpot end demonstration of the previous small hit V jackpot game, Pending 1 is extinguished in a high base state (changes related to the second special symbol corresponding to Pending 1 are performed in the high base state) In other words, the previous small win V jackpot game is the small win V jackpot game A, and the subsequent small win V jackpot game is the small win V jackpot game B. ``The final decisive battle mode has entered!! !” is displayed (FIG. 72(c)).

After that, the previous small hit V jackpot game ends, the state shifts to a high base state, and the hold 1 is exhausted, and the instruction "Charge again!" is displayed, and a new 2nd special symbol is displayed. This prompts the user to make a reservation (FIG. 72(d)).

After that, when a new reservation related to the second special symbol occurs, the message "Charge completed!" is displayed, and then the fluctuation due to the expiration of reservation 1 stops, and the fluctuation of the second special symbol stops. A decorative pattern and a simple pattern corresponding to the display are displayed in a stopped state, and both the decorative pattern and the simple pattern are displayed as "6V6". After that, "Aim for V!!!" is displayed, which is an instruction display instructing you to shoot the game ball aiming at the big prize opening P751 (specific area), and further, by entering the specific area, you can win a small hit. ``Final Battle Bonus Preparation'' is displayed, indicating that the V jackpot game will be executed (FIG. 72(e)).

Thereafter, when the ball enters a specific area during the execution of the small winning game, a "final battle bonus" indicating that the small winning V jackpot game will be executed is displayed, and the first round is started. At this point, the player will decide whether to win or lose the battle (whether the small hit V jackpot game scheduled to be executed due to the expiry of the suspension related to the new second special symbol is the small win V jackpot game A or the small win V jackpot game) It is unclear whether it is Game B). In addition, "If you win, you will get a victory bonus! Furthermore, the battle mode will continue! ” is displayed (FIG. 72(f)).

After that, if the small hit V jackpot game scheduled to be executed due to the expiration of the suspension related to the new second special symbol is the small hit V jackpot game A, it will be announced that the battle has been won by progressing to the 5th round. At the same time, the message "Next time, win bonus!" is displayed indicating that the small win V jackpot game scheduled to be executed is the small win V jackpot game A due to the expiration of the reservation related to the new second special symbol. (Figure 72(g-1)). On the other hand, if the small hit V jackpot game scheduled to be executed due to the expiration of the suspension related to the new second special symbol is the small hit V jackpot game B, it will be announced that the battle has been defeated by progressing to the 5th round. At the same time, the message "Next time, defeat bonus" is displayed indicating that the small hit V jackpot game scheduled to be executed is the small hit V jackpot game B due to the expiration of the reservation related to the new second special symbol ( Figure 72 (g-2))

[Example 9-2]
The pachinko game machine P in the 9th-2nd embodiment employs the above-mentioned "small hit V" specifications. The pachinko gaming machine P of the 9th-2nd embodiment has the following features. (A) The lottery results for the first special symbol include "hit" and "lost". (B) The lottery results for the second special symbol include "hit,""smallwin," and "miss." (C) The jackpot probability is 1/300 (no high probability state is provided), the small hit probability is 299/300, the number of reservations for the first special symbol is 4, and the reservation for the second special symbol. The number is 4. (D) "Second special pattern (special pattern 2) priority digestion control" is adopted. (E) The small winning game is a small winning game in which it is easy to win a V prize in a specific area (it does not have a small winning game that makes it difficult to win a V prize). In other words, if a ball enters the big winning device P750 during execution of a small winning game, it is almost certain that the ball will enter a specific area, and this will be used as an opportunity to play a jackpot game (also referred to as a small winning V jackpot or a small winning V jackpot game). ) is executed. The number of prize balls of the big winning device P750 is 10 balls, and the specified number (count) is 10 balls. (F) The types of jackpot games executed in the jackpot related to the first special symbol include jackpot game A and jackpot game B, and the ratio thereof is 51:49. The types of jackpot games executed in the jackpot related to the second special symbol include jackpot games C and jackpot games D, and the ratio thereof is 25:75. The types of small win V jackpot games that are executed in response to the small win related to the second special symbol are small win V jackpot game A (executed when a ball enters a specific area during execution of small win game A). ) and a small win V jackpot game B (executed when a ball enters a specific area during execution of the small win game B), and the ratio is 25:75. The jackpot games A and B are 5R jackpot games, the jackpot games C and D are 5R jackpot games, and the small win V jackpot game A and the small win V jackpot game B are 5R small win V jackpot games. (G) It has a low base state and a high base state. Jackpot game A, jackpot game B, and small win V jackpot game A shift to a high base state after the jackpot game ends. Jackpot game B, jackpot game D, and small win V jackpot game B shift to a low base state after the jackpot game ends. The high base state continues until the first special symbol changes 10 times or until the second special symbol changes once.

FIG. 73 shows the first half of the performance example in the pachinko gaming machine P of the 9-2 embodiment, and FIG. 74 shows the second half of the performance example in the pachinko gaming machine P of the 9-2 embodiment (FIG. Continuation of (h)) is shown.

First, after the execution of the jackpot game A, which is executed when the winning/failure lottery of the first special symbol in the low base state becomes a jackpot, the game shifts to the high base state, and then the second special symbol is displayed in a variable manner and the second special symbol is displayed in a variable manner. In a situation where no reservations related to the 2nd special symbol have occurred, a variable display of the simple symbol corresponding to the variable display of the 2nd special symbol is performed (decorative symbols are not displayed), and an arrow is displayed at the top right of the screen. A "→" symbol is displayed in a very small size to notify that the current gaming situation is a situation where you should play right (in a high base state). In addition, an instruction "Charge!!!" is displayed to urge the user to place the second special symbol on hold. Here, in the circle image at the bottom of the screen, the leftmost circle image indicates whether the change in question (current change) is being executed (if it is filled in black, it indicates that the change in question is being executed). ), and the other circle images indicate whether or not a reservation has occurred (presence or absence of a reservation) related to the second special symbol (if it is filled in black, it indicates that a reservation has occurred). Note that although this variation is assumed to be a variation that triggers the execution of the small winning game B, the player is not suggested or informed of this at this point (FIG. 73(a)).

After that, when four reservations related to the second special symbol occur, a message "Charge completed!" is displayed indicating that the reservation has reached the upper limit, and after that, the fluctuation stops, and the second special A simple symbol is displayed in a static state corresponding to the static symbol variation, and "6V6" is displayed. Then, after the end of the fluctuation, a message ``waiting for super bonus'' is displayed indicating that the small hit V jackpot game will be executed. Here, the four holds are referred to as hold 1, hold 2, hold 3, and hold 4 in order of completion. In addition, here, reservations 1, 2, and 4 are the reservations that trigger the execution of the small winning game B, and reservation 3 is the suspension that triggers the execution of the small winning game A, but the player is not informed of this at this point. is not suggested or announced (Fig. 73(b)).

After that, after the fluctuation is finished, a small winning game is executed, and "Aim for V!!!" is displayed, which is an instruction display instructing to fire the game ball aiming at (a specific area of) the big winning hole P751. Furthermore, a message ``Preparing for a super bonus!'' is displayed, indicating that a small hit V jackpot game will be executed by entering the specific area (FIG. 73(c)).

Thereafter, by entering the specific area, a small win V jackpot game is executed, and during the jackpot start demonstration, "Super Bonus" is displayed, and an image indicating that 45 stars have been obtained is displayed. Each star represents one round, that is, it suggests or informs the player that 45 unit games are scheduled to be played from now on (FIG. 73(d)). In order to realize this notification mode, the small win types of Pending 1 to 4 are pre-read (pre-determined) during the small win game that is executed during the fluctuation or after the fluctuation stops, and the result of the pre-read determination ( The notification mode is determined based on the results of prior judgment. In this production example, first, we will play 5 rounds of the small hit V jackpot game that is triggered by the fluctuation, and 5 rounds of the small hit V jackpot game that is triggered by the expiration of pending 1, and the expiration of pending 2. There are 5 rounds of the small hit V jackpot game that is executed as a trigger, and 5 rounds of the small hit V jackpot game that is executed as a trigger for the expiration of pending 3, and up to this point, 20 rounds are scheduled to be executed. This means that Then, the small hit V jackpot game that is executed with the expiration of pending 3 is the small hit V jackpot game A that triggers the transition to the high base state, so after the small win V jackpot game A ends, it is necessary to play again. You can accumulate up to the maximum number of reservations. Therefore, 4 new reservations will be accumulated while the reservation 4 is being used up after the end of this small hit V jackpot game A, so 5 new reservations will be accumulated in the small hit V jackpot game that is executed with the expiration of the reservation 4. In the V jackpot game, which is executed after the round and the newly accumulated 4 pieces of reservation are used up, it is "5 rounds x 4 = 20 rounds", and the ball enters a specific area. There are some parts that depend on the player's game progress, such as whether there is a hold or not, so the figures are provisional (assuming that the player shoots the game ball at a specific area and always accumulates the hold to the upper limit in a high base state) However, since it is known at this point that a total of 45 rounds are scheduled to be executed, an image indicating that 45 stars have been obtained can be displayed. In addition, as a modification, the image for acquiring stars may be executed during fluctuation or during a small winning game. Furthermore, instead of displaying an image showing that 45 stars have been obtained, as in this production example, an image showing that 30 stars have been obtained is displayed, and new changes and new small changes that will be executed after that are displayed. An image indicating that 15 pieces have been obtained during a winning game or a new small winning V jackpot game may be displayed. That is, instead of notifying the entire number of rounds scheduled to be executed in one notification, the number of rounds scheduled to be executed may be notified at multiple timings.

After that, the small hit V jackpot game progresses. The number of stars acquired is always displayed, and the number of prize balls acquired during the small hit V jackpot game is also cumulatively displayed (FIG. 73(e)). Then, since the first small win V jackpot game was the small win V jackpot game B, when the small win V jackpot game ends, the state shifts to a low base state. Then, when Pending 1 among Pending 1 to 4 is exhausted, Pending 2 before Pending 1 is used becomes Pending 1, Pending 3 before Pending 1 is being used becomes Pending 1, and Pending 4 before Pending 1 is being consumed becomes Pending 1. Shift to hold 3. In addition, the second special symbol is displayed in a variable manner as the hold 1 is exhausted (FIG. 73(f)). After that, the variation stops, and a simple symbol corresponding to the stop display of variation of the second special symbol is displayed, and "3V3" is displayed. After that, a small winning game is executed, and a small "Aim for V!!!" is displayed, which is an instruction display instructing to shoot the game ball aiming at (the specific area of) the big winning hole P751 (Fig. 73 ( g)). After that, the second small hit V jackpot game starts (FIG. 73(h)).

Thereafter, as before, the execution of the second small win V jackpot game is completed, and the third small win V jackpot game starts and ends (FIG. 74(i)). After that, as before, the suspension is extinguished, which is the trigger for the 4th small win V jackpot game, and the execution of the 4th small win V jackpot game starts and ends (Fig. 74 (j), (k)) , (l), (m)). Since this fourth small win V jackpot game is a small win V jackpot game A, after the small win V jackpot game ends, the game shifts to a high base state. Therefore, it becomes possible to accumulate the reservation related to the second special symbol up to the upper limit again, and in order to suggest or notify that fact, a telop image saying "Charge!" is displayed on the front, and the change The circle images corresponding to the execution/non-execution and the occurrence/non-occurrence of pending 1 to 4 are also displayed again (FIG. 74(n)).

After that, when four reservations related to the second special symbol occur, a small display saying "Charge completed!" is displayed indicating that the reservation has reached the upper limit, and then the fluctuation stops, and the second A simple symbol is displayed as a stop display corresponding to the stop display of the variation of the special symbol, and "6V6" is displayed (FIG. 74(o)). Regarding the holds 1 to 4 held this time, hold 1, 3, and 4 are the hold that will trigger the execution of small winning game B, and hold 2 is the hold that will trigger the execution of the small winning game A (hold 2 Due to the extinguishment of Hold 3, which is used up after the execution of the small hit V jackpot game that is executed as a trigger, only one hold is accumulated, and three new holds can be created. "5 rounds x 3" will be additionally scheduled), during the jackpot start demo of the 5th small win V jackpot game, an image indicating that 15 additional stars have been obtained will be displayed, The number of stars in the image is updated from 45 to 60 (FIG. 74(p)).

With the above configuration, the pachinko game machine P in the 9-1 embodiment is scheduled to execute a small hit V jackpot game in which the number of pieces exceeds the upper limit number of reservations related to the second special symbol (4 pieces). It is possible to suggest or inform the player in advance that the round will last, and it is not known how long the round will last (small win V. It is unknown how many times the jackpot game will be executed, all the reservations related to the second special symbol) The small win V jackpot game continues until the small win V jackpot game B becomes the small win V jackpot game B).

[10th Example]
As the pachinko gaming machine P of the present embodiment to the ninth embodiment, the pachinko gaming machine P having various playability has been described. The tenth embodiment is an example of the content with further improvements.Hereinafter, only the underlying technology and the differences from this embodiment will be described in detail, and the explanation of common points will be omitted or simplified. It should be noted that, among the elements constituting the pachinko game machine P of the tenth embodiment, the same reference numerals are given to the elements that are the same as or correspond to the elements explained in the base technology or the present embodiment.

The pachinko game machine P in the tenth embodiment has a board configuration similar to that shown in FIG. 53, and adopts the "small hit rush" specification. The pachinko gaming machine P of the tenth embodiment has the following features. (A) The lottery results for the first special symbol include "hit" and "lost". (B) The lottery results for the second special symbol include "hit," "small win," and "miss." (C) The jackpot probability in the low probability state is 1/300, the jackpot probability in the high probability state is 1/50, and the small win probability in the low probability state and the high probability state is 1/1.2. (D) "Parallel control (parallel digestion)" is adopted. (E) In the low probability low base state, the low probability high base state, and the high probability high base state, the game progresses based on the first special symbol, so in these game states, the first special symbol is The fluctuation time is relatively shorter than the second special symbol (the average fluctuation time of the first special symbol is 20 seconds on average in the low probability low base state, and an average of 3 seconds in the low probability high base state and the high probability high base state) seconds, but the average time of the second special symbol is 10 minutes on average in the low probability low base state, the low probability high base state, and the high probability high base state). (F) In the high probability low base state, the game progresses mainly with the second special symbol, so in this game state, the second special symbol has a relatively shorter fluctuation time than the first special symbol ( The average fluctuation time of the second special symbol is 2 seconds on average in the high probability low base state, but the average time of the first special symbol is 5 minutes on average in the high probability low base state). (G) As the jackpot symbol related to the first special symbol, jackpot symbol A (10R probability variable jackpot), which triggers the transition to a high probability low base state that is variable probability until the next time, is selected at 30%, and high probability that is variable probability until the next time. Jackpot symbol B (5R probability variable jackpot), which triggers the transition to the high probability base state, is selected at 30%, and jackpot symbol C (5R normal jackpot), which triggers the transition to the low probability high base state of 100 rotations, is selected at 40%. is selected. (H) As the jackpot symbol related to the second special symbol, the probability is variable until the next time, and if you win in the high probability low base state, it will be an opportunity to shift to the high probability low base state, and you will win in the high probability high base state. In this case, the jackpot symbol D (10R probability variable jackpot) that triggers the transition to the high probability high base state is 60%, and the jackpot symbol E (10R normal jackpot) that triggers the transition to the low probability high base state of 100 rotations is 40%. is selected.

In this way, the pachinko gaming machine P in the tenth embodiment responds to the base state when the jackpot symbol D is won as the second special symbol (when the fluctuation of the second special symbol winning the jackpot symbol D starts). The feature is that the base state to which the jackpot game corresponding to the jackpot symbol D is transferred after completion of execution is different. Furthermore, the pachinko gaming machine P in the tenth embodiment, according to the base state when the jackpot symbol D is won as the second special symbol (when the fluctuation of the second special symbol winning the jackpot symbol D starts), The time between rounds during the execution of the jackpot game corresponding to the jackpot symbol D (the closing time of the jackpot P751 between round games) is configured to be different. Specifically, FIG. 75(a) shows the time between rounds of the jackpot game executed when the jackpot symbol D is won in the high probability low base state, and is set to 1.5 seconds. On the other hand, FIG. 75(b) shows the time between rounds of the jackpot game executed when jackpot symbol D is won in the high probability high base state, and is set to 3.5 seconds. In both of FIGS. 75(a) and 75(b), the opening time of the big prize opening P751 is 30 seconds in common for all rounds.

By configuring as described above, even if the same jackpot symbol is won, the progress status (progress speed) of the special game to be executed thereafter can be made different. In the pachinko game machine P of the tenth embodiment, by continuing to win the jackpot symbol D in a high probability low base state, it is possible to accelerate the progress of the jackpot game, realizing speedy gameplay. In addition, by continuing to win the jackpot symbol D in a high-probability, high-base state, it is possible to delay the progress of the jackpot, and it is possible to realize a gentle gameplay, allowing for a well-defined gameplay. It can be realized.

The high probability low base state is a state of small hit rush, and the cycle of "2nd special symbol fluctuation → small winning winning → small winning game → 2nd special symbol fluctuation →..." is repeated. , so that there is no sense of discomfort even when playing a jackpot game, "the time from the start of the small winning fluctuation of the second special symbol in the high probability low base state to the opening of the big winning opening P751 in the small winning game" is set to a high probability low It is preferable that the inter-round time (1.5 seconds) of the jackpot game executed when jackpot symbol D is won in the base state be approximately the same.

In addition, as a modified example, the time between rounds of the jackpot game executed when jackpot symbol D is won in a low base state (for example, low probability low base state) is set to 3.5 seconds, and the time between rounds in a high base state (for example, , low probability high base state, or high probability high base state), the time between rounds of the jackpot game executed when the jackpot symbol D is won may be set to 1.5 seconds, and if configured in such a manner, , it is possible to realize a gaming property in which a large amount of game balls can be acquired in a short time by accelerating the progress of a jackpot game during a series of games.

As another modification, the time between rounds of the jackpot game executed when jackpot symbol D is won in a low base state (for example, low probability low base state) is set to 1.5 seconds, and the time between rounds of the jackpot game is set to 1.5 seconds, and , low probability high base state, or high probability high base state), the time between rounds of the jackpot game executed when the jackpot symbol D is won may be set to 3.5 seconds, and if configured in such a manner, , it is possible to realize a gaming property in which the progress of the jackpot game during a series of games is slowed down so that the player can enjoy the series of games for a long time.

[Eleventh Example]
As the pachinko gaming machine P of the present embodiment to the tenth embodiment, we have described the pachinko gaming machine P having various playability. The eleventh embodiment is an example of a further modification of the content.Hereinafter, only the underlying technology and the differences from this embodiment will be described in detail, and the explanation of common points will be omitted or simplified. It should be noted that, among the elements constituting the pachinko game machine P of the eighth embodiment, the same reference numerals are given to the elements that are the same as or correspond to the elements explained in the underlying technology or the present embodiment.

(Board configuration)
First, the configuration of the board configuration (configuration of the gaming area) of the Pachinko gaming machine P of the eleventh embodiment will be explained.

The pachinko game machine P of the eleventh embodiment can be implemented with almost the same board configuration as the pachinko game machine on which it is based as shown in FIG. Since the pachinko gaming machine P of the eleventh embodiment adopts the gaming characteristics (specs) described later, a specific area P760 is provided inside the big prize opening (attacker) P751.
The configuration includes the following. Note that a different board configuration may be adopted as appropriate as long as the change does not change the gameplay (or is a minor change) as disclosed below.

(spec)
Next, the gaming performance (specs) of the pachinko gaming machine P of the eleventh embodiment will be explained. In addition, in this explanation, regarding the "settings" (setting values) that affect the ball dispensing performance, only the specifications related to "Setting 1" will be explained, but various numerical values related to other setting values will be set as appropriate. It is.

As shown in FIG. 76, the pachinko gaming machine P of the 11th embodiment has a jackpot probability of 1/300 (common to the first special symbol and the second special symbol) and a small win probability of 35/100 (the second special symbol). (design only) is set. In addition, the number of prize balls is 3 balls for the first starting prize opening (first starting opening) P711, 1 ball for the second starting winning opening (second starting opening) P721, 3 balls for the left general winning opening P731L, and 3 balls for the right general winning opening The winning hole P731R is set to 1 ball, and the big winning hole (attacker) P751 is set to 15 balls.

Furthermore, the pachinko gaming machine P of the 11th embodiment employs ball entry order processing control in which balls entered first are given priority, and both the first special symbol and the second special symbol are reserved. If it exists, the reservation that occurred first is given priority and displayed in a variable manner (regardless of whether the reservation is related to the first special symbol or the second special symbol, the reservation is consumed in the order in which the reservation occurs). In addition, in the pachinko gaming machine P of the eleventh embodiment, only the second special symbol is configured to have a "small win" as a special symbol lottery result, but the first special symbol may be configured to have a "small win". is also possible. In addition, if the game nature of the Pachinko gaming machine P of the eleventh embodiment is not lost, the first special symbol priority digestion control may be applied as a modification, in addition to the input order digestion control, or the first special symbol priority digestion control may be applied. 2 Special symbol priority digestion control may be applied. In addition, in the external information output process, when outputting information (referred to as a high base signal) corresponding to the operating state (base state) of the electric chew support function as a signal related to the gaming state, when the high base state ends and the low base signal Even if the state is shifted to, if there is a hold related to the second special symbol, the output of the high base signal may be continued until all the holds related to the second special symbol are extinguished. In addition, in such a configuration, when transitioning from the high base state to the low base state, there are two reservations related to the first special symbol and four reservations related to the second special symbol. , the order of digestion is "Reservation related to the second special symbol → Reservation related to the second special symbol → Reservation related to the first special symbol → Reservation related to the first special symbol → Reservation related to the second special symbol → Reservation related to the second special symbol If the hold related to the second special symbol is ``reserved'', (1) the output of the high base signal may be continued until all of these are extinguished, or (2) the output of the high base signal may be temporarily changed to the first special symbol after the hold related to the second special symbol is extinguished. In the case of extinguishing such a hold, even if the hold relating to the second special symbol still remains, the output of the high base signal may be interrupted after the hold relating to the second special symbol is extinguished.

The pachinko gaming machine P of the 11th embodiment employs a gaming feature (spec) called "Small hit V" described as the basic technology, and in addition to the case where a "big hit" is achieved in the special symbol lottery, A "small win" occurs in the special symbol lottery, and when a game ball passes through a specific area P760 inside the big prize opening P751 (also referred to as an entering ball) during a small win game that is subsequently executed, the accessory continuous operation device is activated and a jackpot game is executed. In the eleventh embodiment, when a small win game develops into a jackpot game, a series of special game states from the start of the small win game to the end of the jackpot game are referred to as "small win V" or "small win development jackpot". ” etc.

The types of jackpots (including small hit V) in the special gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine P of the 11th embodiment are 4R jackpots (first special symbol jackpot, second special symbol jackpot, and second special symbol small win V). ) is provided. In addition, regarding a specific game that is an advantageous normal game state, the pachinko gaming machine P of the 11th embodiment does not have a probability variation function, but has an electric chew support function (electronic support) after each jackpot (including small hit V). A specific game (high base state) is executed by activating the function.

In the pachinko gaming machine P of the 11th embodiment, as shown in FIG. 76, when a small hit is won in the winning/failure drawing for the second special symbol, the small winning symbols A and B are selected as the symbol drawing for the second special symbol. You will be elected to one of them. In other words, when a small hit is won in the lottery for the second special symbol, the stopping mode of the second special symbol is the stopping mode corresponding to the small winning symbol A (for example, 8 LEDs on the second special symbol display device P52 Among them, the stop mode in which the 1st, 2nd, 7th, and 8th are lit and the others are off), the stop mode corresponding to the small winning symbol B (for example, among the 8 LEDs in the second special symbol display device P52) A stop mode in which the 2nd, 3rd, 6th, 7th, or 8th light is on and the others are off) will be the stop state. When winning a small hit, the small winning symbols A and B are allocated to 25% and 75%.

Here, the small winning games that are executed when the small winning symbols A and B stop (these are referred to as small winning games A and B) are "small winning games that are easy to win V" as described above. , it is not a "small winning game where it is difficult to win a prize" as mentioned above. In addition, the small winning V jackpot game (referred to as small winning V jackpot game A) when the ball enters a specific area in small winning game A is a 4R jackpot, and when the ball enters a specific area in small winning game B The small win V jackpot game (referred to as the small win V jackpot game B) is also 4R. Jackpot game (4R jackpot which is jackpot game A corresponding to jackpot symbol A in the first special symbol, 4R jackpot which is jackpot game B corresponding to jackpot symbol B in the second special symbol) and small win V jackpot game A, B After the end of the jackpot game, the game shifts to a high base state.

FIG. 77 shows a game flow in the pachinko gaming machine P of the eleventh embodiment. Here, the "normal mode" is a low base state, and the game progresses mainly using the first special symbol. "Challenge Mode", "Battle Mode", and "Consecution Mode" are in a high base state (however, there is a second special that occurs pending during a high base state and is consumed in a low base state immediately after the high base state ends). (including symbol variations corresponding to reservations related to symbols), and the game progresses with the second special symbol as the main character. Although the details will be described later, in the pachinko gaming machine P of the eleventh embodiment, the conditions for transitioning from the high base state to the low base state include a specified number of symbol fluctuations (the second special symbol fluctuates 7 times or 255 times). (or the first special symbol changes 10 times) and the normal electric accessory P770 operates a prescribed number of times (for example, the normal electric accessory P770 operates once or 255 times).

In the 11th embodiment, the probability of winning a normal symbol is 1/1 in both the low base state and the high base state, the number of reserved regular symbols is 4, and the normal electric accessory corresponding to the winning symbol of the normal symbol Opening pattern of P770 (operation pattern corresponding to one operation of the ordinary electric accessory P770 triggered by the normal symbol stopping at the hit symbol, that is, "one operation of the ordinary electric accessory P770" = " ``Executing one set of opening patterns that open one or more normal electric accessories P770'') is an opening pattern of 0.01 seconds x 1 opening in the low base state, and 1.5 seconds in the high base state. It is an opening pattern of opening x 3 times, but in any of the opening patterns, the operation of the normal electric accessory P770 will be forcibly terminated by two balls entering the ordinary electric accessory P770 (for example, 1.5 seconds) If a second ball is detected during the second 1.5 second release in the ×3 release, the remaining time of the second release, which is the subsequent release, will be forcibly terminated, and the third ball will be released. ).

By hitting the jackpot with the first special symbol in the normal mode (FIG. 77(a)), the game shifts to the challenge mode after the jackpot game A ends (FIG. 77(b)). The termination condition a, which is the termination condition of the high base state in the challenge mode, is the following (a1) to (a5). Note that the high base state does not end when all of (a1) to (a5) are satisfied, but the high base state ends when any one of (a1) to (a5) is satisfied. (a1) The number of fluctuations of the first special symbol (the number of consecutive losing fluctuations) is 10 (a2) The number of fluctuations of the second special symbol (the number of consecutive losing fluctuations) is 1 (a3) Normal electric accessory P770 is activated once (a release pattern of 1.5 seconds release x 3 times is executed once, and if the second ball is detected within one release pattern, the release pattern is forced even in the middle) (It is counted as one operation of the normal electric accessory P770 is completed), however, the high base state ends when the first operation starts (when the opening of the ordinary electric accessory P770 starts) (a4) Jackpot The game (either jackpot game A or B) is executed, however, after the jackpot game or small win V jackpot game ends, the state returns to the high base state (a5) Small win V jackpot game (small win V jackpot game A, Either B) is executed, however, after the jackpot game or small win V jackpot game ends, the state will go back to the high base state.

In addition, when (a1) is satisfied, the end timing of the high base state in the challenge mode is the timing when the 10th symbol variation of the first special symbol ends (symbol stop timing, timing immediately before the start of the symbol fixing time) If (a2) is satisfied, the timing is the end of the first symbol variation of the second special symbol (symbol stop timing, timing immediately before the start of the symbol fixed time), and if (a3) is satisfied , when the first operation of the ordinary electric accessory P770 starts (when the opening of the ordinary electric accessory P770 starts), and when (a4) is satisfied, the symbol fluctuation in which the jackpot symbol A or B stops occurs. This is the timing at which the symbol change ends (symbol stop timing, the timing immediately before the start of the symbol fixing time), and if (a5) is satisfied, the timing at which the symbol variation at which the small winning symbol A or B stops (symbol stop timing, the symbol (timing immediately before the start of the fixed time).

The challenge mode is basically a high base state that continues until (a1) to (a5) are satisfied, but since it shifts from the normal mode where the game progresses mainly using the first special symbol to the challenge mode, Basically, immediately after entering the challenge mode (immediately after the end of the jackpot game from the normal mode), there is no second special symbol pending (there are 0), and in order to cause the second special symbol to be pending, it is necessary to It is necessary to activate the electric accessory P770. However, in the challenge mode, the high base state ends when the first operation of the normal electric accessory starts, so after the first operation of the normal electric accessory starts, the game ball is placed in the second starting prize hole P721. When the ball enters and the second special symbol is suspended, it is already in a low base state, and when the second special symbol corresponding to the suspension starts to fluctuate, it is already in a low base state. In addition, since one operation of the normal electric accessory P770 is completed by two balls entering the ordinary electric accessory P770, up to two second special symbols can be reserved. In other words, During the fluctuation of the second special symbol, which is extinguished immediately after the second special symbol is suspended due to the first ball entering and begins to fluctuate, one second special symbol can be suspended (challenge mode) In this case, since the high base state ends at the start of the first operation of the normal electric accessory, the normal electric accessory P770 will not operate any more, so the second special symbol will no longer be suspended.) . The challenge mode also falls under the challenge mode even during symbol fluctuations corresponding to the reservation of the second special symbols that are digested in these low base states. Then, after all the symbol fluctuations corresponding to the reservations related to the second special symbols that are consumed in the low base state are executed as losing fluctuations, the mode shifts to the normal mode (FIG. 77(e)). In addition, the symbol fluctuation corresponding to the reservation related to the second special symbol corresponding to end condition a (symbol fluctuation corresponding to the reservation related to the second special symbol digested in the low base state) is the summary fluctuation as described above. It may be performed as

By hitting the jackpot (including the small hit V jackpot) with the first special symbol or the second special symbol in the challenge mode (Fig. 77(c)), the game shifts to the battle mode after the jackpot game (including the small win V jackpot game) ends. (FIG. 77(d)), or shift to consecutive game mode (FIG. 77(f)).

Specifically, when the small win V jackpot game B is executed in the challenge mode, the game shifts to the battle mode, and when the jackpot game B is executed in the challenge mode, or when the small win V jackpot game A is executed. , shift to continuous mode.

The termination condition b, which is the termination condition of the high base state in the battle mode, is the following (b1) to (b5). Note that the high base state does not end when all of (b1) to (b5) are satisfied, but the high base state ends when any one of (b1) to (b5) is satisfied. (b1) The number of fluctuations of the first special symbol (the number of consecutive losing fluctuations) is 10 times (b2) The number of fluctuations of the second special symbol (the number of consecutive losing fluctuations) is 1 (b3) Normal electric accessory P770 is activated 255 times (a release pattern of 1.5 seconds release x 3 times is executed 255 times, and if the second ball is detected within one release pattern, the release pattern is forced even in the middle) (It is counted as one operation of the normal electric accessory P770 is completed), however, the high base state ends at the start of the 255th operation (when the normal electric accessory P770 starts to open) (b4) Jackpot The game (either jackpot game A or B) is executed, however, after the jackpot game or small win V jackpot game ends, the state returns to the high base state (b5) Small win V jackpot game (small win V jackpot game A, Either B) is executed, however, after the jackpot game or small win V jackpot game ends, the state will go back to the high base state.

In addition, when (b1) is satisfied, the end timing of the high base state in the battle mode is the timing when the 10th symbol variation of the first special symbol ends (symbol stop timing, timing immediately before the start of the symbol fixed time) If (b2) is satisfied, the timing is the end of the 255th symbol variation of the second special symbol (symbol stop timing, timing immediately before the start of the symbol fixed time), and if (b3) is satisfied , it is the start of the 255th operation of the normal electric accessory P770 (the start of opening of the ordinary electric accessory P770), and when (b4) is satisfied, the symbol fluctuation in which the jackpot symbol A or B stops occurs. This is the timing at which the symbol change ends (symbol stop timing, the timing immediately before the start of the symbol fixing time), and when (b5) is satisfied, the timing at which the symbol variation at which the small hit symbol A or B stops (symbol stop timing, the symbol (timing immediately before the start of the fixed time).

Battle mode is basically a high base state that continues until (b1) to (b5) are satisfied, but it occurs pending during this high base state, and immediately after the high base state ends, it changes to a low base state. It should be noted that the battle mode also applies to the period of symbol variation corresponding to the suspension of the second special symbol that is consumed. Specifically, when (b1) is satisfied, if there are 4 reservations related to the second special symbol (in addition, the small win is won first, or the small win V jackpot game is executed first) (This almost never happens due to the fact that it can happen), and even if you go to a low base state, you will be in battle mode until you clear all 4 of the reservations. However, in terms of performance, the performance while the second special symbol is changing in the high base state and the performance while the second special symbol is fluctuating after the high base state (in the low base state) are the same as the content of the performance. are configured so that they are different. The details will be described later, but the performance during the fluctuation of the second special symbol in the high base state is to execute a performance (retention charge performance) that prompts the player to accumulate the reservation of the second special symbol, and the high base state ends. The subsequent performance (in the low base state) during the fluctuation of the second special symbol will be performed as a summary fluctuation as described above (the lottery result of the current fluctuation display and one or more of the fluctuations that will start from the next time onwards). This is a dramatic variable display that notifies all winning/failure lottery results, including preliminary judgment information on hold, using one variable display. Specifically, it is a variable display that displays multiple second special symbols that are digested in a low base state. Based on the advance determination information regarding the reservation of , the fluctuation related to the reservation of the second special symbol that is consumed first in the low base state is displayed in the fluctuation related to the reservation of the second special symbol that is consumed first in the low base state. This is an effect in which all winning/failure lottery results are announced in a single fluctuating display, including the lottery results and one or more pending pre-judgment information whose fluctuations will start from the next time onwards. If there is a hold related to the second special symbol that occurs during the high base state corresponding to end condition b and is consumed in the low base state immediately after the high base state ends, the symbol corresponding to the hold After all the fluctuations are executed as erroneous fluctuations, a transition is made to the normal mode (FIG. 77(j)).

By hitting the jackpot (including the small hit V jackpot) with the first special symbol or the second special symbol in the battle mode (Fig. 77 (g)), the game shifts to the battle mode after the jackpot game (including the small win V jackpot game) ends. (FIG. 77(i)), or shift to consecutive game mode (FIG. 77(h)).

Specifically, when jackpot games A and B or small hit V jackpot games A and B are executed in a high base state in battle mode, the game shifts to continuous game mode and in a low base state in battle mode. When the small win V jackpot game B is executed, the game shifts to the battle mode, and when the jackpot game B is executed in the battle mode, or when the small win V jackpot game A is executed, the game shifts to the consecutive game mode.

End conditions c, which are the end conditions for the high base state in consecutive game mode, are (c1) to (c6) below. Note that the high base state does not end when all of (c1) to (c6) are satisfied, but when any one of (c1) to (c6) is satisfied. (c1) The number of fluctuations of the first special symbol (the number of consecutive losing fluctuations) is 10 times (c2) The number of fluctuations of the second special symbol (the number of consecutive losing fluctuations) is 255 times (c3) Normal electric accessories P770 is activated 255 times (a release pattern of 1.5 seconds release x 3 times is executed 255 times, and if the second ball is detected within one release pattern, the release pattern is forced even in the middle) (It is counted as one activation of the normal electric accessory P770 is completed), however, the high base state ends at the start of the 255th operation (when the opening of the ordinary electric accessory P770 starts) (c4) Jackpot The game (either jackpot game A or B) is executed, however, after the jackpot game or small win V jackpot game ends, the state returns to the high base state (c5) Small win V jackpot game (small win V jackpot game A, (Either B) is executed, however, after the jackpot game or small win V jackpot game is over, it will go back to the high base state (c6) If you win a small win or jackpot in the high base state and win a small win V jackpot game or jackpot If the game is executed three times in a row (if the event "a small win is won in a high base state and a small win V jackpot game is executed" occurs three times in a row), more specifically, the high base state Jackpot games A, B and small win V which are executed by winning or losing lottery and fluctuating display. If jackpot games A and B occur three times in a row (not three times each, but one of them three times in a row) , After the third jackpot game A, B or small jackpot V jackpot game ends, the game is forcibly shifted to the low base state (in addition, the jackpot game or small jackpot V jackpot game is executed in the high base state in the battle mode. If the game moves to consecutive game mode, the jackpot game or small win V jackpot game in the high base state in the battle mode will be counted as the first jackpot game or small win V jackpot game in the high base state. When a jackpot game or a small-hit V-jackpot game is executed twice in consecutive game mode, the game shifts to a low base state after the jackpot game or small-hit V-jackpot game ends.)

In addition, when (c1) is satisfied, the end timing of the high base state in the consecutive winning mode is the timing when the 10th symbol change of the first special symbol ends (symbol stop timing, timing immediately before the start of the symbol fixing time) ), and when (c2) is satisfied, the timing is the end of the 255th symbol variation of the second special symbol (symbol stop timing, timing immediately before the start of the symbol fixed time), and (c3) is satisfied. In this case, it is at the start of the 255th operation of the ordinary electric accessory P770 (when the opening of the ordinary electric accessory P770 starts), and when (c4) is satisfied, the symbol variation where the jackpot symbol A or B stops. is the timing at which the symbol change ends (symbol stop timing, the timing immediately before the start of the symbol fixing time), and when (c5) is satisfied, the timing at which the symbol variation at which the small winning symbol A or B stops (symbol stop timing, (timing immediately before the start of the symbol fixing time). In addition, when (c6) is satisfied, as described above, it is after the third (third consecutive) jackpot game A, B or small win V jackpot game in the high base state is completed.

Consecutive game mode is basically a high base state that continues until (c1) to (c6) are satisfied, but it occurs pending during this high base state and immediately after the high base state ends, the low base state It should be noted that the period of symbol variation corresponding to the suspension of the second special symbol to be consumed in is a battle mode. Specifically, when (c6) is satisfied, that is, when the third jackpot game A, B or small hit V jackpot game in the high base state is executed (FIG. 77(k)), then the low base state , and a battle mode in a low base state (more specifically, a battle mode in which the suspension related to the second special symbol that occurred during consecutive shots mode is digested in a low base state, that is, A transition is made to the battle mode (FIG. 77(i)) in which the above-described collective fluctuation is performed without performing the above-described suspended charge effect (FIG. 77(i)). After all the symbol fluctuations corresponding to the hold related to the second special symbol digested in the battle mode in the low base state are executed as losing fluctuations, the mode will shift to the normal mode (Fig. 77 (j)). , When small hit V jackpot game B is executed in battle mode in a low base state, the transition to battle mode is performed, and jackpot game B is executed in battle mode in a low base state, or small win V When the jackpot game A is executed, the game shifts to consecutive game mode. In addition, in the 11th embodiment, since the small hit probability in the second special symbol is as high as 35/100, the game progresses normally (by the player continuing to hit right, it is difficult to enter the specific area). Since it is almost impossible to satisfy (c2) and (c3) by avoiding loss of ball opportunities, the transition from the consecutive game mode to the normal mode without going through the jackpot game is not shown in Figure 77. I would also like to add that this is not the case.

Furthermore, the pachinko game machine P of the eleventh embodiment is equipped with a "relief function". Specifically, after the end of the special game (after the small hit V jackpot or after the jackpot game), the "relief function" occurs when the fluctuation stops at the 900th rotation (when the symbol fixing time elapses) (as a modification, the special The "relief function" may occur after 900 revolutions have passed after the end of the high base state after the end of the game), thereby shifting from the normal mode to the consecutive game mode (FIG. 77(l)).

FIG. 78 shows the conditions for ending the high base state that are set after the end of the jackpot game. Note that the termination condition when the "relief function" is activated is not set in the event of a jackpot game or a small win V jackpot game, so it is omitted in FIG. 78.

In FIGS. 78(a-1) and (a-2), regarding the ending conditions of the high base state that transitions after the end of the jackpot game (some of the ending conditions a to c mentioned above), the gaming state at the start of jackpot fluctuation and It shows what end conditions are set depending on the jackpot game type (jackpot symbol A or B).

FIG. 78 (a-1) shows that when jackpot game A or B is executed by starting fluctuation in a low base state and stopping at jackpot symbol A or B, jackpot game A or B ends. It shows the ending condition of the high base state that will be transferred later.After the jackpot game A is finished, the ending condition a is set (transition to challenge mode), and after the jackpot game is finished, the ending condition c is set (successful game mode) (transition to).

Figure 78 (a-2) shows that when jackpot game A or B is executed by starting fluctuation in a high base state and stopping at jackpot symbol A or B, jackpot game A or B ends. It shows the end condition of the high base state that will be transferred later. After the jackpot game A ends, the end condition c is set (transfers to consecutive game mode), and even after the jackpot game ends, the ending condition c is set (successful game A). mode). However, as described above, after the third (third consecutive) jackpot game A, B or small hit V jackpot game in the high base state ends, the game is forcibly shifted to the low base state.

In FIGS. 78(b-1) and (b-2), regarding the ending conditions of the high base state (part of the above-mentioned ending conditions a to c) that transitions after the end of the small winning V jackpot game, at the start of the small winning game It shows what kind of end conditions are set depending on the game state and the small winning game type (whether the small winning symbol is A or B).

Figure 78 (b-1) shows that when a small hit V jackpot game A or B is executed by starting fluctuation in a low base state and then stopping at a small winning symbol A or B, the small winning V jackpot game A or B is executed. It shows the ending condition of the high base state that shifts after the game A or B ends, and after the small hit V jackpot game A ends, the ending condition c is set (transfers to consecutive game mode), and the small hit V jackpot game After the end, end condition b is set (transition to battle mode).

Fig. 78 (b-2) shows that when a small hit V jackpot game A or B is executed by starting fluctuation in a high base state and stopping at a small winning symbol A or B, the small winning V jackpot game A or B is executed. It shows the ending condition of the high base state that shifts after game A or B ends, and after the small hit V jackpot game A ends, the ending condition c is set (transfers to consecutive game mode), and the small hit V jackpot game This indicates that the termination condition c is set even after the game ends (transition to consecutive game mode). However, as described above, after the third (third consecutive) jackpot game A, B or small hit V jackpot game in the high base state ends, the game is forcibly shifted to the low base state.

By configuring the pachinko game machine P of the 11th embodiment as described above, even if the high base state is the same, the end conditions of the high base state are different, thereby realizing various playability. Can be done. Specifically, after a jackpot game related to the first special symbol in a low base state, the game is shifted to challenge mode, and then the gameplay is like aiming for battle mode or consecutive winning mode. In this case, even if you are in a high base state, the probability of transitioning to consecutive game mode will not be extremely increased, but as long as you transition to battle mode, at least the first rotation of the second special symbol will be in a high base state. Therefore, it is possible to increase the probability of transitioning to continuous winning mode compared to challenge mode, and furthermore, in continuous winning mode, the next jackpot is virtually guaranteed until the number of consecutive jackpots in the high base state reaches a predetermined number. Therefore, it is possible to realize a rich gameplay experience in which even if the consecutive game mode ends, the player can shift to the battle mode again and aim to enter the consecutive game mode again.

FIG. 79 shows an example of the effect in the normal mode. More specifically, an example of the effect screen before and after the occurrence of the "relief function" is shown. In FIG. 79(a), a decorative pattern (P801) and a simple pattern (P801) corresponding to the variable display of the first special pattern are displayed in a variable manner, and a simple pending display (P814) is displayed at the top right of the screen. The number and the number 0 on the right side are displayed. In addition, the number on the left side shows the number of reservations of the first special symbol, and the number on the right side shows the number of reservations of the second special symbol. Further, at the bottom of the screen, there are provided a display area for a pending object (P811) corresponding to the holding of the first special symbol and a display area for the variable object display (P813) corresponding to the variation of the first special symbol. In the 11th embodiment, if the display area of the variable object display is displayed as a black circle (●) other than a white circle (○), it indicates that the variable display is in progress, and the display area is displayed as a white circle (○). If it is displayed, it means that it is not being fluctuated (fluctuating is stopped), and if the display area of the pending object display is displayed as a black circle (●) or something other than a white circle (○), there is a pending object. (a pending object exists), and a white circle (○) indicates that a pending object does not exist (a pending object does not exist). Regarding the pending objects, from the left, there are three pending objects: a pending object corresponding to the first pending of the first special symbol, a pending object corresponding to the second pending of the first special symbol, and the first special symbol. These are the pending object corresponding to the pending eye, and the pending object corresponding to the fourth pending of the first special symbol. In addition, on the right side of the screen, there is a number display (also referred to as "specific information") that indicates how many variations the current variation display is, counting from the end of the special game (after the small hit V jackpot or after the jackpot game). Here, "895th rotation" indicating that it is the 895th rotation is displayed. Note that this number of times is the cumulative value of the number of times the first special symbol changes and the number of times the second special symbol changes. Further, this number of times display also indicates that there are five revolutions remaining until the occurrence of the "relief function", considering that the "relief function" occurs after the end of the 900th revolution. In addition, as a modification, regarding this number of times display, from the end of the special game (after the small hit V jackpot or after the jackpot game) until the 800th rotation, special numbers such as "345th rotation" or "532nd rotation" will be displayed. While displaying a number corresponding to the number of changes after the end of the game (after the small hit V jackpot or after the jackpot game), after the 800th spin, it will display "99 remaining" or "17 remaining", etc. It may be configured to display a number corresponding to the remaining number of times until the "relief function" occurs. With this configuration, by changing the display format of the remaining number of times until the "relief function" occurs, it is possible to indicate that the "relief function" is approaching not only by the number of times but also by the display format (inciting). ) become possible.

FIG. 79(b) shows a situation in which the first special symbol is held up to the fourth symbol during the variation of the first special symbol of the 895th variation, and then the variation is stopped due to a miss. Next, FIG. 79(c) shows a situation where a new first special symbol has started changing, and the number display has been switched from "895th rotation" to "896th rotation". Next, FIG. 79(d) shows a situation in which the first special symbol is held up to the fourth symbol during the variation of the first special symbol of the 896th variation, and then the variation is stopped due to a miss.

Next, FIG. 79(e-1) shows a situation where a new first special symbol has started changing, and the number display has been switched from "896th rotation" to "897th rotation". In this situation, when the third hold out of the three remaining holds is extinguished, the fluctuation of the first special symbol at the 900th rotation is started, and when the fluctuation stops at the miss, the "relief function ” will occur, but if these three holds include a hit hold (a hold where the winning/failure lottery result is scheduled to be a “jackpot”), a jackpot will occur before the “relief function” occurs. At this point, the occurrence of the "relief function" is not confirmed as the game will move to challenge mode. Here, FIG. 79(e-1) shows that all three remaining holds are scheduled to have a losing lottery result, and are scheduled to be executed in the variation pattern A described in FIG. 81 etc. Therefore, a rescue function advance effect (also referred to as a "specific effect") is executed that suggests or informs the occurrence of the "relief function" such as "3 more times!". In this way, there is a hold that triggers the occurrence of the "relief function", and the lottery results for that hold and all holds that are extinguished before that (including current fluctuations) are scheduled to be lost. , and on the condition that the variation pattern A described in FIG. 81 etc. is pending execution, the relief function advance effect can be executed. At the 898th rotation, which is the next change in FIG. 79(e-1), "Two more times!" is displayed, and at the 899th rotation, which is the next change, "One more time!" is displayed. Furthermore, at the 900th rotation, which is the next variation, the rescue function advance effect is not executed, but "0 more times!" may be displayed.

Similarly to FIG. 79(e-1), FIG. 79(e-2) shows a situation where a new first special symbol variation has started from FIG. 79(d), and the number of times displayed is " 896th rotation" has been switched to "897th rotation," but among the remaining three holds, the first hold is a hit hold, so the rescue function advance performance has not been executed ("Remaining 3 times !” is not displayed). It should be noted that among the remaining three holds, the first hold is a loss hold (a hold in which the winning/failure lottery result is scheduled to be a "lose"), and the variation pattern E explained in FIG. 81 etc. is scheduled to be executed. Even if there is a certain hold, the rescue function advance presentation is not executed. The reason for this is that even though it is called a failure suspension, it is a suspension that corresponds to the fluctuation in which a highly anticipated performance (development performance C) is executed, so it is suggested in advance that a "relief function" will occur. If the advance performance of the rescue function to be notified is executed, even if the development performance C is executed because the missed pending performance is exhausted, the player will be able to notice first that the development performance C is a failure. This is because it may reduce the interest of the game. However, this losing hold is extinguished, the fluctuation related to the losing hold ends, and a new change starts, and after that, the winning/failure lottery results for all the holdings that are scheduled to be extinguished are scheduled to become losers, and, in addition, as shown in FIG. If the fluctuation pattern A explained in 2.2 is a hold that is scheduled to be executed, even if the relief function advance presentation (display of "3 times left!") is not executed before the expiration of the missed hold, the relief function will not be executed after that. Preliminary effects (for example, display of "One time left!", etc.) may be performed. As a modified example, among the remaining three holds, the first hold is a loss hold (a hold in which the winning/failure lottery result is scheduled to be a "lose"), and the variation pattern E described in FIG. 81 etc. is In the case of a hold that is scheduled to be executed, this losing hold will be extinguished, the change related to the lost hold will end, a new change will start, and after that, all holds that are scheduled to be extinguished will have a winning lottery result. Even if the fluctuation pattern A described in FIG. Display, etc.) may be configured so as not to be executed.

After three rotations from FIG. 79(e-1), as shown in FIG. 79(f), the first special symbol starts to fluctuate at the 900th rotation. Next, as shown in FIG. 79(g), when the fluctuation stops at the 900th rotation, a "relief function" is activated, and "Enter consecutive shots mode!" indicates the transition to consecutive shots mode. is displayed in the center of the screen, the words "Right hit!" are displayed in the center of the screen, and a very small "→" symbol indicating an arrow is displayed in the upper right corner of the screen. It is reported that the game situation is such that the player should play right (in a high base state).

With this configuration, it is possible to know in advance that the "relief function" will be finalized. Moreover, on the contrary, it is also possible to detect that there is a possibility that a highly anticipated performance will occur before the "relief function" occurs (the existence of fluctuations other than non-reach fluctuations).

In addition, the relief function advance performance is displayed for only one second immediately after the start of the fluctuation, and is configured to always end during the fluctuation (in other words, it is configured to be displayed for only one second after the start of the fluctuation. , the execution time of the relief function pre-production is shorter). Therefore, the rescue function preliminary performance is not executed (display is continued) during the symbol fixing time. Another variation is that when a hold occurs that causes the 900th revolution to start when it is digested (a hold that triggers the occurrence of the "relief function"), relief is immediately taken after the occurrence of the hold. It may be configured to perform a pre-function presentation. For example, a third hold occurs during the fluctuation of the 897th rotation, and this fluctuation is the fluctuation pattern A explained in FIG. If the hold is scheduled to be "missed") and the fluctuation pattern A explained in FIG. may be configured.

80 and 81 show examples of effects in the normal mode. More specifically, FIG. 80 shows the display mode of the pending object corresponding to the suspension of the first special symbol and the fluctuation object corresponding to the variation of the first special symbol in the 11th embodiment, and the jackpot expectation in each display mode. FIG. 81 shows an example of the fluctuation pattern and performance pattern of the first special symbol in the 11th embodiment, and the jackpot expectation level for each fluctuation pattern (each performance pattern). Note that the display mode of the pending object and the variable object may be the same, and the display mode of the pending object (the variable object) may differ depending on the display mode of the pending object (the variable object). It may change to a different display mode (this is the pending change described above; here, for convenience, the change in the variable object is also referred to as a pending change, but the term "variable right display", which will be described later), is also used to refer to a change in the pending object. (The change in the variable object may also be collectively referred to as a ``variable right display change.'') In addition, pending objects that are being changed will be moved to the left when the change ends and the pending object is newly used (e.g., the fourth pending object moves to the third object). (The first pending object moves to and displays the variable object, etc.) When changing on hold, it may change during the change, or it may change after the moving display. Also, when a pending change occurs, other display objects (for example, a mini character or an effect display on the screen) are displayed, and other display objects interfere with the pending object and change the pending object (for example, when the mini character turns into a stone). You may perform a change effect (such as changing the held object by throwing it, changing the held object after being surrounded by a golden effect display, etc.). Further, regarding the variation pattern A in FIG. 81, the variation time determined by the number of reservations of the first special symbol at the time of the start of variation of the first special symbol may be configured to be different, for example, When the number of pending items is 3, the fluctuation time is 4 seconds (this fluctuation is referred to as fluctuation M), and when the number of pending items at the start of fluctuation is 1, the fluctuation time is 13 seconds (this fluctuation is designated as fluctuation N). In this case, (1) It is possible to perform a change effect on the pending object that remains during the change whether it is a change M or a change N, but if it is a change M or a change N. The display mode of the change effect differs depending on the effect (in the case of change M, the held object changes after being surrounded by a golden effect display, and in the case of change N, the mini character throws a stone) A change effect that changes the pending object may be configured as shown in B), or (2) the trigger pending occurs when variation N is being executed and the remaining variation time is 4 seconds or more. Although the change effect A is not executed, the pending change may be configured to be executable when the trigger hold occurs (when the hold occurs, hold objects other than the initial group to be described later can be displayed from the beginning). In addition, even in this configuration, the configuration may be such that by starting the next variation, the pending variation (or the variation of the variation object) can be executed thereafter. It should be noted that hereinafter, the pending object and the variable object may be collectively referred to as a "variable right display."

As shown in FIG. 80, the display mode of the variable rights display is divided into an initial group, a first group, and a second group. The initial group has only a round and black display mode, and is an initial display mode, that is, an initial display mode in which no change in the variable rights display is performed. The first group includes four types of display modes: round and blue, round and green, round and red, and round and rainbow-colored. The relationship between the jackpot expectation levels of each display mode in the first group is blue < green < red < rainbow colors. In addition, the variable right display change of each display mode in the first group can change from blue to green, red, or rainbow color, and from green to red or rainbow color, It can change from red to rainbow color, but it cannot change from rainbow color. Further, while it is possible to change from the round and black display mode of the initial group to any display mode of the first group, any display mode of the first group can be changed from the round and black display mode of the initial group. There is no change in the display mode. Further, any display mode in the first group does not change to any display mode in the second group described later, and any display mode in the second group does not change to any display mode in the first group. It never changes. As a modification, none of the display modes in the second group changes to any display modes in the first group, but the blue in the first group changes to blue, green, red, and rainbow in the second group. Can change colors, from green in the first group to green, red, and rainbow colors in the second group; from red in the first group to red and rainbow colors in the second group; rainbow in the first group It may be possible that the color cannot be changed to any of the second group. This first group of variable rights displays is displayed both as a pending object and as the variable object.

The second group includes four types of display modes: rectangular and blue, rectangular and green, rectangular and red, and rectangular and rainbow colored. Further, in each display mode, characters are attached, such as "SP reach A", "SP reach B", "SP reach C", and "full rotation", respectively. These indicate or notify the content of the performance to be executed with the variation corresponding to this variation right display (for example, if a variation right display with a rectangular and green display format is displayed, With the corresponding variation, super reach B is executed). In addition, "SP reach A" indicates the aforementioned development effect A, "SP reach B" indicates the above-mentioned development effect B, "SP reach C" indicates the above-mentioned development effect C, and "full rotation" refers to the above-mentioned full rotation reach. (Full rotation performance) is shown. Furthermore, while it is possible to change from the round and black display mode of the initial group to any display mode of the second group, any display mode of the second group can also be changed from the round and black display mode of the initial group. There is no change in the display mode. In addition, any change in the display format of each display format in the second group cannot occur (in other words, if the round and black display format of the initial group changes to any display format of the second group, no further changes will occur) nothing to do).

As shown in FIG. 81, the variation patterns and production patterns of the first special symbol in the normal mode include variation patterns A to L and production patterns A to L. Fluctuation pattern A corresponds to production pattern A, and is an out-of-reach fluctuation in which no reach is formed (non-reach fluctuation). The fluctuation patterns B to K correspond to the performance patterns B to K, and are jackpot fluctuations or miss fluctuations in which a reach is formed (and then shifts to either normal reach or developed performances A to C). It should be noted that the pseudo-continuous performance may be executed more than once. The variation pattern L corresponds to the performance pattern L, and is a jackpot variation in which the pseudo-continuous performance is always performed three times, and then after the formation of the ready-to-reach, it shifts to the full-rotation performance.

Here, the correspondence between the variable right display and the variable pattern (performance pattern) will be explained. The black variable right display of the initial group can be displayed as a variable right display corresponding to the variable patterns A to L (performance patterns A to L). In addition, the correspondence between the variable right display and the variable pattern (performance pattern) will be explained. The variable right display of each display mode of the first group can be displayed as a variable right display corresponding to the variable patterns B to L (performance patterns B to L). Furthermore, the second group of blue fluctuating rights displays can be displayed as fluctuating rights displays corresponding to the fluctuating patterns C, F, I (effect patterns C, F, I). Further, the second group of green variable right displays can be displayed as variable right displays corresponding to the variable patterns D, G, J (performance patterns D, G, J). Further, the second group of red fluctuating rights displays can be displayed as fluctuating rights displays corresponding to the fluctuating patterns E, H, K (effect patterns E, H, K). Further, the second group of rainbow-colored fluctuating rights displays can be displayed as fluctuating rights displays corresponding to the fluctuating pattern L (performance pattern L).

In addition, the variation patterns C to K (performance patterns C to K) are configured to develop into advanced performances at "stage A", "stage B", "stage C", and "pre-reading stage" as described above. The background image of each stage (the stage you were staying at) switches to the background image of the development performance (and also switches to the BGM dedicated to the development performance), and the stage BGM is not output while the development performance is running, and the background image of the development performance changes. By displaying a production that indicates a failure in the production, the background image of each stage will be switched again (the background image of the stage that was displayed before the development production) within the variable display in which the development production was executed. In that situation, even if the background image of the stage is displayed, the stage BGM will not be output until the next variable display starts, and the BGM dedicated to the development will not be output (it will be silent, or it will not be the same as the stage BGM). A specific BGM that is different from the BGM dedicated to the development effect is output). Here, even if a production indicating a failure is displayed in the development production, the next variation will not start after switching to the background image of each stage (the background image of the stage that was displayed before the development production). An unexpected effect in which the variable right display (in this case, the variable object) that was displayed changes to the rainbow color of the first group is executed, and then the decorative pattern is displayed as "333" etc. to notify that it is a jackpot. You may perform a sexual performance. In that case, during the variation in the variation patterns C to K (performance patterns C to K), the variation right display (here, the relevant variation object) is displayed before the development production is displayed, but while the development production is displayed, the variation right display is displayed. The rights display (here, the variable object) may be hidden, and the variable rights display (here, the variable object) may be re-displayed after the development effect is displayed. In that case, only a part of the variable rights display may be hidden; for example, if the variable rights display (in this case, the variable object) before the development effect is displayed is the black variable rights display of the initial group. If the variable right display (in this case, the variable object) before displaying the advanced performance is a different variable right display, the variable right display may be continuously displayed even during the display of the advanced performance.

In addition, as a modified example, if the variable rights display is configured to be displayed even while the development effect is displayed, for example, in the variation pattern (performance pattern) that develops into development effect A, the first group is displayed before the development of development effect A. If the blue variable rights display is displayed, when the display of development effect A starts, it will be switched to the blue variation right display of the second group, and at the same time, before the development effect A develops, the green variable rights display of the first group will be changed. When the fluctuating right display is displayed, the configuration may be such that the display of the blue fluctuating right of the second group is not switched to when the development effect A starts to be displayed. In addition, as a further modification, a variable rights display is displayed when development production A or development production B is being displayed, while a variation rights display is not displayed when development production C or full rotation production is being displayed. may be configured.

By configuring this way, in the case of a fluctuating rights display change (fluctuating rights display mode) with low expectations, a further fluctuating rights display change is triggered by the development of a specific performance to incite and develop expectations. While indicating or informing the future, if there is a change in the display of variable rights with high expectations (variable rights display mode), by maintaining the high expectation level (variable rights display mode), It is possible to maintain expectations for

FIG. 82 shows an example of the effect in the normal mode. More specifically, FIG. 82 shows an example of a variation rights display change in a special look-ahead effect.

FIGS. 82(a-1) to (a-4) show situations in which a special look-ahead effect (a "restriction effect" to be described later, also referred to as a "restriction state" or "prefetch stop state") is not executed. ing. FIG. 82(a-1) shows a situation where the first special symbol is changing and there are three pending first special symbols. Regarding this third suspension, it is a trigger suspension, and when the suspension occurs, the special pre-reading effect execution lottery is not won, but the execution lottery of normal pre-reading effects such as variable rights display change is won ( Although the variable rights display change has not been executed when the suspension occurs, the variable rights display change is scheduled to be executed in response to the subsequent moving display of the variable rights display). FIG. 82(a-2) is the next variation of FIG. 82(a-1), in which a variable right display change is executed for the variable right display corresponding to the second suspension, and the blue display mode of the first group In addition, a background change (change to the above-mentioned pre-reading stage), which is a background pre-reading effect, is performed in which a band background saying "Entering the Chance Zone" (jackpot expectation rate 20%) is displayed at the top of the screen. It shows the situation where FIG. 82(a-3) is the next variation of FIG. 82(a-2), in which a variable right display change is executed for the variable right display corresponding to the first suspension, and the green display mode of the first group In addition, the background change (change to the above-mentioned pre-reading stage), which is a background pre-reading effect, is performed in which a band background saying "Entering the intense heat zone" (jackpot expectation rate 50%) is displayed at the top of the screen. It shows the situation where FIG. 82(a-4) is the next variation of FIG. 82(a-3), and when the trigger hold is expired, the variation right display change (here, the change of the variable object) is executed in the trigger variation. , the display mode has changed to the green color of the first group, and the background change of the background with "Entering the intense heat zone" (expectation of jackpot 50%) continues to be performed. It shows.

FIGS. 82(b-1) to (b-4) show situations in which a special look-ahead effect is being executed. FIG. 82(b-1) shows a situation where the first special symbol is changing and there are three pending first special symbols. This third hold is a trigger hold, and when the hold occurs, you win the lottery to execute a special look-ahead effect, and immediately after the hold occurs, special characters "Sealing ahead" will be displayed in the center of the screen. . This special character continues to be displayed until the trigger changes. Figure 82 (b-2) shows the state after the 3 fluctuations in Figure 82 (b-1) (during the trigger fluctuation that is executed when the trigger hold is extinguished), and the text "Sealing ahead" is changed to "Opening ahead". !” to indicate the situation. It should be noted that the text "Read-ahead release!" is displayed for 2 seconds immediately after the start of trigger fluctuation, and then disappears. FIG. 82(b-3) shows a situation in which a pseudo-continuous effect is being executed in which the decorative symbols temporarily stop 15 seconds after the start of trigger fluctuation and then fluctuate again. During this pseudo-continuous performance, a variable right display change (in this case, a change in the variable object) is executed, and the display mode changes to the blue color of the first group, and although it is not a pre-reading effect, the message "Entering the Opportunity Zone" is displayed at the top of the screen. ” (Jackpot expectation level 20%) is displayed. This shows a situation in which a background change is being executed. In addition, to indicate that this is the first pseudo-sequence performance, "Pseudo-sequence x 1" is also displayed at the bottom right of the screen. FIG. 82(b-4) shows a situation in which a pseudo continuous effect (second time) is being executed in which the decorative pattern temporarily stops again 30 seconds after the start of the trigger change and then changes again. During this pseudo-continuous performance, a variable right display change (in this case, a change in the variable object) is executed, and the display mode changes to the green color of the first group. This shows a situation in which a background change is being performed in which a strip background reading "Rush" (expectation level of jackpot 50%) is displayed. In addition, to indicate that this is the first pseudo-sequence performance, "Pseudo-sequence x 2" is also displayed at the bottom right of the screen. In this way, we have created an unprecedented performance that limits pre-reading effects such as variable rights display changes and background changes, and then executes the same or similar effects multiple times during a pseudo-sequential effect upon subsequent trigger changes. Running.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to realize a novel performance that feels strange, such as prohibiting pre-reading even when the pre-reading is in progress, and performing a pre-reading style performance despite the fluctuation (trigger fluctuation).

FIG. 83 shows an example of the effect in the normal mode. More specifically, FIG. 83 shows an example of a special performance using a performance accessory.

FIG. 83(a) shows a situation where the first special symbol is changing and there are two pending first special symbols. This second hold is a trigger hold, and when the hold occurs, the person wins the lottery to execute the special performance, which will be described later. (The situation is such that a special performance of a role model is scheduled to be performed in response to the moving display of). In addition, on the upper left side of the screen and on the front side of the screen, there is placed a performance accessory A on which the word "geki" is formed, which overlaps a part of the display area of the screen. The situation where this performance accessory A is located at the top left of the screen is the situation where it exists at the initial position (raised position), and the situation where it is located at the center left of the screen as shown in Figure 83 (c-1) is from the initial position. This is the lowered operating position (lowered position). Further, at the upper right of the screen and on the front side of the screen, there is arranged a production accessory B on which the word "fight" is formed, which overlaps a part of the display area of the screen. The situation where this performance accessory B is located at the upper right of the screen is the situation where it exists at the initial position (raised position), and the situation where it is located at the center right of the screen as shown in Figure 83 (c-1) is the situation where it exists from the initial position. This is the lowered operating position (lowered position). Regarding the performance accessories A and B, when they exist in the initial position, they light up and emit white light.

FIG. 83(b-1) is the next variation of FIG. 83(a), and the trigger variation is executed when only the performance accessory A moves from the initial position to the operating position and the trigger hold is exhausted. This shows a situation in which it is suggested or announced in advance that a line production (with a jackpot expectation of 5%) using production accessories A is scheduled to be performed. In other words, the role-playing special performance is executed as a look-ahead performance. Performance accessories A are lit and emit blue light, and performance accessories B are lit and emitted white. FIG. 83(b-2) is the next variation of FIG. 83(b-1), and shows a situation in which a line performance (jackpot expectation level 5%) using performance accessory A is actually executed. Performance accessory A flashes and emits blue light, and performance accessory B lights up and emits white light.

FIG. 83(c-1) is the next variation of FIG. 83(a), which is executed when both performance accessories A and B move from the initial position to the operation position, and the trigger hold is extinguished. This shows a situation in which it is suggested or announced in advance that an effect performance (with a jackpot expectation of 70%) using performance accessories A and B is scheduled to be executed due to trigger fluctuations. In other words, the role-playing special performance is executed as a look-ahead performance. The performance accessory A is lit and emitted in red, and the performance accessory B is also lit and emitted in red. Figure 83 (c-2) is the next variation of Figure 83 (c-1), and shows a situation in which an effect performance (jackpot expectation level 70%) using performance accessories A and B is actually executed. There is. The performance accessory A is flashing and emitting light in red, and the performance accessory B is also flashing and emitting light in red.

By configuring in this way, in a specification in which a plurality of movement patterns of performance accessories are provided depending on the degree of jackpot expectation, it becomes possible to visually estimate in advance which movement pattern of the performance accessory is used.

In addition, as a modified example, instead of executing a special performance as a look-ahead performance, the performance accessory A and/or the performance accessory B executes a special performance during the currently executing fluctuation, and the said fluctuation A production (line production) using the performance accessory A and/or the performance accessory B (suggested or announced in the role material special performance) corresponding to the character special performance performed earlier at the subsequent timing of the middle part. or effect production). In addition, if only the performance accessory A moves from the initial position to the action position, the expectation level for executing the dialogue production using the performance accessory A is 85%, and the effect production using the performance accessory A and B is executed. If the expectation level for performing the dialogue production using performance accessory A is 15% and both performance accessories A and B move from the initial position to the action position, the expectation level for performing the dialogue using performance accessory A is 30% and production accessory A , B may be configured such that the degree of expectation for executing the effect production using B is 70%.

FIG. 84 is a diagram showing an example of a performance in a high base state (challenge mode). First, a simple symbol corresponding to the second special symbol is displayed (stop display), a very small "→" symbol indicating an arrow is displayed at the top right of the screen, and the current gaming situation is a situation where you should hit right. (in high base state). In addition, an instruction "Charge!" is displayed, prompting the user to place the second special symbol on hold (FIG. 84(a)).

After that, a game ball enters the normal pattern operating port P741, the normal pattern changes and stops at the winning pattern, and the normal electric accessory P770 is activated. In order to notify the player that the normal electric accessory P770 is operating, "Opening..." is displayed at the bottom right of the screen. In addition, in the challenge mode, the high base state ends when the normal electric accessory P770 starts operating for the first time, so the "→" symbol showing an arrow at the top right of the screen indicates that the high base state ends when the normal electric accessory P770 starts operating for the first time. It becomes hidden (FIG. 84(b)).

After that, one game ball (first ball) enters the normal electric accessory P770, and one second special symbol is suspended, but it is quickly digested and a simple one that corresponds to the fluctuation of the second special symbol is generated. The pattern begins to change. With the start of this variation, "Challenge 1 Stock" is displayed, and it is announced that the first right of lottery for the second special symbol in the challenge mode has been acquired (FIG. 84(c)).

After that, one game ball (second ball) enters the normal electric accessory P770, and one second special symbol is held. Along with this reservation occurrence, "Challenge 2 Stock" is displayed, and it is reported that the second right of lottery for the second special symbol in the challenge mode has been acquired. At the same time, the operation of the normal electric accessory P770 ends when the second game ball enters, so the display of "Opening..." also disappears (FIG. 84(d)).

After that, since the variation of the second special symbol currently being executed is a variation in which the small winning symbol B stops, "333", which is a combination of the decorative symbol and the simple symbol corresponding to the small winning symbol B, is stopped and displayed. . At the same time, "Challenge 1 Success!" is also displayed to inform the player that the small winning symbol B has stopped (FIG. 84(e)). In addition, if both the fluctuation of the second special symbol currently being executed and the reservation of one existing second special symbol are loss fluctuations (missing reservation), the fluctuation of the second special symbol currently being executed is "343", which is a combination of decorative symbols and simple symbols corresponding to the missing symbol, is stopped and displayed, and "Challenge 1 Failed..." is displayed to notify the player that the missing symbol has stopped, and then ``343'', which is a combination of a decorative symbol and a simple symbol corresponding to the variation and the missed symbol, is stopped and displayed, and in order to inform the player that the missed symbol has stopped, "Challenge 2 Failed..." is displayed. Furthermore, in order to notify the player of the transition to the normal mode, a message ``Returning to normal mode...'' is displayed (FIG. 84(h)).

After that (after FIG. 84(e)), the small winning game B is executed, and the instruction display "Aim for V!", which instructs to fire the game ball aiming at (the specific area of) the big winning hole P751, is displayed. (FIG. 84(f)).

Thereafter, the small hit V jackpot game B is executed by the game ball entering the specific area of the big winning hole P751. After the small hit V jackpot game B is executed and the 4th round, which is the final round, is completed, "600 GET!", which is the number of game balls acquired in the jackpot end demo, is displayed, and after the small win V jackpot game B is finished, the battle starts. In order to notify the player of the transition to the mode, "Next time, battle mode!" is displayed (FIG. 84(g)).

In addition, when the small winning pattern A instead of the small winning pattern B stops, "777", which is a combination of the decorative pattern and the simple pattern corresponding to the small winning pattern A, is stopped and displayed. At the same time, "Challenge 1 Success!" and "Challenge 2 Success" are displayed to inform the player that the small winning symbol A has stopped, and then the small winning game A is executed and the big winning hole is displayed. "Aim for V!" is displayed, which is an instruction display instructing you to shoot the game ball aiming at (the specific area of) P751, and then when the game ball enters the specific area of the big prize opening P751, the small After the winning V jackpot game A is executed and the 4th round, which is the final round, is completed, "600 GET!", which is the number of game balls acquired in the jackpot end demo, is displayed, and after the small winning V jackpot game A is finished, consecutive games are displayed. In order to inform the player that the mode will be shifted to, a message "Next time, consecutive game mode!" is displayed (not shown).

FIG. 85 is a diagram showing an example of presentation in a high base state (battle mode) (an example of presentation regarding transition to battle mode). First, a simple symbol corresponding to the second special symbol is displayed (stop display), a very small "→" symbol indicating an arrow is displayed at the top right of the screen, and the current gaming situation is a situation where you should hit right. (in high base state). In addition, an instruction "Charge!" is displayed, prompting the user to place the second special symbol on hold. Also, unlike the challenge mode, a second special symbol pending object is displayed at the bottom of the screen. Note that a white circle (○) indicates a pending occurrence, and a black circle (●) indicates a pending occurrence (FIG. 85(a)).

After that, a game ball enters the normal pattern operating port P741, the normal pattern changes and stops at the winning pattern, and the normal electric accessory P770 is activated. Unlike the challenge mode, the high base state does not end with one activation of the normal electric accessory P770, so the "Opening... ” will not be displayed. After that, a ball enters the normal electric accessory P770, one second special symbol is held, and immediately after that, the second special symbol begins to fluctuate due to the expiration of the second special symbol, and during that fluctuation, the second special symbol Triggered by the occurrence of four special symbols being reserved, a message "Charge completed!" is displayed to notify the player that four second special symbols are being reserved (FIG. 85(b)). ). Incidentally, the variation of this second special symbol is a miss variation, and the case where it is a small hit variation will be described later.

Thereafter, the first of the four reserved second special symbols is consumed, and the above-mentioned summary variation performance is executed by the variation of the second special symbol accompanying the consumption. Since this variation is a variation in which the small winning symbol B stops, "Battle Victory" is displayed to notify the player that the small winning symbol B has stopped (FIG. 85(c)). Thereafter, "333", which is a combination of a decorative pattern and a simple pattern corresponding to the small winning pattern B, is stopped and displayed (FIG. 85(d-1)). After that, the small winning game B is executed, and "Aim for V!", which is an instruction display instructing to shoot the game ball aiming at (the specific area of) the big winning hole P751, is displayed, and after that, the big winning hole P751 When the game ball enters the specific area, the small hit V jackpot game B is executed, and "600 GET!", which is the number of game balls obtained in the jackpot end demo after the 4th round, which is the final round, is executed. ``Next time, battle mode!'' is displayed (not shown) in order to notify the player that the transition to battle mode will take place after the small win V jackpot game A ends. In addition, when the small winning pattern A instead of the small winning pattern B stops, "777", which is a combination of the decorative pattern and the simple pattern corresponding to the small winning pattern A, is stopped and displayed. At the same time, in order to notify the player that the small winning symbol A has stopped, the message "Battle victory!" is displayed, and after that, the small winning game A is executed and the (specific area of) the big winning opening P751 is opened. "Aim for V!", which is an instruction display instructing to aim and fire the game ball, is displayed, and then, when the game ball enters the specific area of the big prize opening P751, the small hit V jackpot game A is executed. ``600 GET!'', which is the number of game balls acquired in the jackpot end demo after the end of the 4th round, which is the final round, is displayed, indicating that the game will shift to consecutive game mode after the small win V jackpot game A ends. In order to inform the players, a message saying "Next time, consecutive game mode!" is displayed (not shown).

In addition, the fluctuation related to the third reservation, which is the fluctuation related to the reservation that is consumed after that, is not the fluctuation related to the first reservation of the second special symbol for four, but the fluctuation related to the third reservation, which is the fluctuation in which the small hit symbol B stops. In this case, the contents of the performance of the summary fluctuation are different. Specifically, the first of the four reserved second special symbols is consumed, and the above-mentioned summary variation performance is executed by the variation of the second special symbol accompanying the consumption. This variation is a variation in which the winning symbol stops, but since the variation related to the third hold is a variation in which the small winning symbol B stops, "Battle Victory" is displayed to notify the player of this. is performed (FIG. 85(c)). After that, "246", which is a combination of simple symbols corresponding to the missed symbol, is stopped and displayed (FIG. 85 (d-2-1)). Thereafter, in the second hold-related variation, the simple symbol is stopped at "246" and the message "Battle Victory!" is continuously displayed (not shown). After that, the display of "Battle Victory!" continues to be displayed even with the variation related to the third hold, and "333", which is a combination of decorative symbols and simple symbols corresponding to small winning symbol B, is stopped and displayed (Fig. 85 (d-2-2)). In this way, the three fluctuations are shown together as one effect, and after that, the small winning game B is executed and an instruction display is displayed instructing to shoot the game ball aiming at (the specific area of) the big winning hole P751. A certain "Aim for V!" is displayed, and after that, when the game ball enters the specific area of the big prize opening P751, the small hit V jackpot game B is executed, and after the 4th round, which is the final round, ends. "600 GET!", which is the number of game balls acquired in the jackpot end demo, is displayed, and the message "Next time, battle mode!" is displayed to notify the player that the game will move to battle mode after the small win V jackpot game A ends. A display is made (not shown). In addition, when the small winning pattern A instead of the small winning pattern B stops, "777", which is a combination of the decorative pattern and the simple pattern corresponding to the small winning pattern A, is stopped and displayed. At the same time, in order to notify the player that the small winning symbol A has stopped, the message "Battle victory!" is displayed, and after that, the small winning game A is executed and the (specific area of) the big winning opening P751 is opened. "Aim for V!", which is an instruction display instructing to aim and fire the game ball, is displayed, and then, when the game ball enters the specific area of the big prize opening P751, the small hit V jackpot game A is executed. ``600 GET!'', which is the number of game balls acquired in the jackpot end demo after the end of the 4th round, which is the final round, is displayed, indicating that the game will shift to consecutive game mode after the small win V jackpot game A ends. In order to notify the players, a message saying "Next time, consecutive game mode!" is displayed (not shown).

In addition, when all of the four second special symbols are pending, the performance contents of the summary fluctuation are different. Specifically, the first of the four reserved second special symbols is consumed, and the above-mentioned summary variation performance is executed by the variation of the second special symbol accompanying the consumption. This variation is a variation in which the winning symbol stops, and the remaining pending symbols are also pending, so "Battle Defeat..." is displayed to inform the player, and then the response to the losing symbol is displayed. "343", which is a combination of simple symbols, is stopped and displayed (FIG. 85(e)). Thereafter, in the second to fourth pending changes, the simple symbol is stopped at "246" and the message "Battle Defeated..." is continuously displayed (not shown). In this way, the four variations are combined and shown as one performance.

FIG. 86 is a diagram showing an example of a performance in a high base state (battle mode) (an example of a performance related to transition to consecutive game mode). Since FIGS. 86(a) and 86(b) are the same as FIGS. 85(a) and 85(b), description thereof will be omitted.

After FIG. 86(b), the first of the four reserved second special symbols is consumed, and the above-mentioned summary variation effect is executed by the variation of the second special symbol accompanying the consumption. This variation is a variation in which the winning symbol stops, but since the variation related to the second hold is a variation in which the small winning symbol A stops, "Battle Victory" is displayed to notify the player of this. After that, "246", which is a combination of simple symbols corresponding to the missed symbols, is stopped and displayed (not shown). After that, the display of "Battle Victory!" continues to be displayed until the change related to the second hold, and "777", which is a combination of decorative symbols and simple symbols corresponding to the small winning symbol A, is stopped and displayed (Fig. 86 (c-1)). In this way, the two fluctuations are shown together as one effect, and after that, the small winning game A is executed and an instruction display is displayed instructing to shoot the game ball aiming at (the specific area of) the big winning hole P751. A certain "Aim for V!" is displayed, and then, when the game ball enters the specific area of the big prize opening P751, the small hit V jackpot game A is executed, and after the 4th R which is the final round is over. "600 GET!", which is the number of game balls acquired in the jackpot end demo, is displayed, and "Next time, consecutive game mode!" is displayed to notify the player that the game will move to consecutive game mode after the small win V jackpot game A ends. is displayed (FIG. 86(c-2), part not shown).

Here, if the current fluctuation of the second special symbol in FIG. 86(b) is a small hit fluctuation (a fluctuation in which the small winning symbol A or the small winning symbol B stops), FIG. 86(d-1)(d -2) The contents of the performance will be as follows. Specifically, after the start of the battle mode, a ball enters the normal electric accessory P770, one second special symbol is suspended, and immediately after that, the small hit fluctuation of the second special symbol occurs due to the expiration of the second special symbol. When the second special symbol has been held for four times during the change, the message "Ultimate mystery!" is displayed instead of "Charge completed!". This display suggests or informs the player that the current fluctuation is a small hit fluctuation. Since this small win fluctuation is a small win fluctuation that starts fluctuating in a high base state, after the small win V jackpot, the game shifts to the consecutive winning mode. Specifically, when the small winning game A or the small winning game B is executed, "Aim for V!", which is an instruction display instructing to fire the game ball aiming at (the specific area of) the big winning hole P751, is displayed. Then, when the game ball enters the specific area of the big winning opening P751, the small hit V jackpot game A or the small hit V jackpot game B is executed, and the jackpot ends after the 4th round, which is the final round, ends. In order to display "600 GET!", which is the number of game balls acquired in the demo, and inform the player that the game will move to consecutive game mode after the small win V jackpot game A or the small win V jackpot game B ends, the screen displays the message "Next time, ``Succession mode!'' is displayed (not shown).

Furthermore, the current fluctuation of the second special symbol in FIG. 86(b) is a small hit fluctuation (a fluctuation in which the small winning symbol A or the small winning symbol B stops), and the four second special symbols are reserved. If all of the related fluctuations are small hit fluctuations (fluctuations in which the small winning symbol A or the small winning symbol B stops), the performance contents will be as shown in FIGS. 86(e-1) and (e-2). Specifically, after the start of the battle mode, a ball enters the normal electric accessory P770, one second special symbol is suspended, and immediately after that, the small hit fluctuation of the second special symbol occurs due to the expiration of the second special symbol. When the second special symbol is held for four times during the change, instead of the display of "Charging completed!", the display of "Ultimate Secret Technique! x2!!!" is displayed. This display suggests or informs the player that the current fluctuation is a small hit fluctuation, and that all the fluctuations related to the reservation of the four second special symbols are small hit fluctuations. In this case, a small hit V jackpot game that is executed after the current variation ends (the first small win V jackpot game in a high base state), a small win V jackpot game that is executed after the first pending variation ends. (2nd small win V jackpot game in high base state), small win V jackpot game (3rd small win V jackpot game in high base state) executed after the end of the fluctuation related to the second hold The game is executed, and the event of ``a small win is won in a high base state and a small win V jackpot game is executed'' occurs three times in a row, so the game is forced to enter the battle mode, which is a low base state, and immediately after that. The small hit that is executed after the end of the fluctuation related to the third hold, which is consumed in When the small hit V jackpot game (the first small win V jackpot game in a high base state) is executed after the fluctuation related to the holding of the eyes ends, the game shifts to consecutive game mode, and from then on, the high base state The consecutive winning mode continues until the small winning V jackpot game is executed twice. In other words, the current fluctuation of the second special symbol in FIG. 86(b) is a small hit fluctuation (a fluctuation in which the small winning symbol A or the small winning symbol B stops), and the four second special symbols are reserved. If all of the fluctuations related to this are small hit fluctuations (fluctuations in which the small winning symbol A or the small winning symbol B stops), the transition from battle mode to consecutive winning mode will be confirmed twice, so it is important to note that In order to inform the player of this, "Ultimate Secret Technique! x 2!!!" is displayed.

Here, the fluctuation for performing the held charge performance during the battle mode is configured so that it is uniformly 30 seconds in the case of a loss fluctuation, but it is either 5 seconds or 20 seconds in the case of a small win fluctuation. Among these, only when the small winning variation is 20 seconds, the above-mentioned "Ultimate Secret Technique!" and "Ultimate Secret Technique! x 2!!!" can be displayed. In addition, if the small winning variation is 5 seconds, an immediate winning effect (for example, a short winning effect where "V" is displayed immediately after the variation starts) will be executed, and "Charge completed!" will be displayed. Also, "Ultimate Secret Technique!" and "Ultimate Secret Technique! x 2!!!" are never displayed.

FIG. 87 is a diagram showing an example of a performance in a high base state (consecutive winning mode). More precisely, it is a diagram illustrating an example of the performance of the consecutive game mode to which the small win V jackpot game A is executed in the low base state. First, the simple symbol corresponding to the second special symbol is changing, and a very small "→" symbol indicating an arrow is displayed at the top right of the screen, and the current gaming situation is a situation where you should hit right (high base state). medium). In addition, "600 GET!", which is the display of the number of prize balls obtained in the previous small hit V jackpot game, is continuously displayed. Note that the decorative pattern is not displayed in the consecutive game mode (FIG. 87(a)). This variation is a miss variation, and when the variation stops, "357", which is a combination of simple symbols corresponding to the miss symbol, is stopped and displayed (FIG. 87(b)). In addition, in the consecutive winning mode, the variation time of the second special symbol is uniformly 2 seconds regardless of whether it is a small hit variation or a miss variation. The next variation starts the small hit variation, and when the variation stops, "357", which is a combination of simple symbols corresponding to the small winning symbol, is stopped and displayed (FIGS. 87(c) and 87(d)). After that, unlike the battle mode and challenge mode, a small message "Aim for V" is displayed, which is an instruction display instructing to shoot the game ball aiming at (a specific area of) the big prize opening P751 (Fig. 87(e) )). In the consecutive game mode, a plurality of small winning V jackpot games are made to look like one jackpot game, so the decorative patterns are hidden and the display of ``Aim for V'' is made as inconspicuous as possible.

After that, one more small hit V jackpot game is executed, and "1800 GET!", which is the sum of the number of prize balls for 4R twice, is continuously displayed from the initially displayed "600 GET!" (Figure 87 ( f)). At this point, the event of "a small win is won in the high base state and the small win V jackpot game is executed" has occurred twice in a row, so when the next small win V jackpot game is executed, the "high base Since the event of ``a small win is won in the state and a small win V jackpot game is executed'' occurs three times in a row, after the third small win V jackpot game ends, the game shifts to a battle mode in a low base state. This battle mode is a low base state, and the second special symbol cannot be suspended during this battle mode, so the third small hit V jackpot game is executed in a high base state. 2. It is necessary to cause four special symbols to be reserved. Therefore, when the small win fluctuates in the high base state after the event of "a small win is won in the high base state and the small win V jackpot game is executed" occurs twice in a row, if the second special symbol is held less than four. In some cases, a message saying "You're about to hit the jackpot! Charge up!" is displayed to urge the player to reserve the second special symbol (FIG. 87(h)). In addition, when the number of second special symbols on hold reaches four, the display saying "You're about to hit the jackpot! Charge!" is hidden. In addition, when the event of "a small win is won in a high base state and a small win V jackpot game is executed" occurs twice in a row, when the loss fluctuates in a high base state, less than 4 second special symbols are held. Even if it is, the message "You're about to hit the jackpot! Charge!" is not displayed (FIG. 87(g)). As a modified example, when the small win fluctuates in the high base state after the event of "a small win is won in the high base state and the small win V jackpot game is executed" occurs twice in a row, the second special symbol is suspended for 3 times. If the number of second special symbols is 2, the message ``You are about to hit the jackpot! Charge!'' is displayed to encourage the player to save up the second special symbol, and if there are two second special symbols pending, the player will be prompted to In order to encourage the player to accumulate the reserves of the second special symbol, the message "You are about to hit the jackpot! Be sure to charge!!!" is displayed, and if the number of reserves of the second special symbol is 0 or 1, the player is prompted to reserve the second special symbol. In order to urge the user to save up the special symbols, a message such as "You are about to hit the jackpot! Be sure to charge!!!" may be displayed, and a warning sound may also be output.

As a further modification, after the event of "a small win is won in the high base state and the small win V jackpot game is executed" occurs twice in a row, the small win fluctuation in the high base state will be the same as the second one at the start of the fluctuation. When the number of reserved special symbols is small (for example, when there is one second special symbol reserved), the fluctuation time is set to 20 seconds, and when the number of reserved second special symbols at the start of fluctuation is large (for example, when there is one second special symbol reserved), the fluctuation time is set to 20 seconds. If there are 4 symbols on hold), the variation time may be set to 2 seconds. In addition, there will also be a small hit start demo of a small winning game that is executed after the small winning variation ends in a high base state after the event of “a small winning is won in a high base state and a small winning V jackpot game is executed” occurs twice in a row. The small win of the small win game that is executed after the small win fluctuation in the high base state before the event of ``a small win is won in the high base state and the small win V jackpot game is executed'' occurs twice in a row. It may be longer than the start demo time (during the small winning game that is executed after the small winning fluctuation that started to fluctuate in the high base state ends, it is desirable to maintain the high base state until the V prize is won).

[12th Example]
As the pachinko gaming machine P of the present embodiment to the eleventh embodiment, we have described the pachinko gaming machine P that has various playability. The twelfth embodiment is an example in which the content has been further improved.Hereinafter, only the underlying technology and the differences from this embodiment will be described in detail, and the explanation of common points will be omitted or simplified. Of the elements constituting the pachinko game machine P of the twelfth embodiment, the same reference numerals are given to the elements that are the same as or correspond to the elements explained in the underlying technology or the present embodiment.

The pachinko game machine P in the twelfth embodiment employs the above-mentioned "small hit V" specifications. The pachinko gaming machine P of the twelfth embodiment has the following features. (A) The lottery results for the first special symbol include "hit" and "lost". (B) The lottery results for the second special symbol include "hit," "small win," and "miss." (C) The jackpot probability is 1/200 (no high probability state), the small hit probability (second special symbol only) is 199/200, and the number of reservations for the first special symbol is 4. , the number of second special symbols reserved is four. (D) "Second special pattern (special pattern 2) priority digestion control" is adopted. (E) As the jackpot game of the first special symbol, jackpot game A (jackpot game corresponding to jackpot symbol A) is provided, and as the jackpot game of the second special symbol, jackpot games B-1 to B-3 (jackpot game It is equipped with small winning games A to C (small winning games corresponding to small winning patterns A to C) as small winning games of the second special symbol. Each of these games is a small winning game that makes it easy to win a V prize in a specific area (there is no small winning game that makes it difficult to win a V prize). In other words, if the ball enters the big winning device P750 during the execution of the small winning game, it is almost certain that the ball will enter the specific area, and this will be used as an opportunity to play the jackpot game (the specific area during the execution of the small winning games A to C). The jackpot games executed by winning a V prize are respectively referred to as small hit V jackpot games A to C). In addition, the selection rate of each symbol is shown in FIGS. 88(a) and 88(b). (F) It has a low base state and a high base state, and has high base states A to C as high base state types. In the low base state, the probability of winning the normal symbol is 1/1, and if the normal symbol stops at the winning symbol, 1/1 is 0.01 as the operation pattern corresponding to one operation of the normal electric accessory P770. The opening pattern is 1 second opening x 1 opening. In high base state A, the probability of winning a normal symbol is 1/1, and if the normal symbol hits and stops at a winning symbol, 5/6 is 0. The opening pattern is 01 seconds x 1 time, and 1/6 is the 5 seconds x 1 release pattern. In high base state B, the probability of winning the normal symbol is 1/1, and when the normal symbol hits and stops, 29/30 is 0. The opening pattern is 01 seconds x 1 time, and 1/30 is the 5 seconds x 1 release pattern. In high base state C, the probability of winning a normal symbol is 1/1, and if the normal symbol hits and stops at the winning symbol, 1/1 is 5 seconds as the movement pattern corresponding to one operation of the normal electric accessory P770. ×1 open pattern. In addition, in any of the opening patterns, when one ball enters the normal electric accessory P770, the operation of the ordinary electric accessory P770 is forcibly terminated. (G) Tables A and B are provided as variation pattern tables for the second special symbol in the high base state. In table A, only 0.1 second is selected as the variation time of the second special symbol. In table B, only 60 seconds is selected as the variation time of the second special symbol. (H) In the high base state A, which refers to the table A that moves after the end of the jackpot game A, which is executed by starting fluctuation in the low base state and then stopping the fluctuation, the first special symbol fluctuates five times. Alternatively, the process ends when the second special symbol changes once or when the normal electric accessory P770 operates five times (FIG. 88(c)). (I) After the execution of the jackpot game A, which is executed by starting fluctuation in a high base state and then stopping fluctuation, or after the execution of jackpot game A, which is executed by starting fluctuation in a low base state and high base state and then stopping fluctuation. A small win that is executed by winning a V prize during a small win game that is executed after the execution of the jackpot game B-1, or by starting fluctuation in the low base state and high base state and then stopping the fluctuation. The high base state B that refers to the table A that transitions after the execution of the V jackpot game A is when the first special symbol fluctuates five times, the second special symbol fluctuates once, or the normal electric accessory P770 The process ends when is activated 50 times (FIG. 88(c)). (J) After the execution of jackpot game B-2, which is executed by starting fluctuations in a low base state and high base state and then stopping fluctuations, or after starting fluctuations in a low base state and a high base state and then fluctuations The high base state B that refers to table A that moves after the completion of the small win V jackpot game B that is executed by winning V during the small win game that is executed after stopping is the first special symbol that is 5. It ends when the second special symbol changes twice, or the normal electric accessory P770 operates 50 times (FIG. 88(c)). (K) After the completion of the jackpot game B-3, which is executed by starting fluctuations in a low base state and high base state and then stopping fluctuations, or after starting fluctuations in a low base state and high base state and then fluctuations The high base state C that refers to the table B that moves after the completion of the small win V jackpot game C that is executed by winning V during the small win game that is executed after stopping is the first special symbol that is 5. It ends when the second special symbol changes once, or the normal electric accessory P770 operates 50 times (FIG. 88(c)). (L) If the high base state is maintained even after the small hit fluctuation starts in the high base state, that is, the first fluctuation of the second special symbol in the high base state B in (J) above is a small hit. If it is a fluctuation (the second fluctuation of the second special symbol is also in high base state B, the high base state is maintained even after the end of the small winning fluctuation of 1 fluctuation), even during that small winning game. V While maintaining the high base state until winning a prize, if the fluctuation starts in the high base state and shifts to the low base state after the small winning fluctuation ends, in other words, if the high base state other than (J) above If the first variation of the 2nd special symbol is a small hit variation (the 2nd variation of the 2nd special symbol is in a low base state, it will be in a low base state after the small winning variation of 1 variation ends), that small hit. When winning a V during a game, the base is already low. (M) If the base state at the time of V winning during a small winning game is a high base state, exceptionally, the normal electric power which is the high base state end condition in the high base state of (I) to (K) above The number of operations of accessory P770 becomes 10,000 times.

By having the above characteristics, in the high base state of (H) above, the normal electric accessory P770 operates 5 times and the high base state ends, 1/6 of 5 seconds x 1 time. It becomes possible to realize the gameplay of whether or not the open pattern is won. If you win the opening pattern of 1/6 of 5 seconds x 1 time and enter the game ball into the normal electric accessory P770, the second special symbol will be suspended, and immediately after that, the suspension will be extinguished. Since the variation time is 0.1 seconds, one variation of the second special symbol ends immediately, so the high base state also ends immediately. Since the second special symbol always wins a jackpot or a small win, the high base state after the end of the jackpot game is determined according to the jackpot symbol type or small win symbol type when the second special symbol stops changing. In addition, in the high base state of (I) above, if the normal electric accessory P770 operates 50 times and the high base state ends, the 1/30 5 seconds x 1 opening pattern will be won. It becomes possible to realize various kinds of gameplay. If you win the opening pattern of 1/30 for 5 seconds x 1 time and enter the game ball into the normal electric accessory P770, the second special symbol will be suspended, and the suspension will be extinguished immediately after that. Since the variation time is 0.1 seconds, one variation of the second special symbol ends immediately, so the high base state also ends immediately. Since the second special symbol always wins a jackpot or a small win, the high base state after the end of the jackpot game is determined according to the jackpot symbol type or small win symbol type when the second special symbol stops changing. In addition, in the high base state of (J) above, will you win the 1/30 5 seconds x 1 opening pattern before the normal electric accessory P770 operates 50 times and the high base state ends? It becomes possible to realize various kinds of gameplay. If you win the opening pattern of 1/30 for 5 seconds x 1 time and enter the game ball into the normal electric accessory P770, the second special symbol will be suspended, and the suspension will be extinguished immediately after that. Since the fluctuation time is 0.1 seconds, one second special symbol fluctuation ends immediately, but unlike other high base states, even if one second special symbol fluctuation ends, the high Base state does not exit. Therefore, since the V winning during the small winning game that is executed after the fluctuation of the second special symbol stops, it will be the V winning in the high base state, so as mentioned above, the above (I) ~ ( Since the number of operations of the normal electric accessory P770, which is the condition for ending the high base state in the high base state of K), is 10,000 times, the winning of the 5 seconds x 1 open pattern is almost certain. In addition, in the high base state of (K) above, not only will you win the opening pattern of 5 seconds x 1 time at 1/1, but you will also be able to win the opening pattern and enter the game ball into the normal electric accessory P770. In this case, the second special symbol is suspended and the second special symbol is immediately extinguished, and the variable time is 60 seconds, so the second special symbol can be suspended multiple times (up to four, which is the maximum number of second special symbols that can be suspended). Since it is possible to win an open pattern of 5 seconds x 1 time, it is possible to realize a game in which a plurality of small win V jackpot games can be executed.

[13th Example]
As the pachinko gaming machine P of the present embodiment to the twelfth embodiment, we have described the pachinko gaming machine P having various playability. An example will be referred to as a twelfth embodiment. Hereinafter, only the underlying technology and the differences from this embodiment will be described in detail, and explanations of common features will be omitted or simplified. It should be noted that, among the elements constituting the Pachinko gaming machine P of the thirteenth embodiment, the same reference numerals are given to the elements that are the same as or correspond to the elements explained in the underlying technology or the present embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 89(a), the pachinko game machine P in the thirteenth embodiment can display a volume adjustment screen in the center of the screen while the fluctuation is stopped or during the fluctuation. The volume adjustment screen is displayed when the player operates the lower button of the cross key P383 while the fluctuation is stopped or during the fluctuation. Note that if there is no operation after the volume adjustment screen is displayed, or if a certain period of time (for example, 10 seconds) has elapsed after the last four-way controller operation after the volume adjustment screen was displayed, The volume adjustment screen is automatically hidden.

The volume adjustment specifications in the 13th embodiment are configured such that the volume level for each of the three audio types can be adjusted, including the volume level of BGM, the volume level of SE (sound effect, sound effect), and the volume level of VOICE ( The volume level of the character's speaking voice and the voice of the character can be adjusted separately. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 89(b), the volume adjustment screen in the thirteenth embodiment allows the player to adjust the volume level in 10 levels (10% to 100) for each of the three audio types: BGM, SE, and VOICE. There are three volume memory display items that can be arbitrarily set in %). The player can select the item for which he/she wants to adjust the volume level by operating the up and down buttons of the cross key P383, and adjust the volume level by operating the left and right buttons of the cross key P383. In addition, although the details will be described later, there is also an item called "emphasis mode" that allows you to set a predetermined volume level combination that emphasizes one of the three audio types: BGM, SE, and VOICE. There are one.

FIG. 89(b) shows a volume adjustment screen in a situation where BGM is selected as the volume level adjustment item (blacked out items are selected items). In FIG. 89(b), the BGM volume level is set to 10 (100%), the SE volume level is set to 6 (60%), and the VOICE volume level is set to 3 (30%). In this state, each time the left button of the cross key P383 is operated, the BGM volume level decreases by 1 (10%) from 10 (100%). Please note that the initial settings for the volume level after powering on are BGM volume level 5 (50%), SE volume level 5 (50%), and VOICE volume level 5 (50%). I'll keep it.

FIG. 89(c) shows a volume adjustment screen in a situation where SE is selected as the volume level adjustment item (blacked out items are selected items). In FIG. 89(c), the BGM volume level is set to 5 (50%), the SE volume level is set to 8 (80%), and the VOICE volume level is set to 5 (50%). In this state, each time you press the left button of the cross pad P383, the SE volume level decreases by 1 (10%) from 8 (80%), and in this state, press the right button of the cross pad P383 once. Each time, the SE volume level increases from 8 (80%) to 1 (10%).

FIG. 89(d) shows the volume adjustment in a situation where "BGM emphasis mode", which is one of the "emphasis modes", is selected by operating the lower button of cross key P383 twice from the state of FIG. 89(c). The screen is shown (blacked out items are selected items). When this "BGM emphasis mode" is selected, the BGM volume level will be set to 10 regardless of the combination of BGM volume level, SE volume level, and VOICE volume level that were set before "BGM emphasis mode" was selected. (100%), the volume level of SE is set to 3 (30%), and the volume level of VOICE is set to 3 (30%).

FIG. 89(e) shows the volume adjustment in a situation where "SE emphasis mode", which is one of the "emphasis modes", is selected by operating the lower button of cross key P383 once from the state of FIG. 89(d). The screen is shown (blacked out items are selected items). When this "SE emphasis mode" is selected, the BGM volume level will be set to 3 regardless of the combination of BGM volume level, SE volume level, and VOICE volume level that were set before "SE emphasis mode" was selected. (30%), the volume level of SE is set to 10 (100%), and the volume level of VOICE is set to 3 (30%).

FIG. 89(f) shows the volume adjustment in a situation where "VOICE emphasis mode", which is one of the "emphasis modes", is selected by operating the lower button of cross key P383 once from the state of FIG. 89(e). Shows the screen (blacked out items are selected items). When this "VOICE emphasis mode" is selected, the BGM volume level will be set to 3 regardless of the combination of BGM volume level, SE volume level, and VOICE volume level that were set before "VOICE emphasis mode" was selected. (30%), the volume level of SE is set to 3 (30%), and the volume level of VOICE is set to 10 (100%).

In this way, by selecting each "emphasis mode", the player can adjust the BGM volume level according to his/her preference without having to select the BGM volume level, SE volume level, and VOICE volume level. , SE volume level, and VOICE volume level can be determined all at once. In addition, if you select "Reset to default settings", which is the bottom item on the volume adjustment screen, the BGM volume level will be set to 5 (50%) and the SE volume level will be set to 5 (50%), which is the default setting of the volume level after turning on the power. 5 (50%) and the VOICE volume level is 5 (50%). In addition, when each "emphasis mode" is selected, if you operate the upper button of the four-way controller P383 one or more times and select BGM, SE, VOICE, etc. as the volume level adjustment item, "emphasis mode" will be selected. The previously set combination of BGM volume level, SE volume level, and VOICE volume level is restored (for example, if the upper button of cross key P383 is operated once from the state shown in FIG. 89(d), (returns to state (c)).

With this configuration, sound output that matches the player's hobbies and preferences can be realized in a more flexible manner than ever before.

[Fourteenth Example] <Top view of upper spherical plate P341 in this embodiment>
FIG. 90 is a top view of the spherical dish unit in this embodiment. The upper ball plate P341, the production button P381, the lever P382, and the cross key P383 in FIG. 90 are the same as those described above, and therefore their explanation will be omitted.

The ball lending button (also referred to as a ball lending switch, lending button, or lending switch) in Fig. 90 is a button that is operated by a player to borrow a game ball from a lending unit. When operated, 125 game balls worth 500 yen are lent to the upper ball tray P341 through a nozzle extending from the lending unit.

The return button (also referred to as a return switch, payment button, or payment switch) in FIG. 90 is a button that stores unused cash inserted into the lending unit in a storage medium such as an IC card. If, after inserting 10,000 yen into the rental unit, the ball lending button is operated once, 500 yen is lent out, and the return button is operated once, 9,500 yen worth of data will be stored in the IC card. be done.

The segment display device in FIG. 90 is a display device for displaying the balance of cash put in the lending unit by three 7-segment display devices (8 segments when DP points are combined). If 10,000 yen is inserted, "100" will be displayed on the segment display, and if the ball lending button is operated once in this situation, "95" will be displayed on the segment display, and in this situation, the return button will be displayed. When operated once, "00" is displayed on the segment display.

The upper ball tray passage in FIG. 90 is a passage that stores game balls rented from the rental unit, and communicates with the firing passage.

<Performance of ball lending button and return button>
The ball lending button and the return button are spring-type push buttons, and when the operation part of the ball lending button or return button is pressed, the elastic energy of the spring is stored and the ball lending button or return button is operated. When the parts are separated, the elastic energy of the spring is released. In addition, since a stopper part is formed on the operation part of the ball lending button and the return button, even if the operating parts of the ball lending button and the return button are kept pressed down, the stopper part allows the ball lending button and the return button to be operated. Since the pressed position of the part does not move (it stops at the maximum pressed position), excessive force is not applied to the spring and the spring is prevented from being plastically deformed.

In addition, when the operation parts of the ball lending button and the return button are pressed down and pushed a certain amount, a shield is created between the light emitting part and the light receiving part of the optical sensor provided in the ball lending button and the return button. can enter and detect the operation of the ball lending button or return button. After that, if the operating section continues to be pressed down, it comes into contact with the stopper section and the operating section cannot be pressed down, but the shielding section remains inserted between the light projecting section and the light receiving section of the optical sensor.

Here, the game balls fired by the firing device P242 are stipulated in the technical standards related to pachinko gaming machines so that the size (diameter) is 11 mm and the mass is 5.4 grams or more and 5.7 grams or less. It is being

There are no special rules for game medals used in drum-type game machines, but they must be 25 mm in size (diameter), have a mass of 5.0 grams or more and 6.0 grams or less, and have a thickness of 1.6 mm. There are many products on the market that have a diameter of 30 mm, a mass of 7.5 grams or more and 8.5 grams or less, and a thickness of 1.7 mm.

Currently, there are many amusement arcades that have a mix of pachinko machines and reel-type gaming machines that use game medals with a size (diameter) of 25 mm. You can enjoy both the machine and the reel-type gaming machine. In other words, there may be cases in which a player temporarily plays a pachinko game machine while holding game medals, or plays a reel-type game machine while holding game balls. It should be noted that the number of establishments of reel-type game machines using game medals with a size (diameter) of 30 mm is smaller than that of reel-type game machines using game medals with a size (diameter) of 25 mm.

It is often seen that players place their personal mobile terminals, game balls, or game medals on the upper ball tray P341 of the Pachinko game machine to play the game.

In such a scene, considering the possibility that various things may be arranged on the upper part of the upper ball plate P341, it is necessary to specify the pressing energy of the various buttons so that they are unlikely to malfunction.

FIG. 91 is a diagram when game medals or game balls are placed on the operation part of the ball lending button. In FIG. 91, the energy due to the mass of the game medal or game ball itself is shown above the ball lending button, and the case where the game medal or game ball is dropped from above is not shown.

As shown in FIG. 91, when the game medal is 5 grams, the energy related to the operation part of the ball lending button is 0.049 N (5 grams x gravitational acceleration 9.80665 m/S). Further, when the game ball weighs 5.5 grams, the energy related to the operation part of the ball lending button is 0.054 N (5.5 grams (mass of the game ball) x gravitational acceleration 9.80665 m/S).

In this case, by making the spring constant of the ball lending button larger than 0.054N, which is the energy pressed down by the game ball, the ball lending button will not hold even if the game medals and game balls are placed on the ball lending button. It is possible to prevent the button from being pressed to a position where pressing of the ball lending button is detected. The reason why 0.054N is used as the standard is that the mass of the game ball is larger than the mass of a game medal with a size of 25 mm.

Not limited to the configuration described above, when the mass of the game medal is used as a standard, the spring constant of the ball lending button can be made larger than 0.049N, which is the energy pressed by the game medal, so that the game medal can be Even if the ball lending button is placed on the button, the ball lending button can be prevented from being pushed to a position where pressing down of the ball lending button is detected.

Also, since a game medal with a size (diameter) of 25 mm may weigh 6.0 grams, the energy related to the operation part of the ball lending button is 0.059 N (6 grams x gravitational acceleration 9.80665 m/S). There is. At this time, the load applied to the operation part of the ball lending button that can be moved to the detection position where the operation of the ball lending button becomes effective is set to be larger than 0.059N (specifically, for example, 0.059N). 06N) This makes it difficult for the ball lending button to become effective even if a 6.0 gram game medal is placed on the operation part of the ball lending button. Note that 0.06N is just an example, and the above effect can be achieved regardless of the load as long as it is 0.06N or more.

FIG. 92 is a diagram when game medals or game balls are placed on the operation part of the ball lending button similarly to FIG. 91, but the upper surface of the upper ball tray P341 is on the near side (player side) This shows the case where the slope is slanted to . In FIG. 92, the game medals or the energy due to the mass of the game ball itself is shown above the ball lending button, and the case where the game medal or game ball is dropped from above is not shown.

As shown in FIG. 92, when the game medal is 5 grams, the energy related to the operation part of the ball lending button is 0.049 cos θN (5 grams x gravitational acceleration 9.80665 m/S x cos θ). Further, when the game ball weighs 5.5 grams, the energy related to the operation part of the ball lending button is 0.054 cos θN (5.5 grams x gravitational acceleration 9.80665 m/S x cos θ).

In this case, the spring constant of the ball lending button is set to be larger than 0.054 cosθN, which is the energy pressed down by the game ball, so that even if the game medals and game balls are placed on the ball lending button, the ball lending button will not move. It is possible to prevent the button from being pressed to a position where pressing of the ball lending button is detected. The reason why 0.054 cos θN is used as the standard is that the mass of the game ball is larger than the mass of a game medal with a size of 25 mm.

Not limited to the above-mentioned configuration, when the mass of the game medal is used as a standard, the spring constant of the ball lending button can be made larger than 0.054cosθN, which is the energy pressed by the game medal, so that the game medal can be used as a ball lending button. Even if the ball lending button is placed on the button, the ball lending button can be prevented from being pushed to a position where pressing down of the ball lending button is detected.

Also, since a game medal with a size (diameter) of 25 mm may weigh 6.0 grams, the energy related to the operation part of the ball lending button is 0.059 cos θN (6 grams x gravitational acceleration 9.80665 m/S x cos θ). It may happen. At this time, the load applied to the operating part of the ball lending button that can move to the detection position where the operation of the ball lending button becomes effective is set to be larger than 0.059 cos θN (specifically, for example, 0.059 cos θN). 06 cos θN), it is possible to make it difficult for the ball lending button to become effective even if a 6.0 gram game medal is placed on the operation part of the ball lending button. It should be noted that 0.06 cos θN is an example, and the above effect can be achieved regardless of the load as long as the value is 0.06 cos θN or more.

Although the ball lending button has been explained in FIGS. 91 and 92, if the ball lending button and the return button are composed of the same parts (the color of the operation part may be different), The ball lending button can be replaced with the return button.

In addition, since the ball lending button and the return button are constructed from different parts (for example, they use springs with different spring constants), the load on the operation part of either the ball lending button or the return button is small. In this case, the spring with a spring constant such that the button with the smaller load is larger than 0.054N or 0.054cosθN shown in FIGS. 91 and 92 is used. In this way, by making the spring constants of the ball lending button and the return button different, the operating feeling of the ball lending button and the return button can be changed, and the player can avoid erroneously operating the ball lending button and the return button. It is possible to reduce the number of people who do this.

In particular, by making the load on the operating part of the ball lending button larger than the load on the operating part of the return button, players can avoid accidentally operating the ball lending button when trying to operate the return button. Also, since the ball lending button has a larger load, it is more difficult to press than the return button, and the sensor part that detects the operation of the ball lending button can also be made difficult to be pressed. In other words, the ball lending button is harder to press than the return button, and even if a player who tries to operate the return button accidentally operates the ball lending button, the operation of the ball lending button will not be detected. can do.

With this configuration, it becomes easier to prevent game balls from being lent out due to erroneous operation of the ball lending button. Particularly at stores that offer non-equivalent exchange, the value of rented game balls decreases when exchanging them for prizes, so preventing players from accidentally operating the ball rental button can prevent players from losing interest. This is an important matter.

In addition, the amount of press (also referred to as stroke) from when the operation part of the ball lending button and the return button is pressed until the shielding part first enters between the light emitting part and the light receiving part of the optical sensor is calculated as the ball lending button. It is conceivable that the return button be different from the return button. Even in this mode, the operation feeling of the ball lending button and the return button can be changed, and it is possible to reduce the player's act of erroneously operating the ball lending button and the return button.

In particular, by making the stroke of the ball lending button's sensor detection longer than the stroke of the return button until it is detected by the sensor, players can avoid accidentally operating the ball lending button when trying to operate the return button. Also, since the ball lending button has a longer stroke, it is more difficult to detect than the return button, and it is possible to make it difficult for the sensor part that detects the operation of the ball lending button to be pushed. In other words, the ball lending button is harder to press than the return button, and even if a player who tries to operate the return button accidentally operates the ball lending button, the operation of the ball lending button will not be detected. can do.

With this configuration, it becomes easier to prevent game balls from being lent out due to erroneous operation of the ball lending button. Particularly at stores that offer non-equivalent exchange, the value of rented game balls decreases when exchanging them for prizes, so preventing players from accidentally operating the ball rental button can prevent players from losing interest. This is an important matter.

Furthermore, it is conceivable that the areas of the operation parts for the ball lending button and the return button are different. Even in this mode, the operation feeling of the ball lending button and the return button can be changed, and it is possible to reduce the player's act of erroneously operating the ball lending button and the return button.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 91, by setting the protrusion height of the ball lending button and the return button from the top surface of the upper ball plate P341 to 5.0 mm, the ball lending button and the return button are set to have a height of 5.0 mm. The projection height of the button from the upper surface of the upper spherical plate P341 is configured to be higher. With this configuration, even if the game medal on the top surface of the upper ball tray P341 slides and collides with the ball loan button or return button, the game medal will not land on the operation part of the ball loan button or return button. This makes it possible to reduce the number of erroneous operations of the ball lending button and return button.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 93, if the operating parts of the ball lending button and the return button are not horizontal but have a spherical convex shape (if they have an R part as shown in FIG. 93), the side of the operating part By configuring the structure so that the height up to the vertical part is higher than the thickness of the game medal, the game medal on the top surface of the upper ball tray P341 slides and presses the ball lending button or return button. Even if the game medal collides with the button, it is difficult for the game medal to get on the operation part of the ball lending button or the return button, and it is possible to reduce the act of erroneously operating the ball lending button and the return button.

Furthermore, when the cross key P383 is provided on the upper surface of the upper ball tray P341 as shown in FIG. It is conceivable to configure the structure so that the protrusion height is higher than the height of the protrusion. With this configuration, it becomes difficult to accidentally operate the ball lending button or the return button when operating the cross key P383, thereby reducing the act of erroneously operating the ball lending button or the return button. I can do it.

Furthermore, when the cross key P383 is pressed down and comes into contact with the stopper part constituting the cross key P383, and the cross key P383 is pushed in the maximum amount, the protruding height from the top surface of the upper ball plate P341 to the operation part of the cross key P383 is By configuring the projecting height to be higher than the protruding height of the , ball lending button, and return button, it becomes more difficult to operate the ball lending button or the return button when operating the cross key P383, and the ball lending button This can further reduce the number of erroneous operations of the return button.

In addition, in the example mentioned above, the protrusion height of the cross key P383 is configured to be higher than the protrusion height of the ball lending button and the return button, but the present invention is not limited to this. Even when a button (such as button P381 used for production during a game) is provided, the same effect can be obtained by replacing the configuration of cross key P383 with a production button and employing a similar configuration.

In addition, when the cross key P383 is provided on the upper surface of the upper spherical plate P341 as shown in FIG. The load related to the operation part of the cross key P383 moves until the ball lending button and the return button are operated, and the optical sensor provided on the ball lending button and the return button moves to the ball lending button. It is conceivable to configure the operation parts of the ball lending button and the return button to be smaller than the loads related to the moving ball lending button and the operating parts of the return button until the operation of the ball lending button and the return button can be detected. With this configuration, it becomes difficult to accidentally operate the ball lending button or the return button when operating the cross key P383, thereby reducing the act of erroneously operating the ball lending button or the return button. I can do it.

In addition, in the example mentioned above, the load related to the operation part of the cross key P383 that moves to the position where the optical sensor provided on the cross key P383 can detect the operation of the cross key P383 is due to the ball rental. When the ball lending button and the return button are operated, the operation parts of the ball lending button and the return button are moved to a position where the optical sensor provided on the ball lending button and the return button can detect the operation of the ball lending button and the return button. Although it is configured to be smaller than the load related to the operation part of the moving ball rental button and the return button, the present invention is not limited to this. Even when a button to be used) is provided, the same effect can be obtained by replacing the configuration of the cross key P383 with a production button and adopting a similar configuration.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 90, the upper ball tray P341 is provided with an upper ball tray passage, so that game balls lent from the lending unit are organized in the upper ball tray passage and sent to the firing device unit P240. It has become. In addition, game balls flow from the upper ball tray passageway to the firing device unit P240 through the upper ball tray passage opening at the end of the upper ball tray passageway and are guided one ball at a time to the ball feeding mechanism P241 of the firing device unit P240. There is.

As mentioned above, since there is a possibility that not only game balls but also game medals are placed on the upper surface of the upper ball tray P341, the opening area of the upper ball tray passage opening is made smaller than the area of the game medals. It consists of With this configuration, since the game medals mixed in the upper ball tray passage cannot pass through the upper ball tray passage opening, it is possible to prevent the game medals from getting mixed into the inside of the firing device unit P240. Moreover, the same effect can be achieved by configuring the maximum length of the upper ball tray passage opening to be shorter than the diameter of the game medal.

In addition, the area of the opening for removing balls provided in the lower ball tray P342 (the opening that leads from the lower ball tray P342 to the dollar box or counting unit of the gaming machine island) is made larger than the area of the game medals. It consists of With this configuration, the game medals mixed in the lower ball dish P342 can pass through the opening for removing balls provided in the lower ball dish P342, so the game medals mixed in the lower ball dish P342 can be removed from the game machine. It can be easily discharged to the island side.

Furthermore, among pachinko game machines, there is a managed game machine in which game balls are sealed inside and circulated. This managed game machine is also equipped with an effect button, a ball lending button, and a return button, similar to the pachinko game machine described above. Furthermore, in the managed game machine, a rental unit is arranged on the left side of the managed game machine as a facility of a gaming machine island, and the managed game machine and the rental unit are configured to be able to communicate with each other regarding rental information.

In such a managed gaming machine, when points are obtained through a special prize or the like, game balls are not paid out, but are stored as electronic data in the game ball number display device. In addition, when the ball lending button is operated, rental data indicating a predetermined number of game balls can be output from the lending unit to the game ball number display device, and when the return button is operated, the number of game balls is displayed. Data regarding the total number of game balls stored in the device can be output to the rental unit. Further, the ball lending button and the return button are configured so that they can be operated even during the game.

In the managed gaming machine, it is desirable that the ball lending button and the return button be arranged on the lending unit side (left side) compared to the performance button. As mentioned above, when the ball lending button and return button are operated, they communicate with the game ball count display device and the number of game balls is updated, so when a performance that prompts the operation of the performance button during a game is executed, the game This is to prevent a person from accidentally operating the ball lending button and return button. Further, the same effect can be obtained by arranging the ball lending button and the return button on the left side from the center of the managed gaming machine, and placing the performance button on the right side from the center of the managed gaming machine.

[15th Example] <Structure of the glass frame P3 of the Pachinko gaming machine P in this embodiment>
As shown in FIG. 2, the glass frame P3 is configured to be able to perform an effect of changing the light emission mode using a frame lamp P350. The frame lamp P350 has a top lens fixed to the top of the glass frame P3, and side lenses fixed to the left and right parts of the glass frame P3.

The top lens or side lens is covered with a light-transmitting resin cover, and light from an LED provided on a lamp board disposed inside is irradiated through the cover.

FIG. 94 schematically shows the top lens and side lenses. The side lenses and the top lens are removable from the front of the gaming machine, and the side lenses can be removed after the top lens is removed. Specifically, the upper part of the side lens and a part of the top lens are attached so that they overlap, so if you try to remove the side lens before the top lens, the part of the top lens above the side lens The side lens cannot be removed because the overlapping part is stuck.

Furthermore, the top lens and side lenses protrude toward the player (front), and are closer to the player than the game board.

In addition, the top lens is positioned above the player's head when the player is seated in front of the gaming machine, and the bottom of the top lens is connected to the lamp board provided on the top lens. By lighting the provided LEDs, it is possible to indicate a lighting mode that corresponds to the liquid crystal display during the game or a lighting mode that corresponds to the anticipation of the game.

FIG. 95 shows the gaming machine of FIG. 94 viewed from the right side. As shown in FIG. 95, the screws for fixing the top lens are tightened from the glass frame side (the rear surface of the top lens).

Note that the screws are made of metal and have the effect of reflecting light, so if the screws were installed at the bottom of the top lens, the screws would reflect the light from the liquid crystal, causing light to be reflected from the top lens. The light and the light from the liquid crystal become cloudy, and the lamp effect may not be performed in the way the designer intended.

In order to prevent such a situation, the screws for fastening the top lens to the glass frame are located on the glass frame side (the rear surface of the top lens). Thereby, the light from the liquid crystal is not reflected by the screws for fastening the top lens and the glass frame, and the player can visually recognize the lamp performance of the top lens, which has a high performance effect.

In addition, by providing a stepped portion at the bottom of the top lens and molding the bottom of the top lens with unevenness, light from the liquid crystal is diffused, and the light from the liquid crystal is reflected toward the player. You can prevent it from getting stuck.

[16th Example] <Structure related to game board>
In addition to wood, game boards are also made of acrylic resin. Acrylic resin game boards are transparent, and even if a liquid crystal is placed behind the game board, the display area will not be obstructed. Therefore, it is possible to connect the liquid crystal and the game board without placing the liquid crystal in the notch in the center of the game board. By arranging them so that they overlap in the front-back direction (overlapping in the front-back direction), even if the size of the liquid crystal is larger than the notch in the center of the game board, the liquid crystal display can be seen through the transparent board surface, so the LCD Various effects can be performed in the display area. The following is the technology used for game boards made of acrylic resin. Hereinafter, the area where the acrylic resin game board and the liquid crystal placed behind it overlap in the front-rear direction will be referred to as an overlapping area.

The notch in the center of the game board through which the liquid crystal can be seen has a substantially flat cross section. In addition, the cross section is polished and has high transparency (the cross section is smooth). In other words, the inside of the game board is visible when the cross section of the game board is viewed diagonally and when the cross section of the game board is viewed from the front of the game board.

With this configuration, it is possible to make it difficult for the player's line of sight to be obstructed through the cross section when viewing the liquid crystal, so that the player can check the liquid crystal presentation without stress.

Also, the warp passage is screwed onto the game board. The warp passage is a passage that makes it easier for game balls flowing down the game board to be guided to the stage, and the game balls that flow into the warp passage roll on the stage and are more likely to enter the starting hole. ing. Further, the warp passage is made of transparent resin, so that the falling state of the game ball within the warp passage can be visually recognized.

Among the effects displayed on the LCD, there is a hold display that indicates that the play is on hold due to the hold function. Up to four pending displays are displayed corresponding to the special drawings, and if there are two special drawings, up to eight can be displayed. In addition, since there is a hold function for general maps, the reservation display for general maps is also performed. Unless otherwise specified below, a pending display refers to any one of all pending displays, and if any pending display satisfies the configuration, it will have an effect on that configuration. be able to.

FIG. 96 is a diagram showing that the game board (acrylic resin) and the liquid crystal are overlapped in the front and back direction. The area drawn with broken lines indicates the overlapping portion of the liquid crystal with the game board. In other words, the part drawn with a broken line is where the liquid crystal is behind the game board, but since the game board is made of a transparent material (acrylic resin), the part drawn with a broken line on the liquid crystal is also part of the liquid crystal display. is visible to the player from the front.

In a game machine with such a configuration, the hold display displayed on the liquid crystal is not in the overlapping area of the game board and the liquid crystal, but in a place where there is no obstruction (non-transparent parts) in front of the game board in the horizontal direction (except for the glass plate). Furthermore, it is displayed in an area of the liquid crystal that does not overlap with the boundary between the game board and the liquid crystal.

With this configuration, the visibility of the hold display can be ensured, so the player can check important information in the game without stress.

In addition, a prize opening, a warp passage, or a decoration is fixed to the game board with screws. Since the screws are made of metal, they are not translucent. For this reason, if the game board is transparent, in order to avoid reducing visibility due to the screws, the hold display is not displayed in the overlapping area between the game board and the LCD, or the hold display is not displayed in the overlapping area between the game board and the LCD. Even if this is done, the system is configured so that a hold display is not displayed at a position that overlaps with the screwed part.

With this configuration, the visibility of the hold display can be ensured, so the player can check important information in the game without stress.

In addition, if the warp passage is made of a transparent member, the liquid crystal display is configured to be visible through the warp passage, but in this case, the hold display should be displayed at a position that does not overlap with the warp passage. Configure it like this.

With this configuration, the visibility of the hold display can be ensured, so the player can check important information in the game without stress.

Furthermore, game nails are driven into the game board to change the rolling behavior of the game balls flowing down the game board. Since the game nail is made of metal, it does not have translucency. For this reason, if the game board is transparent, in order to avoid reducing visibility due to the game nails, the hold display is not displayed in the overlapping area between the game board and the LCD, or the hold display is displayed in the overlapping area between the game board and the LCD. Even when a game nail is driven, a hold display is not displayed at a position overlapping with a part where a game nail is driven.

With this configuration, the visibility of the hold display can be ensured, so the player can check important information in the game without stress.

Among the performances displayed on the liquid crystal, there are decorative symbols that change to show a sense of anticipation to the player while the special symbols are changing. The decorative pattern is, for example, a display of three numbers from "1" to "9" arranged horizontally, and it is generally known that when all three numbers line up, a jackpot is announced.

The display area of the LCD that displays such decorative patterns is not an area that overlaps with the game board, there is no horizontal obstruction in front (excluding the glass plate), and the LCD does not overlap with the boundary between the game board and the LCD. Display in the area of

With this configuration, the visibility of the decorative patterns can be ensured, so the player can check important information in the game without stress.

Further, the decorative patterns displayed on the liquid crystal may be partially displayed in the overlapping area of the liquid crystal and the game board, as shown in FIG. 97. In such an embodiment, a part of the left and right decorative patterns, a part of the left-only decorative pattern, or a part of the right-only decorative pattern overlaps the overlapping area of the liquid crystal and the game board. It is possible that

By configuring a part of the LCD to overlap the overlapping area of the game board, the visibility of the decorative patterns can be ensured, and the decorative patterns can be displayed in a larger size, making it easier for players to see important information in the game. can be checked without stress.

In addition, a prize opening, a warp passage, or a decoration is fixed to the game board with screws. Since the screws are made of metal, they are not translucent. For this reason, if the game board is transparent, in order to avoid reducing visibility due to screws, decorative patterns should not be placed in the overlapping area between the game board and the liquid crystal, or decorative patterns should not be placed in the overlapping area between the game board and the liquid crystal. Even if the decorative pattern is displayed, it is configured so that it is not displayed at a position overlapping the screwed part.

With this configuration, the visibility of the decorative patterns can be ensured, so the player can check important information in the game without stress.

In addition, if the warp passage is made of a transparent member, the liquid crystal display is configured to be visible through the warp passage, but in this case, the decorative pattern should be displayed at a position that does not overlap with the warp passage. Configure it like this.

With this configuration, the visibility of the decorative patterns can be ensured, so the player can check important information in the game without stress.

Furthermore, game nails are driven into the game board to change the rolling behavior of the game balls flowing down the game board. Since the game nail is made of metal, it does not have translucency. For this reason, if the game board is transparent, in order to avoid reducing visibility due to the game nails, decorative patterns are not displayed in the overlapping area between the game board and the liquid crystal display, or decorative patterns are not displayed in the overlapping area between the game board and the liquid crystal display. Even when a decorative pattern is displayed, the decorative pattern is not displayed at a position overlapping with a part where a game nail is driven.

With this configuration, the visibility of the decorative patterns can be ensured, so the player can check important information in the game without stress.

Among the effects displayed on the liquid crystal, there is an addictive prevention display (also referred to as an alert display or an alert image) for preventing players from becoming "absorbed" in the game. The addictive prevention display is displayed at the end of the jackpot, the end of the probability change, the end of time saving, or on the demo screen, and the display ends after a predetermined period of time (for example, 5 seconds) has elapsed.

As shown in Figure 98, the display area of the liquid crystal that performs the immersion prevention display is not the overlapping area of the game board and the liquid crystal, and there is no obstruction (non-transparent parts) in front of it in the horizontal direction (excluding the glass plate). , and is displayed in an area of the liquid crystal that does not overlap with the boundary between the game board and the liquid crystal.

With this configuration, the visibility of the addictive prevention display can be ensured, so that the player can check important information in the game without stress.

Further, the immersion prevention display displayed on the liquid crystal may be partially displayed in the overlapping area of the liquid crystal and the game board.

By configuring the display so that a portion thereof overlaps with the overlapping area between the liquid crystal and the game board, the visibility of the anti-addictive display can be ensured, and the anti-addictive display can be displayed in a large size, allowing important information in the game to be displayed. The player can check without stress.

In addition, a prize opening, a warp passage, or a decoration is fixed to the game board with screws. Since the screws are made of metal, they are not translucent. For this reason, if the game board is transparent, in order to avoid lowering the visibility with screws, there is no display to prevent getting stuck in the overlapping area between the game board and the LCD, or there is no display to prevent getting stuck in the overlapping area between the game board and the LCD. Even if a display is to be displayed, the display is configured so that the display does not overlap with the screwed part.

With this configuration, the visibility of the addictive prevention display can be ensured, so that the player can check important information in the game without stress.

In addition, if the warp passage is made of a transparent material, the liquid crystal display is configured to be visible through the warp passage, but in this case, the immersion prevention display is displayed at a position that does not overlap with the warp passage. Configure it to do so.

With this configuration, the visibility of the addictive prevention display can be ensured, so that the player can check important information in the game without stress.

Furthermore, game nails are driven into the game board to change the rolling behavior of the game balls flowing down the game board. Since the game nail is made of metal, it does not have translucency. For this reason, if the game board is transparent, in order to avoid reducing visibility due to the game nails, there is no display to prevent people from getting stuck in the overlapped area between the game board and the LCD, or if they are stuck in the overlapped area between the game board and the LCD. Even when the prevention display is performed, the display is not displayed at a position overlapping with a part where a game nail is driven.

With this configuration, the visibility of the addictive prevention display can be ensured, so that the player can check important information in the game without stress.

There is a light guide plate as an effect device installed in a gaming machine. The light guide plate is a device in which a light source (such as an LED) is irradiated from the cross section of the light guide plate, and the light is reflected by the processing marks inside the light guide plate, causing the light guide plate to emit surface light and making a specific pattern appear. It is placed between the game board and the glass plate. In other words, since the light guide plate is placed closer to the player than the liquid crystal, by emitting light from the light guide plate for the player who is gazing at the liquid crystal, the synergistic effect of the liquid crystal display and the light guide plate display will enhance the game experience. The performance effect can be enhanced.

As described above, a light source is required to illuminate the light guide plate, and a light source substrate is disposed near the cross section of the light guide plate.

As shown in FIG. 99, LEDs for irradiating light onto the light guide plate are arranged above and below the liquid crystal. In this way, the light source (light source board) of the light guide plate is arranged at a position that does not overlap with the decorative pattern.

With this configuration, the visibility of the decorative patterns can be ensured, so the player can check important information in the game without stress.

Further, although not shown, the hold display displayed on the liquid crystal is also displayed at a position that does not overlap with the light source of the light guide plate.

With this configuration, the visibility of the hold display can be ensured, so the player can check important information in the game without stress.

Further, although not shown, the immersion prevention display displayed on the liquid crystal is also displayed at a position that does not overlap with the light source of the light guide plate.

With this configuration, the visibility of the addictive prevention display can be ensured, so that the player can check important information in the game without stress.

A movable object (also referred to as a movable body or a movable accessory) is a performance device installed in a gaming machine. In FIG. 99, a movable object labeled "Nsu" placed at the top right of the game board (top right) and a movable object written "cha" placed at the bottom left of the game board (bottom left) are shown. has been done. The positions of the movable object (upper right) and movable object (lower left) shown in FIG. 99 are called standby positions, and are the positions before the movable object moves. The movable object at the standby position may be hidden so that the player cannot see it, or it may be visible so that the player can see it. Furthermore, the movable object in FIG. 99 is located between the liquid crystal and the game board, and is configured to move ahead of the liquid crystal.

When the operating conditions for movable objects are met, the movable object marked "Nsu" (top right) and the movable object marked "Cha" (bottom left) move toward the center of the game board, and the game begins. The word ``chance'' appears in the center of the board.

In this way, the manner in which the movable object moves can create a sense of anticipation for the game. For example, even with the same LCD display, the expectations for giving bonuses such as jackpots are different when the movable object moves and when the movable object does not move. Players have come to expect it.

Therefore, at times other than when the movable object is possible, the player watches the liquid crystal, and when the time comes for the movable object to move, the player starts gazing at the movable object. (when the display is on), place it outside the liquid crystal so as not to impair the visibility of the liquid crystal display.

With this configuration, the visibility of the liquid crystal display is not lowered when the movable object is on standby, and the operation mode can be visually recognized when the movable object is in operation, thereby improving the interest of the game.

As described above, the present invention has been described in accordance with the present embodiment, the second embodiment, the third embodiment, the fourth embodiment, the fifth embodiment, the sixth embodiment, the seventh embodiment, the eighth embodiment, the ninth embodiment, The explanation has been made based on the tenth example, the eleventh example, the twelfth example, the thirteenth example, the fourteenth example, the fifteenth example, and the sixteenth example. It should be understood by those skilled in the art that the examples are merely illustrative, and that various modifications can be made to the combinations of the constituent elements and treatment processes, and that such modifications are also within the scope of the present invention. be.

P Pachinko gaming machine, P1 Outer frame, P2 Front frame, P3 Glass frame, P4 Back set unit, P5 Game board, P40 Main control board, P41 Performance control board, P42 Image control board, P43 Payout control board, P44 Power supply board, P47 Power switch, P48 Ram clear switch, P49 Setting key switch, P50 Main control display device, P51 1st special symbol display device, P52 2nd special symbol display device, P80 Production display device, P81 Production operation means (P380 Production operation unit, P381 Production button, P382 Lever, P383 Cross key), P82 Production lamp (P350 Frame lamp, P550 Panel lamp), P83 Speaker (P141 Curtain speaker, P371 Upper speaker), P560 Production accessory, P710 First start prize device, P720 2nd start prize device, P730 General prize device, P740 Normal figure operation gate device, P750 Big prize opening device P755 Special electric accessory, P770 Ordinary electric accessory

Claims (1)

Ball rental button and
Equipped with a return button,
It is configured to detect the operation of the ball lending button when the operating part of the ball lending button is pressed and the operating part of the ball lending button moves a predetermined distance,
When the operation part of the ball lending button is pressed down and the operating part of the ball lending button moves a predetermined distance to detect the operation of the ball lending button, the load applied to the operating part of the ball lending button is a predetermined load of 0.06N or more. A gaming machine that is designed for heavy loads.

Images